P. 1
PDS Data Manager

PDS Data Manager

|Views: 1,456|Likes:
Published by Selva Kumar

More info:

Published by: Selva Kumar on Sep 30, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

03/17/2013

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • If You Need Assistance
  • Intergraph Directory
  • Preface
  • General Conventions
  • Keyboard Conventions
  • Terminology
  • 1. Introduction
  • 1.1 Project Organization
  • 1.2 Reference Data Overview
  • 1.2.1 Piping Job Specification Introduction
  • Graphic Commodity Data Introduction
  • Material Description Data Introduction
  • Standard Note Library Introduction
  • Label Description Library Introduction
  • Piping Assembly Library Introduction
  • 1.3 Reference Database Introduction
  • 1.4 Delivered Reference Data
  • 1.5 Reference Data Setup
  • 2. PDS Environment
  • PD Shell
  • PD_Shell Form Conventions
  • Common Tools on the PD Shell Forms
  • Batch Processes
  • Help
  • 3. Reference Data Manager
  • 3.1 Data Security
  • 3.2 Reference Data Archival
  • 4. Reference Data Location
  • 4.1 Reference Database Management Data
  • 4.2 Default Project Control Data
  • 5. Piping Job Specification
  • 5.1 Material Reference Database Structure
  • 5.2 Neutral File Input
  • 5.2.1 Piping Materials Class Data (201)
  • 5.2.2 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)
  • 5.2.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)
  • 5.2.4 Instrument Component Specification Data (204)
  • 5.2.5 Tap Properties Data (205)
  • 5.2.6 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211)
  • 5.2.7 Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)
  • 5.2.8 Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)
  • 5.2.9 Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232)
  • 5.2.10 Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233)
  • 5.3 Spec Writer
  • 5.3.1 RDB Options File
  • 5.3.2 Piping Materials Class Data Command
  • 5.3.2.1 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data
  • 5.3.3 Piping Commodity Data Command
  • 5.3.3.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data
  • 5.3.3.2 Implied Data
  • 5.3.3.3 Add Entry to Material Description Library
  • 5.3.4 Piping Specialty Data Command
  • 5.3.4.1 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data
  • 5.3.5 Instrument Data Command
  • 5.3.5.1 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data
  • 5.3.6 Tap Properties Data Command
  • 5.3.6.1 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data
  • 5.3.7 Commodity Implied Data Command
  • 5.3.7.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data
  • 5.3.8 Table Checker
  • 5.4 Piping Job Specification Manager
  • 5.4.1 Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset Options
  • 5.4.2 Delete Option
  • 5.4.3 Report Option
  • 5.5 Piping Job Spec Report Manager
  • 5.5.1 Using the Report Commands
  • 5.5.2 Report Format Form
  • 5.5.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form
  • 5.5.2.2 Format Deletion Form
  • 5.5.3 Report Discrimination Data Form
  • 5.5.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form
  • 5.5.3.2 Search Criteria Form
  • 5.5.3.3 Discrimination Data Revision Form
  • 5.5.3.4 Discrimination Data Deletion Form
  • 5.5.4 Report Form
  • 5.5.4.1 Report Creation Form
  • 5.5.4.2 Revise Report Form
  • 5.5.4.3 Report Deletion Form
  • 5.5.4.4 Report Approval Form
  • 5.5.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form
  • 5.5.5 Report Management Defaults Form
  • 6. Piping Job Specification Tables
  • 6.1 PJS Tables and Functions
  • 6.1.1 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table
  • 6.1.2 Nominal Piping Diameters Table
  • 6.1.3 Thickness Data Tables
  • 6.1.4 Materials Data Table
  • 6.1.5 Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations
  • Delivered Equations
  • 6.1.6 Branch Insertion Tables
  • 6.1.7 Gasket Separation Table
  • 6.1.8 Fluid Code Table
  • 6.2 RDB Tables
  • 6.2.1 Commodity Item Name Table (G02)
  • 6.2.2 Bend Deflection Table (G04)
  • 6.2.3 Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06)
  • 6.2.4 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07)
  • 6.2.5 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)
  • 6.2.6 Weld Type Table
  • 6.2.7 Weld Clearance Table
  • 6.2.8 Weld Graphics Dimensions Table
  • 6.2.9 Bolt Commodity Code Table
  • 6.2.10 Gasket Diameter Table
  • 6.2.11 Field Fit Length Table
  • 6.2.12 Component Mirror Table
  • 6.2.13 Operator Mirror Table
  • 6.2.14 Default End Preperation Table
  • 6.2.15 MTO Tables and Functions
  • 6.3 Piping Job Specification Tables Command
  • 6.3.1 Options
  • 6.3.2 Create Library
  • 6.3.3 Compress Library
  • 6.3.4 Unapproved ==> Approved
  • 6.3.5 Create/Interactive Spec Tables
  • 6.3.6 Create/Batch Spec Tables
  • 6.3.7 Revise Spec Tables
  • 6.3.8 Delete Spec Tables
  • 6.3.9 Report on Spec Tables
  • 6.3.10 List Spec Tables
  • 6.3.11 Extract Spec Tables
  • 7. Graphic Commodity Data
  • 7.1 Graphic Commodity Library
  • 7.1.1 Symbol Processors
  • 7.1.2 Sub-Symbol Processor
  • 7.1.3 Physical Data Definitions
  • 7.1.4 Parametric Shape Definitions
  • Model Parametric Shape Definitions
  • 7.2 Physical Data Tables
  • 7.2.1 Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library
  • 7.2.2 Example of Physical Data Look-Up
  • 7.3 Notes for Graphic Commodity Data
  • 7.3.1 Connect Point Data
  • 7.3.2 Bends and Branches
  • 7.3.3 Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges
  • 7.3.4 Pipe, Tubing, and Hose
  • 7.4 Graphic Commodity Library Manager
  • 7.4.1 Create Library
  • 7.4.2 Compress
  • 7.4.3 Unapproved ==> Approved
  • 7.4.4 Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data
  • 7.4.5 Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data
  • 7.4.6 Revise Graphic Commodity Data
  • 7.4.7 Delete Graphic Commodity Data
  • 7.4.8 Report Graphic Commodity Data
  • 7.4.9 List Graphic Commodity Data
  • 7.4.10 Extract Graphic Commodity Data
  • 7.5 Physical Data Library Manager
  • 7.5.1 Create Library
  • 7.5.2 Compress
  • 7.5.3 Unapproved ==> Approved
  • 7.5.4 Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data
  • 7.5.5 Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data
  • 7.5.6 Revise Physical Commodity Data
  • 7.5.7 Delete Physical Commodity Data
  • 7.5.8 Report Physical Commodity Data
  • 7.5.9 List Physical Commodity Data
  • 7.5.10 Extract Physical Commodity Data
  • 8. Table Formats and Naming Conventions
  • 8.1 Table Conventions
  • 8.1.1 Table Names
  • 8.1.2 Comments
  • 8.1.3 Revision Markers
  • 8.1.4 Component Tables
  • 8.1.5 Units
  • 8.1.6 Fields (Input/Output Columns)
  • 8.1.7 NPD Values
  • 8.1.8 Rating
  • 8.1.9 Schedule/Thickness
  • 8.1.10 Weight Tables
  • 8.1.11 Abbreviations
  • 8.2 Table Requirements
  • 8.2.1 Tables Required for Piping Components
  • 8.2.1.1 Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C and 6Q3C)
  • 8.2.1.2 Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C)
  • 8.2.2 Tables Required for Instrument Components
  • 8.3 Generic Tables
  • 8.3.1 Variables for Generic Tables
  • 8.3.2 Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10)
  • 8.3.3 Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12)
  • 8.3.4 Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T)
  • 8.3.5 Generic Table for Male Ends (G20)
  • 8.3.6 Generic Table for Female Ends (G30)
  • 8.3.7 Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50)
  • 8.4 Piping Component Tables
  • 8.4.1 Variables for Specific Tables
  • 8.4.2 Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A)
  • 8.4.3 Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B)
  • 8.4.6 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A)
  • 8.4.7 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B)
  • 8.4.9 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves (P60A)
  • 8.4.12 Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components
  • 8.5 Instrument Component Tables
  • 8.5.1 Instrument Body (I80 and P80)
  • 8.5.2 Instrument Operator (I81 and P81)
  • 9. Material Description Data
  • 9.1 Material Data in the Material Reference Database
  • 9.2 Short Material Description Library
  • 9.3 Long Material Description Library
  • 9.4 Specialty Material Description Library
  • 9.5 Material Description Library Manager
  • 9.5.1 Create Library
  • 9.5.2 Unapproved ==> Approved
  • 9.5.3 Load/Revise Interactive
  • 9.5.4 Load/Revise Batch
  • 9.5.5 Replace Interactive
  • 9.5.6 Replace Batch
  • 9.5.7 Report Option
  • 10. Table Checker
  • 10.1 Table Checker Form
  • 10.1.1 Using the Report Commands
  • 10.1.2 Report Format Form
  • 10.1.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form
  • 10.1.2.2 Format Deletion Form
  • 10.1.3 Discrimination Data Form
  • 10.1.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form
  • 10.1.3.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form
  • 10.1.3.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form
  • 10.1.4 Report Form
  • 10.1.4.1 Report Creation Form
  • 10.1.4.2 Revise Report Form
  • 10.1.4.3 Report Deletion Form
  • 10.1.4.4 Report Approval Form
  • 10.1.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form
  • 10.1.5 Report Management Defaults Form
  • 10.2 Sample Table Checker Output
  • 11. Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager
  • 11.1 Support Tutorial Definition Manager
  • 11.1.1 Create Library
  • 11.1.2 Compress
  • 11.1.3 Unapproved ==> Approved
  • 11.1.4 Create Data
  • 11.1.5 Revise Data
  • 11.1.6 Report Data
  • 11.1.7 List Data
  • 11.1.8 Delete Data
  • 11.1.9 Extract Data
  • 12. Standard Note Library
  • 12.1 Standard Note Library Manager
  • 12.1.1 Create Library
  • 12.1.2 Compress
  • 12.1.3 Unapproved ==> Approved
  • 12.1.4 Create Standard Note Type
  • 12.1.5 Revise Standard Note Type
  • 12.1.6 Report Standard Note Library Contents
  • 12.1.7 List Standard Note Data
  • 12.1.8 Delete Standard Note Data
  • 12.1.9 Extract Standard Note Type
  • 12.1.10 Load Database
  • 13. Label Description Library
  • 13.1 Label Types
  • 13.1.1 Displayable Attribute Labels
  • 13.1.2 Alphanumeric Labels
  • 13.1.3 Displayable Attribute Message
  • 13.1.4 Commodity Code Attribute Message
  • 13.1.5 Isometric Drawing Labels
  • 13.1.6 Report Labels
  • 13.1.7 Clash Management Labels
  • 13.2 Label Description Library Manager
  • 13.2.1 Create Library
  • 13.2.2 Compress Library
  • 13.2.3 Unapproved ==> Approved
  • 13.2.4 Create Label Data
  • 13.2.4.1 Create Label Graphic Data
  • 13.2.4.2 Create Label Attribute Data
  • 13.2.4.3 Mass Annotation Options
  • 13.2.5 Revise Label Data
  • 13.2.6 Delete Label Data
  • 13.2.7 Report Label Data
  • 13.3 Label Library Merger
  • 13.3.1 Label Library Merger Interface
  • 13.3.1.1 File Menu
  • 13.3.1.1.1 Open Source Label Library 1
  • 13.3.1.1.2 Open Source Label Library 2
  • 13.3.1.1.3 Open Destination Library
  • 13.3.1.1.4 Information
  • 13.3.1.1.5 Exit
  • 13.3.1.2 Edit Menu
  • 13.3.1.2.1 Select All
  • 13.3.1.2.2 Unselect All
  • 13.3.1.2.3 Invert Selection
  • 13.3.1.2.4 Edit Label Number
  • 13.3.1.2.5 Edit Label Description
  • 13.3.1.2.6 Delete
  • 13.3.1.2.7 Validate
  • 13.3.1.2.8 Compress Destination Library
  • 13.3.1.2.9 Copy to Destination
  • 13.3.1.2.10 Clear Error Messages
  • 13.3.1.3 Help Menu
  • 13.3.1.3.1 Contents
  • 13.3.1.3.2 About Library Merger
  • 13.3.2 Workflow
  • 14. Piping Assembly Library
  • 14.1 Piping Assembly Language
  • 14.1.1 PAL Keywords
  • 14.1.2 Placing Taps in Assemblies
  • 14.1.3 Sample Piping Assembly Files
  • 14.2 Piping Assembly Library Manager
  • 14.2.1 Options
  • 14.2.2 Create Library
  • 14.2.3 Compress
  • 14.2.4 Unapproved ==> Approved
  • 14.2.5 Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data
  • 14.2.6 Create/Batch Assembly Data
  • 14.2.7 Revise Piping Assembly Data
  • 14.2.8 Delete Piping Assembly Data
  • 14.2.9 Report Assembly Data
  • 14.2.10 List Assembly Data
  • 14.2.11 Extract Assembly Data
  • 15. Reference Database Revision Manager
  • 15.1 Reference Data Conflict Report
  • 15.2 Table Change Report
  • 15.3 Reference Data Impact Report
  • 15.3.1 Examples
  • 15.4 Proposed RDB Changes Report
  • 16. Verify RDB Library
  • Appendix B Codelists
  • B.1 General Comments
  • B.2 Comments Specific to Units of Measure Codelist Sets
  • Glossary
  • Index

Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)
Reference Guide
Document Number DPDS3-PB-200034A DPDS3-PB-200034B Version PDS 7.1 PDS 7.2 Date April 2002 February 2003 Pages 1-684 685-694

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies.

Trademarks
CLIX, Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. DBACCESS, DesignReview, DIALOG, EE Raceway, FrameWorks, Project Engineer, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright
 1984-2002 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software — Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished — rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

_ _______________
If You Need Assistance
Intergraph Online
Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products, services, and direction. Our web address is: http://www.intergraph.com.

If You Need Assistance

Support
For the lasest Support Services information, use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.intergraph.com/ppo/services/support.asp. If you are outside of the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www.intergraph.com.

Intergraph Directory
The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. If you are outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office.

Intergraph General Information
All countries — 1-256-730-2000

Training Registration
1-800-766-7701 (U.S. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)

Mailing Address
Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison, Alabama 35758 U.S.A. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.com.

3

_ _______________
Documentation Contacts
We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed, let us know. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison, AL 35758

4

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 1.1 1.2 Project Organization ............................................................................................................ Reference Data Overview ................................................................................................... 1.2.1 Piping Job Specification Introduction ..................................................................... Graphic Commodity Data Introduction .............................................................................. Material Description Data Introduction .............................................................................. Standard Note Library Introduction .................................................................................... Label Description Library Introduction .............................................................................. Piping Assembly Library Introduction ................................................................................ 1.3 1.4 1.5 2. Reference Database Introduction ........................................................................................ Delivered Reference Data ................................................................................................... Reference Data Setup ..........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

3 3 15 17 18 19 21 22 23 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 31 32 33 34 37 37 40 41 43 45 46 47 48 53

PDS Environment ........................................................................................................................ PD Shell ....................................................................................................................................... PD_Shell Form Conventions .............................................................................................. Common Tools on the PD Shell Forms .............................................................................. Batch Processes ................................................................................................................... Help ..............................................................................................................................................

3.

Reference Data Manager .............................................................................................................. 3.1 3.2 Data Security ....................................................................................................................... Reference Data Archival .....................................................................................................

4.

Reference Data Location .............................................................................................................. 4.1 4.2 Reference Database Management Data ............................................................................... Default Project Control Data ...............................................................................................

5

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. Piping Job Specification ............................................................................................................... 5.1 5.2 Material Reference Database Structure ............................................................................... Neutral File Input ................................................................................................................ 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.3 Piping Materials Class Data (201) .......................................................................... Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) .......................................................... Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) .............................................................. Instrument Component Specification Data (204) ................................................... Tap Properties Data (205) ....................................................................................... Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) ....................................... Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) .................................................... Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) .......................................................... Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) .................................................................. Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) .......................................... 55 56 59 62 67 77 81 85 88 91 95 98 101 103 105 113 114 117 119 126 128 129 130 133 134 137 138 140 141 144 145

Spec Writer .......................................................................................................................... 5.3.1 5.3.2 RDB Options File .................................................................................................... Piping Materials Class Data Command .................................................................. 5.3.2.1 5.3.3 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data ..............................................

Piping Commodity Data Command ........................................................................ 5.3.3.1 5.3.3.2 5.3.3.3 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data ............................. Implied Data ............................................................................................. Add Entry to Material Description Library ..............................................

5.3.4

Piping Specialty Data Command ............................................................................ 5.3.4.1 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data .................................

5.3.5

Instrument Data Command ..................................................................................... 5.3.5.1 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data ..........................................

5.3.6

Tap Properties Data Command ............................................................................... 5.3.6.1 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data ..........................................................

5.3.7

Commodity Implied Data Command ...................................................................... 5.3.7.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data .......................

5.3.8 5.4

Table Checker .........................................................................................................

Piping Job Specification Manager ......................................................................................

6

_ _______________
5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5 Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset Options ....................................... Delete Option .......................................................................................................... Report Option .......................................................................................................... Piping Job Spec Report Manager ........................................................................................ 5.5.1 5.5.2 Using the Report Commands .................................................................................. Report Format Form ................................................................................................ 5.5.2.1 5.5.2.2 5.5.3 Format Creation/Revision Form .............................................................. Format Deletion Form ..............................................................................

Table of Contents

148 151 152 154 155 157 159 161 163 165 167 169 171 173 175 178 181 183 184 186 189 190 191 194 197 200 203 204 208 212 214 215 216 219 221

Report Discrimination Data Form ........................................................................... 5.5.3.1 5.5.3.2 5.5.3.3 5.5.3.4 Discrimination Data Creation Form ......................................................... Search Criteria Form ................................................................................ Discrimination Data Revision Form ........................................................ Discrimination Data Deletion Form .........................................................

5.5.4

Report Form ............................................................................................................ 5.5.4.1 5.5.4.2 5.5.4.3 5.5.4.4 5.5.4.5 Report Creation Form .............................................................................. Revise Report Form ................................................................................. Report Deletion Form .............................................................................. Report Approval Form ............................................................................. Report Multiple Submit Form ..................................................................

5.5.5 6.

Report Management Defaults Form ........................................................................

Piping Job Specification Tables ................................................................................................... 6.1 PJS Tables and Functions ................................................................................................... 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.5 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table ..................................................... Nominal Piping Diameters Table ............................................................................ Thickness Data Tables ............................................................................................ Materials Data Table ............................................................................................... Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations ........................................... Delivered Equations ........................................................................................ 6.1.6 6.1.7 6.1.8 6.2 Branch Insertion Tables .......................................................................................... Gasket Separation Table ......................................................................................... Fluid Code Table .....................................................................................................

RDB Tables ......................................................................................................................... 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 Commodity Item Name Table (G02) ...................................................................... Bend Deflection Table (G04) .................................................................................. Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06) .................................................

7

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15 6.3 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07) ....................................................................... Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11) ......................................................................... Weld Type Table ..................................................................................................... Weld Clearance Table ............................................................................................. Weld Graphics Dimensions Table .......................................................................... Bolt Commodity Code Table .................................................................................. Gasket Diameter Table .......................................................................................... Field Fit Length Table ........................................................................................... Component Mirror Table ...................................................................................... Operator Mirror Table ........................................................................................... Default End Preperation Table .............................................................................. MTO Tables and Functions ................................................................................... 222 223 226 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 236 237 239 240 242 242 242 243 244 245 247 248 250 251 253 254 256 258 259 263 266 267 268 270 270 271 272 273 275

Piping Job Specification Tables Command ........................................................................ 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 6.3.10 6.3.11 Options .................................................................................................................... Create Library ......................................................................................................... Compress Library .................................................................................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... Create/Interactive Spec Tables ................................................................................ Create/Batch Spec Tables ....................................................................................... Revise Spec Tables ................................................................................................. Delete Spec Tables .................................................................................................. Report on Spec Tables ............................................................................................ List Spec Tables .................................................................................................... Extract Spec Tables ...............................................................................................

7.

Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................................................ 7.1 Graphic Commodity Library ............................................................................................... 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.2 Symbol Processors .................................................................................................. Sub-Symbol Processor ............................................................................................ Physical Data Definitions ........................................................................................ Parametric Shape Definitions ..................................................................................

Physical Data Tables ........................................................................................................... 7.2.1 7.2.2 Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library ....................................................... Example of Physical Data Look-Up .......................................................................

7.3

Notes for Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................... 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 Connect Point Data ................................................................................................. Bends and Branches ................................................................................................ Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges .................................................................................... Pipe, Tubing, and Hose ...........................................................................................

7.4

Graphic Commodity Library Manager ................................................................................

8

_ _______________
7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 7.4.8 7.4.9 7.4.10 7.5 Create Library ......................................................................................................... Compress ................................................................................................................. Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data .......................................................... Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................. Revise Graphic Commodity Data ........................................................................... Delete Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................ Report Graphic Commodity Data ........................................................................... List Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................ Extract Graphic Commodity Data .........................................................................

Table of Contents

277 277 277 278 279 281 283 284 285 286 287 290 290 290 291 292 294 296 297 299 300 303 304 304 304 305 305 306 308 309 309 310 313 314 315 315 316 317 318

Physical Data Library Manager ........................................................................................... 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.5 7.5.6 7.5.7 7.5.8 7.5.9 7.5.10 Create Library ......................................................................................................... Compress ................................................................................................................. Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data ......................................................... Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data ................................................................. Revise Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... Delete Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... Report Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... List Physical Commodity Data ............................................................................... Extract Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................

8.

Table Formats and Naming Conventions ..................................................................................... 8.1 Table Conventions .............................................................................................................. 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6 8.1.7 8.1.8 8.1.9 8.1.10 8.1.11 8.2 Table Names ............................................................................................................ Comments ............................................................................................................... Revision Markers .................................................................................................... Component Tables .................................................................................................. Units ........................................................................................................................ Fields (Input/Output Columns) ............................................................................... NPD Values ............................................................................................................. Rating ...................................................................................................................... Schedule/Thickness ................................................................................................. Weight Tables ....................................................................................................... Abbreviations ........................................................................................................

Table Requirements ............................................................................................................ 8.2.1 Tables Required for Piping Components ................................................................ 8.2.1.1 8.2.1.2 8.2.2 Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C and 6Q3C) ................................................. Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C) ....................................

Tables Required for Instrument Components .........................................................

9

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.3 Generic Tables .................................................................................................................... 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 8.3.6 8.3.7 8.4 Variables for Generic Tables ................................................................................... Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10) ..................................................................... Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12) ................................... Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T) ................. Generic Table for Male Ends (G20) ........................................................................ Generic Table for Female Ends (G30) .................................................................... Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50) ......................... 319 320 324 326 328 330 332 333 334 336 339 341 342 344 345 347 348 350 351 352 354 355 355 358 361 366 367 372 374 376 378 378 379 380 381 382 383

Piping Component Tables ................................................................................................... 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 Variables for Specific Tables .................................................................................. Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A) .......................................... Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B) ............................... Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A) .................................................................. 8.4.5 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B) ............................................................................. 8.4.6 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A) .............................. 8.4.7 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B) .... 8.4.8 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59) ......................................................................................................... 8.4.9 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves (P60A) ............................ 8.4.10 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data (P60B) ................................................................................................................... 8.4.11 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65) ......................................................................................... 8.4.12 Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components ..........................................

8.5

Instrument Component Tables ............................................................................................ 8.5.1 8.5.2 Instrument Body (I80 and P80) ............................................................................... Instrument Operator (I81 and P81) .........................................................................

9.

Material Description Data ............................................................................................................ 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 Material Data in the Material Reference Database ............................................................. Short Material Description Library ..................................................................................... Long Material Description Library ..................................................................................... Specialty Material Description Library ............................................................................... Material Description Library Manager ............................................................................... 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.5.6 9.5.7 Create Library ......................................................................................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... Load/Revise Interactive .......................................................................................... Load/Revise Batch .................................................................................................. Replace Interactive .................................................................................................. Replace Batch .......................................................................................................... Report Option ..........................................................................................................

10

_ _______________
10. Table Checker ............................................................................................................................ 10.1 Table Checker Form ........................................................................................................ 10.1.1 10.1.2 Using the Report Commands ............................................................................ Report Format Form .......................................................................................... 10.1.2.1 10.1.2.2 10.1.3 Format Creation/Revision Form ...................................................... Format Deletion Form ......................................................................

Table of Contents

385 389 390 392 394 396 398 400 402 404 406 408 411 414 416 418 420 422 437 438 440 440 440 441 442 444 445 446 447 449 453 455 455 455 456

Discrimination Data Form ................................................................................. 10.1.3.1 10.1.3.2 10.1.3.3 Discrimination Data Creation Form ................................................. Discrimination Data Revision Form ................................................ Discrimination Data Deletion Form .................................................

10.1.4

Report Form ...................................................................................................... 10.1.4.1 10.1.4.2 10.1.4.3 10.1.4.4 10.1.4.5 Report Creation Form ...................................................................... Revise Report Form ......................................................................... Report Deletion Form ...................................................................... Report Approval Form ..................................................................... Report Multiple Submit Form ..........................................................

10.1.5 10.2 11.

Report Management Defaults Form ..................................................................

Sample Table Checker Output ........................................................................................

Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager ................................................................................ 11.1 Support Tutorial Definition Manager .............................................................................. 11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 11.1.4 11.1.5 11.1.6 11.1.7 11.1.8 11.1.9 Create Library ................................................................................................... Compress ........................................................................................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. Create Data ........................................................................................................ Revise Data ....................................................................................................... Report Data ....................................................................................................... List Data ............................................................................................................ Delete Data ........................................................................................................ Extract Data .......................................................................................................

12.

Standard Note Library ................................................................................................................ 12.1 Standard Note Library Manager ...................................................................................... 12.1.1 12.1.2 12.1.3 12.1.4 Create Library ................................................................................................... Compress ........................................................................................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. Create Standard Note Type ...............................................................................

11

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 12.1.5 12.1.6 12.1.7 12.1.8 12.1.9 12.1.10 13. Revise Standard Note Type ............................................................................... Report Standard Note Library Contents ............................................................ List Standard Note Data .................................................................................... Delete Standard Note Data ................................................................................ Extract Standard Note Type .............................................................................. Load Database ................................................................................................. 457 459 460 461 462 463 465 466 466 466 466 467 467 468 468 471 472 472 472 473 475 478 484 485 487 489 495 495 497 497 497 497 497 498 499 499 499

Label Description Library .......................................................................................................... 13.1 Label Types ..................................................................................................................... 13.1.1 13.1.2 13.1.3 13.1.4 13.1.5 13.1.6 13.1.7 13.2 Displayable Attribute Labels ............................................................................. Alphanumeric Labels ........................................................................................ Displayable Attribute Message ......................................................................... Commodity Code Attribute Message ................................................................ Isometric Drawing Labels ................................................................................. Report Labels .................................................................................................... Clash Management Labels ................................................................................

Label Description Library Manager ................................................................................ 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.2.4 Create Library ................................................................................................... Compress Library .............................................................................................. Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. Create Label Data .............................................................................................. 13.2.4.1 13.2.4.2 13.2.4.3 13.2.5 13.2.6 13.2.7 Create Label Graphic Data ............................................................... Create Label Attribute Data ............................................................. Mass Annotation Options .................................................................

Revise Label Data ............................................................................................. Delete Label Data .............................................................................................. Report Label Data .............................................................................................

13.3

Label Library Merger ...................................................................................................... 13.3.1 Label Library Merger Interface ......................................................................... 13.3.1.1 File Menu ......................................................................................... 13.3.1.1.1 13.3.1.1.2 13.3.1.1.3 13.3.1.1.4 13.3.1.1.5 13.3.1.2 Open Source Label Library 1 ....................................... Open Source Label Library 2 ....................................... Open Destination Library ............................................. Information ................................................................... Exit ...............................................................................

Edit Menu ......................................................................................... 13.3.1.2.1 13.3.1.2.2 Select All ...................................................................... Unselect All ..................................................................

12

.............4 14.................... Workflow ..... Copy to Destination .. Reference Data Impact Report .....................4 Examples ..1 Piping Assembly Language .....................................................2..............2........... Revise Piping Assembly Data .................._ _______________ 13..............................3 13...........................2..........1........................................1............. Table Change Report .....................................2 15................................2.......................... 16.................................................... Sample Piping Assembly Files ..............................................................................2.................1 15...................... Create Library .......................... Placing Taps in Assemblies ....................................................................................................................3..................................................... Piping Assembly Library ......................................9 13.........3....................3.......... Compress Destination Library ..5 14............................................. 13.......................................7 13....................3.......2.........2 PAL Keywords ... Create/Batch Assembly Data . 13.1 14..........................................2................................................1..............................................................................1........................................... Reference Database Revision Manager ....................... Extract Assembly Data ....................8 14...........................2.......3. Delete Piping Assembly Data ...............................................................................1 15.......... Edit Label Number ... Table of Contents 499 499 499 499 499 500 500 500 501 501 501 502 505 506 506 520 521 525 525 527 527 527 528 529 530 532 533 534 535 537 540 546 551 551 555 561 Help Menu .................................................................3................1.........................................1.......2.....1......................... Validate .................................................................2 14.. Delete ....................................................1....3....... Compress .......................6 14.... 15. 15...................2 14..2.......................................................................... Edit Label Description ................................................... Verify RDB Library ..1 14...6 13..............................2....................... 14........2..1................................................................3.........................2...... 13 ...............................3 Invert Selection ...............................2....3........2...............................3 14.........1..........1............ List Assembly Data ......3 14............................................................3.........10 14.....................................................................4 13................................3.....10 13.....2.................................. 14.......1..................2 Contents ....3......................................................1..................................................................5 13............3............................................11 Options .................9 14..............................................................1 13..............1.......................................2.......................................3......... About Library Merger ...... Report Assembly Data ..........7 14.. Clear Error Messages ......................... Piping Assembly Library Manager .2 14...........................................8 13.................................. 15........2................................... Unapproved ==> Approved .3................................. Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data .............................. Proposed RDB Changes Report .......2......3 Reference Data Conflict Report .................................... 14....................

......................................2 Reference Data Manager Error Messages .............................. Codelists ........................................................................... Index ................................... Glossary .................................................................................................. 14 ................................................................................. 565 567 569 569 667 675 General Comments ................................... Comments Specific to Units of Measure Codelist Sets ................................................................._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Appendix A: Appendix B: B.......................1 B..............................................................................................................................................................................

Oracle. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific Reference Data Manager function. these include Informix. This document is designed as a reference. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. You should also be familiar with a text editor. vi. The Reference Data Manager module is one part of the overall Plant Design System. It enables you to control and standardize the PDS 3D tasks. Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for project managers who have a working knowledge of the PDS 3D Modules. or EMACS. and Ingres._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for the Reference Data Manager module of the PDS 3D products. Related Documents/Products Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate PDS 3D. You can also modify the reference data to reflect company practices and standards. PDS 3D uses interactive graphics and database management techniques to integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. Knowledge of relational database systems and basic file manipulations is recommended. such as Notepad. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide For more information on related aspects of the PDS 3D products. consult the following documents: Project Administrator Reference Guide Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide Equipment Modeling Reference Guide 15 . Currently. It is specifically designed to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3D modules.

Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. a glossary. and an index._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Report Manager Reference Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. This includes information on accessing the product and common conventions for working in the PDS 3D modules. Lists any exceptions made to the certification. Much of this document is devoted to a description of the forms used to setup and maintain reference data. and work flow. File Name readme. Provide additional information related to the Reference Data Manager such as error messages. terms. and file listings. Describes the product environment. the fixes are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. It describes general information. For a fixes release. numbered sections. Section 2 Section 3 Sections 4-16 Appendices Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the software in the directory. 16 . appendices.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. Describes the main Reference Data Manager form used to access the product. Section 1 Provides an overview of the product. Provides special notices to the customer. Describe the individual libraries and managers which make up the Reference Data Manager including operating steps for each form within the manager.

The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. For example. 17 . which is an explanation of what the software is doing. parameter name. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. or dialog box title. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names.dat to load the ASCII file. For example. The text is placed in the viewing plane.rpt file. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. Key in original. For example. The ASCII report is stored in the layout. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message. For example. Choose File > Open to load a new file. For example. or groups of related information. Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response. phrases. which requires an action be taken by the user. Bold Indicates a command name.

You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information. Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed. Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises. 18 . Need a hint — used with activities and labs.k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. To press the Escape key. then K. More information — indicates there is additional or related information. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information. Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. which map menu selections to key combinations.

This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field. To key a character string into a text box. In addition. For example. Double-click on the file original. Preface Double-click Type Key in 19 . After selecting an item. For example. right-button chord. If you are using the CLIX operating system._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. Selecting does not initiate an action. you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. For example. Click Apply to save the changes. Select the line string to define the graphic template. you click the action you want to affect the item. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. Select the file original.dat to load it into the new surface. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. then click Delete to remove it from the directory. In a dialog box. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor.dat from the list box. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. such as selecting toggle buttons. If you are using the Windows NT operating system. you tentative-select by double-clicking with a mouse or pressing <T> on a hand-held cursor. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. For example. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file. you would select items to define parameters.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 20 .

Introduction Welcome to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) module of the Plant Design System of software. Introduction Introduction 1. 21 . to power plants. waste water treatment plants. This reference data ensures consistency in the definition of piping specifications and commodity libraries. placement of piping components is driven by the specification. and cogeneration facilities. consumer products (food. the Plant Design System (PDS) integrates many discipline-specific software modules. these modules automate the many phases of a plant design project. paper. It is used to control and standardize the PDS 3D modules to reflect company practices and standards. soap. beverages._ _______________ 1. and so forth). cosmetics. chemical and pharmaceutical plants. In PDS. Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is one of these modules. This data is contained in the reference database (RDB) and can be used by other projects. The PDS reference data provides the selection criteria for the piping commodity items that are found in the piping job specification and the piping commodity libraries that are delivered with the product. Intergraph’s plant design software can be used to design any type of plant—from petrochemical plants. Specifically. The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is specifically designed to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3D modules. offshore platforms.

The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of Piping projects. a set of drawings. HVAC. Each Piping project consists of a project control database. The project is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. PDS uses the following organization to break the plant into smaller pieces that can be handled more easily. 22 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 1. The reference data may be specific to one project or shared by more than one project.1 Project Organization Since a process plant such as a refinery can be extremely large. Each project contains all the information required to work in a PDS task. and a collection of reference data. A project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. piping and equipment models. reference models (structural. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on setting up a project. A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator before you can use any of the other 3D PDS modules. and electrical raceway). project design database.

Instrument Component Specification Data Table 205 .Tap Properties Data Table 211 . It enables you to control and standardize the PDS 3D tasks.Piping Commodity Specification Data Table 203 . You can also modify the reference data to reflect company practices and standards.Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table 212 . This reference data is used to ensure consistency in the definition of piping specifications and commodity libraries._ _______________ 1.Piping Specialty Specification Data Table 204 .2 Reference Data Overview The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) enables you to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3D modules.Flange Insulation Exclusion Data Practice Specific Reference Data Physical Dimension Tables Piping Job Specification Tables Short Material Descriptions Long Material Descriptions Specialty Material Descriptions 23 . Introduction Spec/Material Database Table 201 .Piping Material Class Data Table 202 .Piping Commodity Implied Material Data Table 231 .Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table 232 . The Reference Data for PDS 3D is composed of the following basic components: Reference Data Overview 1.

24 . it can be posted to the approved reference data files. It depicts how the various parts that make up PDS work together. The following figure illustrates the various pieces of reference data required to place a 6" gate valve in a piping model and report on the placed component. Whenever possible. Once the information in the unapproved files has been verified. This allows revisions to take place in unapproved files while other processes read the approved files. For example._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Practice Independent Reference Data Graphic Commodity Data Standard Note Library Label Description Library Piping Assembly Library The Reference Data Manager supports both approved and unapproved reference data for a project. the discussion of the physical dimension tables will use the tables called to place the gate valve as examples. The Project Control Database contains complete file management data for both an approved and unapproved version of each type of reference data such as the Piping Job Specification or the Graphic Commodity Library. this placement example will be used throughout the rest of this document.

Introduction 25 ._ _______________ Reference Data Overview 1.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 26 .

The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries: Graphic Commodity Library . When you place a component the system uses the Piping Job Specification to select the appropriate component from the parametric symbol definition library which then accesses the component dimensional data.2. Piping Job Specification Introduction 1. piping specialty items. DIN. specialty items. and tap properties tables.library containing the specification tables referenced in the PJS. The Piping Job Spec Tables command enables you to create. You can use the interactive (forms-driven) specification writer or define/revise the data using ASCII neutral files. The information for the Piping Job Specification is contained in the following files: Specification/Material Reference Database . specialty items. (A different Physical Dimension Library is required for each type of practice such as. The Graphic Commodity Library contains the parametric symbol definitions required to place piping and instrument components in a 3D model. The Piping Job Specification Manager enables you to create or revise the specificaton data in the Material Reference Database. The information in the Specification/Material Reference database and Spec Table Library tables is also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can extract and modify.database containing the definitions for piping materials classes. commodity items. revise. or British Standard) Spec Table Library ..1 Piping Job Specification Introduction The Piping Job Specification (PJS) provides selection criteria for piping commodity items. Physical Dimension Libraries . and delete tables in the Spec Table Library. 27 . The parametric descriptions and dimension tables are also delivered in the form of text libraries which you can extract and modify using the Graphic Commodity Library Manager and Physical Data Library Manager._ _______________ 1. and instruments.contains dimension data for the commodity items. U. and instruments.S.contains the parametric definitions for the commodity items. Introduction Graphic Commodity Data Introduction The graphic commodity data is used to define commodity items.contains the specification tables referenced in the PJS. Spec Table Library .

criteria for implied material._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Material Description Data Introduction The Material Description Data is accessed for Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database Other miscellaneous reporting Interfaces to the material control system Stress analysis Isometric drawing extraction. 28 . Specialty Material Description Library . revise. which is not required for the creation of graphic symbologies. and delete data in the Material Description Libraries. Output from the library consists of free-format text which forms the standard note.contains the long material descriptions for commodity items. Long Material Description Library . and which is not part of the geometric data.database tables containing definitions for commodity items.contains the material descriptions for specialty items. Short Material Description Library . The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create. The Material Description Data consists of the commodity item data which is not stored in the Design Database. The material descriptions are also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can modify and post to the libraries.contains the short material descriptions for commodity items and taps. Standard Note Library Introduction The text for code-listed attributes and standard notes is stored in the Standard Note Library. and weld data. All attributes identified as code-listed are actually stored as integer values. This data is contained in the following files: Material Data in the Specification/Material Database . The code list text associated with the integer is stored in the Standard Note Library. You can use the Piping Job Specification Manager to load the material data tables in the Specification/Material Database. Information in the Standard Note Library is identified by note number and note type.

user input Displayable attribute messages Commodity code attribute messages Isometric drawing labels Report labels Clash management labels These labels are intelligent graphics with links to the material database.) Piping Job Specification Introduction 1._ _______________ Label Description Library Introduction The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following label types used in PDS 3D: Orthographic drawing view specific labels Orthographic drawing view identification labels Orthagraphic drawing . line weight. The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for a label (such as level. A Piping Assembly object library and text library which contain the definitions for basic assemblies are included in the product delivery. and color code) and to define the format of the label (what information comprises the label. Introduction Piping Assembly Library Introduction The Piping Assembly Library contains the piping assembly definitions which define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. 29 .

A code list is a set of acceptable values for a particular attribute which can be referred to by an index number. A table is a defined set of attributes which describe an item._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 1. numeric data types can be either real (decimal) or integer. code-listed data types are a special integer values which help standardize and speed up data entry.3 Reference Database Introduction A database is a collection of formatted data which conforms to a set of predefined rules. alphanumeric. alphanumeric data types (also called character) are used for textual information such as component names or descriptions. such as nominal diameter or end preparation. A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value is defined using one of the selections from a particular code list set. it can be either numeric. 30 . Each attribute has a column number in the database table and a name which describes the piece of information to be stored. An attribute is a single type of information to be stored about an item. The actual information stored in the database is referred to as the attribute value. The Specification/Material Reference Database is composed of a set of tables (entities) which represent categories of data. or code-listed. such as the Piping Commodity Data table. This value is a fixed data type. These attributes are used for quantitative values such as pressure or temperature.

Library File Description Graphic Commodity Library Piping Assembly Library Label Description Library Standard Note Library Object pip_gcom. The following reference data. which is not unique to any specific practice.l Text us_pcdim._ _______________ 1. Library File Description Physical Dimension Table Library Piping Job Specification Table Library Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Material Description Library Object us_pcdim.l us_pjstb.l labels. is delivered in the PD Shell product in the \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib directory.l.l us_shbom. Introduction For the DIN RDB substitute din_ for us_ in the listed library file names.l us_spbom.t 31 .l.t - Delivered Reference Data 1.l.l Text pip_gcom.l us_lgbom.l std_note.l assembly.t assembly.t us_pjstb.t std_note.l.4 Delivered Reference Data The following reference data is delivered in the reference database products for the corresponding practices (such as RDUSRDB or RDDINRDB).l.

This has the same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line.5 Reference Data Setup A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator before you can use the Reference Data Manager. Edit the pds. Load the appropriate Reference Data product (such as RDUSRDB for U. In addition to the information specified in the Project Administrator Reference Guide. The default commit value is 25.cmd file to identify the text editor to be used when revising reference data through the Reference Data Manager forms. page 47. Identify the location of the Reference Data files as described in Reference Data Location. $ENV {’PD_EDITOR’} = ’<absolute path to preferred editor executable>’. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on Loading PDS 3D products. Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas. Increasing this variable may improve performance.S.cmd file to define PD_COMMIT_INTERVAL to control the commit interval for use in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. 32 . you should complete the following steps before using the Reference Data Manager. Edit the pds. The default setting for Windows NT systems is Notepad. You can specify any text editor that has been loaded on the workstation. Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data. Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS. Practice or RDDINRDB for DIN Practice)._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 1.

PDS Environment 2. The PD_Shell Environment and all batch jobs in the PDS 3D products interface to Intergraph’s Network Licensing System. The PDS 3D modules provide a simple user interface through extensive use of forms. Environment 33 . This design facilitates the use of non-PDS tools such as relational databases and third party software._ _______________ 2. and RIS required to set up data across a network. All the supported applications use a common interface that is controlled by the PD Shell program. The PDS 3D software uses available nucleus tools such as MicroStation and FORMS. PDS Environment The PDS 3D software supports a variety of applications. The modules also provide an on-line Help capability for easy access to information while working in the product. This ensures consistency across applications and minimizes the amount of time required to learn the product. NQS. It supports standard software such as NFS.

process flow diagrams. These files can be located on the workstation or a server on the network. Options Schematics Environment — Provides access to the PDS 2D modules that are used to create and modify piping and instrumentation diagrams.cmd in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on this file. which provides an environment that is used to create and revise structural models. and instrumentation database records. See pds. You can access the Plant Design System Environment form by Double-clicking the PD_Shell icon on Windows NT workstations. create and revise structural drawings. 34 . which provides an interactive graphics environment that is used to create and revise equipment model graphics and database information. and propagate structural models. The script also activates the Plant Design System Environment form. This form identifies the active project(s) and provides access to all the PDS functions. and it identifies the location of the product files. FrameWorks Environment — Provides access to the FrameWorks module. Equipment Modeling — Provides access to the Equipment Modeling module._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 PD Shell The PD Shell program provides access to the various functions that are associated with the PDS 3D Modules. This executes a control script that defines all of the environment variables that are needed to run the product.

and Piping Assembly Library. which provides an interactive environment that is used to create and revise raceway models and access raceway utilities. Pipe Support Designer — Activates an interactive command environment that is used to create pipe supports in the model. Piping Model Builder — Enables you to create piping graphics from a nongraphics environment. Pipe Stress Analysis — Activates a set of forms that are used to extract information from piping models for input to third-party pipe stress analysis products. and verify the integrity of the data in the model. create and revise project files. This module is used with PD_Design to create an accurate 3D model of the piping network. 35 . Electrical Raceway Environment — Provides access to the Electrical Raceway module. Graphic Commodity Data. Label Description Library. revise existing model graphics and database information. and control the project. define project seed data. Report Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to create and revise report format files and report on information in a project including Material Take-Off reports. provide access to the interactive graphics environment for drawings. and revise existing pipe support model graphics and database information. Piping Design Data Manager — Provides access to a set of options that are used to verify the integrity of the graphic and database information that is associated with a model. Project Administrator — Provides access to a set of forms that are used to create a project. PD Shell 2. Interference Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to check for interferences among project models and to control approved interferences. Reference Data Manager — Provides access to a set of forms that are used to control the reference data for a project including Piping Job Specification data. Alphanumeric Commodity Data. Environment Drawing Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to create and manipulate drawings and drawing views. Isometric Drawing Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to extract isometric drawings from piping models and to review or plot the created isometric drawings. Standard Note Library. and provide access to a plot manager and vector hiddenline manager. DesignReview Integrator — Activates a set of forms that are used to extract information to form label files for use in DesignReview and to review data from a DesignReview session._ _______________ Piping Designer — Activates an interactive command environment that is used to create piping and in-line instrumentation in the model.

Message Area — Displays prompts and messages that are associated with the active process. 3Donly. Refer to the Access Control Manger in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide. for more information on using access control. 36 . For example. only those projects for which you have some level of access are displayed. Error messages are displayed in red. if the active project is a 2D-only project. This field also sets the Review User ID for use in the Interference Manager module._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Other Fields User ID — Used for access control. you must key in a valid user ID as defined by your system manager to gain access to the projects. you cannot access the the Interference Manager module. If access control has been defined. An error is displayed if you select an option that is incompatible with the active project. no entry is required for this field. If access control has been defined. If access control has not been defined. Password — Key in the password for the specified user ID. Project List Field — Displays the defined projects for the network and allows you to select the active project. and 2D & 3D). The system lists all the defined PDS projects (2D-only.

press the <ENTER> or <Tab> key for the data to be entered into the system. text. The available commands vary from form to form depending on the type of operation. The following summarizes other basic actions you use in the environments: Enter — When keying in any data in a key-in field. and prompts that make up the environments. The following describes these tools. 2. You use the select action to select functions. Environment Common Tools on the PD Shell Forms There are many gadgets in the environments that are common to most or all of the forms. PD_Shell Form Conventions Selecting Options You move through the PD Shell forms by selecting function buttons or other gadgets from the form. select from lists. scroll through data displayed on the screen. toggle buttons. anything you find on a form is called a gadget. activate data fields. The display size of forms and dialog boxes in the nonMicrostation graphics environment are independent of the size of the workstation’s display system. In general. and other gadgets._ _______________ PD_Shell Form Conventions The following Conventions describe how to respond to the various buttons. Delete — If you make a mistake while keying in text. you can double-click on a row to select and accept the data in that row. and so on. fields. lists. You can also press <ENTER> or <Tab> to move through a set of key-in fields. The Help button activates on-line Help for the active form. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and then selecting the Accept button. access other forms. Standard Commands The PD Shell forms have a set of standard buttons in the upper right corner of most of the form windows. 37 . For most of the forms with scrolling lists. press the <Delete> key to erase character(s) to the left of the cursor. Most forms contain the same basic features: buttons. Help remains active until you delete the Help window. Select means to place the screen cursor (which appears as an arrow) on top of a screen gadget and press <D>.

These arrows scroll lists line by line. The Accept button accepts a selection or operation. The scrolling list has an arrow pointing up and an arrow pointing down. Scrolling List Some screen menus have a scrolling list of projects or applications. The items scroll through the window as you move the button. The list scrolls up or down depending on which arrow you select. You need to scroll a list only if more options are available than can be displayed in the window. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and then selecting the Accept button. Control returns to the immediately preceding form in the hierarchy. You can also select the slider and. The size and position of the button on the scroll bar is an indication of the number of lines and the relative position within the list. the active form remains active so that you can repeat a similar operation or control returns to the preceding form. There is a button that slides between these two arrows to indicate your position on the list. slide the button up or down the bar. select the arrow buttons on the side of the list. The Restart button clears any key-in fields on the form that have values you can modify. while pressing <D>. To scroll a list. select the space above or below the sliding button. you can double-click on a row to select and accept the data in that row. For most forms this returns to the Plant Design System Environment form. 38 . In some forms with scrolling lists. The list pages up or down accordingly. All commands that display a list of design areas or models order the list alphanumerically by the design area number or model number in ascending order. To page through the list._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The Shell button exits the active form and returns control to the base manager that is associated with the active form. The Top button exits the active form and returns control to the top form of the active branch. Depending on the active form or option. The Cancel button cancels or exits from the active form.

and press <Return>. These fields are boxshaped and dark gray. To change a field. one of which is always displayed. Toggle A toggle field on a screen menu enables you to select one of two possible choices. reselect the field and key in the new information. If you select a key-in field for a code-listed attribute. there is a display list associated with the Authorization key-in field shown. there is a small box with horizontal dashes. At the end of the field. Therefore. Place a data point on the toggle field to toggle between the two choices. Often. Environment 39 . Key-in fields have a maximum number of characters depending on the item that is being defined. Key in your input. The option displayed is active. Place a data point on the roll-through list to scroll through the available options. there are two buttons marked with arrows. These buttons are called shift left and shift right buttons. Shift Left moves the text display to the front of the field. When you select this display list box with the screen cursor. you can key in more characters than a field display shows. Display-List Boxes A display-list box is located at the end of some key-in fields. It lets you select data from a list instead of keying in information. For example. MicroStation requires lowercase characters for the file specification and path name of all design files. 2. Roll-Through List A roll-through list shows one choice at a time of a list that can be several items long. Shift Left and Shift Right buttons At the bottom of some key-in and display fields. A bar cursor appears in the active key-in field. the system automatically converts any input for the file specification and path name of a design file (such as a model or drawing) to lowercase before loading into the Project Control Database. Shift Right moves the text display to the end of the field. You can select a key-in field and key in a new value. the system activates a form that lists the code list values for the selected field. Select an item from the list to enter its value into the field._ _______________ Key-in Fields PD_Shell Form Conventions Screens that accept keyboard input have key-in fields. an associated list of valid input values displays.

the system creates the necessary batch queues for that application. When you submit a batch process the system sends an electronic mail message to the mail path of the default login reporting the jobs completion status. The mail message also includes any error log information. you can press <D> along the edge of a form or any area not occupied by a button. 40 . Many of the batch processes can be delayed for submission at a specified time. or other gadget. Collapse/Restore Repaint Pop-to-bottom Modify/Resize Pop-to-top Restore Size Batch Processes When you install the PDS 3D applications. You can manipulate form windows just like any other workstation window. Refer to Loading PDS Products in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for a listing of the batch queues. PDS 3D uses these batch queues to allow you to continue working in the environment while the system processes a request. to display a box of icons._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Standard Window Icons When using this software in the CLIX environment. key-in field. The following list defines the available window icons.

Help provides A table of contents that lists subjects by topic and subtopic (in a hierarchy). Select a topic from this list or select a command from the menu to display an article in the pop-up window. Environment When you first select Help. Help that is specific to that form is displayed._ _______________ Help On-line Help is a special feature of your application software. For instance. Help 2. The ability to move up. down. An alphabetized index of every command or subject that has been documented for the software. Whenever possible. The Help window has buttons that you can use to manipulate either Help or the window itself as follows: 41 . prompt sequences. the Help Table of Contents is displayed in a pop-up window. Help provides instant access to information from the application reference documents. and forth through Help by using cross-references and links to primary and secondary commands. such as command descriptions and explanations. PDS Help is context sensitive. For example. The ability to quickly search through Help for information on a specific subject or command. There are several avenues you can take to find information about a command or subject. and much more. if you select the help icon for a given form. back. A glossary to help you become familiar with product-specific terms.

Help Command Buttons — Enable you to move around in the Help file. 2._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Scroll Bar — Moves up or down in an article that is displayed in the Help window. Operating Sequence 1. Select the Help button from the command window or form. help on the active command is displayed. — OR — Exit Help. 42 . If you select Help while using a command. If no command is active. the table of contents is displayed. Cancel or File > Exit — exits Help and closes the Help window. Use the command buttons or scroll bar to move around in Help.

modify. page 55 and Piping Job Specification Manager. page 275. 43 . Piping Job Spec Report Manager — Used to define and generate reports of data in the Material Reference Database. See Spec Writer. Select the Reference Data Manager option from the PD Shell form. Piping Job Specification Manager — Used to create. and delete information in the Piping Job Spec Table Library. page 266 and Physical Data Library Manager. Piping Job Specification Tables — Used to create. and delete physical data (dimension tables) in object and text libraries. page 145. and delete information in the Material Reference Database using a forms interface. See Piping Job Spec Report Manager. page 154. See Physical Data Tables. Graphic Commodity Library Manager — Used to create._ _______________ 3. modify. page 189 and Piping Job Specification Tables Command. See Graphic Commodity Library. and delete graphic commodity library data (Eden modules). modify. Spec Writer — Used to create. page 287. page 254 and Graphic Commodity Library Manager. Reference Data Manager The Reference Data Manager provides access to the various functions associated with the PDS 3D Reference Database. Reference Data Manager 3. modify. and delete information in the Material Reference Database using neutral files. page 239. Physical Data Library Manager — Used to create. Reference Data Manager Select the option to be performed. See Piping Job Specification. modify. page 103. See Piping Job Specification Tables.

See Standard Note Library. Piping Assembly Library Manager — Used to create. page 449 and Standard Note Library Manager. page 376. and delete piping assembly definitions in the Piping Assembly Library. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item. and spec tables. and color code) and to define the format of the label (what information comprises the label). page 465 and Label Description Library Manager. See Default Project Control Data. revise. 44 . program files. page 471. See Reference Database Revision Manager. and report files). graphic commodity data. Reference Database Revision Manager — Used to create a set of reports for coordinating revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are required in the model. The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. and Eden modules for a piping materials class exist in the graphic data libraries for the project. Label Description Library Manager — Used to define the graphic parameters for a label (such as level. revise. Default Project Control Data — Used to define the default location for the source files used to load the RDB files (such as neutral files._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Material Description Library Manager — Used to create and modify alphanumeric commodity data. Support Tutorial Definition Manager — Used to create. and report the code lists and standard notes associated with the PDS 3D modules. page 505 and Piping Assembly Library Manager. Standard Note Library Manager — Used to create. page 537. See Material Description Data. page 53. page 48. revise. page 453. page 525. Reference Database Management Data — Used to define the filenames for Reference Database Files. page 361 and Material Description Library Manager. See Label Description Library. See Piping Assembly Library. See Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager. dimension tables. line weight. page 437. and delete data in the Tutorial Definition Library. See Reference Database Management Data. page 389. Table Checker — Used to verify that all the commodity spec tables. entries. See Table Checker Form.

If you are aware that a different user may be revising that library within a different project. The system displays an error if the Reference Data Manager determines that an error exists in the binary tree structure. select the exit option. the system deletes the temporary file. the system creates a temporary file for that library.c and will be created in the same directory location as the object libary. Reference Data Manager 45 . select the accept option. This temporary file is named <library_specification>. the system displays a dialog box when the next user enters the Reference Data Manager to revise that library. select the exit option. or delete data in any of the these libraries. you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library. the Reference Data Manager verifies the integrity of the binary tree structure within the library. This feature requires that PDS users have write access to the directory in which the libraries reside. In this event. the corresponding source library. 3. If a PDS user is unable to exit the Reference Data Manager for any reason (such as a power failure). You must decide which of the following situations applies and respond accordingly. The Reference Data Manager will display an error message. and different users in different projects mistakenly attempt to revise one of the libraries simultaneously. When a PDS user exits a data creation or revision session.1 Data Security Data Security The Reference Data Manager provides data security features for the following reference data libraries in the event of accidents such as. if the user does not have privileges for write access to the applicable directory and the user will not be able to revise that library. — If you are concerned with the integrity of the library for any reason._ _______________ 3. make one of the following decisions. revise. — If a corrupted library (including the corresponding source library and revision library) has been restored from a backup. electrical power surges and network failures. Once you successfully exit the applicable library manager. and the corresponding revision library to their previous state (before the last revisions). These features also protect the libraries in the event that a library is being shared by multiple projects. Then restore the library. If you are certain that the warning results from a previous unusual exit. Graphic Commodity Library Physical Data Library Piping Job Specification Table Library Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Material Description Library Standard Note Library Label Description Library Piping Assembly Library When you enter the Reference Data Manager to create.

46 . see Reference Data in the Project Administrator Reference Guide.2 Reference Data Archival PDS includes a Project Archival Manager to provide archival and retrieval facilities for projects._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 3. For specific information about archiving reference data. see Project Archival Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide. including reference data. For more information about the Project Archival Manager.

Reference Database Management Data — Defines the location for Reference Database Files. Reference Data Location This section describes the options used to define the location of the Reference Data files on the network. See page 48._ _______________ 4. and spec tables. graphic commodity data. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item. dimension tables. Reference Data Location 4. Reference Data Location 47 . See page 53. Default Project Control Data — Defines the default location for the source files used to load the RDB files (such as neutral files. and report files). language files.

Operating Sequence 1. 48 . dimension tables. you must define the applicable file locations before you can continue. Piping Job Specification Table Library — This field identifies the location of the Piping Job Spec Table library. graphic commodity data. Select RDB File Type Select the RDB file from the list of files. and spec tables. 2.1 Reference Database Management Data This option activates the Reference Database Management Data form used to define the filenames for Reference Database Files._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 4. You can use the scroll arrows to scroll through the listed files. Material/Specification Reference Database — This field identifies the Material Reference Database for the project. The system identifies the file for the selected field in the fields at the bottom of the form. Refer to the Project Setup Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on this database. Select Reference Database Management Data from the Reference Data Manager form. There are no default settings for these files. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item.

the system will use the unapproved file for all Reference Data Manager operations (such as revising entries in a library. Select confirm to update the information.) Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting the choice of data for a model file or drawing. Refer to Delivered Reference Data. in-line instruments. page 31. Physical Data Library — These fields identify the library files which contain the physical data tables for a range of geometric industry standards. 49 . Commodity Synonym Library — This field identifies the user-defined library which contains the map for translating the default piping commodity names used in the P&ID Task to names specified by the user in the Piping Job Specification. Reference Data Location Orthographic Drawing Borders — This field identifies the drawing border files to be used when creating drawings. This library contains the symbol definitions for assemblies. You must specify which style of borders is to be used. Piping Assembly Library — This field identifies the location for the Piping Assembly library. for a listing of the delivered reference data files. Standard Note Library — This field identifies the location of the standard note library. 3. Label Description Library — This field identifies the location for the label description library. If you specify an unapproved file. Reference Database Management Data 4. A set of border files are delivered to the directory win32app\ingr\pddraw\border. Long Material Description Library — This field identifies the library which contains the long BOM description for all piping commodity items._ _______________ Short Material Description Library — This field identifies the library which contains the short bill-of-material description for all piping commodity items and the BOM description addenda for taps. 4. Graphic Commodity Library — This field identifies the library which contains the Eden modules used to place components in the model. You can select Approved –> Not Approved to copy the approved definition of the selected RDB file to the Not Approved fields. This library tends to be customer-specific. The long BOM description is only used for requisitions. Specialty Material Description Library — This field identifies the library which contains the BOM description for engineered items. Key in any changes to the selected RDB files. and pipe supports.

5. Specify Default Nodename Key in a default network address and pathname to be used for all approved Reference Database libraries and a network address and pathname to be used for all unapproved libraries. 7. and file specification to the various Reference Database libraries for both the approved and unapproved libraries. the copy will not occur if the approved library is the most recent or has the same date as the unapproved library. pathname. 6. The file specifications for all libraries are determined automatically on the basis of the industry practice and the following naming convention. You can select Default All Library Locations to define a default location for all approved and all unapproved library files. When copying the Not Approved library to the Approved library. You can override any of these default specifications by selecting the appropriate library and keying in the file information. You can select Copy All Standard Libraries to copy the delivered library files to a specified location. Options Default All Library Locations This option assigns a default network address. Select Accept following each change to the reference data to accept the specified file location. — THEN — Select Cancel to exit the form. 50 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Refer to the individual managers for information on posting the unapproved information to the approved files.

Practice B International .l std_note.S. rdusrdb or rddinrdb).l spclty_bom.JIS International . This option provides a new user with a simple method to create a Reference Database using RDB products delivered by Intergraph. The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the PD Shell product. Graphic Commodity Library Label Description Library Standard Note Library Piping Assembly Library 4. This is not intended for use in a production environment. Physical Data Library Piping Spec Table Library Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Description Library 51 .Practice A European .DIN European ._ _______________ Library Graphic Commodity Library Label Description Library Standard Note Library Piping Assembly Library Piping Spec Table Library Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Description Library Physical Data Library Filename pipe_gcom.l short_bom.l labels. Practice European . Reference Data Location The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the applicable Reference Database product (such as.Practice A International . Practice U.l <standard>_pcdim.Practice B Company Practice Prefix us din bs eua eub jis aus ina inb cmp Copy All Standard Libraries This option copies the delivered Reference Database libraries from the applicable product directories to the disk locations specified in the Reference Database Management data of the Project Control database.Australian International .l long_bom.l pjs_tbl.British Standard European .l Reference Database Management Data The text to be used for the <standard> is determined in the following manner.l assembly.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The system also copies the applicable Table Revision Management Libraries for the Piping Spec Table Library and Physical Data Libraries.cmd shell script accordingly. None of the libraries are copied. The network address and path name for any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project cannot be mounted. Practice European . None of the subsequent libraries are copied. 52 . The text to be used for the standard is determined in the following manner.cmd shell script. Any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project are in use (locked). Practice U. and not that of the library in the delivered product.S. Therefore.JIS International .DIN European .British Standard International . The system will display an error message for any of the following conditions. this command presently searches for the following exported variables: Product RD_USRDB RD_DINRDB RD_BSRDB RD_JISRDB RD_AUSRDB Practice U. None of the libraries are copied. The network address for any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project are undefined.Australian Prefix us din bs jis aus The list of available products is determined from the list of exported variables as specified in the pds. will be used for the destination library. If the RDB product resides on a remote server (or workstation). you must manually mount the directory that includes the RDB product and change the exported variable in the pds. Practice DIN British Standards JIS Australian The file specification recorded in the Project Control Database.S.

Reference Data Location 2. Operating Sequence 1. report files. Select Default Project Control Data from the Reference Data Manager form to define the default location for the RDB source files. Standard Note Library Path / Node — The default location for the Standard Note (code list) source files. Assembly Path / Node — The default location for the Piping Assembly Language source files. Dimension/Spec Table Path / Node — The default location of the Dimension Table and Spec Table source files. You can also change these file locations during the operation of the applicable managers. 53 . 4.2 Default Project Control Data Default Project Control Data This option defines the default location for common reference files used by the project (such as neutral files._ _______________ 4. Piping Spec Path / Node — The default location for the neutral files to be used to load the Specification/Material Reference Database and Material Description Libraries. Piping Eden Path / Node — The default location for the Eden source files. Select the field to be defined and key in the location of the source files and the associated node name. and library files).

TDF Table Path / Node — The default location for the Equipment table definition files. 3. Accept any changes to the Project Control Data. 54 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Equipment Eden Path / Node — The default location for the Equipment Eden source files. Model Builder Path / Node — The default location for the model builder language source files.

_ _______________ 5. piping engineered items. 5. and instruments. Piping Job Specification 55 . and company practices associated with piping commodity items. Then the system reads the PJS for the parameters required to define the item. design standards. properties. When you select an item for placement in the model. the system uses the active parameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) to search the Piping Job Specification for the selected item. Piping Job Specification Piping Job Specification The Piping Job Specification (PJS) defines the characteristics.

see page 98. revise.see page 77.1 Material Reference Database Structure The Material Reference Database contains a set of tables which define the Piping Job Specification data. The numbers in parentheses indicate the database table number. Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) . Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) .see page 67. It stores the revision dates for the other database tables in the Material Reference Database. character(n) integer short alphanumeric field n characters in length long (double word) integer short integer 56 .see page 62.see page 95. The Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping Materials Class Data.see page 88.see page 85. The revision dates are updated automatically when you use the Piping Job Spec Manager to load. Attribute Types The following conventions are used to designate the field type for database attributes. Piping Materials Class Data (201) .see page 101. Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) . The Reference Database Revision Management Data table is totally systemdefined. Instrument Component Specification Data (204) . Tap Properties Data (205) . Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) . Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) . Reference Database Revision Management Data (213) Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) .see page 81. or delete data in these database tables.see page 91. Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5.

and Instrument database tables classify connect point dependent data about a component in terms of green and red connect points. — If the termination types are the same but the values for rating. Piping Specialty. If a component has ends with different nominal diameters (regardless of other end properties) the larger nominal diameter is designated as the green connect point. For example. The following conventions are used to coordinate the two sets of data: If data is only shown under the green connect point. In the following database descriptions attributes which are code-listed are identified by a standard note number at the end of the line following the field type description. schedule. SN 125 indicates that fluid_code is defined in terms of code list numbers belonging to Standard Note 125. the following rules apply: — If the ends have different termination types (regardless of the values for schedule/thickness) the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest codelist number are designated as the green connect point. the "stronger" ends(s) are designated as the green connect point. or thickness differ._ _______________ double standard note nnnn real (floating point) value Standard Note Type for code-listed attribute Material Reference Database Structure Code-Listed Attributes A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value must be defined using one of the selections from a particular code list in the Standard Note Library. 5. character(6) . If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties which differ. it applies to all ends of the component. fluid_code . A possible entry for this attribute would be 197 for chlorine gas (GCL). Fluid Code/Connector Type. Piping Job Specification 57 . Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the code list sets associated with PDS 3D. the line 6. Connect Point Data The Piping Commodity.

the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus 5000. the coded number equals the size (in millimeters) For English units. This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mm increments for metric units. and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" increments for English units. 58 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 NPD Units Nominal piping diameter is defined as a special coded number (NPD units) with the following formula. For metric units.

To declare the system of units add the appropriate units marker to the entry: 5. 59 . For certain attributes you can use a dash (-) to indicate that a default value be used._ _______________ 5. You can use any of the three PDS conventions to enter fractional Nominal Piping Diameters. If you use the SINGLE_SPACING option 2 1/2 can be used only if enclosed by single quotes (’2 1/2’) You can use both metric and English units. Piping Job Specification mm for metric " for English The Tap Properties Table must include the Table Name along with other data by using the TABLE statement. All comments are disregarded by the system. You can set the spacing between each entry by specifying SINGLE_SPACING or DOUBLE_SPACING as the first item in the file. Each entry (attribute) can begin at any point along the input. The entries 2-1/2 2. Entries are automatically interpreted as English. The system_unique_no attribute is never user-defined. You can place blank lines anywhere in the file for readability. For single line comments. If you do not define the spacing. double spacing is used. place an exclamation point (!) at the beginning of the line. Therefore.5 2 1/2 are all equivalent ways of entering the same figure. it should not be included in the neutral file data or in the list of attributes defined by the SEQUENCE statement. These lines do not effect the information being copied. The default system of units must be declared once in the beginning and each time the default system is changed. The neutral file must conform to the following rules: Neutral File Input There must be an entry for each user-defined parameter in the Material Reference Database.2 Neutral File Input A neutral file is an ASCII text file used to load information into the the Material Reference Database. The SEQUENCE statement can be used to define the order of entries in the neutral file.

P2. The SEQUENCE statement can only be used once per file. the third to PDS parameter #4.. and the fifth to PDS parameter #2. The values of P1. At least two spaces must separate the keyword and each parameter._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 SEQUENCE Statement The SEQUENCE statement is an optional statement which can be used to define the order of the parameters in the neutral file. This statement performs the same function as the SEQUENCE statement except that it lists the order of the attributes as they were defined in the VAX Piping Job Specification Database. and their position tells the system the order in which to enter them. SEQUENCE= 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *4 *5 *21 *22 ORDER Statement Neutral files translated from VAX PDS data may contain an ORDER statement rather than a SEQUENCE statement.Pn are the parameter numbers assigned by PDS. You can use the convention *Pn to indicate an attribute that is not defined in the neutral file. Format SEQUENCE= P1 P2 P3 P4 . If the SEQUENCE statement is used it must be placed before any entries... Pn where: SEQUENCE= P1.. 60 .. Examples SEQUENCE= 5 3 4 1 2 The first parameter read corresponds to PDS parameter #5.. For example. All of the *Pn attributes should be placed at the end of the SEQUENCE statement following the list of included attributes. If the SEQUENCE statement is omitted.Pn keyword which can be entered in either upper or lower case letters. the second to PDS parameter #3.. the fourth to PDS parameter #1. parameters 1 through n. it is assumed that the parameters appear in the order defined by PDS.

375 691 591 NREQD E$37591XXX > 0. The TABLE statement can be used more than once in a neutral file. the Tap Properties Table below defines two tables (C001. The active table name remains unchanged until another TABLE statement is encountered. and C002) by using the Table keyword to segregate the data for each table being defined. For example. the name of the table associated with the following data.5 691 591 NREQD E$50591XXX : : 34 691 591 NREQD E034591XXX 36 691 591 NREQD E036591XXX 42 691 591 NREQD E042591XXX 48 691 591 NREQD E048591XXX 5. Format TABLE= table_name where TABLE= table_name keyword which can be entered in upper or lower case letters.5 691 591 NREQD E$50591XXX : : 30 691 591 NREQD E030591XXX 32 691 591 NREQD E032591XXX 34 691 591 NREQD E034591XXX 36 691 591 NREQD E036591XXX 42 691 591 NREQD E042591XXX 48 691 591 NREQD E048591XXX Table= C002 ! Description= SWE CL6000 default taps ! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code 0. Double_Spacing Order= 2 3 5 4 6 7 ! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=2 Date=12-May-1995 Table= C001 ! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps ! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code 0._ _______________ TABLE Statement The TABLE statement defines a table name to be associated with a particular set of data. Piping Job Specification 61 .5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064 0.375 691 591 NREQD E$37591XXX > 0.5 1 CL6000 421 NREQD E$50421072 0. Neutral File Input There must be at least one/two spaces (depending on the default spacing selected) between the keyword and the table_name.

when the unapproved data is posted to the approved Material Reference Database. Much of the design data is stored in tables so that common information can be accessed by more than one piping materials class. for the data in this piping materials class (including the Commodity Item data). It is user-defined and is not updated automatically when the piping commodity data for that piping materials class is revised. or spec number. 6.C. When that piping materials class is posted from the unapproved to the approved Material Reference Database._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. 3. character(2) This attribute represents the version number. The Piping Job Spec Manager increments this attribute when the piping commodity data for that piping materials class is revised or reloaded. The revision number of the approved Material Reference Database is updated to that of the unapproved Material Reference Database. This attribute is under the complete control of the system. The version number starts with A and is incremented (B. 4.2. as determined by the system. spec class. when you specify a new revision number in the neutral file. spec name. system_unique_no . SN 125 This attribute can be used to define the type of fluid for which the piping materials class is intended. A piping materials class defines a classification of components based on design data and service limits.) when you revise the piping materials class. revision_date . 1. character(10) This user-defined attribute can be used to define a date for the latest revision to the data in a piping materials class. 62 . character(2) This attribute identifies the revision number for the data in the piping materials class. the version number for that piping materials class is reset to A in the unapproved Material Reference Database. integer piping_mater_class . 2. fluid_code . 5.D. character(16) This attribute identifies the service number. revision_no .. character(6) . The Piping Materials Class Data table contains 23 attributes.1 Piping Materials Class Data (201) The piping materials class data is independent of nominal piping diameter and commodity item... The revision number of the unapproved Material Reference Database is incremented only. version_no .

It is required for reporting and to calculate the wall thickness of piping components whose thickness is not specifically included in the piping materials class. Piping Job Specification This attribute identifies the nominal piping diameter table used to verify valid nominal piping diameters in this piping materials class. You must insure that all commodity items within the piping materials class are acceptable within the boundary of this table. To use the specified fluid code(s). diameter_table . 7. 63 . It is required for reporting and making matches and comparisons with values for this parameter from the Piping Design Database. This code has a detailed definition outside the scope of PDS that represents the decision of the Project Metallurgist regarding the piping system. page 191._ _______________ You can specify a single fluid code value (such as 521 for process) from code list set 125. you must also set the Fluid Code Control toggle to Yes on the Piping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager. service_lim_table . page 214. SN 148 This code-listed attribute is a generic description of the materials used for this piping materials class (such as carbon steel). 10. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on this form. character(6) 5. page 194. for more inforamtion. character(6) Piping Materials Class Data (201) This attribute defines the materials of construction class for the piping materials class. and instruments included in this piping materials class are suitable (unless you define a lower maximum temperature limit for a specific commodity item). Refer to Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table. for more information on this table. short . the name of a fluid code table to define a set of fluid code values. This parameter includes the material code. corrosion_allow . Refer to Fluid Code Table. double This attribute defines the corrosion/erosion allowance that applies to the piping materials class. This attribute is only used for reporting. engineered items. Refer to Nominal Piping Diameters Table. character(6) This attribute identifies the table used to determine maximum pressure as a function of temperature. 9. for more information. mater_of_construct . 11. This table includes the pressure and temperature sets that form the boundary for which the commodity items. 8. mat_description .

character(6) This attribute identifies the branch insertion table used to determine the name of the branch commodity item to be used for tee and lateral branches. Refer to Materials Data Table. character(6) This attribute identifies the default piping wall thickness equation to be used for this piping materials class. but is not necessarily the compressed gasket thickness. for more information. Several vent and drain definitions are contained in the delivered Piping Assembly Library. 18. page 203. If a schedule/thickness parameter for an item specifies the default calculation. character(6) This parameter defines the materials data table used to determine the material properties required for piping wall thickness calculations in the piping materials class. thickness_table . Refer to Tap Properties Data (205). vent_drain_macro . for more information. 64 . It can coincide with. Refer to Branch Insertion Tables. character(6) This attribute identifies the thickness data table used in piping wall thickness calculations for this piping materials class.) This attribute exists as alphanumeric data. character(6) This attribute is not currently used by the PDS software. Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations. character(6) This attribute defines the name of the tap properties table which includes those parameters required to define a tap on a specific commodity item. materials_table . page 200. tap_data_table . then this equation is used to perform the piping wall thickness calculation. page 208. 13. for more information. for more information. 16. for more information. run size. and branch size. The output of the branch table is the item name of a commodity item (AABBCC code). The item name is determined as a function of branch geometry. thickness_equation . Refer to Thickness Data Tables. page 197. 15. (You cannot override this value by defining a specific gasket gap override value. character(8) This attribute is used to determine the actual gap that is assumed between seating surfaces of two mating bolted ends. gasket_separation ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 12. 14. You can override this value during a design session by changing the type of gasket that applies to the joint. 17. page 85. branch_table .

The input to the Standard Note Library is the note number. SN 499 These code-listed attributes provide the index numbers to CL499 for notes that apply to this piping materials class. page 219. character(6) 5. Piping Job Specification This attribute identifies the Pipe Length Threshold Table to be used for this piping materials class. short standard_note_no_b . This attribute is useful in defining specs for underground piping. Refer to Bend Deflection Table (G04). The maximum length of the default Bend Deflection Table name. character(6) This attribute identifies the Bend Deflection Table to be used for this piping materials class. Therefore. SN 499 . In the delivered data. 22. Piping Materials Class Data (201) All other values are assumed to identify a table name for gasket separation data as a function of nominal piping diameter in the Piping Graphic Commodity Library. Likewise. If this column is undefined (blank). 20. you need not define a Bend Deflection Table for each piping materials class in the Material Reference Database. pipe_length_table . Therefore. Note that the Bend Deflection Table name in the Piping Materials Class data is limited to 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data._ _______________ A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a gasket separation value in the physical subunits specified for the model. 23. page 212. 65 . Refer to the description of gaskets in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more details. the system will use the default Pipe Length Threshold Table specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager. standard_note_no_a . note numbers 1 through 199 are allocated for defining the PJS. This attribute is useful for defining specs for underground piping. short . 19. revision_mngt_date . the system will use the default Bend Deflection Table specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager. The output is the free. as specified with the Project Data Manager can be as many as 20 characters.format text which forms the standard note. you need not define a Pipe Length Threshold Table for each piping materials class in the Material Reference Database. 21. you need not revise any existing neutral files to include this column. bend_deflect_table . for more information. If this column is undefined (blank). for more information. Refer to Gasket Separation Table. integer This system-defined attribute identifies the date of the latest revision for the data in this piping materials class.

Neutral File Format The following is a sample neutral file for the Piping Material Class database table. A set of sample files depicting various options are delivered in the \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory. The maximum length of the default Pipe Length Threshold Table name. bend_tbl.pmc._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Note that the Pipe Length Threshold Table name in the piping materials class data is limited to 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data.pmc fpipe.pmc piplen_tbl. Entries in this table should be sorted alphanumerically by Piping Materials Class.pmc equiv_npd.pmc gskt_tbl. for more information. Any previously created piping materials class data neutral files will not require any revision as a result of this change.pmc 66 .pmc fluid_code.pmc gasket.pmc thickness.pmc pharm. The Sequence= keyword in a piping materials class data neutral file does not require *21 for the revision management date.pmc metric_npd. as specified with the Project Data Manager can be as many as 13 characters. page 222. Sample Files A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\classes. Refer to Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07).

you should create a forms customization file as defined in the Piping Designer. If you do not use the AABBCC code. pipes. 4. character(6) This attribute identifies the commodity item name. character(16) This attribute identifies the Piping Materials Class for the piping commodity. this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary commodity item).2 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) The Piping Commodity Specification Data defines all the components. a Piping Job Specification access name. 2. bolts. You can select the unique options (as defined in CL400) from a form. integer . This can be a PDS commodity item name.2. Option codes 4001 to 4010 are used to specify manual input of bend data for pipe bends. The PDS commodity item names are also used with the delivered Place Component forms. It defines the standard components found in a manufacturers catalog (commonly referred to as off-the-shelf components). 67 . page 270. short . or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. option_code . Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) Information for connect point data is defined in terms of two types of connect points known as green and red connect points. index 1 piping_mater_class . If no option is specified at placement. system_unique_no . commodity_name . a separate set of commodity items must be defined for each Piping Materials Class. 5. Option 2 is reserved as the secondary commodity item. for more information on green and red connect points. The Piping Commodity Specification Data table contains 28 attributes: 1. and gaskets associated with a particular Piping Materials Class. Because the Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping Materials Class. Piping Job Specification This parameter is used as a commodity override in Piping Design. 3. you must define a Commodity Synonym Library for proper communication with the P&ID Task._ _______________ 5. Refer to Connect Point Data. SN 400 This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information on item names. a secondary commodity item. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary commodity item. If you use a different code.

or mm for millimeters) must be declared once in the beginning and each time the default system is changed. The applicable NPD value specified at placement is used to search for the suitable component in the Piping Job Specification. the system verifies that the normal operating temperature. maximum_temp . Any reports created from the Piping Job Specification depict this default value as alphanumeric blanks. It represents the maximum temperature for which this commodity item is acceptable. 6. these entries must have the same option code in order to be considered by the commodity selection in the Place Component command. the maximum temperature value is used as an input to the Gasket Gap Table. short . Proper entry of temperature values in the PJS assists the definition of gap thicknesses when gaskets with different gap thicknesses are used in the same piping materials class. short (NPD Units) (NPD Units) These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point (first size) in NPD units. the normal design temperature._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Option codes 4500 to 4999 are reserved for company practice (user-defined). short . set the maximum temperature equal to or greater than the maximum temperature of the spec limits table for the applicable piping materials class instead of using an undefined value (’-’). and the alternate design temperature are less than this maximum allowable temperature. If no units are given. gcp_end_prep . 8. When you do define the piping commodity. to help determine the gap thickness at bolted joints. If this maximum is exceeded by any of these temperatures. however. the value is automatically interpreted as inches. When a commodity item is retrieved from the Piping Job Specification. If you specify the default value (-9999). 5. For gaskets. To define the highest maximum temperature for the same piping commodity. the system automatically searches for another occurrence of the same commodity item. The default system of units (" for inches. the alternate operating temperature. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in Tables 211 and 212. gcp_from_nom_diam gcp_to_nom_diam . The to value must equal or exceed the from value. no test is performed. The order in which entries of the same piping commodities with different maximum temperature values are made in the PJS (PDtable_202) is not considered by the system. double This attribute is used if the commodity item is temperature dependent. SN 330 68 . 7. a maximum temperature value must be defined for each entry or an error message is displayed. Option codes 5000 to 5999 are used to refer to implied components.

This enables the same table to be used regardless of how the rating is defined. or OT characters. the system will be unable to locate the proper information. GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain a nominal fluid head. #. In the delivered PJS. character(8) Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation for the green connect point. If such rating values consist of alphanumeric characters. xxxx#. #. or OTxxxx. Ratings can be expressed in any of the following formats: CLxxxx. An example is a valve supplied with flanged ends that meets the bolting pattern of ANSI CL150 pressure rating but has pressure carrying characteristics different from those of that ANSI rating. (Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide. Piping Job Specification 69 . gcp_rating . Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and not in terms of rating. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables. you must use a numeric pressure rating (do not use the characters CL. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values This attribute identifies the pressure rating for the green connect point.) 9.399 male terminations 400 . the system strips all alpha characters from the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicable tables. or OT). If the rating in the PJS is expressed in terms of alphabetic characters only.599 female terminations You can define end compatibilities by using the End Preparation Compatibility Table. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for other female ends._ _______________ 2 . However. If any character entries are encountered. the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. the system uses the characters in accessing the data tables. The names of the data tables include all the alphabetic characters included in the PJS. table entries and file names representing the rating exclude the CL. For bolts and gaskets. OTxxxx refers to the rating of a connect point that meets the applicable ANSI or API rating geometrically but not from a pressure carrying standpoint. This parameter exists as alphanumeric data.199 bolted terminations 300 . 5. these rating formats are used in accordance with the following criteria: CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI or API.

A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in the same physical units as nominal piping diameter._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 OTHER can be used to identify a non standard rating value. for more information on this attribute. If a schedule name exceeds the provided field length (for example S-SDR13. To insure compatibility between the PJS. but for which a rating does not apply. (Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations. S-XS and S-XXS. character(8) This attribute identifies the schedule thickness value for the green connect point. MATCH indicates the need to match the thickness of a component to that of the pipe of the same diameter and of option 1. and wall thickness calculations. the component is to be considered infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations. data tables. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables. Decimal points are not included for numbers without decimals.5) it is defined in terms of its wall thickness. 11. short .) In order of preference. A specific schedule such as S-40. page 203 for a more detailed description of the naming conventions for these calculations.xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger Trailing zeroes are not included. NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends would normally require the attribute rating as part of the table name. Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations. — Either stress analysis is not applicable or. schedule and thickness are expressed in terms of: A generic schedule such as S-STD. if applicable.xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inch x if the thickness is an even inch x. An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. thickness is expressed in the form: . SN 576 70 . 10. This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. NREQD is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply: — The thickness value is not required in purchasing the component. page 203. gcp_table_suffix . — Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values. gcp_sch_thk . S-40S and S-80.

In cases such as a concentric reducer or weldolet. The to value must equal or exceed the from value.(hyphen). The commodity code can be defined in one of three ways: 71 ._ _______________ This code-listed attribute is used to further reference the source of the generic dimensional data. rcp_table_suffix . For AMS standards. For AMS standards. rcp_end_prep See gcp_end_prep. short . This attribute is also referred to as the table suffix. you should set these parameters to . A parametric definition is used when connection graphics are required in the model and orthographic drawings. short . 15. commodity_code . it represents the built-in length selection flag (or reihe number) for valves and wall thickness selection flag for pipes and fittings. it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe number) for pipes and fittings. 17. This attribute is the index into the Material Data Tables and the Material Description Library. For DIN standards. rcp_sch_thk See gcp_sch_thk. For DIN standards. It defines the customer’s commodity code (or part number). such as flange data or piping outside diameter data. 13. SN 577 . For a full size component. rcp_rating See gcp_rating. short Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point (second size). character(8) . These values are not necessarily the same as the range in Tables 211 and 212. it represents the table suffix for the red connect point. this value must be less than the corresponding green value. 18. 12. 16. rcp_from_nom_diam rcp_to_nom_diam . character(8) . it represents the table suffix for the green connect point. SN 330 This attribute is used to further reference the dimensional data for a specific component. 14. Piping Job Specification The commodity code is a user-assigned code that together with the NPD and schedule/thickness uniquely defines the component. short . character(16) 5.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Commodity codes with neither an * or a + prefix. modify the values in column 2 and column 7.ddl file as follows: In table 34 (Piping Component Data). In table 212 (Piping Commodity Implies Material Data). When you modify these values. set the specified values to 21. to create a 20-character commodity code. refer to the PD_Report User’s Guide. but you can modify this length if needed. set the character limit to be one more than the number of characters you actually want in the commodity code. To customize the character length. The default length for a commodity code is 16 characters. For large diameter valves (25"+) it is used to build the name of the operator dimension table. This value is specified in two files: design. modify the design. reducing flanges. the commodity code also defines the name of the dry weight table (required for stress analysis).) as the NPD assigned by the system for the implied component can be either the larger or smaller (green or red) NPD of the implying item based on how the system traces the line.e. reducers. Modify the reference. 72 . modify the values in column 2 and column 7. For example. It is not recommended that specification implied (*) items be generated by size change components (i. In table 211 (Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data). In table 50 (Piping/Tubing Data). You must make these modifications before the project is created. Commodity codes prefixed by an *. For more information on defining * implied items. indicate a commodity item (primary component) which has one or more associated implied components as defined in Table 212. This is necessary for you to add a * or + prefix if needed. modify the value in column 18. For valves. modify the value in column 8.ddl and reference. etc. indicate a commodity item that has no associated implied components. indicate a commodity item (primary component) which has one associated implied component (such as a lap joint flange and stub end). Commodity codes prefixed by a +.ddl.ddl file as follows: In table 202 (Piping Commodity Specification Data). modify the value in column 12.

It has various uses depending on the type of commodity item as defined below. If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to "_GKT". this attribute can be used to prioritize gasket entries in the Piping Materials Class. elbows. GATR. The smaller the value the higher the priority. 20. Each model code is classified by Item name option size ranges end preparations ratings Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) The model code includes the definition of the graphic representation of the component in the piping model. For pipe bends. Depending upon the circumstances: One or more model codes can be assigned to to a single Item Name (for example. model_code . For gaskets. or spec valves. and valves. PDS_sort_code . character(6) This field can be used to specify the length (in subunits) for Purchased length pipe. 73 . The system uses the NPD to determine the gasket inside and outside diameters.TBL. 21. GAT. double 5. the gasket outside and inside diameters are generated using the table gasket_commodity_code_GKT. The gasket diameter table is used if the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to _GKT. If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is not "_GKT". A value of 999999 is interpreted as an undefined priority. or to specify the gasket diameter for gaskets. it defines the joint quality factor (E) times 100 to be used during branch reinforcement calculations in those cases where the wall thickness is not calculated. The priority is set with a numeric value (integer or decimal) greater than zero. The same model code can be assigned to different Item Names. Non-numeric values are ignored by MTO and not considered to be a priority selection. spec flanges. the gasket outside diameter is equivalent to the NPD of the rated component and the gasket inside diameter is undefined. character(6) This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends. modifier . miters._ _______________ 19. For pipe. it defines the bend radius of the pipe in terms of the numeric factor by which the nominal diameter of the pipe is to be multiplied to obtain the bend radius. and GATF are all used for 6Q1C01). Piping Job Specification This attribute is used for pipe bends.

ISO. it represents the code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type) which defines the symbol description and the source of the physical data for the valve operator. which ranges from 0 to 5. SN 578 This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. SN 575 This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industry standard. If this value is a negative number (such as -3) the operator is not displayed when placing the component. it defines whether the bolt is a stud bolt (0 or positive). geometric_standard . Numbers 7000-27999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to European piping practices._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 For orifice flanges and drip ring tees. Field Fabricated). short . Numbers 28000-31999 are reserved for specific company practices. or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. The absolute value of this modifier. materials_grade . A value of negative 2 (-2) defines 2 taps. 23. short . short . For reinforcing pads and welds. or machine bolt (negative). Shop Supplied. 24. 22. For valves. and the material if either affects the dimensions of the commodity item. 90 degrees apart. it defines the gasket thickness to be used in procuring the gasket. it defines the number of taps to be provided. For bolts. such as ANSI. fabrication_cat . Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to US piping practices. A value of 1 defines a single tap. short . it defines the length of the component. SN 145 74 . This parameter represents the vendor or industry standard. determines the applicable bolt extension. SN 180 This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. For gaskets. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example. For nippolets and nipples. This is the actual gasket thickness for MTO reports .not the compressed gasket thickness (gasket separation). 25. which is derived from the Piping Materials Class data. it defines whether data about the component is to be derived from tables in the system (0) or from the user by prompting (1). It determines the table to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. A value of 2 defines 2 taps. It is required for those cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric industry standard. or DIN. 180 degrees apart. weight_code .

5. specification. input_form_type . short . Any previously created piping commodity data neutral files will not require any revision as a result of this change. grade-temper. SN 499 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) These code-listed attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in standard note type 499 that apply to this commodity item. Neutral File Format The following is a partial listing of the sample neutral file for the Piping Commodity Specification Data. This data is used in wall thickness calculations. standard_note_no_a . SN 990 This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with the Spec Writer command. It can also be used to access physical data in the Physical Data Library. 26. In the delivered data. and joint efficiency for the component. short . SN 499 . Entries in this table should be sorted alphanumerically by commodity_name. The output is the free. note numbers 200 through 599 are allocated for piping commodity items. The Sequence= keyword in a piping commodity data neutral file does not require the *2 for the piping materials class name. Piping Job Specification 75 . 28. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. short standard_note_no_b ._ _______________ This code-listed attribute identifies the material code. 27.format text which forms the standard note.

pcd pharmk. A set of sample files depicting various options are delivered in the \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory.pcd gasket.pcd piplen_tbl.pcd (one for each piping materials class specified in the classes.pcd fpipe.pcd metric_npd.pcd equiv_npd.pcd 76 .pcd fluid_code.pmc file).pcd gskt_tbl.pcd thickness.pcd pharm._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Sample Files A set of neutral file for US practice are delivered in the files \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\*.pcd pharmf. bend_tbl.

It is sometimes referred to as Item Number. No entries in the PJS database are required for these interactive definitions.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) This database table contains data for a specific specialty item. system_unique_no piping_comp_no . This can be a Piping Job Specification access name or a PDS commodity item name. Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) 1. character(20) This attribute uniquely identifies the specialty component number. option_code .2. short . Piping Job Specification 77 . short . 6. You can also place specialty items interactively in the model by defining the necessary parameters at the time of placement. This parameter is used as a component override in the Piping Designer. gcp_from_nom_diam gcp_to_nom_diam . they are not partitioned by Piping Materials Class. It is used to define those specialty items which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. 7. 4. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing specialty items. The specialty items are defined for the entire project. model_code . Option 2 is reserved as the secondary item. If no option is specified at placement. 2. a secondary item. You can select the unique options (as defined in standard note 400) from a form. the primary item is used. gcp_end_prep . The Piping Specialty Specification Data table contains 26 attributes. or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. SN 330 5._ _______________ 5. short (NPD Units) (NPD Units) These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point. short . character(6) This attribute identifies the piping specialty name. integer . 3. 5. SN 400 This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item.

This value is an intelligent code list. short (NPD Units) (NPD Units) These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point. 12. these values are set to zero. For DIN standards.199 bolted terminations 300 . short . 13. (Refer to the description of pressure rating under Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard formats. 11. it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe number) for pipes and fittings. it represents the table suffix for the connect point.) 9.) 10. rcp_end_prep See gcp_end_prep. 15. character(8) These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. gcp_table_suffix . rcp_sch_thk . For AMS standards.599 female terminations 8. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values 2 . character(8) These attributes identify the schedule or thickness value for the green/red connect point. gcp_sch_thk . short ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 These attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point. short . This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. gcp_rating . SN 330 78 . For a full size component. 14. such as flange data or piping outside diameter data.399 male terminations 400 . SN 576 These code-listed attributes identify the source of the generic dimensional data. This parameter exists as alphanumeric data. rcp_rating See gcp_rating. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for more information on standard formats. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. character(8) . rcp_from_nom_diam rcp_to_nom_diam . character(8) .

It can be used to access physical data in the Graphic Commodity Library. 24. It is required for those cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric industry standard. short . 18. short . 21. short . physical_data_id . or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. standard_note_no_a . modifier . 19. short . SN 180 This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. 16. and miters. geometric_standard . SN 578 This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. double This attribute is used for pipe bends. rcp_table_suffix . short . character(6) This attribute can be used to define an arbitray index to a geometric data table for piping specialties. weight_code . 5. It determines the table to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. Field Fabricated). SN 499 79 . This is an optional input. ISO. specification. It represents the bend radius in terms of the nominal piping diameter. elbows. materials_grade . 20. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example. Shop Supplied._ _______________ See gcp_sch_thk. character(8) Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) This parameter can be used to identify the name of the physical dimension table in the Physical Data Library to be used for this engineered item. grade-temper. PDS_sort_code . SN 577 See gcp_table_suffix 17. SN 145 This code-listed attribute identifies the material code. 22. Piping Job Specification 23. SN 575 This attribute provides a reference to the source of the data (which is usually an industry standard. fabrication_cat . or DIN. and joint efficiency for the component. short . such as ANSI.

The output is the free-format text which forms the standard note.data. SN 990 This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with the Spec Writer command. input_form_type . short . SN 499 These attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in 499 that apply to this specialty item. short ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 25. 80 . standard_note_no_b . note numbers 600 through 799 are allocated for piping specialties. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number.data. 26. Neutral File Format Sample Files A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\specialty. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical specialty items is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharms. In the delivered data.

6. or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. integer Instrument Component Specification Data (204) instrument_comp_no . No entries in the PJS database are required for these interactive definitions. SN 330 81 . gcp_from_nom_diam gcp_to_nom_diam . You can modify the character length for this attribute. short . short ._ _______________ 5. 4. or a PDS commodity item name. Option 2 is reserved as the secondary item. It is used to define the instruments which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. gcp_end_prep . the default option 1 is used. 2. The instruments are defined for the entire project. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing instruments. character(20) This attribute identifies the tag number for the instrument item. 7. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information on item names. 1. If no option is specified at placement. Piping Job Specification (NPD Units) These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound to high bound) for the green connect point. 3. You can also place instruments interactively in the model by defining the necessary parameters at the time of placement. The following data exists in the Instrument table. SN 400 This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. or spec valves.2. spec flanges. model_code . You can select the unique options (defined in a standard note) from a form. system_unique_no . character(6) This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends. The Instrument Component Specification Data table contains 26 attributes. option_code . 5. a secondary item.4 Instrument Component Specification Data (204) This table contains the data for a specific instrument item. This can be a Piping Job Specification access name. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item. short (NPD Units) 5. This parameter is used as a component override in Piping Design. they are not partitioned by PMC. short .

The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. SN 576 These code-listed attributes reference the source of the generic dimensional data. 12. 15. rcp_rating See gcp_rating. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for more information on standard formats. short . gcp_table_suffix . short . short . 14.399 male terminations 400 .) 10. gcp_sch_thk . For AMS standards. This parameter exists as alphanumeric data. 13. (Refer to the description of pressure rating for more information on standard formats. it represents the table suffix for the connect point. 11. rcp_sch_thk See gcp_sch_thk. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values 2 .599 female terminations 8. it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe number) for pipes and fittings. these parameters are set to zero. rcp_end_prep See gcp_end_prep. character(8) These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. character(8) These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 These code-listed attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point. rcp_from_nom_diam rcp_to_nom_diam . For DIN standards.199 bolted terminations 300 . short (NPD Units) (NPD Units) These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound to high bound) for the red connect point. such as flange data or piping outside diameter data. SN 330 82 . character(8) . gcp_rating . . character(8) .) 9. For a full size component.

SN 180 This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. 83 . Piping Job Specification These code-listed attributes provide the index number to standard notes in NL499 that apply to this instrument. It specifies the identification of the symbol description and the source of the physical data for a valve operator.format text which forms the standard note. short . SN 145 This code-listed attribute identifies the material code. SN 577 See gcp_table_suffix. ISO. if applicable. grade-temper. modifier . specification. The output is the free. Field Fabricated). materials_grade . and joint efficiency for the instrument. 25. It can be used to access physical data in the Piping Graphic Commodity Library. 17._ _______________ 16. 23. 20. Shop Supplied. It is required for those cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric industry standard. fabrication_cat . 21. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example. physical_data_id . rcp_table_suffix . short . standard_note_no_a . short . character(6) Instrument Component Specification Data (204) This attribute can be used to define an arbitrary index in the geometric data table for instruments. It determines the table to be used in finding the dry weight of the instrument. double This parameter. or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. or DIN. short . SN 499 . PDS_sort_code . weight_code . short . SN 578 This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the instrument. is used to determine the type of valve operator for instrument valves. 19. SN 575 This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industry standard such as ANSI. 22. short standard_note_no_b . 18. SN 499 5. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. character(8) This parameter can be used to reference the set of physical data from the Physical Data Library to be used for this instrument item. short . geometric_standard . This is an optional input. 24.

note numbers 800 through 999 are allocated for instruments. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical instruments is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharmi. 26. Neutral File Format Sample Files A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\instrment.data. SN 990 This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with the Spec Writer command. short ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 In the delivered data. 84 . input_form_type .data.

These tables define the piping taps which can be added to any of the components included in a piping materials class. Tap tables do not allow a NPD range. For metric NPD units._ _______________ 5. schedule/thickness. enter the units after the value on the first NPD entry. The system uses the information in these tables and the nominal diameter to provide values for rating. The NPD entry in the tap table should be either imperial units or metric units depending on the NPD requirements of the project. For example.5 Tap Properties Data (205) This table contains the tap properties data that is a function of the tap properties table name and the nominal piping diameter. a hole tap may be placed on a cap to allow the subsequent placement of a reducing component such as a flatolet. Hole taps that permit the venting or draining of a piping and/or instrument component.2. The diameter of this component tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the desired connection. For example. such as 0.375. For example: ! Diam 10mm 20 Opt 1 691 Rating Prp 591 591 SC/Th NREQD NREQD Tap Code E$37591XXX E$37581XXX Tap Properties Data (205) The Tap Properties Data table contains 8 attributes. and instrument components. there must be an individual entry for each tap diameter. end preparation. and tap code. a socketwelded component tap may be placed on a gate valve to represent a socketwelded connection furnished by the valve manufacturer. the diameter of this no-hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part on which placed. piping components. a hole tap can be placed on an elbow downstream of a relief valve. rather than a hole. Component taps that represent a tap connection. A hole tap can also be placed on a blind flange to allow the placement of plain piping. For imperial units. The following kinds of taps may be defined in this table: No-hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of a pipe support trunnion. a no-hole tap may be placed on an elbow or tee to allow the subsequent placement of a pipe trunnion for a pipe support. The software will provide a default unit of inches when the value is loaded into the project. the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part on which placed. Piping Job Specification 85 . the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the plain piping. For example. the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the desired drain hole. For example. integer 5. system_unique_no . enter the specified NPD. Hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of piping. 1.

character(8) This attribute exists as alphanumeric data. this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary item). short . The combination of the tap properties table name. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard formats. 6. a thickness value.) 7. character(10) This optional attribute can be used to access the Material Description Library for the tap’s material description addendum. 86 . or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. end_preparation . nominal_piping_dia . option_code . The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. the tap NPD. a secondary item. short . 5. this text can be appended to either the short or long descriptions of the component to which the tap applies. must be unique. another range as being butt welded termination types. rating . 4. This parameter is used as a component override in Piping Design. etc. SN 400 This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. short This attribute defines the value for the nominal tap diameter. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item. character(8) This attribute identifies the generic or specific schedule. tap_material_code . These tables use the following naming conventions: first character: C next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique. The system recognizes a certain range of values as being flanged termination types. SN 330 This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation. tap_table_name . 3._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2. including material descriptions for commodity items. sched_thick . or a calculation. If no option is specified at placement.) 8. It must be a unique reference to the Material Description Library. In reporting or isometric extraction. and the tap option. character(6) This attribute identifies the name of the Tap Properties Data Table. (Refer to the description of pressure rating for Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard formats.

data.75 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$75421064 0.375 691 591 NREQD E$37591XXX > 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$5421064 1. for more information on the tap commodity code.75 691 591 NREQD E$75591XXX > 1 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E001421064 1 691 591 NREQD E001591XXX > 1.5 691 591 NREQD E1$5591XXX > 2 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E002421064 2 691 591 NREQD E002591XXX 2. Piping Job Specification 87 .25 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$2421064 1._ _______________ This attribute is also referred to as the Tap Code. Tap Properties Data (205) Neutral File Format Double_Spacing Sequence= 3 4 6 5 7 ! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW 8 Rev=2 Date=12-May-1988 Table= C001 ! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps ! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code 0. page 367. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical tap properties is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_tap.5 691 591 NREQD E2$5591XXX > 3 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E003421064 3 691 591 NREQD E003591XXX 3.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064 0. Refer to the listing of the tap descriptions in the Short Material Description Library.5 691 591 NREQD E3$5591XXX > 4 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E004421064 4 691 591 NREQD E004591XXX 5 691 591 NREQD E005591XXX 6 691 591 NREQD E006591XXX 8 691 591 NREQD E008591XXX 10 691 591 NREQD E010591XXX 12 691 591 NREQD E012591XXX 14 691 591 NREQD E014591XXX 16 691 591 NREQD E016591XXX 18 691 591 NREQD E018591XXX 20 691 591 NREQD E020591XXX 24 691 591 NREQD E024591XXX 26 691 591 NREQD E026591XXX 28 691 591 NREQD E028591XXX 30 691 591 NREQD E030591XXX 32 691 591 NREQD E032591XXX 34 691 591 NREQD E034591XXX 36 691 591 NREQD E036591XXX 42 691 591 NREQD E042591XXX 48 691 591 NREQD E048591XXX Sample Files A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\taps.data.5 691 591 NREQD E$50591XXX > 0.25 691 591 NREQD E1$2591XXX > 1. 5.

A generic schedule such as S-STD. S-60 and S-80. character(16) This parameter identifies the customer’s commodity code (or part number). A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in the same physical units as nominal piping diameter. A specific schedule such as S-40.2. gcp_sch_thk rcp_sch_thk ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. nominal piping diameter. 6. This table is used for miscellaneous batch reporting. and interfaces to material control. There are multiple occurrences for a specific commodity code and a specific pair of green and red nominal piping diameters in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table because schedule/thickness is not included in the commodity code. stress analysis. and schedule/thickness. S-XS and S-XXS. 88 .6 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on the commodity code. short These coded attributes identify the nominal piping diameter for the green/red connect point in NPD Units. 1. short . This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. 4. You can modify the character length for this attribute. 5. The Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table contains 10 attributes. stress analysis is not applicable. NREQD is used if the thickness value is not required in purchasing the component. gcp_nom_diam rcp_nom_diam . integer sys_commodity_code . 2. character(8) . empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values. character(8) These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point. If the schedule name exceeds the provided field length it is defined in terms of its wall thickness. system_unique_no . 3. such as construction cost reports and requisition orders. and isometric drawing extraction.

8. 89 . character(16) . 10. manhours . 9. Neutral File Format A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pcd_size. weld_weight ._ _______________ An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. index 1 This attribute identifies the customer’s commodity code or vendor’s part number. This form of data retrieval is used during the MTO report creation process. commodity_code . double Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) This parameter represents the total weld required at all welded ends of the commodity item. double This attribute identifies the unit manhours associated with the commodity item.data. It is not required for the customer’s commodity code. unit_price . Piping Job Specification Data Retrieval The data retrieval from the Size-Dependent Data table involves data for a commodity item that is dependent upon nominal piping diameter and schedule/thickness. 5. double This attribute identifies the unit price (materials cost) for the commodity item. 7. if the customer’s commodity code is not dependent upon nominal piping diameter or thickness.

first size NPD red ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 inputs (search criteria) pointer to the commodity item dependent data NPD green .second size schedule/thickness .unit price labor data .unit manhours 90 .green connect point schedule/thickness .red connect point outputs customer’s commodity code or vendor’s part number weld data price data (materials cost) .

NPD is defined as a special coded number with the following formula. The Piping Commodity Implies Material Data table contains 10 attributes. for a specific commodity item. 1. you must assign a new commodity code to the 11" valve. or gaskets) which are generated automatically by the system. 3. It is also used for reporting the implied components of a commodity item (for example. nuts. Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) A unique commodity code must be defined for each commodity definition.2. bolts. 4. 2. cap screws). It is reserved for spec implied material. Piping Job Specification 91 . Refer to the Report Manager (PD_Report) User’s Guide for more information on implied items. the coded number equals the size (in millimeters) for English Units. You can modify the character length for this attribute. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in the Piping Job Specification. the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus 5000. 5. system_unique_no . integer sys_commodity_code . for Metric units. gcp_from_nom_diam gcp_to_nom_diam . This data is used strictly for generating implied material for MTO reporting and material control. character(16) This parameter identifies the customer’s commodity code (or part number)._ _______________ 5. such as caps or stubs.7 The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on both the Piping Commodity Library code and nominal piping diameter range. short . short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the green connect point in NPD units. The entries in this tables should not be confused with mating implied items (such as welds. if it is not dependent upon nominal piping diameter. but you want a different description for an 11" gate valve. For example. coded number = 32*diameter + 5000 (in) This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mm increments for metric units. if a commodity code is defined for gate valves from 2" to 14". and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" increments for the English System of Units.

rcp_from_nom_diam rcp_to_nom_diam . It is used to generate an MTO line item as a result of a piping commodity item in the Piping Design model. short This code-listed attribute provides index numbers to standard notes in CL499 that apply to this implied material. short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the red connect point in NPD units. Field Fabricated). 92 . Shop Supplied. quantity . short This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. commodity_code ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. 8. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example. fabrication_cat . 6. For a full size component. 7. short . 9. 10. these parameters should be set to ’-’. The implied material is generated by accessing the Piping Commodity Library . standard_note_no . index 1 This attribute identifies the Piping Commodity code of the implied material. character(16) . These values are not necessarily the same as the range in the Piping Job Specification.not by accessing the Piping Design database. double This attribute identifies the quantity of the implied material.

93 . Piping Job Specification Data Retrieval Data retrieval from the Implied Material Data table involves implied material data for a commodity item that is dependent on nominal piping diameter range.data.data. This form of data retrieval is used during the MTO Report Creation process and Material Control. 5. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical gasket data is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_212._ _______________ Neutral File Format Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) Sample Files A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\implied.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 inputs (search criteria) pointer to the commodity item dependent data outputs Commodity code of the implied material Quantity of the implied material Fabrication category of the implied material Standard note for the implied material 94 .

If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of model code.2. the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component’s commodity name in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data. Piping Job Specification The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions. 5. For piping specialties and instrument components. or instrument component (excluding pipes) on an insulated line. insulation purpose. integer 95 . green nominal piping diameter of the component (range search) red nominal piping diameter of the component (range search) heat tracing requirements (range search) insulation purpose (range search) normal operating temperature (range search) For piping commodities. and normal operating temperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment that is associated with the first connect point of the applicable component. the insulation thickness will be included in the component’s interference envelope. piping specialty. system_unique_no . Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) For each piping component. the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the component’s interference envelope. 1.8 Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) The Component Insulation Exclusion Data is used to completely or partially exclude the insulation of components on insulated lines with respect to interference checking._ _______________ 5. the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the component’s interference envelope. the insulation thickness will be included in the component’s interference envelope. the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component’s model code using the same data. The Component Insulation Exclusion Data table contains 13 attributes. If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions. Otherwise. Otherwise. If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions. the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the component’s interference envelope. the Piping Envelope Builder will search the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table on the basis of the following data to determine whether or not insulation should be completely excluded from that component’s interference envelope. the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component’s model code in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data.

model_code . 7. character(6) This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3). For instruments. 5. SN 200 . this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Specialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3). short . commodity_name . rcp_npd_from rcp_npd_to . short insul_purpose_to . SN 200 These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from code list set 200. short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. heat_tracing_from heat_tracing_to . 96 . A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements are not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. gcp_npd_from gcp_npd_to . 3. If this attribute is blank. 8. short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19). Heat Tracing Requirements. SN 220 These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220. insul_purpose_from . this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Instrument Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3). 11. 9. 6. short . For piping specialties. SN 220 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2. 4. short . short . Insulation Purpose. the system will search for a match by model code. short . character(6) For piping commodities. For full size components use a dash (-) for these attributes. 10.

double nor_oper_temp_to . alternate operating temperature._ _______________ A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process.data. Piping Job Specification 97 . 12. double Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound) for the component or instrument. Neutral File Format ! DEFINE COMPONENT INSULATION EXCLUSION DATA Single_Spacing Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 6Q2C76 I15AS REDE 4 4 4 12 12 12 2 10 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 150 150 150 200 200 200 A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\component. Note that normal design temperature. 13. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 5. nor_oper_temp_from . and alternate design temperature are not considered. The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for the maximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table.

The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements. the required modification to the interference parametric for the weldneck flange (FWN) is as follows: !FLANGE .2. as described in Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231). The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data in this table for each bolted end of each piping component or instrument component on an insulated line that are determined to be insulated. The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data on the basis of the following data to determine whether or not insulation should be excluded from the flange outside diameter of that bolted end of the component. This is an optional data table. The Piping Eden modules for the interference envelopes that are to consider the partial exclusion of insulation from the flange outside diameter of a bolted end.Interference Module Interference_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’F1A’ Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR ) Thickness_1 Thickness_2 !Original Line ! Facing_OD_1 !Modified Line Facing_OD_1 Facing_OD_2 = Thickness_1 + CP_Offset_1 = Thickness_2 + CP_Offset_2 = Facing_OD_1 + Insulation * 2 = Facing_OD_1 + Insulation_1 * 2 = Facing_OD_2 + Insulation * 2 98 . and normal operating temperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment associated with the first connect point of the applicable component. if no data is defined for this table the Piping Envelope builder will continue to function as it has in previous releases of PDS. If you do not change any or all of the Piping Eden modules for the interference envelopes. Otherwise.9 Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data provides for partial exclusion of flange insulation thickness from the generation of interference envelopes. when applicable. this table will have no impact and the interference envelopes will include complete insulation. page 95. nominal piping diameter of the bolted end (range search) heat tracing requirements (range search) insulation purpose (range search) normal operating temperature (range search) If matching criteria is found in the exclusion table for these conditions. the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the flange outside diameter of the bolted end of that component’s interference envelope. For example. The system only searches for components that passed the component insulation exclusion test. insulation purpose._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. the insulation thickness will be included in the component’s interference envelope. must be revised to accommodate this option.

SN 200 . integer . double nor_oper_temp_to . Heat Tracing Requirements. Piping Job Specification These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound) for the bolted end of the component or instrument. short insul_purpose_to . 2. short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the bolted end of the component or instrument in NPD units. 7. 1. Insulation Purpose. short . SN 220 . A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. short . insul_purpose_from . 3. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements are not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. Facing_OD_1 ) Call Draw_Cylinder ( Thickness_2._ _______________ Call Draw_Cylinder ( Thickness_1. short . 9. system_unique_no bolted_npd_from bolted_npd_to . A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 4. short . double 5. heat_tracing_from heat_tracing_to . Facing_OD_2 ) RETURN END Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data table has 9 attributes. SN 220 These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220. 5. alternate operating temperature. The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for the maximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table. 6. 8. nor_oper_temp_from . Note that normal design temperature. SN 200 These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from code list set 200. and alternate design temperature are not considered. 99 .

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002

Neutral File Format
! DEFINE FLANGE INSULATION EXCLUSION DATA Single_Spacing Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 4 4 12 12 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 150 150 150 200 200 200

100

_ _______________
5.2.10 Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233)
The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data can be used to completely or partially exclude construction tolerance from the generation of interference envelopes. This feature only applies to Piping vs. Piping construction tolerances.

Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233)

This is an optional data table; if no data is defined for this table the Piping Envelope builder will continue to function as it has in previous releases of PDS. For each piping or instrument component, excluding pipes, the Piping Envelope Builder searches Table 233 on the basis of the following data to determine whether the Piping versus Piping construction tolerance should be excluded from that component’s interference envelope. green NPD of the component (range search) red NPD of the component (range search) For piping commodities, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component’s commodity name in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data. If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the component’s interference envelope. If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions, the Piping Envelope Builder will search for the component’s model code using the same data. If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of the model code, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the component’s interference envelope. Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in the component’s interference envelope. For piping specialties and instrument components, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component’s model code in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the component’s interference envelope. Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in the component’s interference envelope.

5. Piping Job Specification

101

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data table has 7 attributes. 1. 2. system_unique_no commodity_name , integer , character(6) This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3). If this attribute is blank, the system will search for a match by model code. 3. model_code , character(6)

For piping commodities, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19). For piping specialties, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Specialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3). For instruments, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Instrument Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3). 4. 5. gcp_npd_from gcp_npd_to , short , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. 6. 7. rcp_npd_from rcp_npd_to , short , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. For full size components use a dash (-) for these attributes.

Neutral File Format
! PIPING CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCE EXCLUSION DATA Single_Spacing Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 6Q2C76 I15AS REDE 4 4 4 12 12 12 2 10

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\constol.data.

102

_ _______________
5.3 Spec Writer
This command provides a forms interface for interactively creating, revising, and managing the following specification data. This interface provides more simplicity and flexibility to a beginner or a casual user, than defining specs with their respective neutral files: Piping Materials Class Data (PDtable_201) Piping Commodity Specification Data (PDtable_202) Piping Specialty Specification Data (PDtable_203) Instrument Specification Data (PDtable_204) Tap Properties Data (PDtable_205) Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (PDtable_212)

Spec Writer

Features
5. Piping Job Specification
The Spec Writer provides the following general features: User-specified options for customizing the input of data (RDB_options). A direct interface to the unapproved Specification Material Reference Database. On-line validation for the existence of a material description, once the commodity code (or component number) has been defined.

103

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Optional on-line Table Checker validation using pre-defined Table Checker reports. Automated selections from the Standard Note Library for code-listed data. The approved Standard Note Library must have been defined to include the correct data for use in the Material Reference Database. Selectable list of acceptable model codes for a specified commodity name. Context-sensitive user interface. The form options will vary depending on the item being defined. For example, the creation (and revision) of specification data for bolts and gaskets, will display only those inputs relevant for bolts or gaskets. Context-sensitive on-line help that is linked to the Component Data Reference Guide and the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide.

104

_ _______________
5.3.1 RDB Options File
The RDB Options File allows you to customize the data input operations for the Interactive Spec Writer. You should define an RDB options list, named RDB_options in the project directory. A default RDB options list is included in the PD_Data sample/data/ directory.
! RDB_options ! ! general items = three main toggles ! SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF ! ! PDtable_201 items ! SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, L NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, D BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, B TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = DATABASE GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, T MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, M FLUID_CODE = VALUE MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = LIST !BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = LIST, BENDEF !PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = LIST, PIPLEN STANDARD_NOTE = LIST PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION ! ! PDtable_202 items ! MODEL_CODE = LIST VALVE_OPERATOR = LIST ! ! COMMODITY_NAME<===>MODEL_CODES ! ! Pipe/Tube PIPING = PIPE, TUBE ! ! Valves (6Q1C) ! 6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR 6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB 6Q1C03 = GATCON 6Q1C04 = GATBL ! ! Generic 3-way 6Q1C05 = BAL3P, GLO3W, PLU3W, SLI3W, 3WRV1 ! 6Q1C06 = BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP 6Q1C08 = BAL3P 6Q1C11 = GLOSP, GLO, GLOF, GLOR 6Q1C12 = GLOASP, GLOA 6Q1C13 = GLO3W 6Q1C14 = GLOY, GLOYF, GLOYR 6Q1C16 = PLUSP, PLU, PLUVP, PLUFB, PLUF, PLUR 6Q1C18 = PLU3W 6Q1C19 = PLU4W 6Q1C22 = NEE 6Q1C26 = BFYLP, BFYHP 6Q1C30 = DIA, DIASP, DIAPL, DIAGL 6Q1C32 = KNF 6Q1C33 = SLI 6Q1C34 = SLI3W 6Q1C37 = CKALSP, CKAL, CKST, BDA, HOSA 6Q1C38 = CKLSP, CKSSP, CKL, CKLF, CKLR, CKS, CKSF, CKSR, CKSY, CKLRY 6Q1C39 = CKWF, CKWFSP 6Q1C40 = CKALSP, CKAL 6Q1C41 = CKST 6Q1C42 = CKAST 6Q1C43 = CKYST

RDB Options File

5. Piping Job Specification

105

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002
6Q1C50 = CKBP 6Q1C51 = CKAR 6Q1C53 = BDA 6Q1C54 = BDY 6Q1C56 = PIN 6Q1C57 = FLO 6Q1C58 = FOOT 6Q1C62 = TKDR 6Q1C69 = DEL 6Q1C72 = HOS 6Q1C73 = HOSA ! ! Generic Vent/Drain Valve 6Q1C76 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP ! ! Generic Instrument Root Valve 6Q1C80 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP ! 6Q1C81 = 3WRV1 6Q1C82 = 4WRV1 ! ! On-line Fittings (6P2C) and In-line Fittings (6Q2C) ! 6Q2C01 = FWN, FLWN, FSO, FL, FPL, FSSSO, FSSL, FSSPL, FLSSO, FLSL, FFIL, FS, FSW, FTHD, FCP 6Q2C03 = FRWN, FRSO, FRPL, FRS, FRSW, FRTHD 6Q2C04 = FEWN 6Q2C06 = FOWNA, FOWNAW, FOWNB, FOWNBW, FOSOA, FOSOAW, FOSOB, FOSOBW, FOSWA, FOSWAW, FOSWB, FOSWBW, FOTHDA 6Q2C08 = FBLD 6Q2C10 = BLSPO 6Q2C11 = BLSPC 6Q2C12 = BDISC 6Q2C13 = BLPAD 6Q2C14 = T1SPA, T2SPA1 6Q2C15 = BLSPA, OPSPA ! ! Generic End 6Q2C16 = FBLD, HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21, PLUG, CAPBV, CAPOT ! 6Q2C17 = HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21 6Q2C19 = PLUG 6Q2C21 = CAPBV, CAPOT ! ! Generic Conentric Diameter Change 6Q2C23 = REDC, SWGC, CPLR, INSR1, INSR2 ! ! Generic Eccentric Diameter Change 6Q2C24 = REDE, SWGE ! 6Q2C25 = CPL 6Q2C26 = CPLH 6Q2C27 = REDC 6Q2C28 = REDE 6Q2C32 = CPLR 6Q2C35 = SWGC 6Q2C36 = SWGE 6Q2C39 = UN 6Q2C40 = UNO 6Q2C41 = UND 6Q2C43 = HC 6Q2C44 = BUSH 6Q2C46 = INSR1, INSR2 6Q2C47 = PIPB, PIPB2 6Q2C49 = E5 6Q2C51 = E11 6Q2C53 = E22 ! ! Generic <45 Degree Direction Change 6Q2C55 = E5, E11, E22, E45TLR, PIPB, PIPB2 ! ! Generic 45 Degree Direction Change 6Q2C56 = E45LR, E45, PIPB, PIPB2, E45LT, E453D, E45T3D, E45U, E45ST, E45S, E45L, M451, M452 ! 6Q2C57 = E45 6Q2C59 = E45LR, E45TLR 6Q2C60 = E45LT 6Q2C61 = E453D, E45T3D 6Q2C63 = E45U 6Q2C65 = E45ST

106

_ _______________

RDB Options File

6Q2C66 = E45S 6Q2C68 = E45L 6Q2C73 = E60 ! ! Generic 45-90 Degree Direction Change 6Q2C75 = E90TLR, PIPB, PIPB2 ! ! Generic 90 Degree Direction Change 6Q2C76 = E90LR, E90, E90SR, E90LT, E90R, E903D, E903T3D, E90U, E90ST, E90RST, E90S, E90L, PIPB, PIPB2, E90LT, M901, M902, M903, M9 ! 6Q2C77 = E90 6Q2C79 = E90SR 6Q2C80 = E90LR, E90TLR 6Q2C82 = E90LT 6Q2C84 = E90R 6Q2C86 = E903D, E903T3D 6Q2C88 = E90U 6Q2C90 = E90ST 6Q2C91 = E90RST 6Q2C93 = E90S 6Q2C94 = E90L ! ! On-line Fittings (6P3C) and In-line Fittings (6Q3C) ! 6Q3C01 = R180 6Q3C03 = R180SR 6Q3C05 = R180LR 6Q3C07 = R180CL 6Q3C08 = R180MD 6Q3C09 = R180OP 6Q3C14 = M1, M2, M3, M4 6Q3C16 = M451, M452 6Q3C18 = M901, M902, M903, M904 6Q3C22 = T, TBT 6Q3C24 = TRB, TRBT 6Q3C25 = TRRB 6Q3C27 = TUOR 6Q3C28 = TUOB 6Q3C31 = TST 6Q3C34 = TRI 6Q3C36 = TDRA, TDRAW, TDRB, TDRBW 6Q3C38 = TBA 6Q3C45 = Y 6Q3C47 = L 6Q3C49 = LRB 6Q3C50 = LRRB 6Q3C52 = S90YB 6Q3C53 = S90YRB 6Q3C54 = L90YB 6Q3C55 = L90YRB 6Q3C60 = X 6Q3C62 = XRB 6Q3C63 = XRRB 6Q3C64 = XBA 6Q3C70 = SAD 6Q3C72 = SWOL 6Q3C73 = WOL 6Q3C74 = SOL 6Q3C75 = TOL 6Q3C76 = NOL 6Q3C77 = EOLLR, EOLSR 6Q3C78 = LOL 6Q3C79 = FOLHC 6Q3C80 = RPAD, RPAD2 6Q3C82 = RWELD, RWELD2 6Q3C84 = BWELD, BWELD2, BWELD3 6Q3C88 = NIP 6Q3C89 = NIPIL !6Q3C95 = GASKET !6Q3C97 = STUD !6Q3C98 = NUT ! ! ! VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST ! ! Handwheels !

5. Piping Job Specification

107

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002
OP_0 = None Required OP_3 = Handwheel OP_4 = Handwheel if GCP>RCP OP_5 = Handwheel, inclined OP_9 = Wrench, short OP_11 = Wrench, long OP_17 = Lever OP_19 = T-handle, short OP_21 = T-handle, long OP_25 = Handwheel, special OP_27 = Wrench, special OP_29 = Gear, top mounted handwheel OP_31 = Gear, top mounted inclined handwheel OP_33 = Gear, side mounted handwheel OP_35 = Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel OP_39 = Lever, quick-action OP_40 = Post indicator ! ! Actuators ! OP_411 = Diaphragm, type 1 OP_412 = Diaphragm, type 2 OP_413 = Diaphragm, type 3 OP_431 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 1 OP_432 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 2 OP_433 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 3 OP_451 = Regulator type 1 OP_452 = Regulator type 2 OP_453 = Regulator type 3 OP_491 = Single acting cylinder type 1 OP_492 = Single acting cylinder type 2 OP_493 = Single acting cylinder type 3 OP_511 = Doulble acting cylinder type 1 OP_512 = Doulble acting cylinder type 2 OP_513 = Doulble acting cylinder type 3 OP_531 = Pilot operated cylinder type 1 OP_532 = Pilot operated cylinder type 2 OP_533 = Pilot operated cylinder type 3 OP_534 = Pilot operated cylinder type 4 OP_571 = Motor type 1 OP_572 = Motor type 2 OP_573 = Motor type 3 OP_574 = Motor type 4 OP_611 = Digital type 1 OP_651 = Electro-hydraulic type 1 OP_652 = Electro-hydraulic type 2 OP_811 = Weight type 1 OP_851 = Manual type 1 OP_852 = Manual type 2 OP_853 = Manual type 3 OP_854 = Manual type 4 OP_891 = Spring type 1 END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST

You can use the following keywords to customize the settings in the RDB options file.

General Items
For piping commodities, you can verify that a material description has been defined in the Short Material Description Library and/or the Long Material Description Library. For piping specialties and instruments, you can verify that a material description has been defined in the Specialty Material Description Library. SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF — If set to ON, the short material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code.

108

_ _______________
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF. LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF — If set to ON, the long material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF. SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF — If set to ON, the specialty material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF.

RDB Options File

PDtable_201 items
SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Service Limits Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use L for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use D for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Branch Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use B for the delivered tables.) The list is filtered to only include the unique tables, where the branch angle is 90 degrees. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. You should not assign the same Branch Table to be used in two different piping materials classes if, for example, one allows intersections at both 45 degrees and 90 degrees, and the other only allows 90 degree intersections. The Reference Data Manager will not detect this problem.

5. Piping Job Specification

TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = KEYIN or DATABASE — If set to DATABASE, a list of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined in PDtable_205 of the unapproved Material Reference Database) is displayed.

109

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Gasket Separation Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use G for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. When listing the Gasket Separation Tables, the list of tables is restricted to unique names, excluding the underbar (_) and the pressure rating value that follows. In other words, the list of Gasket Separation Tables will not include the pressure rating (G001 instead of G001_1500). THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use T for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Materials Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use M for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. FLUID_CODE = VALUE — Specify a default fluid code value to be used for the piping materials class. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is that you do not intend to define this data, unless you specify the name of a Fluid Code Table. FLUID_CODE_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Fluid Code Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix (such as FC) to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of materials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the value.

110

_ _______________
If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Pipe Length Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name.

RDB Options File

BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables.

STANDARD_NOTE = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of standard notes (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode will to key in the value of the standard note.

PDtable_202 items
MODEL_CODE = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of acceptable model codes (determined by the commodity name) is displayed. (See keyword COMMODITY_NAME <===> MODEL_CODES for more information.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of acceptable model codes is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value. VALVE_OPERATOR = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file) is displayed. (See keyword VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST for more information.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of valve operator types is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value. PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION — This keyword is used if you require that all (or some) orifice flanges have two taps oriented 90 degrees apart. By default orifice taps are oriented 180 degrees apart on the outside diameter of the flange. If this keyword is not included in the RDB options list, the relative tap orientation for two taps will always be 180 degrees. COMMODITY_NAME <===> MODEL_CODES — This keyword precedes the list of associations between commodity names and their acceptable model codes. This list must be defined to use the LIST option for MODEL_CODE.

5. Piping Job Specification

111

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The association between a commodity name and the acceptable model codes for that commodity name is defined as follows. <commodity_name> = <model_code_A>,<model_code_B>, ... 6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR 6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB You can define as many as 50 model codes, separated by a comma, for each commodity name. The delivered RDB options list includes a list of acceptable model codes for the reference data provided with PDS. VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST — This keyword precedes the list of valve operator types and their corresponding descriptions. The list of valve operator types is defined as follows. <valve operator type> = <description> OP_0 = None Required OP_3 = Handwheel The delivered RDB options file includes a list of valve operator types for the reference data provided with PDS. The description is for information only to aid the user in selecting the proper valve operator type. END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST — This keyword must follow the valve operator list as a delimiter.

112

2 Piping Materials Class Data Command The Piping Materials Class Data command can be used to create a piping materials class definition in Table 201 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing piping materials class definition. Piping Materials Class Data Command Options Create — The system activates the Create Piping Materials Class Data form._ _______________ 5.3. Revise By Keyin — The system activates the Revise Piping Materials Class Data form. 5. Piping Job Specification 113 . The system activates the Revise Piping Materials Class Data form with the data for the selected piping materials class. Revise By List — Select the piping materials class to be revised from the displayed list of piping materials classes (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference Database) and select Accept. Key in the name of the piping materials class to revise in the Piping Materials Class field.

1 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data The Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data form is used to create or modity the definition of a piping materials class. When creating a new definition. Refer to Piping Materials Class Data (201). page 105 for information on defining list options for the applicable input fields. The system verifies that specified piping materials class does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database. Once you define a valid input for a mandatory field the system will drop the highlight for that field. page 62 for more information on the attributes for the Piping Materials Class Data table (201). Refer to RDB Options File. Gasket Separation (keyin) — Key in the value for the gasket separation for this piping materials class. Mandatory Input Fields Piping Materials Class (keyin) — Key in up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the piping materials class to be defined._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. Field Descriptions The system highlights the mandatory input fields (those that must be specified).3.2. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields. — OR — 114 .

The Reference Data Manager will detect this problem. Optional Data . one allows intersections at both 45 degrees and 90 degrees. 115 . Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data Diameter (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Nominal Piping Diameter Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). since all specification data within the Material Reference Database is approved in one operation. The unapproved tap properties data is referenced. Tap Data (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Tap Properties Data Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined in PDtable_205 of the unapproved Material Reference Database). Branch Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Branch Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Branch Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). for example.3-1987 ANSI B31. where the schedule or thickness is not explicitly defined in the piping materials class or in a wall thickness table.Wall Thickness This data is required for piping commodities. and the other only allows 90 degree intersections. Corrosion Allowance (keyin) — Key in a numeric value. Service Limits (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Service Limits Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Service Limits Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). The list of Gasket Separation Tables will exclude the pressure rating value. where the branch angle is 90 degrees.1a-1986 EL01 EJ01 5. Piping Job Specification The corresponding name for the thickness equation is loaded into the Piping Materials Class Data Table. Thickness Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Thickness Data Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). The list will only include the unique tables._ _______________ Gasket Table (keyin or list) — Key in the table name or select from the list of tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). You should not assign the same Branch Table to be used in two different piping materials classes if. ANSI B31. Thickness Equation (list) — Select one of the displayed wall thickness equations. if wall thickness calculations are to be used.

Materials of Construction (keyin) — Key in upt to six alphanumeric characters. Optional Data The following data is not not required and can be defined or not defined based on your company practices. The current date will not be entered automatically. Note that the Reference Data Manager creates and maintains a separate revision management date on the basis of the current date and time which can be used in the reporting of reference data. Pipe Length Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Pipe Length Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Pipe Length Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library)._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Materials Data Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Materials Data Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Materials Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). — OR — Fluid Code Table (keyin list) — Key in the name of the Fluid Code Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Fluid Code Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Materials Description (keyin or list) — Key in the numeric value for the materials description in the Standard Note Library for this piping materials class or select from the list of materials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library). Fluid Code (keyin list) — Define a default fluid code to be used for the piping materials class. 116 . Standard Note Number (keyin or list) — Key in the note number in the Standard Note Library for this piping materials class or select from the list of standard notes (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library). Bend Deflect Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Bend Deflection Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Revision (keyin) — Key in up to two alphanumeric characters for the revision number. Revision Date (keyin) — Key in up to ten alphanumeric characters for the date.

Copy — You can use the Copy option in conjunction with the Revise options as a cut-and-paste feature. Revise By Keyin — Key in the name of the piping materials class for the commodity item to be modified.These are active fields that. then select Accept. including the piping commodity specification data or selectively copy specific commodities.3 Piping Commodity Data Command The Piping Commodity Data command can be used to create a piping commodity definition in Table 202 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping commodity definition. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. when selected. This command requires that both the source piping materials class data and the destination piping materials class have been created.Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. Select From List . The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping commodity. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping commodity. Revise By List — Select the piping materials class for the commodity item to be revised from the displayed list of piping materials classes and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept._ _______________ 5. 5. Select the option for the items to be copied. 117 . display the piping materials class list. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. Source and Destination Piping Materials Class . Then select the piping commodity to be copied from the list of all piping commodities within the source piping materials class. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept.3. The system activates the Create Piping Commodity Specification Data form. Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list. You can copy a complete piping materials class. Piping Commodity Data Command Options Create — Select the Piping Materials Class for the commodity item to be created from the list of piping materials classes (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference Database) and select Accept.This option copies the specification data for all piping commodities within the selected source piping materials class to the specified destination piping materials class. Piping Job Specification Select All .

Long Commodity Material Description ON/OFF — You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Long Material Description Library. page 128. Bolts are recognized on the basis of the bolt commodity name._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Select Gaskets . Short Commodity Material Description ON/OFF — You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Short Material Description Library. Select Bolts . Gaskets are recognized on the basis of the gasket commodity name.Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. 118 . as specified through the Project Data Manager. the system activates the Add Entry to Material Description Library form. The system copies the specification data for all bolts within the source piping materials class to the destination piping materials class. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. See Add Entry to Material Description Library. The system copies the specification data for all gaskets within the source piping materials class to the destination piping materials class. as specified through the Project Data Manager. If the Material Description toggle is set to ON and no corresponding material description is found for a specified commodity code. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept.Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept.

Piping Job Specification The system will modify the form fields to reflect the data that is specific to that type of component. Refer to Piping Commodity Specification Data (202). Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data Field Descriptions Refer to RDB Options File. When creating a new definition.3. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields._ _______________ 5. Where possible. the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. for information on defining options for the applicable input fields. 119 . page 105. page 67.3.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form is used to create or modify the definition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. The system stores the commodity type as the input_form_type within the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table of the Material Reference Database. For example. General Fittings Pipe Bends Orifice Flanges Branch Nipples Branch Reinforcement Valves Piping Tubing Gaskets Bolts Nuts 5. the system verifies that the specified value is valid for the applicable piping materials class. Commodity Type — This field can be used to select the type of piping commodity data to be created based on the settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note Library. for information on the attributes for the Piping Commodity Specification Data table. NPD values are checked against the associated diameters table in the approved Piping Job Spec Table Library.

First Size (keyin) End Preparation . Commodity Code (keyin) — Key in the commodity code for the piping commodity. Table Suffix . When size-dependent commodity codes are required. For implied data (project-wide or class-specific). page 126 for information on class-specific implied data. Model Code (keyin or list) — Attribute 19.First Size (list) Pressure Rating . Refer to Implied Data. Branch Reinforcement._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Any input fields that are not used for a specific piping commodity type will be deactivated. Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) fabrication category (list) 120 . Key in the model code or select the model code from a list of acceptable model codes (as defined by commodity name in the RDB options file). page 140 for information on project-specific implied data. Branch Nipples.First Size (list) — Attribute 10.First Size (list) Schedule/Thickness . General Fittings. For the revise command. This form is used for any piping commodity that does not fall within any of the other types. You can use the Implied Data option to specify implied data for this piping commodity. although the prefix will be loaded in the database. Pipe Bends. Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command. The default is that implied data does not apply. The system automatically translates the specified commodity code to be upper-case. the prefixes for implied data are not displayed as part of the commodity code.First Size (keyin) — This data is automatically set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type. The General Fittings category will allow input in all the input fields. Orifice Flanges. and Valves Commodity Name (keyin) From NPD . the system will display the toggle setting rather than showing the prefix in the commodity code field.First Size (keyin) To NPD . This data is automatically set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type. this will represent a system commodity code and will be used by the Report Manager to reference the sizedependent commodity code in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table.

Second Size (keyin) — Attribute 13. Nipple Length (keyin) [Branch Nipples] — Key in length of the branch nipple. This toggle only appears for orifice flanges that have two taps. you must specify the corresponding pressure rating. Number of Taps (toggle) [Orifice Flanges] — Set the toggle for the number of taps (1 or 2) on the orifice flange. Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data You can optionally define the following fields when two ends of that component require different data. Modifier (keyin) — You can define this value for specific piping commodities not covered by the previous list. set the orientation of the taps as 90 degrees or 180 degrees._ _______________ Define the following data for any reducing components. Bend Radius (keyin) [Pipe Bend] — Key in the bend radius for the pipe bend. Key in the lowest second size for which this specification data applies. Valve Operator (keyin or list) [Valves] — Key in the valve operator type or select the valve operator type from a list of valve operator types. From NPD . Piping Job Specification 121 . The setting is stored in the modifier attribute.Second Size (keyin) — This data is set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type.Second Size (list) Pressure Rating . If applicable. This data will not apply to either the orifice flange or branch nipple commodity type. Key in the highest second size for which this specification data applies. if you specify a red End Preparation. If you select the by user branch reinforcement option. Valve Operator Display (toggle) [Valves] — Set the toggle to ON or OFF to determine whether the valve operator is displayed in the model. The list of valve operator types and the corresponding descriptions are defined in the RDB options list.Second Size (list) — This data is set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type. The following data must be defined for the designated [component types]. the commodity option code is automatically defined with a value of 699 (User-defined).Second Size (list) Schedule/Thickness . End Preparation . To NPD . as required by PDS. Table Suffix .Second Size (keyin) — Attribute 12. By PDS convention. Reinforcement Data (toggle) [Branch Reinforcement] — Set the toggle for the source of the branch reinforcement data to By System or By User. and schedule/thickness. 5. table suffix.

Commodity Code (keyin) Model Code (toggle) — Set the toggle to By System (PIPE) or By User (*FPIPE). you can request that the wall thickness be computed automatically by the system by specifying the joint quality factor for wall thickness calculations. this value will be ’*C095’. From NPD . PDS Sort Code (keyin) — Attribute 20._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 You can define the following optional data depending on your requirements. the default value (undefined) is assigned automatically.First Size (keyin) To NPD . For example. Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) Fabrication Category (list) You can optionally define the following data for piping. 122 . If no value is specified. The specified value is automatically converted to upper-case. if the joint quality factor is 0. Select the note for this commodity from the list of standard notes defined in the approved Standard Note Library. The system multiplies the joint quality factor by 100. Commodity Option (list) — Attribute 4. Standard Note Number (list) — Attributes 26 and 27. Note that this is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the branch reinforcement calculations. Max Temperature (keyin) — Attribute 5. add a *C prefix to designate that the default calculation is to be used.95. The piping commodity name is defined automatically. as specified through the Project Data Manager. Specification data for piping You must define the following data for piping.First Size (keyin) End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list) Joint Quality Factor (keyin) (For wall thickness calculations) — In lieu of the schedule/thickness. Materials Grade (list) — Attribute 25. and loads the value into the schedule/thickness column.

Purchased Length (keyin) — You can key in the purchased length of the piping in sub-units.First Size (list) Pressure Rating .First Size (list) Schedule/Thickness . From NPD ._ _______________ End Preparation . as specified through the Project Data Manager.Second Size (list) Commodity Option (list) Maximum Temperature (keyin) E.First Size (keyin) To NPD .First Size (list) Joint Quality Factor (keyin) Commodity Code (keyin) Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) Fabrication Category (list) You can optionally define the following data for tubing. The tubing commodity name is defined automatically. This value is stored in the PDS sort code attribute. Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data This is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the wall thickness calculations for the piping.Other (list) 5.Other (list) Specification data for tubing Define the following data for tubing. Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) End Preparation . The system multiplies the joint quality factor by 100 and loads it in the modifier column. Reinforcement (keyin) — Define the joint quality factor (E) for piping for which branch reinforcement calculations apply.First Size (keyin) Table Suffix .First Size (keyin) End Preparation .Second Size (list) Commodity Option (list) Max Temperature (keyin) E. Reinforcement (keyin) Purchased Length (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) End Preparation . Piping Job Specification 123 . End Preparation .

Alternate End Preparation (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. The gasket’s commodity name is defined automatically. The system displays the active project’s selection of MTO options applicable to gaskets for reference. You can optionally define the following data on the basis of the user-specific requirements for gaskets. as specified through the Project Data Manager. You must define the following specification data for gaskets. as specified through the Project Data Manager. when the alternate gasket search option has been enabled for MTO through the Project Data Manager. Alternate Table Suffix (list) — Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.First Size (keyin) Table Suffix .First Size (keyin) Pressure Rating .First Size (keyin) To NPD . The bolt’s commodity name is defined automatically.First Size (keyin) End Preparation .First Size (list) Commodity Code (keyin) Bolt Extension (keyin) 124 .First Size (keyin) To NPD . Alternate Pressure Rating (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating.First Size (list) Commodity Code (keyin) Gasket Thickness (keyin) — Key in the gasket thickness to be reported through the Report Manager. The system displays the active project’s selection of MTO options applicable to bolts for reference. From NPD . This value is loaded into the modifier column.First Size (keyin) Table Suffix . the input fields will be disabled. Otherwise. From NPD ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Specification data for gaskets Define the following data for gaskets. Commodity Option (list) Max Temperature (keyin) Fabrication Category (list) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) Specification data for bolts You must define the following data for bolts.First Size (list) Pressure Rating .

Fabrication Category (list) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) 5. The commodity name is defined automatically. as specified through the Project Data Manager._ _______________ You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements for bolts. Commodity Option (list) Fabrication Category (list) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data Specification data for nuts You must define the following data for nuts. Piping Job Specification 125 . Max Temperature (keyin) Commodity Code (keyin) You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements for nuts.

Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command.3. This data is displayed in review only fields._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. where the stub-end is the implied component. This option is intended for implied components that are not unique within the project. When you accept the specification data for the implied component. A lapjoint flange is an example of the primary component. page 140 for information on Project Specific implied data. When you select Accept to define a primary component. the system prefixes an asterisk (*) to the commodity code of the primary component to indicate that implied data is present. Commodity Option — The commodity option code for the implied component is set to the primary component’s commodity option code plus 5000. 126 . Field Descriptions The following specification data for the implied component are determined by the corresponding data for the primary component. the system modifies the form display to allow you to define the specification data for the implied component. set the toggle to Class Specific. you can select the Implied Data option to indicate that the commodity will have an associated implied item that will be included in MTO reports.3.2 Implied Data When defining a piping commodity. Commodity Name — Same as the primary component. After selecting the option.

Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) Fabrication Category (list) Modifier (keyin) Max Temperature (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) PDS Sort Code (keyin) — (optional)._ _______________ From NPD — same as the primary component. Model Code — same as the primary component. Piping Job Specification 127 . The system converts the value to upper-case. referred to as the system commodity code. To NPD — same as the primary component. End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list) Commodity Code (keyin) — Key in the commodity code for the implied item. except for the commodity code. You can optionally define the following specification data for the implied component based on your reporting requirements. When size-dependent commodity codes are required. this will represent a somewhat arbitrary value. and will be used by the Report Manager to reference the size-dependent commodity code. The values for the implied component default to the corresponding values for the primary component. The system converts this value to upper-case. Implied Data 5.

3. long. Description — Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept. The system adds the specified entry to the Material Description Library. If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes. this option will be ignored. page 361. for more information on material descriptions. Refer to Material Description Data.3 Add Entry to Material Description Library This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the appropriate Material Description Library (short. The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description. 128 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. Requirements The Material Description toggle must be set to ON. unless both of the following conditions are met: The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data Manager. or specialty).3.

_ _______________ 5. The system activates the Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping specialty. See Add Entry to Material Description Library. Then key in the component number for the specialty item to be created and select Accept. You can also add specialty descriptions to the Material Description Library. 5. Specialty Material Description — You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Specialty Material Description Library. The system activates the Create Piping Specialty Specification Data form. If no corresponding material description is found. page 128. The system activates the Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping specialty.3. Options Create — Select the type of specialty (Piping Specialty or Valves from the list.4 Piping Specialty Data Command Piping Specialty Data Command The Piping Specialty Data command can be used to create a piping specialty definition in Table 203 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping specialty definition. Revise By Keyin — Key in the component number of the specialty to be modified and select Accept. Piping Job Specification 129 . Revise By List — Select the piping specialty to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. the system activates the Add Entry to Material Description Library form.

Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the piping specialty. When creating a new definition. From NPD .First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the piping specialty.1 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data The Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form is used to create or modify the definition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. The TO NPD field is only visible if an applicable specialty type is selected._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5.3. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields. Field Descriptions Refer to RDB Options File. 130 . for information on defining options for the applicable input fields.4. page 77. page 105. To NPD . for information on the attributes for the Piping Specialty Specification Data table. which uniquely identifies the piping specialty. the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. Mandatory Input Fields Piping Component Number (keyin) — Key in the piping component number. Refer to Piping Specialty Specification Data (203). Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. The system verifies that the piping component number does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database.

The system will convert the value to uppercase. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer Data Form Type pick list. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. Specialty Type (field) — This field can be used to select the type of piping specialty data to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note Library. Model Code (keyin) — Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define the piping specialty. Valve Operator (keyin or list) — Key in the valve operator type or select the valve operator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file).First Size (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library._ _______________ End Preparation . Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) — Set the toggle to determine whether the valve operator will be displayed in the model. This data is stored in the modifier attribute. Sort Code (keyin) — Key in the sort code to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for piping specialties. Pressure Rating .First Size (list) — Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. NPD . then select the preferred data type. 5.First Size (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating. You must define the following data for valves. Table Suffix . Physical Data ID (keyin) — Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for piping specialties. Schedule/Thickness (list) — Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. You must define the following data for any reducing component.Second Size (keyin) — Key in the second size value for the piping specialty. Fabrication Category (list) — Select from the list of fabrication category values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Piping Job Specification 131 .

Weight Code (list) Geometric Industry Standard (list) Modifier (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) 132 . and schedule/thickness. Optional Input Fields You can optionally define the following data. By PDS convention. if you specify the red end preparation. table suffix. when two ends of the component require different data. End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list) You can optionally define the following data depending on you requirements for piping specialties._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping Specialty Data Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990. you must specify the corresponding pressure rating.

5 Instrument Data Command The Instrument Data command can be used to create an instrument definition in Table 204 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing instrument definition. The system activates the Revise Instrument Specification Data form with the data for the selected instrument. The system activates the Create Instrument Specification Data form. Instrument Data Command Options Create — Select the type of instrument (Instruments or Valves) from the list. See Add Entry to Material Description Library. Revise By Keyin — Key in the component number of the instrument to be modified and select Accept. Revise By List — Select the instrument to be revised from the displayed List of Instruments and select Accept. If no corresponding material description is found.3. Specialty Material Description — You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Specialty Material Description Library. the system activates the Add Entry to Material Description Library form. You can also add descriptions to the Material Description Library. 5. Piping Job Specification 133 . Then key in the component number for the instrument to be created and select Accept. page 128._ _______________ 5. The system activates the Revise Instrument Specification Data form with the data for the selected instrument.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. Field Descriptions Refer to RDB Options File. page 81.3.First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the instrument. which uniquely identifies the instrument. Instrument Component Number (keyin) — Key in the component number. The TO NPD field is only visible if an applicable instrument type is selected. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. End Preparation . page 105.First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the instrument. From NPD . You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields. The system verifies that the component number does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database. 134 . Refer to Instrument Component Specification Data (204).5. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. When creating a new definition. the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. To NPD . for information on the attributes for the Instrument Specification Data table.1 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data The Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data form is used to create or modify the definition of an instrument. for information on defining options for the applicable input fields.First Size (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.

Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data Instrument Type (field) — This field can be used to select the type of instrument component data to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note Library. By PDS convention. Fabrication Category (list) — Select from the list of fabrication category values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. The system will convert the value to upper-case. You can optionally define the following data.First Size (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating. Schedule/Thickness (list) — Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping Specialty Data Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990.First Size (list) — Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Sort Code (keyin) — Key in the code to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for instruments. End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list) 5. if you specify the red end preparation. and schedule/thickness. NPD . Physical Data ID (keyin) — Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for instruments. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer Data Form Type pick list. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. when two ends of the component require different data. table suffix. then select the preferred data type. Table Suffix . you must specify the corresponding pressure rating. Model Code (keyin) — Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define the instrument._ _______________ Pressure Rating . Piping Job Specification 135 .Second Size (keyin) — Key in the second size value for the instrument. You must define the following data for any reducing component.

Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) — Set the toggle to determine whether the valve operator will be displayed in the model._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 You must define the following data for valves. Valve Operator (keyin or list) — Key in the valve operator type or select the valve operator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file). Weight Code (list) Geometric Industry Standard (list) Modifier (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) 136 . This information is stored in the modifier attribute. You can optionally define the following data depending on your requirements for instruments.

The system activates the Revise Tap Properties Data form with the data for the selected tap table._ _______________ 5. The system activates the Revise Tap Properties Data form with the data for the selected tap table. Tap Properties Data Command Options Create — Key in the name of the tap table to be defined. Revise By List — Select the tap table to be revised from the displayed List of Tap Properties Data (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates the Create Tap Properties Data form. 5.3. Revise By Keyin — Key in the name of the tap table to be modified. Piping Job Specification 137 .6 Tap Properties Data Command The Tap Properties Data command can be used to create a tap properties definition in Table 205 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing tap properties definition.

page 85 for more information on the attributes for the Tap Properties Data. Field Descriptions Refer to RDB Options File. the default value (one) is assigned automatically. If you do not select a tap option code. the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. and the tap option code must be unique. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields. Nom Piping Diameter (keyin) — Key in the nominal piping diameter for this tap properties definition. Refer to Tap Properties Data (205). End Preparation (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. 138 . Tap Table Name (keyin) — Key in up to six characters for the table name. Tap Option (list) — Select from the list of tap option codes as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. the tap nominal piping diameter. page 105 for information on defining list options for the applicable input fields.1 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data The Create/Revise Tap Properties Data form is used to create or modity the specification data for taps.6._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. The combination of the tap properties table name. When creating a new definition.3.

_ _______________ Rating (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating. you are allowed to insert Tap Material Code data into the Short Material Description Library. 139 . — The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description. page 361. then adds the specified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries. this option will be ignored. Tap Material Code (keyin) — During the tap properties data creation process. for more information on material descriptions. If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes. Piping Job Specification Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept. Refer to Material Description Data. Schedule/Thickness (list) — Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Create/Revise Tap Properties Data 5. This code must be a unique index into the project’s Material Description Libraries. unless both of the following conditions are met: — The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data Manager. This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the appropriate (short) Material Description Library. if the Short and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON. The system converts the specified tap material code to upper-case. This is the code that may optionally be used by MTO for appending the tap’s material description to that of the component which has been tapped.

Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. Options Create — Key in the system commodity code of the implied component to be created. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping commodity. 140 . Revise By List — Select the implied component definition to be revised from the displayed list of Commodity Implied Data and select Accept. Revise By Keyin — Key in the name of the piping materials class for the commodity item to be modified. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Implied Data form with the data for the implied component definition.7 Commodity Implied Data Command The Commodity Implied Data command defines the specification data for implied components in Table 212 or the Material Reference Database._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5.3. The system activates the Create Piping Commodity Implied Material Data form. These implied components are reported by MTO with the primary component in situations where the implied data is independent of the piping materials class (used throughout the project).

the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. When creating a new definition. the specification data for the primary component must have enabled the option in each piping materials class for which this implied data applies. System Commodity Code — Key in the commodity code for the primary component. 5. page 91 for more information on the attributes for the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data table. The system converts the value to upper-case. To Diameter (First Size) — Key in the highest first size value for which this implied specification data applies. From Diameter (First Size) — Key in the lowest first size value for which this implied specification data applies. Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data Field Descriptions Refer to RDB Options File. Piping Job Specification 141 . For this type of implied data to be reported with the primary component.3. Refer to Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212).7. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields. page 105 for information on defining list options for the applicable input fields.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data form is used to create or modify the definition of an implied component. The to value must equal or exceed the from value._ _______________ 5.

This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the appropriate Material Description Library (short or long). Otherwise. page 361. this value must be less than the corresponding first size value. key in the highest second size value for which this implied specification data applies. Commodity Code (keyin) — During the commodity implied data creation process. 142 . To Diameter (Second Size) — For reducing components. If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes. key in the lowest second size value for which this implied specification data applies. this value should equal the corresponding first size NPD. Refer to Material Description Data. you are allowed to insert Commodity Code data into the Short and Long Material Description Libraries. for more information on material descriptions. The to value must equal or exceed the from value. Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept. — The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description. for a reducing component. if the Short and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON. In cases where the piping commodity represents both a full-size component and a reducing component. This code must be a unique index into the project’s Material Description Libraries._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 From Diameter (Second Size) — For reducing components. unless both of the following conditions are met: — The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data Manager. this option will be ignored.

_ _______________ The system converts the specified commodity code to upper-case. Piping Job Specification 143 . Quantity (keyin) — Key in a whole number or a decimal value for the quantity of the implied component per primary component. Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data 5. Standard Note Number (list) — You can optionally select from the list of standard notes as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. then adds the specified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries. Fabrication Category (list) — Select from the list of fabrication category values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.

table checker validation will be performed for all piping commodities. page 389 for more information on creating a Table Checker report definition. except: implied data specific to the piping materials class gaskets bolts nuts When you enable this option._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. When this option is enabled.3. the system displays a list of the defined Table Checker reports for the project.8 Table Checker You can use the Table Checker option to perform on-line Table Checker validation for the defined piping commodity specification data. Select the report validation to be performed and select Accept. Refer to Table Checker Form. 144 .

The default settings are maintained in the Project Control Database. they will not update the default locations. However. such changes are temporary.4 Piping Job Specification Manager Piping Job Specification Manager This command enables you to load all of the database tables which make up the Piping Job Specification portion of the Material Reference Database. Select the Piping Job Specification Manager option from the Reference Data Manager form. Before Using This Command Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on creating a project and creating the approved and unapproved Specification/Material Reference Database. You must have installed the applicable reference database files (such as USRDB or DINRDB)._ _______________ 5. Operating Sequence 1. Use the Default Project Control Data option to set default settings for Piping Spec Path and Piping Spec Node to point to the location of the neutral files. You can also extract neutral files of the data contained in the Material Reference Database. The system displays the Piping Job Specification Manager main form used to select the type of data to process. 5. Piping Job Specification 145 . You can also change these settings during the operation of the Piping Job Spec Manager.

Select Option Select Unapprove ==> Approve to post the data from the unapproved Specification/Material Reference Database to the approved database. hour. The system displays the options for the selected item. 146 . you will be prompted Accept Time or Respecify Submit Time. Enter the day. When delayed submission is selected. Accept to Create New Records or Exit Toggle between Submit Immediately to submit the report for immediate processing. or Delayed Submit to specify a time to submit the report for delayed processing. 2. You can perform the following activities for each of the entities._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The data manipulation procedure for each of the database tables is similar. then select AM or PM. — OR — Select the command for the database table to be loaded. The following illustration reflects the screen for Piping Materials Class. and minute.

See page 148. or Replace Commodity Subset from a neutral file. Delete existing entries. Replace._ _______________ Piping Job Specification Manager Select Option Select the option for the type of action to be performed. Report on the entity data (create a neutral file). See page 152 5. See page 151. Piping Job Specification 147 . Load.

Replace deletes all entries in the respective database table and then loads new entries from the neutral file.data — the neutral file for Tap Properties Data.pcd — a file that lists the neutral file names of all the delivered pcd files for the different piping materials classes.pmc — the neutral file for the Piping Materials Class Data. The Replace Commodity Subset option is only available for the Size Dependent Material Data and Project Implied Material Data commands.pcd defines all the commodity items for piping materials class 1c0031. 148 . *.data — the neutral file for Project Implied Material Data. Replace. Load adds the contents of the neutral file(s) to the information currently in that database table of the Specification/Material Reference Database.pcd — The neutral files for the Piping Commodity Data are stored in a set of files of the format pmcname. implied.data — a sample neutral file for Piping Specialty Data. instrment. A set of sample neutral files are delivered in the directory \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data specialty. Refer to the database descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered PJS and material data. taps.4.1 Load. 1c0031. The neutral files for the delivered USRDB data are in the directory \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data classes. This option is only available for the Size Dependent Material Data and Project Implied Material Data commands.) list._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5.pcd.data — a sample neutral file for Instrument Data. and Replace Commodity Subset Options These options enable you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Reference Database. (For example. Replace Commodity Subset revises (deletes and replaces) previously created sizedependent or implied commodity data for a specific commodity or group of commodity codes specified in a neutral file.

Piping Job Specification 3. For Piping Commodity Data you can load or replace a single file or a list of files. 5. The file list. for differences in Load. See the description above._ _______________ pcd_size. For Size-Dependent or Implied Commodity Data.pcd contains a list of all the delivered neutral files. Replace. 2. the system displays a dialog box to indicate that the data loaded will be appended to existing data. Select the Load/Replace (or other load or replace) option.data — a sample neutral file for Size Dependent Material Data. and Replace Commodity Subset. The default commit value is 25. and Replace Commodity Subset Options Before Using This Command You can define the variable PD_COMMIT_INTERVAL= in the control. This has the same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line. create a neutral files which contains only the commodity codes to be replaced. Load. set the time to process the neutral file(s). Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. Increasing this variable may improve performance. To replace specific commodity codes. 149 . Select Accept to continue. create a list file which list each neutral file on a separate line. For Delayed Submit. You can copy the files and make changes before loading the information into the database. For the Load option.sh file to control the commit interval in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. To process a list of files. you can replace specific commodity codes or all the entries in the database. Replace. Operating Sequence 1. Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be copied.

Accept to Create New Records or Exit Select Accept to begin processing the request.log — Piping Materials Class Data pcd._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 4.log — Piping Commodity Data specialty.log — Instrument Data taps.log — Tap Properties Data pcd_size. The system also creates a set of log files in the \tmp directory. 150 . Once the job is completed the system sends a mail message indicating the completion status of the load (successful or unsuccessful). Job Has Been Submitted The system submits the load/replace request as a batch job.log — Size-Dependent Material Data implied.log — Project Implied Material Data These log files contain the following information. pmc.log — Piping Specialty Data instrument. The name of the neutral file being loaded The completion status of the load (successful or unsuccessful) The line number that caused the failure if the neutral file was not loaded.

4. Accept to Delete Materials Class Select Accept to begin deleting the data._ _______________ 5. Select the item to be deleted from the database. Piping Job Specification 151 . 5.2 Delete Option This option enables you to delete entries from the Piping Job Specification. 2. Select the Delete option. 3. The system displays a list of all the items in the database for the selected class of data. Delete Option Operating Sequence 1.

2. 3. 4.max.4. Select the Report option from one of the data forms (such as the Piping Commodity Data form)._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. the system will use the default spec order. Accept to Create Report Select Accept to create the specified neutral file. You can change the Node Name and File Path information. For Piping Commodity Data select the appropriate PCD from the list. The order and field lengths of the data in the neutral file is determined by a format file named spec_order. Specify Neutral File Name Key in the name of the neutral file to be created. 152 . Job Has Been Submitted The system creates the neutral file and a log file named specmgr.max.3 Report Option The Report options enable you to create neutral files using the information in the Specification/Material Reference database. This format file is expected to reside in the same network address and directory specified for the report output. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. If an unapproved Specification/Material Reference database exists for the active project.max file is not found at the specified output directory. Operating Sequence 1. For Delayed Submit. A default format file is delivered with the PD_Data product in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format\spec_order. you can select the database to process: approved or unapproved. If the spec_order.log. set the time to process the neutral file(s).

6 27.8 13.6 8.8 14.16 3.6 5.8 17.6 4.6 4.6 9.6 25.7 20.8 15.6 18.8 16.8 7. If this file is in the directory where the software is being run the orders defined in this file will be used as the default attribute order and lengths.6 5.8 4.max ).6 14.8 18.6 2.6 5.6 7.8 11.7 6.6 3.8 8.8 12.6 11.6 10.8 6.8 6.8 9.6 8.6 19.6 17.8 7.16 8.6 24. The user can edit these attribute orders and lengths in this file ( spec_order._ _______________ Example spec_order.10 6.3 4.8 4.6 26.8 10.8 10.6 15.7 20.8 14.6 23.6 13.8 9.6 5.6 21.6 24.8 6.8 12.8 19.8 18.8 2.20 3.6 20.6 2.16 8.6 11. Piping Job Specification 153 .8 15.6 21.6 12.16 3.6 8.6 25.max File ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 201 202 203 204 205 211 212 Report Option = = = = = = = This file contains the spec attribute order and their maximum attribute lengths required for creating spec output neutral files.6 3.6 11.6 21.8 16.6 17.6 22.6 19. 2.8 5.6 23.6 24.6 4.6 23.6 16.20 3.6 25.8 7.8 10.8 10.8 16.8 12.6 20.7 22.16 3.6 17.8 6.3 5.8 9.7 7.7 8.6 18.8 9.8 4.8 6.6 5.6 10.8 13.6 22.8 7.8 7.8 5.16 19.8 15. When creating spec reports the system will default an attribute order and set of attribute lengths.10 2.8 9.8 14.8 13.

copy. see Report Management Defaults Form. and approve report records and report files. which you can use to create. The Piping Job Spec Report Manager stores the report record and location records for each discrimination data file and format file in the Project Control Database. or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). Report Discrimination Data — Displays the Discrimination Data form. which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the default nodename and path for the report definition files. page 186. or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well as the file itself. For more information. Report Management Data — Displays the Report Management Defaults form. Options Report Format — Displays the Report Format form. see Report Discrimination Data Form. For more information. copy. This option is primarily used for setup. page 163._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. page 157. revise. which you can use to create. see Report Form. see Report Format Form. The numbered records are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes. Report — Displays the Report form.5 Piping Job Spec Report Manager This command activates the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form. delete. For more information. revise. which you can use to create. page 173. For more information. revise. It is used to generate reports from the Specification/Material Reference Database with the report definition data. 154 .

format files. Without the format file(s).) 5. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report. the format record is created interactively. Piping Job Spec Report Manager reports cannot be processed. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file. The following definitions explain all of the files and records in the reporting process. and database records that represent these files to generate reports. Piping Job Specification 155 . It is an ASCII file that is created interactively using the Piping Job Spec Report Manager. Using the Report Commands Format File and Record The format file is a user-defined. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file._ _______________ 5.5. Using the Report Format option. Unlike the format file. The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific discrimination data file. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in the report and how the data is sorted. ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside of the Piping Job Spec Report Manager. There is a uniquely-numbered record for each discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing.discrimination. you can create a numbered record for each format file so that it can be accessed for report processing. and places it in the specified directory on the specified node. Discrimination Data File and Record The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. including the report output. A set of basic format files is delivered for each type of reporting. The format record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific format file. and search criteria data files.1 Using the Report Commands Understanding Report Files and Records The Piping Job Spec Report Manager uses the discrimination data files. This is the same way that the format record is used to access a format file. Report Output and Record The Piping Job Spec Report Manager creates a report using the specified format. The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a report.

First. Finally. By defining the defaults first. The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record. use the Report Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report definition files. and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination Data options. 156 . the discrimination data file. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default. Reports cannot be generated until the format file._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Group Workflow There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. discrimination data record. and their corresponding records have been established. simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification. you can prevent keying in a nodename and path on each form. use the Report option to create the actual report.

For more information. Piping Job Specification 157 . Revise — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form. see Format Creation/Revision Form. Options Create — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form. The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be displayed.2 Report Format Form When you select the Report Format option from the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form. which enables you to add a new record of a format file in the project control database._ _______________ 5. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the file’s location has been entered into the project control database. For more information. copy. the Report Format form is displayed. revise. see Format Creation/Revision Form. For more information. Copy — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form. page 159. page 159. page 159.5. which copies the record of an existing format file from the project control database along with the corresponding ASCII format file. Report Format Form This form enables you to create. see Format Creation/Revision Form. or delete a record of the location of the format file in the project control database. which modifies a record of an existing format file in the project control database. 5. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a record and its corresponding ASCII format files.

see Format Deletion Form. 158 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Delete — Displays the Deletion form. If the record of the format file is deleted. reporting cannot be performed. which deletes an existing record of a format file from the project control database. For more information. page 161.

_ _______________
5.5.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form
When you select Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form is displayed.

Format Creation/Revision Form

This form creates, copies, or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines the location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report. Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.

Field Descriptions
Number — A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in the project control database used to identify the record of the format file. Description — A description of up to 40 characters for the format file. File Specification — The file name of the format file to reference. File Path — The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting. File Node — The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This field retains the active setting.

Before Using this Form
You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with the PD_Report product in the win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format directory. The file for Spec Reporting reporting is named piping_rdb.fmt. For more information on the delivered sample format files, see the PD_Report User’s Guide.

5. Piping Job Specification

159

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002

Operating Sequence
1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise. A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record, go to Step 3. 2. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then select Accept. Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information. 3. Specify Report Format Data Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in each field. Then select Accept. The project control database is updated.

160

_ _______________
5.5.2.2 Format Deletion Form
When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

Format Deletion Form

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.

Fields and Options
Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

5. Piping Job Specification

Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

161

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept. The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

162

_ _______________
5.5.3 Report Discrimination Data Form
When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, the Discrimination Data form is displayed.

Report Discrimination Data Form

This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified directory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, or deleted as needed. A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a report. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project control database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be associated with a specific report.

Options
Create — Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a new discrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created. For more information, see Discrimination Data Creation Form, page 165. Copy — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existing data file. The associated project control database record is also copied. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 169. Revise — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies discrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination data file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 169.

5. Piping Job Specification

163

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as well as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Deletion Form, page 171.

164

_ _______________
5.5.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form

Discrimination Data Creation Form

Commands
Approved Piping Job Spec — Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. Search Criteria — Defines search criteria for specified attributes in the Specification/Material Reference Database.

Field Descriptions
Number — Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record to be created by discrimination. The number can be up to 24 characters in the Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identify the record of the discrimination data file.

5. Piping Job Specification

Description — Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40 characters in the Project Control Database. File Specification — Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to create. The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project.

165

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 File Path — Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active setting. File Node — Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active setting.

166

_ _______________
5.5.3.2 Search Criteria Form
You can define search criteria to restrict the elements to be reported based on database attributes. The default is no search criteria. This option enables you to define search criteria for specified attributes in the Spec Database.

Search Criteria Form

If you do not restrict the piping materials class attribute for Piping Commodity Data, all piping materials classes will be reported.

Operating Sequence
1. Select the Search Criteria option from the Discrimination Data form.

2.

Select Entity Select the database entity that contains the data to be restricted. The system displays the attributes for the selected entity.

5. Piping Job Specification

3.

Select Attribute Select the attribute to be restricted. The system displays the selected attribute and displays a list of operators.

167

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 4. Select Operator Select the required operator to define the search criteria. The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value. 5. Enter Attribute Value Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search, key in a string to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards). If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the standard note library. Select the value and select Accept. The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria. 6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternative condition.

— OR — Accept the defined search criteria.

168

_ _______________
5.5.3.3 Discrimination Data Revision Form
When you select Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data Revision form displays. This form enables you to copy or revise a discrimination data file from the specified directory and its record from the Project Control Database. The copied discrimination data file can then be modified. First, the system displays the Record Number display list as shown below on the left. After you select and Accept the discrimination data file you need, the system then displays the discrimination data identification fields. These fields are used to define the record as shown below on the right.

Discrimination Data Revision Form

Commands
Approved Piping Job Spec — Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. Search Criteria — Defines search criteria for specified attributes in the Specification/Material Reference Database.

Field Descriptions
Number — Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record with up to 24 characters in the Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identify the record of the discrimination data file. Description — Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40 characters in the Project Control Database. File Specification — Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to reference.

5. Piping Job Specification

169

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project. File Path — Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active setting. File Node — Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active setting. If prompted to... Select Discrimination Data Specify Discrimination Data Do this: Select the record number of the discrimination data file to revise and select Accept. Key in any changes to the discrimination data record displayed in the information fields, and select as many of the Discrimination Data options as necessary to define the discrimination data file.

170

_ _______________
5.5.3.4 Discrimination Data Deletion Form
When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

Discrimination Data Deletion Form

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.

Fields and Options
Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

5. Piping Job Specification

Operating Sequence
1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

171

The specified record is deleted. 172 . If specified._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2. the associated file is also deleted. Then click Accept. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed.

and sorting sequence. report title. the title is included in the format file. and report node. The following search criteria data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline). search criteria (if applicable). and sorting sequence. path._ _______________ 5. and file name. and which format file. search criteria (if applicable). The report name is not the title that is printed on the report. volume (if applicable). path. and file name).5. volume (if applicable). and file location (network address. these specifications include the report name. At the end of each report. description. path. and file name. report creation/revision date. the report description. and search criteria data file to use to generate a report. discrimination data file.4 Report Form When you select Report from the Report Manager form. Piping Job Specification 173 . a parameters page is included that contains the following information: Report Output — The report number. Search Criteria — The report search criteria number. description. the Report form is displayed. and deletes report records and report files. and node. A report record holds specifications for a report. and file name. 5. Discrimination Data — The report discrimination data number. and file location (node. path. Format — The report format number. The following discrimination data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline). Report Form This form creates. revises. description.

page 183. Approve — Displays the Report Approval form. Multi-Create — Displays the Report Multiple Submit form. page 181. For more information. which regenerates a report from an existing or revised report record. see Report Multiple Submit Form. Delete — Displays the Deletion form. which submits multiple reports to the printer. which deletes an existing report record and the corresponding report. see Report Approval Form. page 178. page 184. For more information. see Report Creation Form. which creates a report record and generates a report. see Report Deletion Form. page 175. Revise — Displays the Revise Report form. 174 . For more information._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Options Create — Displays the Report Creation form. For more information. see Revise Report Form. which approves an existing report. For more information.

Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings. page 186.1 Report Creation Form When you select Create from the Report form.4. This field retains the active settings._ _______________ 5. and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Dataform. page 186. the Report Creation form is displayed. This is not the title in the actual report. and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. Because report records are stored in the project control database. Piping Job Specification 175 . see Report Management Defaults Form.5. 5. Report File Spec — The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). The title of the report is contained in the format file. Fields and Options Report Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. Report Creation Form Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. you can use them repeatedly. For more information. Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. but is rather the title of the report record. Report Title — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. For more information. see Report Management Defaults Form.

Revised By — The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. Select the appropriate format file. additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. Report Discrimination File — The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. Click on a queue to select it. Click on a queue to select it._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. Revision Number – The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. To clear a specification. 176 . the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed — Specifies when the report will be processed. When you select this option. a list of available print queues is displayed. and click Accept. Last Revision Number — The revision number of the last report generated. When you select this field. When you select this field. a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. click Accept without selecting a file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it. Select a search criteria file. Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. Select the appropriate discrimination data file. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed. a list of available print queues is displayed. This field is optional. a list of available format files is displayed. This is a read-only field. and click Accept. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report. you cannot edit it. Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. and click Accept. Revision Description — The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. When you select this field. This field is optional. and you specify a search criteria in this field. When you select this option.

Then select the appropriate report format file. From the Report form. 5. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). 5. discrimination data file. and select a queue if the report is to be printed._ _______________ Operating Sequence 1. Click Accept to save the report file. Report Creation Form 4. Piping Job Specification 177 . If you choose delayed submission. 2. 3. specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Specify Report Data Key in the report record information. select Create. and search criteria data file. The Report Creation form is displayed. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option.

Report File Spec — The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. you can choose to generate an updated report output file without updating the report record. Select the appropriate discrimination data file. and click Accept.4.2 Revise Report Form When you select Revise from the Report form. a list of available format files is displayed. The title of the report is contained in the format file.5. When you select this field. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without generating a report output file. Fields and Options Report Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control database. but is rather the title of the report record. Report Title — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. Select the appropriate format file. the Revise Report form is displayed. and click Accept. This field retains the active settings. Report Discrimination File — The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. 178 . Similarly._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. This field retains the active settings. This is not the title in the actual report. a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. When you select this field.

This field is optional. a list of available print queues is displayed. set this toggle to Revise Data Only. click Accept without selecting a file. Revision Number – The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. Click on a queue to select it. If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title. Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. a list of available search criteria files is displayed. When you select this option. and click Accept. Revise Report Form Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch — Specifies when the report will be processed. To modify both the report file and the report output file. When you select this field. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. This is a read-only field. make the necessary changes. and click Accept. Select a search criteria file. Revision Description — The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. you cannot edit it. Click on a queue to select it. and you specify a search criteria in this field. additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. and the report output file is generated. Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data — Specifies revision of the report data only (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise Report and Data). and click Accept. Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report. To revise the report output file only. Piping Job Specification 179 . set this toggle to Revise Report and Data without modifying any of the fields. Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file._ _______________ Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. Last Revision Number — The revision number of the last report generated. To clear a specification. a list of available print queues is displayed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch. Revised By — The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data. and click Accept. 5. When you select this option. make the necessary changes. set this toggle to Revise Data Only. the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. This field is optional. To revise the report specification without updating the report output file.

and select a queue if the report is to be printed. From the Report form._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Operating Sequence 1. 3. Click Accept to save the report file. specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. select the report to be revised. Select Report From the displayed list. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). 180 . select Revise. 4. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option. If you choose delayed submission. 6. Then click Accept. 2. Revise Report Information Update the report record information as needed. 5. The fields update to display the selected report file specifications. The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files.

_ _______________ 5. Select Report Format From the displayed list. and search criteria files and their database records. 181 . Fields and Options Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. When set to Delete File. When set to Do Not Delete File. discrimination data files and their database records. only the database record is deleted. the Deletion form is displayed. Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted. Report Deletion Form This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. Piping Job Specification Operating Sequence 1.4. select the database record to be deleted.5. 5. the database record is deleted along with the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records.3 Report Deletion Form When you choose Delete.

182 . Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. If specified. the associated file is also deleted._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2. The specified record is deleted. Then click Accept.

the approval status is automatically reset to not approved. From the displayed list. Options Number — The 24-character unique name (also called short name) of the report record. select Approve. 2. Then click Accept. see the Approve Report section of the PD_Report User’s Guide. This approval status provides a way for you to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. the Report Approval form is displayed. Report Approval Form Use this form to select a report to approve. From the Report form.5. Operating Sequence 1. select a report to approve._ _______________ 5. The Report Approval form is displayed.4 Report Approval Form When you select Approve from the Report form. 5. For more information. The Approval form is displayed. When a report is revised. Approving a report means that a database attribute is set from not approved (the default) to approved.4. Piping Job Specification 183 . Description — The 40-character description of the report record.

4. a list of available print queues is displayed. When you select this option.5 Report Multiple Submit Form When you select Multi-Create from the Report form. Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch — Specifies when the report will be processed. Click on a queue to select it. Fields and Options Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. the Report Multiple Submit form is displayed. Description — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report. a list of available print queues is displayed.5. When you select this option. Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. Click on a queue to select it. Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time. additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch. 184 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5.

2. Report Multiple Submit Form 4. and select a queue if the report is to be printed. specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. From the Report form. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or later (Delayed Submit to Batch). 5. select Multi-Create. Piping Job Specification 185 . The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option. Highlighed reports are selected._ _______________ Operating Sequence 1. select the reports to submit. Select Reports for Submission From the displayed list. Click Accept to submit the reports. 3. If you choose delayed submission. 5. select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report.

Report Format Path — Specifies the default path of the format files. 186 . the Report Management Defaults form is displayed. This option is used primarily for setup. tmp or temp) directory. Fields Report Path — Specifies the default path of the report output files. Report Format Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which format files are located.5 Report Management Defaults Form When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form. It is recommended that you not send output reports to your system’s temporary (that is. Report Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output files are located. Report Discrimination Data Path — Specifies the default path of the discrimination data files._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5.5. This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the report definition files.

Accept or Exit In the fields provided. Report Search Criteria Data Path — Specifies the default path of the report search criteria data files._ _______________ Report Discrimination Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which discrimination data files are located. From the Report Manager form. Then click Accept. format files. 5. Piping Job Specification 187 . discrimination data files. Report Management Defaults Form Operating Sequence 1. The Report Management Defaults form is displayed. key in the default paths and node names for the report output files. select Report Management Data. and search criteria data files. 2. Report Search Criteria Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which report search criteria data files are located.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 188 .

Referenced in the Piping Materials Class Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. or delete tables in an existing library. Specification Tables . 6.object library \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb. Piping Job Specification Tables Piping Job Specification Tables Nonphysical data such as branch calculations or gasket separation are stored in the Spec Table Library or hard-coded in the system. RDB Tables . Piping Job Spec Tables 189 .l. modify.l . See page 190.text library These libraries contain the Piping Job Specification tables and the other special tables which contain nonphysical data._ _______________ 6.t . See page 215. You can use the Piping Job Specification Tables command to create a new Piping Job Specification Table library or to create. The Spec Tables for US practice are delivered in the following files: \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.Referenced in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff forms of the Project Data Manager. See page 239. The data in the Spec Table Library falls into two basic categories.

These table/equation names are defined in the Piping Materials Class Specification Table of the Specification Material Reference Database. Temperature and Pressure Service Limits table Nominal Piping Diameter table Thickness Data table Materials Data table Piping Wall Thickness equation Branch Reinforcement calculation Branch Insertion table Gasket Separation table Fluid Code table 190 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6.1 PJS Tables and Functions The following special tables and functions are provided in the Spec Table Library.

PSIG ! Temperature Pressure WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ END 6. Next_One Units= DF. you can only define positive values for pressure. The units of measure for the pressure and temperature values in the table are defined as a part of the table description.1._ _______________ 6. You can define both positive and negative values for temperature. Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’LWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Input_Interpolation 1. This table is limited to 100 temperature and pressure values. These limits can be dictated by factors such as strength of components and materials used. You must insure that each of the components included in the piping materials class meet the indicated temperature and pressure limits. the pressure from the table is not less than any of the corresponding pressure(s) from the TDB. Piping Job Spec Tables 191 .1 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table The temperature and pressure service limits table includes the sets of temperatures and pressures that define the boundaries of acceptability for a piping materials class. However. The system uses the information in this table to insure: Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table The highest temperature from the TDB does not exceed the highest temperature value in the table The lowest temperature in the TDB is not less than the lowest value in the table For a given temperature.

1. These tables use the following naming conventions. -20 to 800 ! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Input_Interpolation 1. and fifth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Example Table_Data_Definition ’L1001’ ! Description= B16. The statement must be included as shown in the table format for the desired interpolation to take place. Input_Interpolation 1. Values are assumed to be positive unless otherwise indicated. PSIG ! Temperature Pressure -20 285 100 285 200 260 300 230 400 200 500 170 600 140 650 125 700 110 750 95 800 80 END Date=13-Feb-1987 Parameters Table_Data_Definition (character-6) — This parameter specifies the name of the Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table. Next_One Units= DF. — first character: L — second character: the pressure rating of the piping materials class as defined by the following code: 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= CL150 CL300 CL400 CL600 CL900 CL1500 CL2500 8= GRAVHD 9= OTHER A= CL125 F= CL800 G= CL2000 H= CL3000 J= CL4500 K= CL5000 L= CL6000 M= CL9000 N= CL10000 R= CL15000 T= CL20000 V= CL30000 — third. 192 . Next_One — This statement tells the system to interpolate between known values for the temperature value. Temperature (real) — This field identifies the maximum temperature value. You can use both positive (+) and negative (-) values.5 CL150-1. fourth.

Piping Job Spec Tables 193 . Negative (-) values are not accepted in this field. Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table 6._ _______________ Pressure (real) — This field identifies the value for pressure corresponding to the previously defined temperature.

1. The system verifies any NPD input in the Piping Design TDB._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6.2 Nominal Piping Diameters Table The NPD Tables consists of the diameters for piping and tubing which are valid within any piping materials class which references this table. Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’DWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0 Units= NPD_IN ! Diam WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW END This table can also be used to define the equivalency for English and metric diameters. Neutral File Format .English/Metric Equivalency Table_Data_Definition ’DWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_MM. NPD_IN ! Metric Diam WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW END 194 . The output column defines the English equivalent for the matching metric size.

Piping Job Spec Tables 195 .75 1 1. NPD_IN ! metric diam.375 to 36) ! By=aw Ckd By= Rev=1 Date=17_jul 1989 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_MM.5 20 0.5 to 36 ! By=NP Ckd By=DG Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0 Units= NPD_IN ! Diam 0.375 15 0.5 0. imperial diam 10 0.75 25 1 40 1.5 50 2 80 3 100 4 150 6 200 8 250 10 300 12 350 14 400 16 450 18 500 20 550 22 600 24 650 26 700 28 750 30 800 32 850 34 900 36 END 6._ _______________ Examples Table_Data_Definition ’D036’ ! Description= From 0.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 END Date=22-Jan-1987 Nominal Piping Diameters Table Table_Data_Definition ’DB001’ ! Description= From 6mm to 900mm (0.

and fourth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique. You can use the value ET_AL to indicate that any nominal diameter value from the TDB which is equal to or greater than the value in the preceding line is an acceptable nominal diameter for the PMC.Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) — This field identifies the value for nominal diameter. Diam ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Parameters Table_Data_Definition (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the NPD table. These tables use the following naming conventions: — first character: D — second. 196 . third.

5 .06 S-XS 1.3125 .15 S-STD 24 .250 .3125 ._ _______________ 6.1. IN. SC_TH_IN. You cannot use an NPD range.250 .147 .3 Thickness Data Tables Thickness data is determined as a function of the table name and nominal piping diameter.250 .0071D<=24. SC_TH_IN.250 .19 S-10 S-STD 30 .1 S-STD 10 . and preferred thicknesses required in the calculation of piping wall thickness.12 S-STD 18 .06 S-XS 2 . thread.3125 .250 .17 S-10 S-STD 28 .154 .250 .250 . not a schedule.5 .20 S-10 S-STD - 6. there must be an individual entry for each diameter.06 S-STD 4 .06 S-XS 1 . SC_TH_IN. SC_TH_IN.250 .07 S-STD 6 .237 .1 S-STD 8 . SC_TH_IN.12 S-STD 16 . These tables include the minimum. SC_TH_IN. IN. SC_TH_IN. SC_TH_IN ! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses 0.15 S-STD 26 .28 .063CA.13 S-STD 22 . IN.06 S-STD 3 .0075D>=26 ! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=31-Jan-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN. PDS requires that the schedule/thickness values be in inches.2 . SC_TH_IN. retirement. Thickness Data Tables Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’TWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN.154 .1 S-STD 14 .06 S-160 0.1 S-STD 12 .12 S-STD 20 .216 . 0.0. The tables provide the actual thickness.250 . Therefore.75 .179 . IN. SC_TH_IN ! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ END Example Table_Data_Definition ’TA501’ ! Description= A.0. IN. IN. Piping Job Spec Tables 197 .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 32 34 36 END .020" 3= 0.5 inch diameter I= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter Z= Special criteria — third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the table is intended.Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) — This parameter identifies the desired value for nominal diameter.125" 8= 0.3125 .250" A= 405 clad B= 410S clad C= 304 clad D= 304L clad E= 316 clad F= 316L clad G= 317 clad H= 317L clad J= 321 clad L= Cement lined M= Epoxy lined N= Glass lined O= Kynar lined P= Polyester lined Q= Polypropylene lined R= PTFE lined S= Saran lined T= Teflon lined U= TK31 lined V= R11 lined W= R15 lined X= R18 lined Y= Other 1 Z= Other 2 — fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique. These tables use the following naming conventions: — first character: T — second character: code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size for which threaded components are used in the piping materials class.050" 5= 0.3125 .23 .21 .030" 4= 0.188" 9= 0. stainless steels. per the following criteria: 1= None 2= 0.Thickness Data Table Name (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the table.063" 6= 0. A= Criteria 1 with no threaded components B= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter C= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1. 198 . Diam .10" 7= 0. criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys. as defined below.3125 . Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels. and non-ferrous alloys.24 S-10 S-STD S-STD S-STD S-XS - Parameters Table_Data_Definition .5 inch diameter D= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter F= Criteria 2 with no threaded components G= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter H= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.

It is only used in piping wall thickness calculations. exclusive of corrosion allowance. inclusive of corrosion allowance and mill tolerance.Thread Thickness (real) — This parameter represents the thickness for threaded pipe that must be added to the calculated wall thickness to account for the presence of threads.Retirement Thickness (real) — This parameter represents the least thickness. This value is only used in piping wall thickness calculations. or mill tolerance. You are restricted to a limit of six preferred thicknesses._ _______________ Ret Thick . Preferred Schedule/Thicknesses 1 through 6 (real) — These parameters represent the schedules and/or thicknesses you prefer be used as a result of a piping wall thickness calculation. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. This value is only used in piping wall thickness calculations. PDS requires that these values be in inches. Thickness Data Tables Min Thick . The system rounds the calculated wall thickness to the next higher preferred thickness. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. which is acceptable for a given NPD. Values in the table are arranged in ascending thickness sequence. 6. Thread Thick . which is acceptable for a given NPD. thread allowance. Piping Job Spec Tables 199 .Minimum Required Thickness (real) — This parameter represents the least thickness.

Only one value can exist per table entry. and the applicable mill tolerance. You must insure that units of measure used in the Materials Table are consistent with those used in the corresponding Temperature-Pressure Table(s). If the thickness range is exceeded. and temperature. allowable stress (S). IN. PSI.4 Materials Data Table The Materials Data Table consists of the materials data that is a function of the table name._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. DEC. These tables include the properties which are required for the calculation of piping wall thickness. Once the actual thickness is calculated for the component. DF. the next entry in the materials table for the applicable materials grade and temperature is sought and the calculation process is repeated.1. wall thickness range. DEC. If values exist for both. Note that you can express the mill tolerance as either a thickness percentage or a tolerance value. The system uses the materials grade and temperature to access the information in the table and provide the values of thickness range. IN. Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’MWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6 Input_Interpolation 2. the system only uses the mill thickness percentage. coefficient Y. the calculation software compares that value with the thickness range. Next_One Units= INT. IN ! Mill Tol ! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ END 200 . material grade.

4 20000 12.4 10800 12.5 142 650 .5 116 300 .5 162 700 . Next_One Units= INT.5 162 750 .5 142 700 .4 20000 12. Piping Job Spec Tables 201 .5 162 400 .5 142 600 .4 13000 12.5 116 750 .4 20000 12.5 142 100 .5 116 -20 .4 20000 12.4 18900 12. PSI. DEC. These tables use the following naming conventions: — first character: M — second character: the applicable design code.4 20000 12.4 16500 12. IN. A106. IN ! Mill Tolrnce ! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value 142 -20 .4 13000 12.5 116 800 ._ _______________ Example Table_Data_Definition ’ML01’ ! Description= ASTM A53-B.4 17000 12.4 17000 12.4 20000 12.5 116 650 . API 5L-B ! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=24-Feb-87 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6 Input_Interpolation 2. IN. per the following convention: A= ASME Section I [Power Boilers] B= ASME Section III [Nuclear] C= Do not use D= ASME Section VIII-1 [Unfired Vessels] 6.4 17300 12.4 10800 12. DF.5 162 800 .5 142 800 .Materials Data Table Name (character 6) — This field identifies the number of the table.5 162 200 .5 162 300 .5 142 500 .4 13000 12.4 20000 12.5 142 200 .4 17300 12.4 20000 12.4 20000 12.4 20000 12.4 16500 12.4 16500 12.5 162 -20 .5 END Materials Data Table Parameters Table_Data_Definition .5 116 200 .4 18900 12.4 20000 12.5 162 650 .5 142 400 .4 17000 12.5 162 100 .5 142 300 .4 17300 12.5 116 700 .4 10800 12. DEC.4 20000 12.5 116 600 .5 116 100 .5 162 500 .5 162 600 .5 116 500 .5 116 400 .5 142 750 .4 20000 12.4 20000 12.4 20000 12.4 18900 12.

1 [Power] K= ANSI-B31.Coefficient Y (real) — This parameter represents the coefficient Y corresponding to the previously defined parameters in the line. and joint efficiency to be used for the component. specification.Wall Thickness Range .low (real) Range . temper. Enter the value of mill tolerance to be considered for the material. Thick . You can enter a positive number or a blank. such as 12. This compound attribute includes the code.5%.3 [Petroleum] M= ANSI-B31. You cannot define this range in terms of schedule.2 [Fuel Gas] L= ANSI-B31. joint or structural grade quality factor (E).4 [Oil Transport] N= ANSI-B31.standard note 145) — This code-listed parameter identifies the materials grade. Enter the mill tolerance to be considered for the material as a percent of nominal thickness. Mill Tol % . Input_Interpolation 2. Mat Gr . A blank indicates that the properties apply regardless of the thickness of the component.Allowable Stress (real) — This parameter represents the allowable stress corresponding to the previously defined parameters in the line. Y . 202 .5 [Refrigeration] P= ANSI-B31. if required. You can enter positive numbers or blanks.01 inch.9 [Building Services] T= API V= AWWA — third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique.Mill Thickness Percentage (real) — This parameter represents the per cent of the wall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for pipe material. such as 0.Material Grade (integer . S .Wall Thickness Range .8 [Gas Transmission] Q= ANSI-B31.high (real) — These fields identify the lower and upper wall thickness bounds for a set of material properties._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 E= ASME Section VIII-2 [Unfired Vessels] J= ANSI-B31. You can enter a positive number or a blank. Interpolation is used for all the output fields. grade. Next_One — This statement must be included as shown for interpolation to take place. S is the basic allowable stress for the material excluding casting. Temp .Mill Thickness Value (real) — This parameter represents the actual wall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for plate material. Mill Tol Value .Temperature (real) — This field identifies the applicable temperature for a set of material properties.

5 Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations These equations define formulas for the calculation of piping wall thickness and branch reinforcement to resist positive pressure.2 L= ANSI-B31.1 K= ANSI-B31. per the following convention: A= ASME Section I B= ASME Section III C= Do not use D= ASME Section VIII-1 E= ASME Section VIII-2 J= ANSI-B31.8 Q= ANSI-B31. Thickness equations have project unique names which must follow the following convention: first character: E second character: the applicable design code. no third or fourth character can be defined.9 T= API V= AWWA [Power Boilers] [Nuclear] [Unfired Vessels] [Unfired Vessels] [Power] [Fuel Gas] [Petroleum] [Oil Transport] [Refrigeration] [Gas Transmission] [Building Services] Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the equation name unique. If the equation name is provided as part of the definition *Cyyy in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data table.5 P= ANSI-B31. 6. the equation name must be limited to the format Ex._ _______________ 6.4 N= ANSI-B31.3 M= ANSI-B31. The actual equations and their logic are hardcoded in the software. PDS requires that the thickness value be defined in inches. Piping Job Spec Tables 203 .1.

1986 [Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping] Thickness logic from paragraph 304. At least one complete set of conditions must be defined.1.ANSI-B31.3.1. equation 3a Reinforcement logic from paragraph 304.3.ANSI-B31._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Delivered Equations The thickness and branch reinforcement logic for the following equations are hardcoded in the software. If actual values exist for the normal design or the alternate design pressure/temperatures.1986 [Power Piping] Thickness logic from paragraph 104. Pressures and temperatures used in thickness/branch reinforcement calculations are derived from data in the Piping Design TDB. General Considerations The following considerations apply to both thickness equations and branch reinforcement calculations.Appendix H PD t = _________ 2(SE+PY) where P D S E Y A Design pressure Pipe outside diameter Allowable stress read from the Materials table Joint quality factor determined from the wall thickness attribute Cxxx where xxx is 100 times E Coefficient Y read from the Materials table Additional Thickness (in inches) Refer to the spec access example below for more information on how the wall thickness equation is used to determine the actual wall thickness value. EJ01 Source .1(D) PD tm = _________ + A 2(SE+Py) EL01 Source . the corresponding operating conditions are ignored.3c. both normal and alternate operating conditions are used. Both normal and alternate pressure and temperature conditions are considered.3 & Code . 204 . equation 3 Reinforcement logic from paragraph 104. If default values exist for BOTH sets of design conditions.1.

Conversions are performed using the procedures and conversion factors defined for the Units of Measure in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide. Independent sets of thickness/reinforcement calculations are carried out for each applicable pressure/temperature set. For example: — A 20" x 10" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *Cyyy.6" thickness. 24" end and a *Cyyy. One or more ends may need to be calculated. — A 24" x 20" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *Cyyy. The calculation of the 24" end results in a 0. 20" end and a 0. Thickness calculations are triggered by specifying an equation name in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data table. table values that are temperature dependent are determined on the basis of the temperature applicable to the calculation set being considered.6" thick reducer is used. In each calculation set. Only positive pressure is considered. 10" end. Piping Job Spec Tables 205 . A 0.5" thickness. 20" end. An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. Refer to the descriptions of the Temperature-Pressure Table and Materials Table to insure consistency between units of measure. joint or structural grade quality factor (E) times 100. the quality factor for the pipe should be entered here.85). Thickness Equations The following considerations apply to thickness equations.5" thickness. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0. For components with ends having different nominal diameters. 6. If you are defining a calculation to be performed on a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match the thickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0. as determined by specific *Cyyy entries in the Piping Commodity Specification Data table. A 0. The system reports an error if you request a thickness calculation involving a vacuum condition (negative pressure).55" thick. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0. The larger thickness (calculated or predefined) is used. independent sets of thickness determinations are performed for each NPD. The thicker calculated thickness is used._ _______________ Delivered Equations Once the proper pressure and temperature sets are determined.55" thick reducer is used. — yyy is the casting. their units of measure are converted to those used in the Temperature-Pressure Table associated with the Piping Materials Class to which the component belongs. This factor is one of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. The letters that form this code have the following meaning: — C is the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the component is determined by calculations using the thickness equation defined in the thickness_equation attribute of the Piping Materials Class Data table.

The system uses the greater of these values as the uncorroded wall thickness. — the applicable branch reinforcement being either a reinforcing weld or a reinforcing pad. the thread thickness from the wall thickness table. or structural grade quality factor (E). joint. Branch Reinforcement The following considerations apply to branch reinforcement calculations. Spec Access The execution of a pipe wall thickness calculation is performed when the variable PIPE_OD_n is encountered in the physical data definition of a pipe or component. and the mill tolerance from the Materials table._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 All thickness calculations involve a casting. This revised thickness is compared against the minimum thickness value in the Thickness Data table. (See Branch Insertion Tables. the schedules are translated to an actual thickness by a table look-up from a table of the form MALWT//Term_type//shc_thick//generic_flag//weight_code 206 . Once the actual thickness is calculated. and the next largest preferred value is used for table look-ups and is stored in the design database. where yyy is defined in the Modifier attribute for entries with an item name of PIPING. joint. Therefore. All calculations involve a casting. The value for this factor is yyy/100. The fillet welds joining reinforcing pads to the header and to the branch are considered in determining the available reinforcement area. The need to perform a branch reinforcement calculation is triggered by — the placement of a generic branch component with the actual item name determined from a branch table. The larger of these two values is compared against the preferred thickness value in the Thickness Data table. If the Thickness Data table uses schedules as preferred thickness.) — the presence of more than one item name in the Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes fields of the applicable branch table. it is compared against the thickness range in the Materials table and the retirement thickness in the Thickness Data table. pipe outside diameter must be calculated or retrieved from a table before the wall thickness can be used as part of a table name. or structural grade quality factor (E). The value for this factor is yyy/100. where yyy is defined in the entry *Cyyy made under the Schedule Thickness attribute for the Commodity Item under consideration. Then the system adds the corrosion allowance from the PMC.

_ _______________ and output 2 gives the actual wall thickness. Delivered Equations Verification of Schedule Thickness You can set an option in the RDB to determine how the piping segment override schedule/thickness value will be handled during wall thickness calculations. By default. 6. Piping Job Spec Tables 207 . the piping segment schedule/thickness override is used in place of the value determined from the Piping Job Specification.

tee with reducing bushing. AN*6. nipolet. Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches in the piping system as a function of the acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters for the intersecting lines. the required reinforcement must be specified in Piping Design. branch weld with reinforcing pad. reducing tee. NPD_IN. For them. The types of tee branch connections include branch weld. tee with reducing insert. tee._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. The system accesses the branch table when placing a component at an intersection when no reinforcement component has been specifically defined. weldolet. You must specify the type of wye or cross to be placed in the model and specify the reinforcement data. These tables do not include the reinforcement required at Y’s and crosses. sockolet.1. AN*6.6 Branch Insertion Tables A branch insertion table defines the selection criteria for tee and lateral branches. AN*6 ! Nom Diam Preferred Branch ! Header Branch AABBCC Codes WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ END 208 . and reducing tee with reducer(s). Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’BWWWW_WW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN. The system uses the information in this table and the header nominal diameter (first size) and branch nominal diameter (second size) to provide the item name of the component to be used at the intersection. threadolet. Neither interpolation nor extrapolation is allowed. coupling.

063CA.75 ’6Q3C24’ 1 1 ’6Q3C22’ 1.75 ’6Q3C74’ 2 1 ’6Q3C74’ 2 1.75 0.5 ’6Q3C22’ 2 0. AN*6.5 1 ’6Q3C24’ 1. AN*6 ! Nom Diam Preferred Branch ! Header Branch AABBCC Codes 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ 3 1 ’6Q3C74’ 3 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 6 2 ’6Q3C73’ > 6 3 ’6Q3C73’ > 6 4 ’6Q3C73’ 6 6 ’6Q3C22’ 8 0.5 ’6Q3C74’ 2 2 ’6Q3C22’ 3 0.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 4 2 ’6Q3C73’ > 4 3 ’6Q3C73’ 4 4 ’6Q3C22’ 6 0.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 12 2 ’6Q3C73’ > 12 3 ’6Q3C73’ > 12 4 ’6Q3C73’ 12 6 ’6Q3C82’ 12 8 ’6Q3C82’ 12 10 ’6Q3C82’ 12 12 ’6Q3C22’ END Date=17-Aug-1988 Branch Insertion Tables 6.75 ’6Q3C22’ 1 0.5 1. Use with TA501 ! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=3 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN. Piping Job Spec Tables 209 .75 ’6Q3C74’ 10 1 ’6Q3C74’ 10 1.75 ’6Q3C74’ 4 1 ’6Q3C74’ 4 1._ _______________ Example Table_Data_Definition ’BA501_90’ ! Description= A.75 ’6Q3C24’ 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 10 2 ’6Q3C73’ > 10 3 ’6Q3C73’ > 10 4 ’6Q3C73’ 10 6 ’6Q3C82’ 10 8 ’6Q3C82’ 10 10 ’6Q3C22’ 12 0.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 8 2 ’6Q3C73’ > 8 3 ’6Q3C73’ > 8 4 ’6Q3C73’ > 8 6 ’6Q3C73’ 8 8 ’6Q3C22’ 10 0. AN*6.5 0. NPD_IN.75 ’6Q3C74’ 12 1 ’6Q3C74’ 12 1.75 ’6Q3C74’ 8 1 ’6Q3C74’ 8 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 3 2 ’6Q3C73’ 3 3 ’6Q3C22’ 4 0.0.75 ’6Q3C74’ 6 1 ’6Q3C74’ 6 1.

030" 4= 0. negative values and values less than 20 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid (per ANSI B31. stainless steels and non-ferrous alloys.050" 5= 0. The second part of the table name defines the acute angle of intersection. This name results from the compounding of the Branch Table entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the acute angle of intersection between the header and the branch.5 inch diameter I= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter Z= Special criteria — third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the table is intended.125" 8= 0. Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels.Branch Insertion Table Name (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the table.020" 3= 0. as defined below. 210 . Negative values and values less than 45 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid. criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Parameters Table_Data_Definition . when dealing with branch reinforcements. A= Criteria 1 with no threaded components B= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter C= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.3).1 and ANSI B31. These tables use the following naming conventions: — first character: B — second character: a code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size for which threaded components are used in the PMC.188" 9= 0.10" 7= 0.250" A= 405 clad B= 410S clad C= 304 clad D= 304L clad E= 316 clad F= 316L clad G= 317 clad H= 317L clad J= 321 clad L= Cement lined M= Epoxy lined N= Glass lined O= Kynar lined P= Polyester lined Q= Polypropylene lined R= PTFE lined S= Saran lined T= Teflon lined U= TK31 lined V= R11 lined W= R15 lined X= R18 lined Y= Other 1 Z= Other 2 — fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique. per the following criteria: 1= None 2= 0.5 inch diameter D= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter F= Criteria 2 with no threaded components G= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter H= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1. However.063" 6= 0.

followed by weldolets. these codes should be arranged in ascending strength sequence (for example. Branch Insertion Tables 6. Nom Diam Header . The system tests the listed item names sequentially (from left to right) until the applicable strength criteria are satisfied. followed by reinforcing pads.NPD for Branch (integer) — This field identifies the nominal diameter of the branch member at the intersection. This is the member with the smallest nominal diameter. Piping Job Spec Tables 211 .NPD for Run (integer) — This field identifies the nominal diameter of the header at the intersection. the system calculates the branch reinforcement thickness. — Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees. Therefore._ _______________ The data fields are sorted by header NPD and then by branch NPD. Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes (character 6) — These field identify the commodity item name of the component used to reinforce the intersection. reinforcing welds. This is the member with the largest nominal diameter. Nom Diam Branch . — Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and weldolets. — If only one item name is listed. — If two or more item names apply in one line. The specified item is placed at the intersection. no branch reinforcement calculation is performed. the codes are from one of the following types: — Reinforcing elements.) Typically. such as reinforcing welds and pads.

DF. to determine the gap thickness to be used at the end.5 1001 . IN ! Diam TMx Gaskt Gap WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ END Example Table_Data_Definition ’G001_1500’ ! Description= SP-1000 deg F .125 12 1000 . the NPD of the end.5 1000 .125 20 1000 .16 0.12 3 1001 .125 4 1000 .12 212 .1. the system uses the applicable table.7 Gasket Separation Table These tables define the gasket gap to be used for a given nominal diameter and maximum temperature.125 18 1000 .125 1 1000 .16 1.16 2 1001 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6.125 3 1000 .125 10 1000 . and the maximum temperature for the gasket to be used at the end. RJ-1001 deg F ! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=0 Date=24-Jun-1987 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN.125 0.125 8 1000 .125 6 1000 .16 1 1001 . Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’GWWW_WWWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN.5 1001 .75 1000 . DF.5 1000 .75 1001 . For each bolted end.125 1.125 24 1000 . Lines in this table are sorted by NPD first and maximum temperature second. IN ! Diam TMx Gaskt Gap 0.125 16 1000 .125 14 1000 .125 0.125 2 1000 .

12 . TMx .44 Gasket Separation Table Parameters Table_Data_Definition .31 . These tables use the following naming conventions: — first character: G — next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique.31 . Gasket Gap — This field identifies the full gasket gap to be used. This name results from the compounding of the entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the rating of the bolted end to which the gasket gap applies._ _______________ 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 END 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 . Diam . — The second part of the table name is the rating of the components to which it applies. (The system must find a match of the commodity item temperature and the value in this column for successful retrieval of data.12 .19 .Gasket Gap Table Name (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the table.38 .) The units of measure used to define the temperature must be the same as the units used in the Temperature Pressure Service Limits table. 6.Nominal Piping Diameter — This field identifies the applicable NPD value.22 .16 . Piping Job Spec Tables 213 . The units of measure used to define the NPD must match the NPD units to be used in the Piping model.16 .Maximum Temperature — This field identifies the maximum temperature for the gasket as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 5). The characters CL and # are not included in the rating designation.

Set the Fluid Code Control toggle to Yes on the Piping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager. Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’FC001’ ! Description= By Process Vendor ! By=SCC Ckd By=SCC Rev=1 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0 Units= INT 521 522 524 527 530 533 536 539 542 545 550 END Date=12-OCT-90 Parameters Table_Data_Definition (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the Fluid Code table. forth. the Fluid Code table contains a set of valid Fluid Codes for a PMC. To use a Fluid Code table. A Fluid Code table works much like the Diameters table. 214 .1.8 Fluid Code Table Fluid Code tables can be used to limit the number of fluid codes which are valid for a particular Piping Material Class. These tables use the following naming conventions: — first and second character: FC — third. Where the Diameters Table contains a valid set of diameters for a PMC. Specify the name of the Fluid Code Table in the fluid_code attribute of the Piping Materials Class definition._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. Fld Cd (integer) — This field list the code list numbers for the valid fluid codes from code list set 125. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on this form. and fifth characters: numbers from 001 to 999 used to make the table name unique.

page 303. RDB Tables 6. for information on the basic conventions used for PDS tables._ _______________ 6. TNF G02 G04 G06 G07 G11 Table Name COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME BEND_DEFLECTION PIPE_RUN_LENGTH PIPE_LENGTH BOLT_LENGTH WELD_TYPE_TABLE WELD_C10031 DRV_WELD_DEF CommodityCode_BLT (Bolt Commodity Code Table) CommodityCode_GKT (Gasket Diameter Table) FIELD_FIT_LENGTH Component_Mirror_Table Operator_Mirror_Table Default_End_Prep MTO Tables and Functions The system uses the settings in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff forms of the Project Data Manager to determine the applicable names for these basic tables. Refer to Table Formats and Naming Conventions.2 RDB Tables The following reference data tables are defined in the Spec Table Library. These tables required to provide basic data for the performance of the software. Piping Job Spec Tables 215 .

It enables you to relate the component types (1 to 70) hard-coded in the software with the applicable Item Names. it uses the derived Item Name from this table to reference the Piping Commodity Specification data in the Specification Material Reference Database. this table is used in conjunction with the Bend Deflection Table. AN*6 ! Comp ! Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 > 23 > 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 AABBCC Code ’PIPING’ ’TUBING’ ’HOSE’ ’6Q2C23’ ’6Q2C01’ ’6Q2C01’ ’6Q2C76’ ’6Q2C75’ ’6Q2C56’ ’6Q2C55’ ’6Q3C45’ ’6Q3C60’ ’6Q2C47’ ’6Q2C84’ ’6Q3C47’ ’6Q3C49’ ’6Q3C50’ ’6Q3C25’ ’6Q3C47’ ’6Q3C77’ ’6Q3C82’ ’6Q3C80’ ’6Q3C88’ ’6Q2C24’ ’6Q1C76’ ’6Q2C16’ ’6Q2C19’ ’6Q2C21’ ’6Q2C08’ - 216 . As the system processes the segment for component placement._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6.2. When placing change of direction components. The table name format that applies to this table is: TNF=G02 COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME Example Table_Data_Definition ’COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME’ ! Description= Correlation of hardcoded component types and AABBCC codes ! By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=16-May-1989 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= INT.1 Commodity Item Name Table (G02) The commodity item name table is used when placing a component at the vertex of an existing piping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement).

C end plug cap blind flange Closing component A .5 degree bend Orifice flange In-line nipple Pipe-like commodity item 1 ._ _______________ 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 END ’IND’ ’6Q2C49’ ’6Q2C51’ ’6Q2C53’ ’6Q2C06’ ’6Q3C89’ Commodity Item Name Table (G02) The meaning of the various component types is outlined below: Comp Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25-27 28 29 30 31 32-37 38-40 41 42 43 44 45 51-60 61-70 Definition Piping (not used by the software) Tubing (not used by the software) Hose (not used by the software) Concentric diameter change Flange in bends Flange in other components 90 degree directional change 45-90 degree directional change 45 degree directional change < 45 degree directional change True Y Equal size cross (if not equal size.625 degree bend 11.10 Pipe-like model code 1 .10 6.F Instrument indicator A . Piping Job Spec Tables 217 .C 5.25 degree bend 22. software will handle as a branch) > 90 pipe bend 90 degree reducing elbow Lateral (not used by the software) Reducing lateral Reducing run and branch lateral Reducing run and branch tee Lateral (not used by the software) Elbolet (used by Compute for Elbolet under the Tap command) Reinforcing weld Reinforcing pad Branch nipple vent/drain valve A .

218 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 If you do not want to place one of the above component types as part of automatic component placement. place a hyphen (-) for the Item Name.

2. Piping Job Spec Tables 219 .high index into the Commodity Item Name table for a full size bend index into the Commodity Item Name table for a reducing bend This table defines which full size and reducing size component types will be placed for a specified angle range. Bend Deflection Table (G04) The system uses the bend angle to search this table for the matching range of bend angles.low bend angle . one table can apply to underground piping and the other to aboveground piping. page 216. For example. The angle is defined as the smallest angle that the continuation of one pipe run makes with the other run. This table contains the following data bend angle .2 Bend Deflection Table (G04) The bend deflection table is used when placing a component at the vertex of an existing piping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement).) A value of 0 for the type indicates that no reducing component should be placed for an angle range. The component types are defined in the commodity item name table. The system uses the bend angle at the segment vertex to determine the type of component to be placed. You can define more than one bend deflection table for a project provided they are given different names. (See Commodity Item Name Table (G02)._ _______________ 6. The table name format that applies to this table is: TNF=G04 BEND_DEFLECTION 6. Refer to the Component Placement form in the Project Data Manager for information on defining the bend deflection table for a project or model. The system searches for an entry in the table where the angle is greater than or equal to the low bend angle and less than the high bend angle. The system uses the index into the Commodity Item Name table for either a full size bend or a reducing bend depending upon the nominal piping diameters of the line route segments that form the bend.

1 9 0 45.1 90.9 45.9 90. DEC.9 13 0 END The following listing shows the component types used in this example.1 44.9 90. INT.1 44.1 7 14 90._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Example Table_Data_Definition ’BEND_DEFLECTION’ ! Description= Component type to use as function of angle between runs ! By=EPZ Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=09-Nov-1987 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 2 Units= DEC. INT ! Angle Comp Type To Use ! Low High Full Red 0.9 10 0 44.1 89.1 89.9 45. bend angle low high 0.1 45.1 179.9 89.9 44.9 index full size 10 ( < 45 trimmed bend) 9 (45 bend) 8 (45-90 trimmed bend) 7 (90 bend) 13 ( > 90 trimmed bend) reducing size N/A N/A N/A 14 (reducing 90 bend) N/A 220 .1 179.9 8 0 89.

The table name format that applies to this table is: TNF=G06 PIPE_RUN_LENGTH Example Table_Data_Definition ’PIPE_RUN_LENGTH’ ! Description= Minimum allowable piping segment run length ! By=DCG Ckd By=GJH Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN.2. The value for nominal diameter is interpreted as follows: Diam Entry n1 n2 n3 . IN ! Diam Min Length 2 0._ _______________ 6. n8 n9 Range of Diameters Covered nominal diameter < n1 n1 <= nominal diameter < n2 n2 <= nominal diameter < n3 n8 <= nominal diameter Using this scheme. The Piping Designer insures that the length of any pipe run of a piping segment exceeds the active segment run length threshold.75 inches in length.50 24 0. The only exception to this is for the small pipe run required for the offset of an eccentric reducer. Piping Job Spec Tables 221 ..3 Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06) Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06) This table enables you to define the minimum allowable segment run length which can be placed in the model during centerline routing.00 192 1. The values defined in this table do not apply to the segment run automatically created by the software when placing components end to end. if you are placing a segment with 12 inch NPD.00 END 6.75 36 1.50 12 0... you can only place segments greater than . For example.25 6 0. The threshold is determined from this table as a function of nominal piping diameter. This threshold is used to insure that the pipe run between two connected bends exceeds the fabrication length of the two bends. you should look on the line following the actual segment NPD to determine the minimum length.00 96 1.00 144 1. Only lengths greater than the minimum length in the table are allowed.

4 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07) This table enables you to define the minimum and preferred allowable pipe lengths which can be placed (manually or by automatic component placement).. IN ! Min Preferred ! Diam Length Length 2 2 2 6 2 3 12 2 4 24 3 6 36 3 9 96 3 12 144 6 12 192 6 12 END 222 . The threshold is determined as a function of the nominal piping diameter. This table is used during model creation and model revision activities to verify the nominal or theoretical pipe (or tube) length. if you are placing a pipe with 12 inch NPD... you should look on the line following the actual NPD to determine the minimum length. IN. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=G07 PIPE_LENGTH Example Table_Data_Definition ’PIPE_LENGTH’ ! Description= Minimum and preferred allowable plain piping length ! By=DCG Ckd By=GJH Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN.2. n8 n9 Range of Diameters Covered nominal diameter < n1 n1 <= nominal diameter < n2 n2 <= nominal diameter < n3 n8 <= nominal diameter Using this scheme. The Piping Designer insures that the length of any pipe or tube exceeds the pipe length threshold._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. Only lengths greater than the minimum length in the table are allowed. Any value for nominal diameter is interpreted as follows: Diam Entry n1 n2 n3 . you can only place pipe runs greater than 3 inches in length. as defined in this table. For example.

0001 6.5 6.25 4.7501 7 7 7.0 1.5 2.7501 4 4 4. It determines the bolt data required for both regular and bolt-thru bolts.7501 5 5 5.25 3.5001 4.5001 8.5 4. Piping Job Spec Tables 223 .0001 5.5 5.75 1.25 7.75 6. You can define up to 300 entries in this table.25 2.5001 5.25 8.5001 1.0001 7.7501 6 6 6.75 8.25 9. end preparation for each mating flange.5 7.2.5 6.2501 5.75 2._ _______________ 6.5 9.25 6.75 4.5 6.75 4.2501 6.5001 2.5 3.25 2. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=G11 BOLT_LENGTH Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on bolt tables and bolt table logic.2501 7.7501 9 9 9.75 3.25 5.0001 2.25 3.5 3.2501 3.75 5.25 8.5 1.75 8.5 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11) The data for bolts and gaskets is a function of nominal diameter.5 8.2501 4.75 5. Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11) Example Table_Data_Definition ’BOLT_LENGTH’ ! Description= Preferred bolt lengths (maximum of 300 entries) ! By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= IN.75 1.7501 2 2 2.2501 9. IN.2501 2.7501 8 8 8.0001 8.75 7.5001 3.75 3. and cap screws.5 4.25 6.75 7. This table enables you to define the low and high range for calculated bolt lengths and the corresponding preferred or purchased lengths of the bolt.75 2.75 6.25 9.5 5.0001 4. The bolt length table supplies data for machine bolts.25 5.0001 3.0001 9.25 4.7501 3 3 3.5001 6.5 1.5001 7.25 7. and pressure rating for each mating flange.2501 8.5 7. stud bolts.5 8.5 2. IN ! Bolt Length Preferred ! Low High Bolt Length 0.

5001 25.75 16 16.5 11.75 18 18.5 16.0001 23.5 10.25 16.75 20 20.5 23.5 16.7501 17.75 21 21.5001 22.7501 19.5 14.5001 17.0001 14.25 20.25 23.75 10 10.25 22.5 20.5001 12.7501 13.75 12 12.7501 16.25 14.25 24.2501 20.25 21.25 11.2501 13.25 12.0001 24.2501 24.5 26.5 18.2501 17.7501 10.75 19 19.2501 16.0001 25.25 23.5 24.7501 20.0001 18.5 13.5001 16.5 20.5 11.2501 23.7501 21.25 17.7501 22.75 11 11.7501 15.75 12 12.5 24.5 15.5001 24.75 13 13.5 17.75 9.2501 14.2501 21.75 19 19.75 23 23.25 20.25 25.2501 22.25 10.25 15.5001 14.5001 9.75 25 25.7501 11.75 24 24.25 13.25 26.75 26 26.25 18.75 24 24.7501 25.25 14.25 17.7501 18.25 10.5 15.0001 19.25 22.2501 19.2501 25.25 25.75 26 26.2501 11.5 21.75 25 25.75 20 20.0001 10.75 22 22.75 22 22.5 22.5001 15.75 15 15.75 10 10.25 19.5001 21.25 12.5 13.7501 24.25 16.2501 26.5 25.75 21 21.75 18 18.75 17 17.2501 12.75 13 13.7501 12.5001 19.7501 26.5 12._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 9.5 23.5 21.25 13.0001 11.5 19.0001 16.25 24.75 14 14.5001 11.75 224 .75 14 14.25 18.2501 15.5 19.0001 21.0001 22.5 14.0001 17.25 21.2501 10.0001 26.7501 23.5 10.0001 12.7501 14.75 23 23.75 15 15.25 11.5 22.0001 13.75 11 11.5 26.25 15.5 12.5 17.5001 13.5001 9.0001 15.2501 18.75 17 17.75 16 16.5001 23.5001 18.5 18.5001 20.5 25.0001 20.25 26.5001 10.25 19.

75 36 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11) 6.25 32.25 33.75 30 30.5001 32.5 27.7501 31.25 35.25 29.5 35.2501 30.7501 29.75 28 28._ _______________ 26.5 30.75 35 35.75 30 30.25 30.5 29.25 35.5 30.25 28.7501 35.75 29 29.25 28.5 32.0001 28.5 33.25 34.75 32 32.25 27.2501 35.5 35.5 27.75 29 29.0001 33.2501 27.2501 33.5 33.5001 31.25 33.25 30.75 31 31.7501 32.0001 34.5 31.2501 28.75 36 27 27.25 27.7501 27.75 28 28.25 31.5001 29.0001 32.0001 29.5 28.5001 28.5001 34.75 35 35.0001 31.0001 35.2501 31.7501 34.75 34 34.75 34 34.75 33 33.2501 29.75 32 32.25 29.5 31.5 28.7501 END 27 27.5001 33.0001 30.7501 33.25 31.2501 32. Piping Job Spec Tables 225 .5001 30.25 32.75 31 31.5 29.5 34.25 34.75 33 33.5 34.7501 28.5001 35.7501 30.2501 34.0001 27.5001 27.5 32.

2. The fabrication category values are determined from the connect point data at each of the mating welded ends. The table name format that applies to this table is: WELD_TYPE_TABLE Example Table_Data_Definition ’Weld_Type_Table’ ! This Table nas NOT been Checked No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= INT.6 Weld Type Table This table defines the weld type code for a given pair of fabrication category values. INT ! Fab Cat 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 15 15 15 15 Fab Cat 1 5 7 15 16 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 5 7 15 16 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 7 15 16 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 15 16 17 25 Weld Type 1 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 11 21 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 21 11 226 . INT._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6.

Piping Job Spec Tables 227 ._ _______________ 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 35 35 35 35 35 35 37 37 37 37 37 45 45 45 45 47 47 47 95 95 97 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 16 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 35 37 45 47 95 97 37 45 47 95 97 45 47 95 97 47 95 97 95 97 97 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 12 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 11 21 11 21 21 21 21 21 21 11 21 11 21 21 21 21 11 21 21 Weld Type Table 6.

7 Weld Clearance Table This table contains information obtained from the NPD and the Weld Type table. IN ! ! NPD ! From 1 3 5 7 9 9 9 11 END Weld Type From 1 1 1 1 1 21 23 1 Weld Type To 25 25 25 25 20 22 25 25 NPD To 2 4 6 8 10 10 10 12 Radius Increase 6 8 10 6 10 12 14 10 Overall Length 18 24 30 18 18 24 30 30 Parameters NPD From . Radius_Increase (integer . The table name format that applies to this table is: WELD_SpecName Example Table_Data_Definition ’WELD_1C0031’ ! Description= Weld Clearance Table ! By=XXX Ckd By=XXX Rev=1 Date=01-22-1999 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN.NPD To (integer) — These parameters identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the weld in NPD units. Add a version of this table to the Physical Data Library for each spec.2. Overall_Length (integer) — This parameter identifies the length of the cylinder for the weld construction tolerance envelope. IN.NPD Units) — This parameter identifies the increase to be applied to the NPD of the weld for use in generating a cylinder to represent the construction tolerance envelope for the weld.Weld_Type_To (integer) — These parameters identify the range of weld type values (from standard note 1100)._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. INT. which are retrieved from the piping model. The To value must equal or exceed the From value. The To value must equal or exceed the From value. INT. NPD_IN. Weld_Type_From . 228 .

— Thickness = 25% of the NPD at the weld. Piping Job Spec Tables 229 . The To value must equal or exceed the From value.TO _NPD (integer) — These parameters identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the weld in NPD units.25.5). 6. the weld graphics dimensions will be determined as follows: — Diameter = 130% of the NPD at the weld. INT.25 0.To_Weld_Type (integer) — These parameters identify the range of the weld type values (from standard note 1100). DEC ! From_NPD From_Weld_Type TO_NPD To_Weld_Type Weld_Dia_Increase Weld_Thickness_NPD_Units 2 6 8 END 10 12 10 7 10 12 22 22 22 0.25 0. Weld_Thickness (decimal) — This parameter identifies the percentage to be applied to the NPD of the weld to determine the thickness of the cylinder.25 0.25 = 7. the diameter of the weld cylinder would be 7 1/2" (6 x 1. The To value must equal or exceed the From value.8 Weld Graphics Dimensions Table This table provides the dimensions used to generate the graphical representation of welds in a DesignReview session. You may customize this table to modify the appearance of weld graphics by weld type and diameter.25 0. For example.25 Parameters From NPD .25 0. INT. If this table is absent or if there is no NPD range encapsulating the WELD NPD. NPD_IN. Weld_Dia_Increase (decimal) — This parameter identifies the percentage increase to be applied to the NPD of the weld for use in displaying a cylinder to represent the weld in SmartPlant Review. DEC._ _______________ 6. From_Weld_Type . The table name format that applies to this table is: DRV_WELD_DEF Weld Graphics Dimensions Table Example Table_Data_Definition ’DRV_WELD_DEF’ ! Description= WELD GRAPHICS DIMENSIONS ! TNF=G12T By=XXX Ckd By=XX Rev=0 Date= 04-Oct-2000 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN. if the NPD is 6" and the increase is .2.

you should code a hyphen (-) in the third column.9 Bolt Commodity Code Table This table is used if the Basis of Bolt Commodity Code is set to Bolt Commodity Code Table in the Project Data Manager. AN*8 ! Bolt Bolt Length Bolt Commodity Code ! Diam Low High 1 2 3 WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ END 230 . AN*8._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. The table name format that applies to this table is: Cmdty Code_BLT Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_BLT’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4 Units= IN.2. The system uses the bolt length and bolt diameter to find the commodity code in the table. IN. IN. AN*8. If you define a bolt commodity code which is less than 17 characters.

The system uses the NPD to find the gasket outside and inside diameters. IN.10 Gasket Diameter Table This table is used if the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to _GKT. The table name format that applies to this table is: Cmdty Code_GKT Gasket Diameter Table Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_GKT’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN.2. IN ! Gasket Diameter ! NPD Inside Outside WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END 6._ _______________ 6. Piping Job Spec Tables 231 .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. IN ! Weld Type 1 11 21 22 Adjust. MTO reads the specified table and increases the pipe length at each welded end of the pipe based on the weld type at that specific end. ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ 232 .11 Field Fit Length Table This table defines the pipe length adjustment for a given weld type. This table is only used if the Field Fit Length option is activated on the Material Takeoff Options form in the Project Data Manager. Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’Fit_Length_Table’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= INT.2. The weld type is determined from the connect point data at the mating welded ends.

Piping Job Spec Tables 233 . — the specific item.2. — mirror logic in the Eden module. All items with these setting must have a tutorial accessed in the Eden module to allow the user to change the TOGGLE during placement. Component Mirror Table Example Table_Data_Definition ’Component_Mirror_Table’ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= AN*6. where <INT> is an integer value as defined below for Option 1. The model codes is used as input by the calling Eden module. The Model Code item will be rotated due to a specific non symmetrical definition where there are no non symmetrical connect points involved. the item is only stocked in one non symmetrical configuration which has non symmetrical connect points involved. Option 1 — This column represents the TOGGLE_<INT> Eden variable or specific command instruction used to control a non symmetrical mirror operation. This table is called through the use of the Eden keyword TOGGLE_<INT>. For example. The item will not be mirrored due to specific non symmetrical definition. Option 2 & Option 3 — These columns are not currently used. INT. This column can have any of the following values.12 Component Mirror Table This table is used for components which require non-symmetrical mirroring. In other words. It defines a mirror option for a given eden module. if Option 1 = 1 check the TOGGLE_1 Eden variable in the Eden module to perform specific logic to compensate for a mirrored component. — degrees instead of mirroring it. INT ! Model Code Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Parameters Model Code — This columns list the model codes for components which require nonsymmetrical mirroring. INT. 6._ _______________ 6.

— degrees instead of mirroring it. if Option 1 = 1 check the TOGGLE_1 Eden variable in the Eden module to perform specific logic to compensate for a mirrored component. where <INT> is an integer value as defined below for Option 1. Option 1 — This column represents the TOGGLE_<INT> Eden variable or specific command instruction used to control a non symmetrical mirror operation. This column can have any of the following values._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. All items with these setting must have a tutorial accessed in the Eden module to allow the user to change the TOGGLE during placement. INT ! Model Code OI_33 OI_35 OI_43 OI_53 A_1033 OP_331 OP_332 OP_333 OP_334 OP_351 OP_493 OP_494 OP_573 OP_574 OP_711 OP_853 OP_854 Option 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Option 2 Option 3 - Parameters Model Code — This columns list the model codes for operator which support mirroring.2. The model codes is used as input by the calling Eden module. This table is called through the use of the Eden keyword TOGGLE_<INT>. INT. It defines a mirror option for a given eden module. For example. Example Table_Data_Definition ’Operator_Mirror_Table’ ! This Table has NOT been Checked ! No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= AN*6. 234 . — mirror logic in the Eden module.13 Operator Mirror Table This table is used for operators that require non-symmetrical mirroring. INT.

if Option 1 = 1000 the Model Code item will be rotated due to a specific non symmetrical definition where there are no non symmetrical connect points involved. — tell the Mirror command to rotate the component 180 degrees instead of mirroring it. Piping Job Spec Tables 235 ._ _______________ For example. The item is only stocked in one non symmetrical configuration and does not have non symmetrical connect points involved. Option 2 & Option 3 — These columns are not currently used. Operator Mirror Table 6.

the last line (421 391) indicates that the end prep for an instrument/specialty connected to a SWE (421) component.2. If the table does not exist in RDB. The system looks for a table with the name Default_End_Prep in the spec table library. the end preparation for the instrument or piping specialty is set based on entries in the table. will default to PE (391). If the table does not exist in the library. the instrument/specialty end prep would default to SWE (421). In the example above. the end prep for the instrument/ specialty defaults to the end prep of the connected piping component. Example Table_Data_Definition ’Default_End_Prep’ ! No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= INT. the end prep for the instrument/specialty defaults to the end prep of the connected piping component.14 Default End Preperation Table The Default End Preparation Table is an optional table that can be used to automatically set the end preparation of instruments and piping specialties that are being placed in a piping model. 236 . If the table exists in the spec table library and the active placement point is connected to previously placed piping or a nozzle. In the table above. INT ! !E_P_in 331 392 441 421 E_P_out 441 421 331 391 Data Retrieval The system performs a table look-up using the active end preparation value._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6.

15 MTO Tables and Functions The following special tables and functions are used by the system during Material Take-Off. Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on the reporting process. Piping Job Spec Tables 237 . field fit length tables (not currently implemented) preferred bolt length tables preferred bolt length roundoff factor nut allowance table bolt diameter and bolt pattern specification Gasket Outside and Inside diameter tables Bolt Length/Diameter Commodity Code tables MTO Tables and Functions 6._ _______________ 6.2.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 238 .

3 Piping Job Specification Tables Command Piping Job Specification Tables Command This command enables you to access the library management options for the Piping Job Specification Table Library. The system tracks revision dates for table entries when a table is revised. The spec tables for US practice are delivered in the file us_pjstb. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path. the software regenerates the library file. This revision management data is recorded in a separate Table Revision Management Library. 6.1 release.l. You can also create reports of the data in the library and post data from the unapproved library to the approved library.r. or delete data in an existing Library.000 bytes per table. If the library has been removed or deleted. With the 4. With the 7. Piping Job Spec Tables 239 . Operating Sequence The Piping Job Specification Tables command activates the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form used to control the contents of the spec table library.000 bytes per table to 20.l in the RDUSRDB product directory. the limitation on the size of tables in the Piping Job Spec Table Library was increased from approximately 16._ _______________ 6.000 bytes or 750 lines. named <table_library>. Before Using This Command Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Piping Job Spec Table library files in the Reference Database Management Data.2 release.000 bytes to 60. You can create a new library file or create. the limitation on the size of tables in the Piping Job Spec Table Library was increased from approximately 20. modify.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. See page 242. Report — used to create a report of the library contents. See page 245. 240 . Revise — used to select a table from the library for editing and compile the revised table definition. You can create a single table or specify a list of tables to be created. See page 243. See page 247. Extract — used to extract a table file from the library for editing or printing. List — used to list the files contained in the library. See page 242. See page 251. See page 248. Create/Interactive — used to compile table files and add the resulting code to the Piping Job Spec Table library.3. See page 242. See page 250. Unapproved ==> Approved — used to copy the unapproved Piping Job Spec Table library to the approved library. Compress Library — used to compress the Piping Job Spec Table library.1 Options Create Library — used to create a new Piping Job Spec Table Library. Create/Batch — used to compile and add tables to the library via batch processing. See page 244. Delete — used to delete a specified table from the library.

for information on defining the default location for library files. Piping Job Spec Tables 241 ._ _______________ Field Descriptions Refer to Default Project Control Data. You can also change the default file locations for each option at any time. page 53. Piping Job Specification Tables Command 6.

6. the text library (. It automatically creates the object library (. 6.3 Compress Library This option is used to compress the Piping Job Spec Table library. the system displays an error indicating the library already exists._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6.3.r) for the library that is being created. and table revision management library (. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files.3. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed. 242 .4 Unapproved ==> Approved This option copies the unapproved Piping Job Spec Table library to the approved library.t).2 Create Library This option is used to create a new Piping Job Spec Table Library.l. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.l. If you specify an existing library file.l).3.t. The system displays the approved and unapproved Piping Job Spec Table Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data.

_ _______________ 6.) 4. create a list file in the Piping Spec Path directory which identifies the names of the table files to be added. You can create a single table or specify a list of tables to be created. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the table file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library.5 Create/Interactive Spec Tables This option enables you to compile tables and add the resulting code to the spec table library. Create/Interactive Spec Tables Before Using This Command To add more than one table to the library. 3. Select the Create option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form. Operating Sequence 1. 6. Set the toggle to Single to process a single table file or to List to process a list file. All of the listed files must reside in the Piping Spec Path directory. page 190. Piping Job Spec Tables 243 . Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file and begin processing. 2. for information on the table formats. This file should list one filename per line with no directory paths. (Refer to PJS Tables and Functions.3.

Select the Create/Batch option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form. For Delayed Submit. Set the toggle to Single to process a single table file or to List to process a list file. set the time to process the table files.6 Create/Batch Spec Tables This option enables you to load table files into the Spec Table Library as a batch operation at a specified time.3. Accept the file and begin processing. The list file should contain one entry (filename) per line. 3. 5. 244 . Specify Filename for Processing Key in the name of the table file or list file to be added to the active library._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. 2. 4. Accept to Submit or Set Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference. create a list file which identifies the names of the table files to be added. Operating Sequence 1. Before Using This Command To add more than one table file to the library.

6. The system updates the revision date for revised table in the Table Revision Management Library.7 Revise Spec Tables This option enables you to revise selected table files from the library. Piping Job Spec Tables 245 . and then compile the table and put it back in the library. select the table.3. 2. The system extracts the specified table from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control. For each table to be edited. 3._ _______________ 6. Revise Spec Tables Operating Sequence 1.sh file) to enable you to modify the file. edit the file. Select Table for Revision Select the table file to be revised and select Accept. Select the Revise option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

the editor screen is invoked automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Make any changes to the displayed file. You can select another table to be revised as specified in step 2. 4. When you exit the text editor. The system redisplays the list of table files. 246 . the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. If an error occurs in revising a table.

It also deletes the revision date for the table from the Table Revision Management Library. Accept or Exit Accept the selected tables.8 Delete Spec Tables This option enables you to delete tables from the Piping Job Spec Table Library. 3. Delete Spec Tables Operating Sequence 1. Select the Delete option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form._ _______________ 6. 6. Select Module Name Select the table files to be deleted from the list of tables. Piping Job Spec Tables 247 . The system deletes the tables from the Spec Table Library. 2.3. Select Module Name. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available tables.

Set the toggle to Default Report to create a list file of all the table files in the library. Select the Report option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form. — OR — Key in the file information (Node Name and File Path) for the location of the neutral file to be created. 4. — OR — Set the toggle to Revision Dates Report and key in a revision date to process all tables modified since the specified revision date. Operating Sequence 1. Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the source of information to be reported. 248 . This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6.3. Accept to Form Report or Revise Report Parameters Select Accept to form the report using the default parameters. 3. The report lists the full contents of the modified tables with individual revision dates per line.9 Report on Spec Tables This option creates a report of information in the Spec Table Library. You can create a list file of all the table files in the Spec Table library or create a detailed report of all the tables modified since a specified date. 2. and proceed to step 6.

Refer to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on setting up multiple print queues. For Print or Print/Save. 6. Accept to Create Report Select Accept to create the specified report file. Select Save. Piping Job Spec Tables 249 . For Delayed Submit. the system creates a file named spec_tables in the default source file location or in the location you specified. Print or Print/Save._ _______________ 5. 7. 6. select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. Report on Spec Tables If you select the Save or Print/Save option. set the time to process the request.

10 List Spec Tables This option displays all the tables for the Spec Table Library with the revision date of each table. Select the List option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form. 250 . Operating Sequence 1.3._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6. 2. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available tables.

Select the tables from the list of files and select Accept._ _______________ 6. 2. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. otherwise it overwrites the file. The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default directory for Piping Spec Data. Extract Spec Tables Operating Sequence 1. Select the Extract option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.11 Extract Spec Tables This option enables you to extract a table file or set of table files from the Spec Table Library for editing or printing. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named PD_tbl_list. If the list file is less than 24 hours old. Piping Job Spec Tables 251 . the system appends the entries to the file.3. You can extract multiple tables at one time. 6. — OR — Select Extract All to to bulk extract all the tables in one operation.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 252 .

to access the graphic commodity library.The delivered file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom. the system uses the active parameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) to search the Piping Job Specification (PJS) for the selected item name. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for a detailed description of the actual placement process. derived from the PJS._ _______________ 7. page 23. Piping Job Specification Table Library . uses the model code (or specialty item number). See page 189. Included in this information is the model code (or specialty item number) for the selected component and the names of the spec tables defined for the Piping Materials Class.l contains parametric definitions for the components.The delivered file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb. places the symbol graphics in the model design file and writes the nongraphic information for the component in the database. See page 254. Graphic Commodity Data 7. If the selected item is found in the PJS database. The definitions in the graphic commodity library determine the physical tables required to place the component and call the tables in the physical commodity library.l contains specification tables referenced in the Piping Job Specification. 253 .The delivered file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l contains American dimension data for components. See page 266. This section describes the graphic commodity data used in placing components in the piping model. Graphic Commodity Data The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries: Graphic Commodity Library . the system reads the PJS for the parameters required to place the component. Refer to Reference Data Overview. Graphic Commodity Data Physical Data (Dimensions) Library . When you select a component for placement in the model. for an illustration of the relationships among these libraries.

l . The data associated with these modules is delivered in the following files: \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom. and any special functions of the Piping Job Specification. and instruments. and envelopes. engineered items. specialty items. The Graphic Commodity Library includes data required for model creation. 254 .object library \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.t .1 Graphic Commodity Library The Graphic Commodity Library (GCL) provides data for commodity items. This prefix is only used by the system.l. It is basically a catalog of component data which is accessed to determine physical data based on user specifications (such as NPD and end preparation) assign connect point data from the Piping Job Specification define the parametric shape for the model graphics.level language (similar to FORTRAN) which uses information from the Piping Job Specification and model to access parametric and dimensional data. it should not be keyed-in as part of the module name. The first line of each Eden module defines the type of module (such as symbol processor) and the module name. resymbolization for model presentation.text library The modular approach provides for more efficient storage of information in these libraries by enabling common information to be shared by different symbols. PDS Piping uses the Eden Parametric Language to define and place components. piping industry standards. or company design practices.character category code to be prefixed to the module name in the object library. Eden is a high. Eden is composed of three major modules Symbol Processors Physical Data Subroutines Parametric Shape Definitions These modules are designed to carry out two functions: data definition and graphic presentation. interference detection._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. operators. This statement determines a two.

_ _______________ Graphic Commodity Library 7. SP PD UF MG DG IG SS Symbol Processor Physical Data Definition Module User Function Module Model Parametric Shape Definition Module Detailed Parametric Shape Definition Module Interference Envelope Parametric Shape Definition Module Sub-Symbol Processor Module Each module must be given a unique name within the graphic commodity library. 255 . Graphic Commodity Data The entries in the library use the following prefixes to identify the type of data. Refer to the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide for information on creating or modifying these modules.

pipe support. or tap) to the physical connect point numbers (CP1. CP4 or CP5). the system searches for the specialty item name (derived from the PJS) as the module name.1. piping specialty. For an instrument. the symbol processor accesses the active component design parameters assigns connect points Calls the required physical data modules determines and calls the required parametric shape modules. 256 . The first line of the Eden module defines the type of module and the module name. The module name is determined by the type of component being placed (commodity item or specialty item). or tap connect point properties. Symbol_Processor ’module name’ This statement tells the system to use the category code SP for the prefix._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. You should use the following conventions in assigning the module name. the system searches for the Item Name as the module name. During component placement. For a commodity item. The symbol definition assigns the data corresponding to these connect point types (green. the system searches for the instrument name (derived from the PJS) as the module name. CP2. The following lists the symbol processor SPGAT which is used to control the placement of a gate valve. red. For a specialty item. or interference envelope. red. The system retrieves the active component parameters which are dependent upon a connect point from the PJS in terms of green. The delivered symbol processors are identified in the library with the prefix SP. The following statement is used in the Eden modules to indicate a symbol processor module.1 Symbol Processors A symbol processor is the controlling function or logic used to produce the graphics for a commodity item. the system searches for the New Item Name (model code) of the commodity item as the module name. CP3. If the New Item Name is blank in the Commodity Item entity. instrument.

_ _______________ ! REGULAR PATTERN. CP1 ) Call Assign_Connect_Point ( RED. Graphic Commodity Data 257 . CP2 ) physical_data_source = ’V1’ // Standard_Type Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source ) parametric_shape = ’V1’ Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape ) Valve_Operator = DABS ( Valve_Operator ) If ( Valve_Operator .LT. 0 ) Then If ( Valve_Operator . 1000 ) Then Subcomponent = ’OP’ // Valve_Operator Else Subcomponent = ’A’ // Valve_Operator EndIf Operator_Orient = FALSE EndIf Stop End Symbol Processors 7. BOLTED OR MALE ENDS GATE VALVE Symbol_Processor ’GAT’ Call Assign_Connect_Point ( GREEN.NE.

Subcomponents are additions to symbols such as an operator on a valve. (This is useful in segregating large diameter valves which almost always have a valve operator from small diameter valves which frequently do not have an operator. If the value is a negative number (such as -3) the operator is not placed with the valve._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. The value is expressed as a code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type).0 Call Prompt_to_Orient_Operator ( prompt ) EndIf physical_data_source = ’OPERATOR_3’ Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source ) parametric_shape = ’OP3’ Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape ) Stop End 258 .EQ. The first line of a sub-symbol processor module indicates the module type and the module name. TRUE ) Then prompt = 1.1. If the value is a positive number (such as 3) the operator is placed with the valve. The following depicts the subsymbol processor SSOP_3 which is used to control the placement of a hand wheel operator on the valve.2 Sub-Symbol Processor A subcomponent call in a symbol processor module indicates a sub-symbol processor. Sub_Symbol_Processor ’module name’ This statement tells the system to use the category code SS for the prefix. ! HANDWHEEL OPERATOR Sub_Symbol_Processor ’OP_3’ If ( Operator_Orient . The sub-symbol processor name for operators is a concatenation of the characters OP_ and the modifier value from the Commodity Item entity in the PJS database.) The symbol processor for the gate valve calls a sub-symbol processor (Subcomponent = ’OP’ // Valve_Operator) which places an operator on the valve.

weight data. Practice U. The specific physical data module is called by the symbol processor.. For most of the delivered symbols. The corresponding table suffix ranges and the suffix for the Piping Eden physical data modules are indicated below.JIS International .Australian International .Practice A European . The module name for a physical data module consists of a symbol type (such as V1._ _______________ 7. the physical data modules are classified into two categories: specific and generic. it should not be keyed-in as part of the module name.British Standard European .. Physical data modules are identified by the statement Physical_Data_Definition ’module name’ as the first line in the Eden module.Practice A International . You can manage ten different sets of logic for table naming conventions for the following industry practices.Practice B International . This prefix is only used by the system. Specific Physical Data Modules The physical data module PDV1_AMS determines the specific dimensions (face-to-center and face-to-face) and other physical properties for a gate valve. Graphic Commodity Data The system uses the physical data definitions to determine the dimension data. Each component must be assigned a geometric industry standard if it is to use physical data tables.Practice B Company Practice Range 1-99 100-199 200-299 300-399 400-499 500-599 600-699 700-799 800-899 900-999 Suffix AMS DIN BRITISH_STD EURO_A EURO_B JIS AUS INT_A INT_B COMPANY The geometric industry standard for a component is defined in the Piping Commodity Data table of the Material Reference Database. Practice European . and surface area data using the active design parameters. This module then calls a generic physical data module.1. This is the module called by the symbol processor SP_GAT 259 .S.3 Physical Data Definitions Physical Data Definitions 7. V2. This statement tells the system to use the category code PD for the prefix. for valves) and a generic type of geometric industry standard (such as AMS or DIN).DIN European . You can define multiple physical data modules for the same symbol depending on the type of standard being referenced (for example. V1_AMS for American standards and V1_DIN for European standards)..

and outside diameter. Term_Type_2 ) Then F_to_C_Dim_2 = F_to_C_Dim_1 Else F_to_C_Dim_2 = Output_4 EndIf F_to_F_Dim = F_to_C_Dim_1 + F_to_C_Dim_2 If ( Valve_Operator . input. output ) Facing_OD_1 = Output_1 Thickness_1 = Output_2 Seat_Depth_1 = Output_3 Thickness_1 = Thickness_1 . input. output ) Dry_Weight = Output_1 EndIf Return End Generic Physical Data Modules The generic modules contain information which is common to more than one symbol such as flange thickness. output ) Facing_OD_1 = Output_2 Thickness_1 = 0. input.EQ. MODEL ) Then Thickness_1 = 0.EQ. output ) Pipe_OD_1 = Output_2 Body_OD_1 = Pipe_OD_1 EndIf Else If ( Gen_Type_1 . output ) Facing_OD_1 = Output_1 Depth_1 = Output_2 Seat_Depth_1 = 0.0 Depth_1 = 0.0 ) Then Call Read_Table ( Table_Name_W._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Physical_Data_Definition ’V1_AMS’ physical_data_source = ’VALVE_2_AMS’ Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source ) Call Read_Table ( Table_Name_A.0 Pipe_OD_1 = 0. gasket separation.0 Pipe_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 Body_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 Else table_name = ’FEM’ // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green Call Read_Table ( table_name. input. input.Seat_Depth_1 CP_Offset_1 = Gasket_Sep_1 If ( Symbology .0 260 .EQ.0 Thickness_1 = 0. output ) Surface_Area = Output_1 Wet_Weight = Output_2 F_to_C_Dim_1 = Output_3 If ( Term_Type_1 . input. MALE ) Then table_name = ’MAL’ // Term_Type_1 // Gen_Flag_Green Call Read_Table ( table_name.0 CP_Offset_1 = 0.0 Depth_1 = 0. The physical data module V1_AMS calls another physical data module VALVE_2_AMS which contains the generic dimension data for all valves with two connect points. BOLTED ) Then table_name = ’BLT’ // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green Call Read_Table ( table_name. Physical_Data_Definition ’VALVE_2_AMS’ Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_1 If ( Gen_Type_1 .0 Body_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 Else table_name = ’MAL_300_5’ Depth_1 = Thickness_1 Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_1 Call Read_Table ( table_name.0 Seat_Depth_1 = 0. 24.LE.EQ.

output ) Pipe_OD_1 = Output_2 Body_OD_1 = Pipe_OD_1 EndIf EndIf EndIf If ( Term_Type_2 ._ _______________ If ( symbology .EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 ) Then Facing_OD_2 = Facing_OD_1 Pipe_OD_2 = Pipe_OD_1 Body_OD_2 = Body_OD_1 Thickness_2 = Thickness_1 Depth_2 = Depth_1 Seat_depth_2 = Seat_Depth_1 CP_Offset_2 = CP_Offset_1 Else Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_2 If ( Gen_Type_2 .0 Depth_2 = 0. output ) Facing_OD_2 = Output_2 Thickness_2 = 0. output ) Facing_OD_2 = Output_1 Depth_2 = Output_2 Seat_Depth_2 = 0. MODEL ) Then Depth_2 = 0.EQ.0 CP_Offset_1 = 0.0 Depth_2 = 0.0 Thickness_2 = 0. BOLTED ) Then table_name = ’BLT’ // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red Call Read_Table ( table_name. input. MODEL ) Then Thickness_2 = 0.0 If ( Symbology .0 Body_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 Else CP_Offset_2 = -Depth_2 table_name = ’MAL_300_5’ Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_2 Call Read_Table ( table_name.EQ. output ) Pipe_OD_2 = Output_2 Body_OD_2 = Pipe_OD_2 EndIf Else If ( Gen_Type_2 . input.EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_1 . Graphic Commodity Data 261 .0 Pipe_OD_2 = 0.0 Seat_Depth_2 = 0.Seat_Depth_2 CP_Offset_2 = Gasket_Sep_2 If ( Symbology . Term_Type_1 . MODEL ) Then Depth_1 = 0. output ) Facing_OD_2 = Output_1 Thickness_2 = Output_2 Seat_Depth_2 = Output_3 Thickness_2 = Thickness_2 . input. MALE ) Then table_name = ’MAL’ // Term_Type_2 // Gen_Flag_Red Call Read_Table ( table_name. input.AND.0 Pipe_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 Body_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 Else table_name = ’FEM’ // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red Call Read_Table ( table_name.0 CP_Offset_2 = 0.0 Pipe_OD_1 = 0.0 CP_Offset_2 = 0.0 Pipe_OD_2 = 0.EQ.0 Body_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 Else CP_Offset_1 = -Depth_1 table_name = ’MAL_300_5’ Call Read_Table ( table_name. input.EQ. output ) Pipe_OD_2 = Output_2 Body_OD_2 = Pipe_OD_2 EndIf Physical Data Definitions 7.0 Body_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 Else Depth_2 = Thickness_2 table_name = ’MAL_300_5’ Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_2 Call Read_Table ( table_name. input.EQ.

EQ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 EndIf EndIf EndIf Table_Name_A = Item_Name // Geo_Ind_Std // Term_Type_1 Table_Name_W = Commodity_Code Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_1 Input_2 = Nom_Pipe_D_2 If ( Term_Type_1 .AND.EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 ) Then Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // ’A’ Else If ( Gen_Type_1 . MALE ) Then ! Male X Bolted and Male X Female Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // ’A’ Else If ( Gen_Type_2 .EQ.EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_1 .EQ. Gen_Type_2 ) Then ! Male X Male or Bolted X Bolted ! or Female X Female Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // ’A’ Else If ( Gen_Type_1 . Term_Type_2 . MALE ) Then Bolted X Male and Female X Male Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // Term_Type_2 // Else Bolted X Female and Female X ! ! Bolted Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // ’A’ EndIf EndIf EndIf EndIf Return End 262 .

The first line of the Eden module indicates the module type and the module name. V2.. valve body. The parametric shape module MGOP3 determines the model graphics for a hand wheel operator. 263 . Parametric shape definitions are used to place symbol graphics in the model or define interference envelopes. This prefix is only used by the system. The first line for these modules is of the form Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’module name’ This statement tells the system to use the category code MG for the prefix. For example. The parametric shape module MGV1 determines the model graphics for a valve. Graphic Commodity Data Model Parametric Shape Definitions Model parametric shapes are used to define the symbol graphics to be placed in the model.in as part of the module name.4 Parametric Shape Definitions The parametric shape definition describes the graphics symbol (such as bend. it should not be keyed. This is the module called by the sub-symbol processor SSOP_3. two cones. Parametric shape definitions are divided into three basic types: model parametric shapes.1. and a cylinder (flange. detailed parametric shapes. the parametric shaped module for a valve consist of a cylinder. and interference envelopes. This is the module called by the symbol processor SPGAT. flange. Parametric Shape Definitions 7. flange)._ _______________ 7. This involves the following major functions defining connect point geometry placing connect points moving the active location a specified distance drawing a specific graphic shape placing a center of gravity location. for valves).. The module name for a parametric shape module consists of a symbol type (such as V1.. or valve body) which is placed for the component in the model.

diameter ) Call Place_Connect_Point ( CP0 ) Call Place_COG_Location ( DRY_COG ) Call Place_COG_Location ( WET_COG ) length = F_to_C_Dim_2 . diameter.0 radius = ( Dimension_2 . If a clash is detected during the interference detection process. Min_Cyl_Dia ) Call Move_by_Distance ( -dist ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle. angle. angle.Thickness_2 Call Draw_Cone ( length.0 Call Draw_Cone ( length. angle. Interference Parametric Shape Definition Interference parametric shapes are not used during component placement. Secondary ) Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle. 264 . Refer to the PDS Interference Checker / Manager Reference Guide for more information on interference envelopes. Body_OD_1. Normal ) Call Move_Along_Axis ( -radius. The first line for these modules is of the form Detailed_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’module name’ This statement tells the system to use the category code DG for the prefix._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’V1’ Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR ) Call Place_Connect_Point ( CP1 ) Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_Offset_1 ) Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_1.5 angle = 90.5 Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Dimension_1. dia ) dist = dia + Min_Cyl_Dia * 0. angle. Min_Cyl_Dia ) Return End Detailed Parametric Shape Definition Detailed parametric shapes are used to define more complex symbol graphics to be placed in the model when the model symbology lock is set to detailed. the interference parametric shape is used to place an interference marker. Facing_OD_2 ) Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_offset_2 ) Call Place_Connect_Point ( CP2 ) Return End Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’OP3’ Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( OPERATOR ) Call Convert_NPD_to_Subunits ( Nom_Pipe_D_1. Body_OD_2 ) Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_2. Min_Cyl_Dia ) Call Draw_Torus ( radius. Facing_OD_1 ) length = F_to_C_Dim_1 . They are referenced during interference detection to determine the volume (interference envelope) to be compared for clashes with other elements. Min_Cyl_Dia ) Call Draw_Torus ( radius.Thickness_1 diameter = 0.Min_Cyl_Dia ) * 0. Secondary ) Call Draw_Torus ( radius. Min_Cyl_Dia ) Call Draw_Torus ( radius.

Graphic Commodity Data 265 ._ _______________ Interference_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’module name’ This statement tells the system to use the category code IG for the prefix. the system uses the model graphics module to determine the interference parametric shape. Parametric Shape Definitions 7. If no interference module is found for a component.

You can also build a specific set of physical data for a particular project. Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for standards that apply to American piping practices.2 Physical Data Tables The physical data tables contain the physical data (dimensions. FEM. water weight. weights.TBL (the table name is independent of the name of the physical data module). engineered item data. Numbers 28000-31999 are reserved for specific company practices. Generic dimensional data Generic tables contain data which is not specific to a particular symbol (such as flange outside diameter or flange thickness). Geometric industry standard is expressed as a code list value from Standard Note Type 575. Specific commodity data Specific tables contain commodity data which is specific to a particular component (such as dimensions. These tables are identified by the prefix BLT. and MTO reporting. — The system uses the water weight data to compute the wet weight using the specific gravity of the operating fluid. or MAL (for the termination type) and end with the extension . and surface area).text library These libraries contain physical data for American standards.object library \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim. fluid weight = water weight * specific gravity for fluid operating weight = dry weight + fluid weight 266 . Refer to Section 4 for a detailed description of the physical data tables and the table naming conventions used in PDS. These tables are segregated for commodity item data. The physical data tables for US Practice are delivered in the following files: \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. These specific tables use the model code or commodity code as part of the table name to classify data by symbol type. Code list numbers 7000-27999 are reserved for standards that apply to European piping practices. The following table types are required for piping and instrument components.l .t . interference detection. and instrument data.l. and surface area) required for symbol creation. By segregating data into separate physical data libraries you can access a subset of the total physical data available for a project. The physical data can be stored in one of ten physical data libraries. The system uses the geometric industry standard for a particular commodity item (or specialty item) to determine which library to reference for the physical data tables. stress analysis.

Graphic Commodity Data The dimensional data. You can form the name of a physical data table from attributes for the component (such as geometry standard and end preparation). the table name cannot exceed 46 characters. dry weight. dry weight. then nine dependent variables are allowed. 7. water weight. it must be listed first in the table.2. Instrument physical data Physical Data Tables 7. If more independent variables are required. If nominal diameter is one of the independent variables. However. and surface area for specialty items can be stored in a set of tables or defined at placement. and surface area for instruments can be stored in a set of tables or defined at placement. If only one independent variable is required. Specific commodity dry weight data Piping Specialty physical data The dimensions. 267 ._ _______________ — The surface area data enables the system to perform paint requirement calculations and insulation weight calculations. water weight.1 Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library The data retrieval from tables in the Physical Data Library is restricted to two independent variables and eight dependent variables. the additional independent variable(s) must be a part of the table name.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. Commodity Code (P59) Using this information. Since the termination type is the same at both ends of the valve (bolted). the dimension tables for a 6" gate valve are: GAT_40_20_150_A This table returns the face-to-center dimension for the valve. and the seating depth for each end of the valve. MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A (P15A) MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B (P15B) . Specific Tables The specific tables are used to define the main body of the valve. Refer to Table Requirements. 268 . Note that the termination type (20) is used rather than the actual end preparation value (21). the system references the following tables.2.2 Example of Physical Data Look-Up In order to place the valve described earlier in this section.This table is only required if more than eight outputs are necessary to define a commodity item. flange thickness. the actual table name will be BLT_20_150_5 This table returns the outside diameter. Generic Tables The spec access for a six-inch gate valve defines the end preparation at both connect points as Raised Face Flanged End (code list value 21) which is a bolted connection. the table name for a bolted connection on a two-connect point valve is table_name= ’BLT’ // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green Using the values from the Piping Job Specification (PMC=1C0031. no red connect point data is required. for an outline of the types of tables which are required to place a valve. As shown in the listing for VALVE_2_AMS. The required tables are found by referring to the Bolted(G) termination type. Item Name=6Q1C01). Table P15B is not required for a gate valve. page 315.

the dimension table for a hand wheel operator on a 6" gate valve is: GAT_BLT_150_3_A This table returns the stem length and the wheel diameter for the handwheel operator. If the end preparations were different at each end of the valve (such as female threaded by socket welded) then a different set of tables would be required. The following table is required to define the valve operator. Example of Physical Data Look-Up 7. MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A (P31A) Using this table name format. Graphic Commodity Data 269 . including the weight of the operator._ _______________ VAABAHCCAA This table returns the empty weight of the valve. An additional table look-up is required to access the dimensional data for the valve operator.

the end preparation should be defined to match the green and red connect points. A flow direction component (such as a check valve) must be defined so that the flow is directed from connect point 1 to connect point 2.3 7. or thickness differ. piping specialties. and instruments is classified in terms of green and red connect points. 270 . connect point information for commodity items. page 190. or instruments should be created with the green connect point representing the larger diameter (first size) of the component and the red connect point diameter representing the smaller diameter (second size)._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. The origin of a component must lie between connect point 1 and connect point 2. — If the end preparations are the same but the values for rating. data for commodity items. A tee type branch must be defined with connect point three on the branch leg of the tee. data is only defined for the green connect point and applies to all ends of the component. for a detailed description of the methods for defining the schedule or thickness value. For size change components. the "stronger" ends(s) are designated as the green connect point. the following rules apply: — If the ends have different end preparations (regardless of the values for schedule/thickness) the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest code list number are designated as the green connect point. The following conventions are used to coordinate the two sets of data: For full-size components. Refer to PJS Tables and Functions.1 Notes for Graphic Commodity Data Connect Point Data As described in the Piping Job Specification description. engineered items. Schedule or thickness values should be defined for all applicable components.3. If the end preparation is different at each end of the component. Flanges should be defined with the green connect point representing the flanged connect point and the red connect point representing the non-flanged connect point. schedule. If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties which differ.

The graphics symbol description in the Graphic Commodity Library sets an attribute in the piping design database that defines the number of joints.to-center dimension rather than end-to-end or end-to-center dimension. the system uses the first and second size to access the branch table and determine the item name of the component to be placed at the branch point (intersection). The number of joints in a mitre is required to compute the stress intensification factor (SIF). you specify the angle of the bend by selecting the item name for the corresponding angle of the bend. In other words. Depending on the active values.2 Bends and Branches For bend components (specific and generic). 271 . For branches (tees and laterals). or a set of two or three components. For miter bend components. Graphic Commodity Data To insure consistency in pipe cut length calculations. Notes for Graphic Commodity Data 7.3._ _______________ A valve operator is always placed at the component origin of the corresponding valve body. the connect points of a component should be located using face-to-face or face. the item name specifies the number of miter joints of the bend. the branch table may define a single component. 7. the system requires that the item name and the new item name be unique with respect to the number of miter joints of the bend. A change of direction component placed by component center must be defined such that connect point 1 is on the primary axis. the item name and the new item name must be unique with respect to the angle of the bend. In other words.

the gasket separation for the connect point is set to one-half the Active Gasket Separation. A lap joint flange is defined with the end preparation at one end as flanged and the other end as lap. and nut extension). — The second table (STUD_Rat_TS) contains flange data required for reporting or analysis activities (such as bolt diameter. or wafer) have integral gaskets and do not have a gasket separation.3. In this situation. number of bolt holes. — If the end preparation for the connect point is not flanged. However.3 Bolts. Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for a description of the table access. and Flanges The data for the number of bolts and the bolt diameter is available with the flange data in the Physical Commodity Library as a function of nominal piping diameter. and geometric industry standard. the gasket separation at each connect point is set to zero._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. Gaskets. The system determines the gasket separation at each connect point of a piping component and an instrument component by the following rules. some flanged connections (lug. ring type joint. the gasket separation for the connect point will be set to zero. However. the bolt data and the flange data are stored in separate tables. termination type. — If the end preparation for the connect point is flanged. 272 . pressure rating. Flange data exists in two tables — The first table (BLT_Term_Rat_TS) contains the flange data required for modeling activities (such as flange outside diameter and flange thickness).

Tubing.3. Tubing. Flexible hose has flanged.4 Pipe. Polypropylenelined tube is purchased with flanged ends in various fixed lengths. Mechanical joint and cast iron pipe can have various fixed lengths. screwed. Graphic Commodity Data 273 . Piping wall thickness is defined it terms of NPD units rather than model units. and Hose 7. All commodity item data in the Alphanumeric Commodity Library exists in terms of nominal piping diameter. and Hose All tubing (such as fiberglass and copper) is specified in terms of piping outside diameter rather than nominal piping diameter. Pipe. A piping converter component (which converts nominal piping diameter from one system of units to another system of units) must be defined in the PJS database for each specific pair of nominal piping diameters._ _______________ 7. or quick disconnect end preparations. You cannot specify a convertor component for a range of nominal piping diameters.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 274 .

Graphic Commodity Library Manager 7. edit the file.4 Graphic Commodity Library Manager This command enables you to create a new graphic commodity library or create and modify data (Eden modules) in an existing library. Create/Interactive — Used to compile Eden source files and insert them in the Graphic Commodity Library. review and delete object code files. page 254. and delete Eden source files from the library. used to compile Eden source files via batch processing. extract. Refer to Graphic Commodity Library. You can create a file or specify a list of files to be created. Compress — Used to compress the Graphic Commodity library. Graphic Commodity Data Options Create Library — Used to create a new Graphic Commodity Library. Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Graphic Commodity library to the approved library. Select the Graphic Commodity Library Manager command from the Reference Data Manager form. Create/Batch — Used to compile Eden source files and add the files to the library via batch processing. 275 ._ _______________ 7. and insert. Revise — Used to select an Eden module from the library. for more information on this library. and put the recompiled file back into the library. You can compile Eden source code.

Full List .Limits the list to those Eden modules which contain a specified substring. List — Used to display the Eden modules in the library. You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the Eden modules to be listed. Report — Used to create a report listing the library contents._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Delete — Used to remove an Eden module from the library.Lists all the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library. Extract — Used to extract an Eden module from the library for editing or printing. 276 . Sub-string .

_ _______________ 7. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. 277 . 7.4. The system displays the approved and unapproved Graphic Commodity Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data.1 Create Library This option is used to create a new Graphic Commodity Library. Graphic Commodity Data 7.3 Unapproved ==> Approved This option copies the unapproved Graphic Commodity library to the approved library.4.t) for the library that is being created. Create Library 7. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.4. It automatically creates the object library (. the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.2 Compress This option is used to compress the Graphic Commodity library. If you specify an existing library file.l.l) and the text library (. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

5. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created. Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file and begin processing. Operating Sequence 1. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation. 278 . Before using this command Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to the location of the Eden source files. at the bottom of the form.4. create a list file which identifies the names of the Eden source files to be added. 3. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the Eden file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library. for information on naming conventions for Eden modules. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. The system displays the default node name and path for the eden modules. Select the Create option. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. The system verifies the existence of the specified file.4 Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data This option enables you to compile Eden source code and add the resulting code to the graphic commodity library. Refer to the description of the Graphic Commodity Library. as specified in the Default Project Control Data. 4. page 254. The list file and all of the source files should reside in the source file directory. 2. To add more than one Eden file to the library._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7.

as specified in the Default Project Control Data. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. 279 . 2. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation. The system confirms the existence of the specified file._ _______________ 7. for information on naming conventions for Eden modules. The system displays the default node name and path for the eden modules. Operating Sequence 1. at the bottom of the form. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the Eden file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library. create a list file which identifies the names of the Eden source files to be added.5 Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data 7. Select the Batch Load option. Before using this command Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to the location of the Eden source files. Refer to the description of the Graphic Commodity Library.4. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. 4. page 254. 3. The list file and all of the source files should reside in the source file directory. Graphic Commodity Data This option enables you to compile Eden source code and insert the specified files into the graphic commodity library via batch processing. To add more than one Eden file to the library.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference. set the time to process the source files. For Delayed Submit. 280 . Accept or Select Other Option Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. Accept the file and begin processing. 6.

6 Revise Graphic Commodity Data This option enables you to select Eden modules from the library. 2. Graphic Commodity Data Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed. Revise Graphic Commodity Data 7. Select Module for Revision Select the Eden modules to be revised and select Accept._ _______________ 7. Select the Revise option.4. 281 . The system displays the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library. edit the file. and then compile the file and put it back in the library. Operating Sequence 1.

The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control. When you exit the text editor. Make any changes to the displayed file. (If you quit the text editor. the system returns to Step 2. 282 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 3. If an error occurs in revising a Piping Eden module or table. the system invokes the editor automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem.sh file) to enable you to modify the file. the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. You can select another Eden module to be revised or select Exit.) If the file compiles successfully. the file will not be recompiled.

Select Module for Deletion Select the Eden modules to be deleted from the list of modules. Accept or Select Other Module Accept the selected modules.7 Delete Graphic Commodity Data This option enables you to delete Eden modules from the graphic commodity library. 283 . Delete Graphic Commodity Data 7. 2. Select the Delete option.4. The system displays the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library. The system deletes the modules from the Graphic Commodity Library. Graphic Commodity Data Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed._ _______________ 7. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Operating Sequence 1. 3.

Select the Report option from the Data Management form. 284 . the system will create a file named piping_eden in the defined default source file location. If you select the Print/Save option. 4. Operating Sequence 1.8 Report Graphic Commodity Data This option enables you to create a list file of all the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity library and their creation dates. Select Print or Print/Save. 3. Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created or use the displayed defaults. 2. Refer to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting up multiple print queues._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. Accept to Form Report or Revise Report Parameters Select Accept to create the report file.4. Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues.

285 . Select the List option. The display includes a description of the type of Piping Eden module._ _______________ 7.4. List Graphic Commodity Data 7. the revision date of each Piping Eden module. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Select Cancel to exit the form. at the end of each line. such as Physical Data Definition or Model Parametric Shape. Graphic Commodity Data Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed. The module names are sorted alphanumerically within the list for each type of Piping Eden module. 3. The system displays the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library. 2. Operating Sequence 1.9 List Graphic Commodity Data This option displays a list of Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library.

2. Select Extract from the Data Management form. the system appends the entries to the file. otherwise it overwrites the file._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. Operating Sequence 1. Before using this command Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to the location of the Eden source files. If the list file is less than 24 hours old. The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default eden directory. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named PD_gc_list.4. 286 .10 Extract Graphic Commodity Data This option enables you to extract an Eden module or set of Eden modules from the Graphic Commodity library for editing or printing. — OR — Select Extract ALL to bulk extract all the Piping Eden modules in one operation. Select EDEN Module for Extraction Select the modules from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed. You can extract multiple files at one time.

With the 7. You can create a new library file or create.r. the limitation on the size of tables in the Physical Data Library was increased from approximately 20. Refer to Physical Data Tables.2 release. the software will regenerate the library file. the limitation on the size of tables in the Physical Data Library was increased from approximately 16.5 Physical Data Library Manager Physical Data Library Manager 7.000 bytes per table to 20. page 266. Select Physical Data Library Manager command from the Reference Data Manager form. and delete data in an existing library. 287 . modify.000 bytes per table. You can also create reports of the data in the library and post the contents of the unappoved library to the approved library. This feature can be used to create revision management reports of components that require reconstructing as a result of changes to any dimension tables since a specified date. Operating Sequence 1.l. If the library has been removed or deleted. for more information on this library.1 release._ _______________ 7. named <table_library>. The system tracks revision dates for table entries when a table is being revised.000 bytes to 60.000 bytes or 750 lines. This revision management data recorded in a Table Revision Management Library. Graphic Commodity Data This command enables you to access the library management options for the Physical Data Library. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path. Before using this command Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Physical Data Library and Spec Table Library files in the Default Project Control Data. With the 4.

Full List lists all the tables in the Physical Data Library. Compress — Used to compress the Physical Dimension library. You can create a single table or specify a list of tables to be created. Sub-string limits the list to those tables which contain a specified substring. 288 .S. Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Physical Dimension library to the approved library. Practice or European . 4. Options Create Library — Used to create a new Physical Dimension Library. Create/Interactive — Used to process table files and add the resulting code to the active Physical Dimension library. Select Table Library Select the active practice (such as U._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2. Select Table Data Management Option Select the option to perform.Din) from the display list and select Accept. 3. You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the physical data tables to be listed. The system loads the table list for the selected practice into memory.

List — Used to display the table files in the active library. 7. Extract — Used to extract a table file from the library for editing or printing._ _______________ Create/Batch — Used to compile and add table files to the active library via batch processing. Physical Data Library Manager Revise — Used to select a table file from the library for editing and put the revised file back into the library. Graphic Commodity Data 289 . Delete — Used to remove a table file from the library. Report — Used to create a report of the library contents.

290 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7.5.t). Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.5.l). 7. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files.3 Unapproved ==> Approved This option copies the unapproved Physical Dimension library to the approved library. the text library (. The system displays the approved and unapproved Physical Dimension Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data.l. It automatically creates the object library (.r) for the library that is being created. the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.2 Compress This option is used to compress the Physical Dimension library.l.1 Create Library This option is used to create a new Physical Dimension Library. and table revision management library (.5. 7. If you specify an existing library file.t. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

You can process a single table file or specify a list of files to be created. it stores the resulting object file in the active library and stores the source file in the associated text library. The system processes the source file and. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. The system displays the default node name and path for the table files. 3. Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data 7. 4. if successful. 291 . at the bottom of the form. 2.4 Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data This option enables you to process physical dimension table source files and insert the specified files into the active library. Graphic Commodity Data Before using this command Set the default table path and node in the Default Project Control Data. create a list file which identifies the names of the table source files to be added. Operating Sequence 1. Select the Create option. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the table file or list file to be processed and added to the active library. as specified in the Default Project Control Data. To add more than one table file to the library. 5._ _______________ 7. Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file and begin processing. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation. The list file and all the source files should reside in the defined default table directory.5. Refer to the description of the applicable table file for information on naming conventions and file formats. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line.

at the bottom of the form. For Delayed Submit. Accept the file and begin processing. create a list file which identifies the names of the table source files to be added. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Before using this command Set the default table path and node in the Default Project Control Data. 292 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. To add more than one table file to the library. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. 6.5 Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data This option enables you to process physical dimension table source files and insert the specified files into the active library via batch processing. Select the Create option.5. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference. 5. 3. Operating Sequence 1. 2. set the time to process the source files. The system displays the default node name and path for the table files. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation. The list file and all the source files should reside in the define default table directory. You can process a single table file or specify a list of files to be created. as specified in the Default Project Control Data. Refer to the description of the applicable table file for information on naming conventions and file formats. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the table file or list file to be processed and added to the active library. Accept or Select Other Option Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. 4.

Graphic Commodity Data 293 . Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data 7._ _______________ The system processes the source file and. it stores the resulting object file in the active library and stores the source file in the associated text library. if successful.

294 . Select Table for Revision Select the table files to be revised and select Accept. The system displays the table files in the active library. Operating Sequence 1.5.6 Revise Physical Commodity Data This option enables you to select a table file from the library. and then put it back in the library. Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. edit the file. Select the Revise option. 2.

When you exit the text editor. 295 . You can select another table to be revised or select Exit. the table is not recompiled.) The system returns to Step 2.sh file) to enable you to modify the file. Revise Physical Commodity Data 7._ _______________ 3. Graphic Commodity Data Make any changes to the displayed file. (If you quit the editor. the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.

The system deletes the table files from the active library._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. It also deletes the revision dates from the corresponding Table Revision Management Library. 3.7 Delete Physical Commodity Data This option enables you to delete a table file or set of table files from the active library. Select Table for Deletion Select the tables to be deleted from the list of tables. Operating Sequence 1. Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed. Select the Delete option.5. The system displays the table files in the active library. 296 . 2. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Accept or Select Other Option Accept the files and begin processing.

_ _______________ 7. 297 . Select Save. Graphic Commodity Data This option enables you to create a report file of all the table files in the active library or those defined by the substring search criteria. Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the source of information to be reported. 4. 3.8 Report Physical Commodity Data Operating Sequence 1. The system displays the reporting options on the form. — OR — Set the toggle to Revision Dates Report and key in a date in the Revision Date field to process all tables modified since the specified revision date. Select the Report option from the Data Management form. 5. Report Physical Commodity Data 7. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. Revise Report Parameters Set the toggle to Default Report to create a report that list the tables in the physical data library. Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created. The report lists the full contents of the modified tables with individual revision dates per line.5. Print or Print/Save. 2.

Practice A International . For Delayed Submit. U.British Standard European . 7.S. Practice European . the system will create a file named <standard>_tables in the default source file location (where <standard> is a prefix depending on the active practice). us din bs eua eub International .Practice B Company Practice jis aus ina inb cmp Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting up multiple print queues.DIN European . 298 .JIS International .Australian International .Practice A European .Practice B 6. set the time to process the request. Accept to Form Report or Revise Report Parameters Select Accept to create the specified report file. If you select the Save or Print/Save option.

Select Cancel to exit the form._ _______________ 7. Select the List option. List Physical Commodity Data 7. 3. 2.9 List Physical Commodity Data This option displays all the table files for the active library with the revision date of each table.5. Operating Sequence 1. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. The system displays the table files in the active library. Graphic Commodity Data Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed. 299 .

The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default table directory._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. For example. Before using this command Set the default table path and node in the Default Project Control Data. 2. The current date and time is: Wed Apr 29 15:59:41 1992 File: File: File: File: File: File: PD_tbl2 PD_tbl3 PD_tbl4 PD_tbl5 PD_tbl6 PD_tbl7 is is is is is is TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_A TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_B TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_C TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_A TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_B TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_C 300 . The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named PD_tbl_list. Select Table for Extraction Select the tables from the list of files and select Accept. Operating Sequence 1. Select Extract from the Data Management form.5.10 Extract Physical Commodity Data This option enables you to extract a table file out of the active library for editing or printing. Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.

the system appends the entries to the file. Graphic Commodity Data 301 ._ _______________ If the list file is less than 24 hours old. otherwise it overwrites the file. Extract Physical Commodity Data 7.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 302 .

page 189 for more information on tables. Also refer to Piping Job Specification Tables. Table Formats 303 ._ _______________ 8. page 266 for more information on these libraries. Table Formats and Naming Conventions Tables are used to store data required for interactive processing of piping and instrument components. Table Formats and Naming Conventions 8. Refer to Physical Data Tables. This section describes the tables which are included in the physical data libraries.

304 . if a dot (. they should not be included as part of commodity codes for valves. takes place. the dot or hyphen will be converted to a dollar sign ($) when the table name or ASCII file name is created. For this reason. is displayed in all fields representing the actual attribute involved.2 Comments You can include any number of comments in a table.1 8. Commodity codes are read verbatim when they are used to create table names. where the commodity code is used to form the name of the dimension table. This allows you to include a dash in the commodity code for a piping commodity valve. as described above. using the conventions described below: For single-line comments: ! XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX .) is not a valid character to include in a table name. When naming ASCII files in the text libraries.. Also note that a dot (. and not the $.1. The actual character. represents the comment text.1 Table Conventions Table Names Unless otherwise indicated. or < XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX > For multi-line comments: < XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX > where XXXX.0.) or a hyphen (-) is included in the Sc/Th column of the piping job specification.25 1 1. The following examples illustrate how thicknesses are represented on the basis of the above rule: Actual Characters .) or hyphens (-). 8.. the Physical Data Library Manager will respect the use of a dash (-) in a table name. values for specific and generic parameters are stored in tables whose names are derived from parameters in the PJS.375 ASCII equivalent $25 1 1$375 With version 5. No conversion of dots (.1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.

the section of the table shown below has been revised three times since it was first delivered. The number of output columns must not exceed 9. Input_Interpolation 1. For example. Table Formats 8. it can be 0. Next_One 305 .1. The following line is required to define the number of input and output columns: No_Inputs x No_Outputs x The number of input columns must not exceed 2.3 Revision Markers Table entries preceded by a karat (>) have been revised since their original release.4 Component Tables The following conventions apply to the definition of columns in all the tables except tables for specialty items._ _______________ 8.1. The following statements are used in some tables to indicate that values will be interpolated. Table Conventions 8. Next_One Input_Interpolation 2.

1. inches decimal Length. psig Pressure. mm Pressure. SF. inches Nominal diameter. IN. degrees Area. IN 8. bar Pressure. degrees Angle between runs. inches water absolute 306 . LB. pascal gage Pressure. atmospheres Pressure. RAT. IN. DEG DEC FT2 IN2 YD2 MI2 SCM SKM INT LBF3 LB_UKGAL LB_USGAL KIPFT3 USTONFT3 KG_L KG_DM3 KGM3 IN MM IN_DEC MM_DEC GRAIN USTON UKTON MG G NPD_IN NPD_MM PSIG PAG BAR BAR_G ATM INH20 Code-listed attributes Density. Length. bar (gage) Pressure. millimeter Length. DEC._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 A definition must be made using the following format regarding the units of measure used in each column of a table: Units= NPD_IN. inches Length.5 Units Units are defined for each column of a table as follows: Angle. INT. mm decimal Mass. Nominal diameter. IN.

Table Formats SFF SM_M SMM_M DC DF DK DR AN*xx where xx defines the number of characters INT DEC LB KG LBF KGM Unitless integer Unitless real number Weight. inches mercury at 32 deg Pressure. kilograms per meter 307 . degrees Fahrenheit Temperature. square meter Surface area. psi Stress. kilogram Weight/unit. degrees Rankine Unitless alphanumeric 8. kpa Stress. millimeters Stress. degrees Celsius Temperature. pounds Weight. inches water at 32 deg Pressure. inches mercury absolute Pressure. pascal Stress. mpa Surface area. mm mercury at 32 deg Pressure. pounds per foot Weight/unit. degrees Kelvin Temperature. square millimeter Surface area/unit. kg per cm squared (absolute) Pressure. mm water at 4 deg Pressure. inches Schedule/thickness. kg per cm squared (gage) Pressure. square feet per foot square meter per meter square millimeter per meter Temperature. megaPascal (gage) Rating INH20_32F INHG INHG_32F KG_CM2 KG_CM2_A MMH20 MMHG MPa_g RAT CLxxx and xxx# are expressed as xxx SC_TH_IN SC_TH_MM PSI PA KPA MPA SF SM SMM Table Conventions Schedule/thickness. square feet Surface area._ _______________ Pressure.

For consistency. Adjacent columns in a table are separated by one or more spaces. 308 . a nominal diameter of twenty inches can be expressed as 20. The system interprets this entry as a blank value and displays a blank in reports. For example. For example. . Real numbers without decimals can be expressed with or without a decimal point. 20. the generic value ET_AL can be used in the input column. ’ZZZZZ’ For tables with only one input column.1. If a value in a table is not known. WWWWs and ZZZZZs in this document are observed. where x defines the number of characters up to a maximum of 8) All entries in the tables are left justified.0. or 20._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8. and other data outputs. The system translates this entry to indicate that values in the immediately preceding line apply to any input value equal to or greater than the value in the current line. NPD (for nominal diameter) INTEGER2 REAL4 (floating point) AN*x (alphanumeric. Fractions are not used to define any table value. The system determines the field type on the basis of data provided in each table. drawings. a hyphen (-) must be used in the corresponding field.6 Fields (Input/Output Columns) Attributes can consist of the following field types. Field locations and field lengths defined with XXXXs. all delivered tables use the value 20 All alphanumeric values in a table must be enclosed in single quotes (’ ’).

Table Formats 8. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for other female ends.00 400 18. table entries and file names representing the rating exclude the CL.375 10 0.250 8 0.000 200 10.000 150 8.1.00 1150 48.500 40 2.1.00 300 Nominal Pipe Diameter inches mm 14.00 750 32. the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating.00 1050 44.00 250 12.00 850 36.00 550 24.500 65 3.00 650 28. these rating formats are used in accordance with the following criteria: CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI or API.000 100 5. OTxxxx refers to a rating that meets the applicable ANSI or API rating geometrically but not from a pressure carrying standpoint.00 500 22.00 600 26. 309 .00 800 34. If such rating values contain alphanumeric characters.00 1000 42.7 NPD Values The following table is used to correlate English nominal pipe diameters with their corresponding metric values.00 950 40. In the delivered PJS.00 450 20.00 700 30._ _______________ 8. or OTxxxx. However. This enables the same table to be used regardless of how the rating is defined.00 1100 46.8 Rating The following conventions apply to the rating attribute with respect to the naming of data tables: Ratings can be expressed in the PJS in any of the following formats: CLxxxx.500 90 4. Table Conventions Nominal Pipe Diameter inches mm 0. or OT characters.125 6 0.00 900 38.000 50 2.500 15 0.000 125 6.750 20 1. #. the system strips all the alpha characters from the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicable tables.000 25 1.000 80 3.250 32 1.00 1200 8. Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and not in terms of rating.00 350 16. xxxx#. An example is a valve supplied with flanged ends meeting the bolting pattern of ANSI CL150 pressure rating but with pressure carrying characteristics different from those of that ANSI rating.

xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inch x if the thickness is an even inch x. The letters that make up this code have the following meaning: — The character C ensures that the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the component is determined by calculations using the thickness equation defined for the piping materials class in the Default Wall Thickness Equation attribute of the Piping Materials Class entity. — Either stress analysis is not applicable. OTHER can be used to identify a nonstandard rating value. S-SDR13.5) it is defined in terms of its wall thickness. such as S-40. S-XS and S-XXS. schedule and thickness are expressed in terms of: Generic schedules. NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends would normally require the rating value as part of the table name. The names of the data tables include all the alphabetic characters included in the PJS. but for which a rating does not apply._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 If the rating in the PJS is expressed in alphabetic characters only. In order of preference. the system uses the characters to access a data table. and wall thickness calculations.1. If the schedule name exceeds the provided field length (for example. NREQD: This value is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply: — The thickness value is not required to purchase the component. Trailing zeroes are not included. . This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables. 310 .xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger *Cyyy: The need to perform a thickness calculation is triggered by an entry with the format *Cyyy in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity. the PJS. such as S-STD.9 Schedule/Thickness Schedule or thickness values are shown for all applicable components. thickness is expressed as defined below. Specific wall thicknesses: To insure compatibility between the data tables. S-60 and S-80. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables. 8. GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain a nominal fluid head. or the component is considered to be infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations. — Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values. Specific schedules. Decimal points are not included for numbers without decimals.

This factor is one of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. joint or structural grade quality factor (E) times 100._ _______________ MATCH: The need to match the thickness of a component to that of the pipe of the same diameter and of option 1 is triggered by an entry with the format MATCH in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity. the quality factor for the pipe should be used. the following convention is used. 8. Table Formats 311 .85). For a given nominal diameter. If you are defining a calculation for a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match the thickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0. only the schedules shown in the line for that diameter are used in the PJS and in the data tables. Table Conventions — The characters yyy define the casting. To minimize duplication when the same thickness can be expressed for metallic materials in terms of either a generic or a specific schedule.

00 28.000 5.750 1.250 1.00 44.00 48.000 1.00 12.500 2.000 8.00 24.00 46.S-5S S-10 S-20 S-30 S-60 S-100 S-120 S-140 S-160 S-XXS _ _______________ 312 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-XXS S-30 S-30 S-30 S-STD S-STD S-30 S-XS S-XS S-30 S-40 S-60 S-XS S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-100 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-XXS S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-120 S-140 S-XXS S-140 S-140 S-140 S-140 S-140 S-140 S-140 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-160 S-10S S-40 S-40 S-40 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-30 S-30 S-30 S-30 S-30 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-STD S-STD S-STD S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-5S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-10S S-40 S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-40 S-40 S-XS S-40 S-40 S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-40S S-80 S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S S-80S Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 NomD 0.00 40.000 3.500 4.00 34.00 36.00 14.00 18.00 22.00 S-5S S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS S-XS .500 3.375 0.000 2.00 20.250 0.000 6.500 0.00 26.00 30.125 0.00 16.00 38.00 42.000 10.00 32.

Table Conventions 8. tables are required in 1/16 inch increments from 0. For components made from plate material. Table Formats 313 .25 to 1.25 inches (inclusive).25 to 1. — If the thickness involved is not covered by a schedule.10 Weight Tables Weight tables are required for the following thicknesses: For components made from pipe material: — If the thickness involved is covered by a schedule._ _______________ 8. tables are required for all commercially available schedules to the full range of their nominal diameter. tables are required in 1/16 inch increments from 0.1. and from 22 inches to the full range of their nominal diameter.25 inches and in 1 inch increments from 12 to 144 inches.

or MAL) Weight Code (from CL578) Refer to Variables for Generic Tables and Variables for Specific Tables for a description of the variables used in table definitions._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.11 Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to describe the table name formats in this document.1. values appearing in all uppercase characters (such as BLT or STUD) indicate a hard-coded value. FEM. 314 . Generally. (G) (R) BrchTbl Cmdty Code GCP GS MC Op Rat RCP Sc/Th Term TNF TS Type WC Green Red Branch Table Commodity Code Green Connect Point Geometric Industry Standard (from CL575) Model Code Operator/actuator type (from CL550) Pressure Rating Red Connect Point Schedule/Thickness End Preparation (from CL330) Table Name Format Table Suffix (from CL576 and CL577) Termination type (BLT.

_ _______________ 8. instruments. the tables in the table combinations are used to store: The surface area and weight of water for the component. The table groups listed in this section are used to store data required for interactive processing of piping and instrument components. The dimensional parameters for the component. 8.2 Table Requirements This section indicates which tables are required to place a particular type of component (such as a valve or fitting). Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a detailed description of the requirements for specific commodity items.2. Table Requirements 8. Table Formats Typically. and miscellaneous piping and instrument items. The empty weight of the component and/or data about valve operators.1 Tables Required for Piping Components Valves (6Q1C) Termination Types Bolted(G) Male(G) Female(G) Bolted(G)-Male(R) Female(G)-Male(R) Applicable Tables MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) MC_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A (if operator code <=24) MC_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B (if operator code <=24) Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40) Cmdty Code_WOPD_B (if operator code >24 & <=40) Bolted(G)-Bolted(R) Bolted(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Male(R) Male(G)-Female(R) Male(G)-Bolted(R) Operators P15A P15B P59 P60A P25A P25B P59 P60A P26A P26B P59 P60A P26A P26B P59 P60A P27A P27B P59 P60A P31A P31B P60A P60B 315 . The applicability of the various table groups is defined as a function of the termination types of the components as defined in the Piping Job Specification (PJS).

6P3C._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.1 Fittings (6P2C. Fire and Safety Piping Components (6P4C and 6Q4C) Termination Types Male(G) Applicable Tables MC_GS_Term(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC Bolted(G) Female(G) Bolted(G)-Male(R) Female(G)-Male(R) Bolted(G)-Bolted(R) Bolted(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Male(R) P11A P11B P51 P15A P15B P52 P25A P25B P61 P26A P26B P62 P21A P21B P63 P27A P27B P64 Male(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Female(R) 316 .1.2. 6Q2C and 6Q3C) Termination Types Male(G) Applicable Tables MC_GS_Term(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC Bolted(G) Female(G) Bolted(G)-Male(R) Female(G)-Male(R) Bolted(G)-Bolted(R) Bolted(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Female(R) Female(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Male(R) P11A P11B P51 P15A P15B P52 P25A P25B P61 P26A P26B P62 Male(G)-Bolted(R) Male(G)-Female(R) Olet fittings Stubbing fittings P21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A P21B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B P63 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC Excludes olet and stubbing type fittings P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B P64 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC Excludes olet and stubbing type fittings P28A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_A P28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B P65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC P29A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A Overflow and weight tables do not apply.

1.2 Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C) P80 P81 Specialty Body Data Operator/Actuator Data Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C) 8._ _______________ 8. Table Formats 317 .2.

2. 7P2C (Relief Devices). and 7Q4D (Off-Line Instruments).2 Tables Required for Instrument Components The following table sets are used for instrument component classes 7P1E (Control Valves and Regulators). I80 I81 Inbody_Specific_AABBCC_MC_n Inbody_Typical_AABBCC_MC_n Inoper_Specific_AABBCC_MC_n Inoper_Typical_AABBCC_MC_n 318 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8. 7P3C (Other in-line Instruments).

COMPAT_Rat(low)_TS_Rat(high)_TS. 319 . This table format may be included in the physical data library but it will not be accessed by the product. Table format G14. The following tables are required to store generic data which applies to both piping and instrument components: TNF G10 G12 G12T STUD_Term_Rat_TS G20 G30 G50 MAL_Term_TS FEM_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS MALWT_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS_WC Attributes Used to Form Table Name BLT_Term_Rat_TS STUD_Rat_TS Generic Tables 8._ _______________ 8. which was used with the VAX Piping Design product is not used by the Workstation product. Table Formats These tables are stored in the physical data library.3 Generic Tables This section describes the neutral file formats used to define generic piping and instrument data.

Variable P End Type Bolted Explanation This is the outside diameter of a bolted end of the indicated termination type. and nominal diameter. However. Q Bolted Male Female Not applicable The value of this variable is "0" for all male ends. it is desirable for the value of this parameter to be larger than the value of the matching male termination end. components such as 90 degree elbows and tees will not place if the value is too large._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8. For female threaded ends. Male Female 320 . and nominal diameter. Therefore. use 30% of the fitting OD at the female end plus 70% of the matching pipe OD. rating. This is the outside diameter of a male end of the indicated termination type and nominal diameter.1 Variables for Generic Tables The letters P through Z are used in the generic tables to represent the following generic variables. This is the depth of socket. The is the outside diameter of the female end of the component of the indicated termination type. use the same as the value of P for the corresponding male termination type. as defined in the table named "FEM_Term_Rat_TS". this value is the nominal depth of the socket less 1/16". For all other female ends. For socketwelded ends. as defined in the table named "FEM_Term_Rat_TS". as defined in the table named "BLT_Term_Rat_TS". For model graphics. The actual depth of socket less 1/16" is used to determine a component’s dimensional parameters.3. rating. this is the thread engagement as defined: in Table 8-1 for components complying with ANSI-B16. as defined in the table named "MAL_Term_TS".12 in Table 8-2 for all other components. the following values have been defined for this parameter: For PVC and CPVC female ends.

small female and large female flanged ends._ _______________ R Bolted Variables for Generic Tables This is the flange thickness. Table Formats Male Female S Bolted Not applicable. A practical alternative would be to create a table in which values for this parameter are large enough to insure that short studs do not result. as defined in the table named "STUD_Rat_TS" as a function of the nominal pipe diameter. This dimension represents the distance from the outermost face of the flange to the back surface of the flange on which the nut rests. It includes any projections of the flange. This is half of the gasket gap thickness. The value of this parameter will be zero for all other bolted ends. Male Female T Bolted Male Female V Bolted Male Female 321 . and table suffix in the RDB. Not applicable. such as the raised face. as defined in the table named "BLT_Term_Rat_TS". Not applicable. and table suffix of the applicable bolted end. This is the seating depth. large groove. This parameter is primarily used to calculate stud length. Not applicable. Not applicable. the entries for the lap type terminations in the BLT_Term* and STUD_Term* generic tables provide for the addition of wall thickness from the TDB. Not applicable. rating. rating. When dealing with specialty components (such as relief valves). 8. This dimension represents the distance from the outermost surface of the bolted end to the seating surface of the gasket. It will only have a value for small groove. it includes the thickness of the pipe or stub end plus the thickness of the loose flange used. you might have to develop many generic tables for precise values. For lap-flanged ends. Not applicable. as defined in the table named "BLT_Term_Rat_TS". If the Source of Bolt Spec Data is set as a function of termination type. and for mechanical joints. Not applicable. as defined in the PJS for the applicable piping materials class. This is the diameter of bolts required at a bolted connection.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 X Bolted Male Not applicable. Female Z Any 322 . This is the wall thickness of the applicable end of a component of the indicated nominal diameter. Not applicable. as defined in the table named "MALWT_Term_Sc/Th_TS_WC". No specific meaning is attached to this variable.

inches ANSI-B16.12 PDS 0.6875 0.016 1 1.6875 0.396 1.0353 1.4375 1.5 2 2._ _______________ Table 8-1.375 0.3125 0.5625 0.3125 1.6875 0.25 1.4375 1.75 1 1. NAVCO ANSI-B1.94 0.2483 1.6875 0.6875 0.0625 0.42 0.25 1.25 1.9375 0.125 1.5 3 3.44 0.25 0.84 0.42 0.625 1.68 0.9375 1 1.208 1.12 NPD in 1.5 2 2.375 0.932 0.68 0.7367 0.5625 1.25 0.1355 1.25 1.61 as Reported By Crane Average 0.6875 0.5625 0.1875 1.4375 0.2713 0.071 1.44 0.6875 0.3125 1.3986 0.375 0.094 1.6859 0.6969 0.25 0.6875 0.3945 0. Thread Engagement for All Other Components NPD in 0.5242 0.6809 0.5 0.9674 1 1.75 1.2985 1.96 1.125 1.75 1.375 0.94 0.75 0.42 0.5625 0.625 1.187 1.96 0.6875 0.3125 1.75 1.375 0.375 0.7033 PDS 0.1875 1.375 0.5625 0.6609 0.6809 0.1 Stockham 0.5602 0.75 0.5343 0.4375 1.3955 0.75 8. inches.25 0. Table Formats 323 .6875 0.0625 1.5 0.5 0.5 4 5 6 8 10 12 Thread Engagement.6809 0.6875 0.5625 0.06 1.5533 0.4375 0.42 0.75 0.06 Variables for Generic Tables Table 8-2.313 1.46 1.375 1. Thread Engagement for Components per ANSI-B16.125 1.84 0.77 0.9375 1.2726 0.77 0.20.5 0.107 1.6859 0.6875 0.5 3 4 5 6 8 Thread Engagement.4067 0.125 0.0625 1.57 1.

5 6 11 1 0 9.5 1.5 0 2. IN.125 1.5 5 0. IN.75 20 27.5 8.5 0. flange thickness.5625 0 22.5 3.5 1.25 12 19 1.6875 0 3.625 0 3.75 3.5 0.6875 0.4375 0 21.5 1.9375 0 7.3.6875 0.125 0 11.625 0.375 0 18.25 18 25 1.5 7 0.5 3 7.6875 0 25 324 .24" & API 605 above 24" ! TNF=G10 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=15-Oct-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN. IN.375 0.75 1 4. seating depth.5 0.75 10 16 1.25 0 17 14 21 1.5 8 13.75 0 4.375 2.25 2.3438 0 1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8. IN ! Diam P R S BCD WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END Example Table_Data_Definition ’BLT_20_150_5’ ! Description= CL150 raised face flange dimensions ! Source= MSS-SP-42 1/4 & 3/8".5 0.1875 0 14.25 0.875 0 5.5 0.75 16 23.5-1981 1/2" .9375 0 8.2 Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10) This table enables you to define the outside diameter. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G10 BLT_Term_Rat_TS Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’BLT_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G10 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN. and bolt circle diameter for components with bolted ends.5625 0 3.4375 0 2.875 0.5 1.3438 0 1.9375 0 7 4 9 0.75 2. IN ! Diam P R S BCD 0. IN. IN.875 2 6 0. IN.25 4.5 5 10 0. ANSI-B16.9375 0 6 3.

6875 39.75 1.625 1.125 46.5625 58.5625 56.3125 2.0625 39.375 2.5625 2.8125 2.3125 31.9375 67.5625 52.9375 1.5625 41.75 42.8125 54.875 1.4375 65.0625 2.3125 33.8125 1.4375 2.75 1.9375 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 29.125 2.4375 Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10) 8.25 50.9375 37.3125 35. Table Formats 325 .125 44.75 63.4375 37.8125 61 63 65.875 2.75 2.625 44.9375 34.5 29.8125 58.6875 2.9375 32.75 60.125 48.5625 54.25 48._ _______________ 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 END 32 30.1875 2.8125 56.125 50.9375 2.25 52.25 46.

75 4 0.5938 0. if the modifier value for the PCD is 0.6563 1 0. and the bolt extension for a given NPD. IN. IN. If the Length Calculation toggle on the Material Takeoff Option form is set to Almost Precise in Project Administrator.6563 0. Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’STUD_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G12 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN. IN. the value in the W_0 column is used for nut allowance.3. IN ! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END Example Table_Data_Definition ’STUD_150_5’ ! Description= CL150 bolting ! Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL ! TNF=G12 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G12 STUD_Rat_TS This table is accessed using values for rating and table suffix derived from the applicable flanged end. such as when stud tensioning devices are utilized. IN. INT. IN. The n applies to the value defined in the Piping Commodity Data for the bolt diameter being considered.6563 1 - Date=03-Nov-1987 W_3 - W_4 - W_5 326 . for studs in bolted connections. IN ! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 0. IN. IN.375 4 0.5 4 0. The W_n columns are used to classify the bolt extension.5 0. IN. For example. IN. the bolt spec data is set as a function of rating and table suffix.5 0._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.375 0. IN. IN. the bolt diameter.875 1 4 0. This capability enables the system to handle special nut allowances.5938 0. IN. INT.5 0.25 4 0.375 0.3 Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12) This table defines the number of bolts.

75 0.5 0.75 1.5 1.375 1.7813 0.25 1.875 2 2 2 2.2188 1.125 2 2.25 0.9688 0.25 2.25 1.6563 0.9063 0.5 3 3.125 1.8751 1.75 2 1.25 0.7813 0.625 0.0938 1.2188 1.7813 0.4688 1.7813 0.2813 1.4688 0.5 1.875 1 1 1 1 1.875 1 1 1.75 0.3438 1.625 0.75 1.5 2 2.5 1.3438 1.9688 1.125 1 1 1 1.125 1.75 1.25 1.875 1 0.0938 1.375 1.6563 0.375 1.2188 1.5 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 END 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 16 16 20 20 36 40 44 48 40 44 40 44 48 52 40 44 48 52 56 60 48 52 0.75 0.125 1.125 1.0313 1.7813 0.375 1.75 0.625 0.625 0.4688 0.3751 1.1563 1.9688 0.9063 1.75 0.125 1.125 1.625 1.3438 1.125 - Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12) 8.125 1.625 0.3438 1.875 0._ _______________ 1.9688 0.5 0.2188 1.125 1.75 2 2 1.125 1.875 0.3438 1.0313 1. Table Formats 327 .75 0.3438 1.75 0.125 1.1563 1.125 2.9063 0.

875 1 4 0. IN.5 4 0. IN. rating and table suffix derived from the applicable flanged end. IN. TNF=G12T By=GJH Ckd By=NP Rev=0 Date=04-Oct-1989 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN.5 0. if the modifier value for the PMC is 0.5 0. IN.75 4 0. If the Length Calculation toggle on the Material Takeoff Option form is set to Precise in Project Administrator. IN ! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! Example Table_Data_Definition ’STUD_20_150_5’ Description= CL150 bolting Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL Parameter W_2 equals 50% of applicable stud diameter plus W_0. For example. IN. the bolt diameter. and table suffix. IN. IN._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.625 1 0. Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’STUD_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL Parameter W_2 equals 50% of applicable stud diameter plus W_0. TNF=G12T By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN. such as when stud tensioning devices are utilized. for studs in bolted connections.625 1 ! ! ! ! 328 . IN.4 Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T) This table defines the number of bolts. INT. IN.5 0. IN. IN ! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5 0.3. The table name format for this table is: STUD_Term_Rat_TS This table is accessed using values for termination type. and the bolt extension for a given NPD. rating.6875 0. The W_n columns are used to classify the bolt extension. This capability enables the system to handle special nut allowances. the bolt spec data is set as a function of termination type. INT. The n applies to the value defined in the Piping Materials Class for the bolt diameter being considered. IN. the value in the W_0 column is used for nut allowance. IN.

5 1.625 1.8125 0.125 1.5 3 3.875 0.75 1.875 1 1 1 1 1.625 0.3125 1.875 0.9375 1.125 1.75 0.9375 2.5 1.5 2 2.125 1.4375 1.125 1.6875 0.25 1.4375 1.8125 1.0625 1. Table Formats 329 .75 1.25 1.75 1.4375 1.125 1.0625 1.75 0.75 0.125 1.9375 1 1.25 1.25 1.8125 0.375 1.3125 1.875 1 1.9375 2 2.25 1.75 0.5 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 END 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 16 16 20 20 36 40 44 48 40 44 40 44 48 52 40 44 48 52 56 60 48 52 0.0625 1 1.125 1.75 0._ _______________ 1.375 1.5625 1.1875 1.4375 1.125 2 2.25 1.5 1.375 1.25 0.875 2 2 2 2.75 0.125 2.25 2.375 1.75 0.9375 2 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.4375 1.75 0.875 0.625 0.5 1.9375 0.125 1.6875 1.4375 1.625 0.625 0.75 0.375 1.125 1.25 1.625 1.125 1.125 1.125 1.1875 - Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T) 8.125 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.5625 0.8125 2.125 1 1 1 1.0625 1.75 1.25 0.375 1.75 0.8125 1.75 2 2.75 1.625 0.4375 1.375 1.125 2.3125 1.3125 1.875 1 1 1.0625 1.375 1.5625 1.625 0.0625 1.375 1.875 2 1.5 1.

3125 8 2.125 0.6575 1.67 14 7 16 4.5625 2. 5LE.5 0.497 1.275 1.25 5 1.405 0. outside diameter. IN ! Unt Sur ! Diam Area P P/2 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END Example Table_Data_Definition ’MAL_300_5’ ! Description= Pipe outside diameters ! Source= ANSI-B-36._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.73 6.75 3.81 10. SFF.2025 0.42 0.7813 6 1. IN.75 6.25 0.1875 2.625 4. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G20 MAL_Term_TS Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’MAL_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G20 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN.25 0.9 0.375 12 3.95 2 0.5 1.27 0.178 4.875 1.675 0.75 5.622 2.375 1.4375 3 0.3.54 0.19M.3125 10 2.525 1 0.5 0.75 0.434 1.5 Generic Table for Male Ends (G20) This table enables you to define the surface area.344 1.05 0.26 8.66 0.753 2.19 16 8 330 .141 0. SFF. 36.177 0.106 0.34 12. IN.5 0. API-5L. IN ! Unt Sur ! Diam Area P P/2 0.5 2.375 0.375 14 3.84 0.22 0.315 0. water weight.916 3.5 1. and 1/2 pipe OD for components with male ends.625 3. 5LP.047 4 2 4 1.10M.3375 0. 5LS & 5LU ! TNF=G20 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=10-Sep-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN.83 1.456 5.

61 14.9 9.94 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 Generic Table for Male Ends (G20) 8.42 9.28 6.71 16.33 7.24 5.90 20._ _______________ 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 END 4.85 19.04 12.76 17.38 8.99 11.52 12.85 8.95 10.76 6.66 15.80 18.47 10.81 7.71 5. Table Formats 331 .57 13.

! Source= ANSI-B16.3125 0.3.11 CL3000 for .6353 0.625 2. ! TNF=G30 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=29-May-1986 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN.3125 0.5625 2 2.5 0.185 0.8558 0. and socketwelded valve O.6 Generic Table for Female Ends (G30) This table enables you to define the outside diameter and depth of socket for female ends.486 0.D.5813 0.125 0.375 dia. IN ! Diam P Q 0.5 3.75 END 332 .7755 0.6875 3 3.125 to .5 above .75 1.4375 1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.5 1.3125 0.0988 0.375 dia’s.3125 0.25 0.25 1. ANSI-B16. IN ! Diam P Q WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END Example Table_Data_Definition ’FEM_420_150_5’ ! Description= CL150 socketwelded flange hub O.375 1 1. IN.5018 0. IN.9443 0.0813 0.725 0.375 0.5 2. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G30 FEM_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’FEM_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G30 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN.D.

IN ! GCP Unit Wt Unit Wt ! Diam Empty Water X WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END Example Table_Data_Definition ’MALWT_300_S$40_5_52’ ! Description= Schedule 40 wall thickness ! Source= ANSI-B36._ _______________ 8. LBF.10M-1985 ! TNF=G50 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN. LBF.688 36 282. The table name format for this table is: For TNF=G50 MALWT_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS_WC Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data.45 0.08 319. Table Formats Table_Data_Definition ’MALWT_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=G50 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN.7 Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data. Male Ends (G50) Neutral File Format 8.44 58. IN ! GCP Unit Wt Unit Wt ! Diam Empty Water X 12 53.52 48.5 0.67 96.2 0.22 0.63 0.92 0.3.25 0.562 20 123.09 0.594 24 171.29 174. LBF.11 120. Male Ends (G50) This table enables you to define empty weight and wall thickness data for male ends.438 18 104.688 32 230.75 END Date=10-Sep-1987 333 .406 14 63.35 405.688 34 244.77 362. LBF.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.P26B. refer to Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A. TNF Attributes Used to Form Table Name P31A MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A P31B MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B Use tables P51-P58 for non-valve piping component empty weights based on green connect point data. For more information.P26A. page 344 .4 Piping Component Tables This section describes the table formats used to define component data. Use tables P11*-P20* for piping component data based only on green connect point data. TNF Attributes Used to Form Table Name P51 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC P52 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC 334 . The following tables are required to store component-specific data required for interactive processing of piping components: These tables are stored in the physical data library.P29A).P28B). page 342 and Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data (P21B. TNF P11A P11B P15A P15B Attributes Used to Form Table Name MC_GS_Term(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B Use tables P21*-P30* for piping component data based on green and red connect point data. TNF P21A P21B P25A P25B P26A P26B P27A P27B P28A P28B P29A Attributes Used to Form Table Name MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A Use tables P31*-P40* for dimensional data based on green connect point data of piping valve operators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 .Operator/Actuator Type) are equal to or less than 24.P25A.P28A.P25B.P27B.P27A.

TNF P61 P62 P63 P64 P65 Attributes Used to Form Table Name MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC Use tables P80 and P81 for data about piping specialty components defined in the Material Reference Database.P65). P80 P81 Specialty Body Data Operator/Actuator Data 335 ._ _______________ Use table P59 for empty weights of piping valves. P59 Cmdty Code Piping Component Tables Use tables P60* for empty weights of piping valves. regardless of whether only green connect point or both green and red connect point data applies to the valve. model codes of valve operators and for dimensional data of piping valve operators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 .P64. 8.Operator/Actuator Type) exceed 24 and are less than or equal to 40.P63.P62. whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 . Refer to Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61. including weight of operators. Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components.Operator/Actuator Type) are less than or equal to 24. weights and centers of gravity of valve operators. page 352 for more information. Table Formats P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A P60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B Use tables P61-P70 for non-valve piping component empty weights based on green and red connect point data. regardless of whether only green connect point or both green and red connect point data applies to the valve. page 354 for more information.

this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of any of its ends. this parameter does not apply. this parameter does not apply. B Any C Any 336 . For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component. this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP2. this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP1. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component. This value can be deduced from the expression E + Q using the values of E and Q from the appropriate tables. Variable A End Type Any Explanation For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component.1 Variables for Specific Tables Letters A through O represent variables which are specific to a component. Not applicable.4. Bolted Male Female This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. Not applicable. Bolted This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. Bolted Male Female This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP3. This value can be deduced from the expression F + Q using the values of F and Q from the appropriate tables. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.

Variables for Specific Tables This value can be deduced from the expression G + Q using values of G and Q from the appropriate tables. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component. this is the distance from the origin of the component to the outermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP4. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component. this is the distance from the origin of the component to PCP2. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. this parameter does not apply. Not applicable. Bolted Male Female This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. This value can be deduced from the expression H + Q using values of H and Q from the appropriate tables. D Any For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component. this is the distance from the origin of the component to any of its PCPs. this parameter does not apply. Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression B + T using the values of B and T from the appropriate tables. this is the distance from the origin of the component to PCP1. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component. 8. Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression A + T using the values of A and T from the appropriate tables. Table Formats E Any Male Female F Any Male Female 337 . This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table._ _______________ Male Female Not applicable.

For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component. Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression C + T using values of C and T from the appropriate tables.M. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.N Any O Any 338 .J._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 G Any For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. For components with identical end terminations and branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of the component. this is the distance from the origin of the component to PCP4. Male Female H Any Male Female I. Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression D + T using the values of D and T from the appropriate tables. For components with different end terminations or branches that are not normal to the main axis of the component.L. These values are used in dimension tables for specific components as required by the component being defined. this is the distance from the origin of the component to PCP3. this parameter does not apply. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table. this parameter does not apply. This is the overall length of the component considering the outermost surface at each end of the component. This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.K.

SF.75 10 6. IN. IN ! GCP Surf Water Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Area Weight Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! ! Example Table_Data_Definition ’GAT_40_20_150_A’ Description= CL150 gate valve raised face flanged ends Source= ANSI-B16.125 0. The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P11A MC_GS_Term(G)_A For TNF=P15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A.5 2.25 2 0.5 5 5 6 5.3125 1 2.5 12 7 14 7.5 ! ! ! ! 339 . IN. LB. IN.10-1986 TNF=P15A By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=29-Oct-1987 SN=V1 Par 1=A No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN. SF.5 3.5 1.25 2.5 2.75 1. Table Formats Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN._ _______________ 8. P15A) 8.25 8 5.4.5 3. IN.375 2 0. P15A) Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A.75 2. IN. IN ! GCP Surf Water Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Area Weight Par 1 0. LB.2 This table enables you to define general parameters for components which require only green connect point data.75 3 4 4 4.25 2 3.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 36 END 8 8.5 9 10 11 12 12 14 340 .

IN. IN. IN. IN. P15B) 8. The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P11B MC_GS_Term(G)_B For TNF=P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B.4. IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 Par 8 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! ! 341 . IN._ _______________ 8. Table Formats Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN. IN. P15B) This table enables you to define overflow parameters for components to which table name formats P11A and P15A apply. IN.3 Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B.

75 0. IN. IN.5 0.25 3 1.53 2 1.8125 3.5 0. IN._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.25 0.5 4.8125 5.5 0.5625 ! ! ! ! 342 .53 3 0.5 0. LB.5625 4.5 2.5 0.5 3.5 2 5.5 1.5 0.8 3 2 4.3125 3.2375 2.5 3 0.75 0.4 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A.25 0.25 0.75 0.25 3. IN.6075 3.4875 2.5 5.9-1978 TNF=P21A By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=15-May-1986 SN=F84 Par 1=E Par 2=K Par 3=F Par 4=L No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6 Units= NPD_IN.75 0. The table name formats for this table are: TNF=P21A TNF=P25A TNF=P26A TNF=P27A TNF=P28A TNF=P29A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 7 Units= NPD_IN.P26A. SF.2375 3 0. LB. IN.75 0.P29A) This table enables you to define parameters for components which require both green and red connect point data.P27A.3575 3 0.5 1.5 2 3.P25A.3125 4.25 3.5625 5.5625 3 2. NPD_IN. IN ! Nom Diam Surf Weight Dimensional Parameters ! GCP RCP Area Water Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 2 1 3 0. IN. SF.4875 3.5 4.25 0.4.25 3 0. IN ! Nom Diam Surf Weight Dimensional Parameters ! GCP RCP Area Water Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! ! Example Table_Data_Definition ’E90R_39_300_300_A’ Description= 90 deg long radius reducing elbow beveled ends Source= ANSI-B16.6075 2.P28A.3575 2 1. IN. NPD_IN.8 4.75 0.

0625 1 2.0625 0.625 1. Table Formats 343 .625 1 3.0313 0.5 7.625 2.5 7.625 5 4 3 2 1 5.25 6 6 6 6 7.5 4 5 4 5 6 5 6 8 6 8 10 8 10 12 10 12 14 10 12 14 16 10 12 14 16 18 12 14 16 18 20 22 - 8.P26A.5 2.0313 0.P29A) _ _______________ 5.625 2 1 4.0625 1.25 1.0625 0.625 1.25 6 6 6 6 7.3438 1.0625 3.625 2.P27A.Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A.7813 0.3125 1.0625 3.5 0.0625 1 2.8125 0.625 2.5625 1.625 5 4 3 2 1 3.5312 2.5313 1.3125 1.625 3 2 1 5.0625 1.5 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 12 12 12 14 14 14 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 20 20 20 20 20 24 24 24 24 24 24 END 3 2 2.25 1.0625 0.5 9 9 9 9 12 12 12 15 15 15 18 18 18 21 21 21 24 24 24 27 27 27 27 30 30 30 30 30 36 36 36 36 36 36 0.5 7.5 4 3 3.25 1.0625 1.6875 1.5313 1.P25A.P28A.5625 1.0625 2.5312 2.25 1.8125 0.625 2 1 4.5 0.5937 2.3438 1.0625 0.7813 0.5 7.625 1 3.625 3.625 3 2 1 5.5 3 3.0625 1.5312 1 2.5 7.625 0.5 9 9 9 9 12 12 12 15 15 15 18 18 18 21 21 21 24 24 24 27 27 27 27 30 30 30 30 30 36 36 36 36 36 36 0.625 2.0625 2.5937 2.6875 1.5312 1 2.625 0.5 7.5 3 3.625 3.

4. The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P21B For TNF=P25B For TNF=P26B For TNF=P27B For TNF=P28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 7 Units= NPD_IN. IN. IN.P28B) This table enables you to define overflow parameters for components to which table name formats P21A. NPD_IN. IN.5 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data (P21B. P26A. IN. P27A and P28A apply.P25B.P27B. IN ! Nom Diam Dimensional Parameters ! GCP RCP Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! ! 344 . P25A._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8. IN.P26B. IN.

75 10 ! ! ! ! Rev=0 Date=26-Feb-1987 345 . IN.25 8._ _______________ 8. Table Formats where Type can have the following possible values: Preparation 2-199 300-399 400-599 Type BLT MAL FEM Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=P31Y By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN.75 9.4.375 3.75 0. IN. IN. IN.125 1 11.25 4. IN. IN.Operator/Actuator Type) are equal to or less than 24. IN.75 0.875 6 1. IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 Par 8 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! ! Example Table_Data_Definition ’GAT_BLT_150_3_A’ Description=Stem and handwheel operator Source=PDS Document 2630-33-OP TNF=P31A By=GJH Ckd By=RJW SN=OP3 Par 1=Y1 Par 2=Y2 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2 Units= NPD_IN.25 12.6 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A) This table enables you to define parameters for valve operators of piping valves whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 .75 0.375 3.5 17.375 3. IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Par 1 Par 2 0. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=P31A MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A) 8.5 8.5 6 1. IN.375 8.

5 61.5 19._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2 2.5 19.125 70.5 20 24 28 30 30 30 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 346 .125 22.75 13.25 140 145 150 155.813 20.5 79.25 105 112.188 31.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 END 17.375 28.5 10 10 12 13.75 116 123.375 45 52.75 89 97.75 35.75 15.

IN. Table Formats Preparation 2-199 300-399 400-599 Type BLT MAL FEM Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=P31B By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN.7 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators. IN.4. IN. IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 Par 8 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! ! 347 . IN. IN. Overflow Data (P31B) This table enables you to define overflow parameters for operators to which table name format P31A applies. Overflow Data (P31B) _ _______________ 8. IN. IN. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=P31B MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B where Type can have the following possible values: 8.Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators.

4. LB ! GCP Weight ! Diam Empty WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ END Examples Table_Data_Definition ’VAABAHCCAA’ ! Description= CL150 gate valve raised face flanged ends weight ! Source= CRANE catalog for figure 47XU ! TNF=P59 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=29-May-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN.0. where the commodity code is used to form the name of the dimension table.P52. LB ! GCP Weight ! Diam Empty 2 46 2.5 70 3 76 4 110 5 155 6 175 8 310 10 455 12 650 14 860 16 1120 348 . The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P51 For TNF=P52 For TNF=P59 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC Cmdty Code With version 5. P52 and P59 apply._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8. Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN.P59) This table enables you to define empty weights for components to which table name formats P51. This allows you to include a dash in the commodity code for a piping commodity valve. the Physical Data Library Manager will respect the use of a dash (-) in a table name.8 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51.

17 0.5 3 3 4.58 1. LB ! GCP Weight ! Diam Empty 0.9 5 15 6 24 8 47 10 83 12 123 14 158 16 207 18 263 20 323 22 392 24 468 26 550 28 625 30 733 32 825 34 36 1061 38 40 42 1442 44 46 48 END Date=24-Apr-1986 8.17 1 0. 722 ! TNF=P51 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN. Table Formats 349 .6 4 8.84 2 1.34 1.5 6.5 0.P52.Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51.25 0.75 0.7 3.P59) _ _______________ 18 20 24 30 END 1400 2125 3120 4250 Table_Data_Definition ’E90LR_39_300_S$STD_52’ ! Description= 90 deg long radius elbow beveled ends ! Source= Taylor Forge Cat.5 0.5 2.

75 16 1120 109 331 62 3. LB. weights and centers of gravity of valve operators. IN._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.625 18 1400 126 331 69.25 END ! ! ! ! ! ! 350 . Par "Y4" includes a 8" mounting adaptor. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_WOPD_A’ Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=P60A By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN.9 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves (P60A) This table enables you to define empty weights of piping valves.625 0 99.375 0 61. INT.9688 10. IN. IN ! GCP Weight Weight Oper Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Vlv Emp Oper Code Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! Example Table_Data_Definition ’VAABAHCCGR_WOPD_A’ Description=Crane 47 gate valve with gear operator 3X-N for 14". model codes of valves operators and dimensional data of piping valve operators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550.75 4.375 5. IN.5 0 84.625 0 65.1875 8. IN. 4X-N for 16.375 15.25 0 73.625 2. DEG. LB.7188 10. IN.625 20 2125 150 331 80. & 6X-N for 24" valve.4. DEG. IN.625 24 3120 248 331 92.2188 10. IN ! GCP Weight Weight Oper Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Vlv Emp Oper Code Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 14 860 75 331 57. Operator/Actuator Type) exceed 24 and are less than or equal to 40.8125 4. LB. 18 & 20". IN. LB. Source=CRANE catalog for Converto-Gear valve operators TNF=P60A By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=1 Date=01-Dec-1987 SN=VARIES No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN.

IN. 4X-N for 16.625 7.25 20 0 18 3. IN.625 7. IN. IN. IN.Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves.25 24 0 20 3. Source=CRANE catalog for Converto-Gear valve operators TNF=P60B By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=0 Date=22-May-1987 SN=VARIES No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 7 Units= NPD_IN. IN. IN.375 6.375 18.2188 15. Overflow Data (P60B) _ _______________ 8.375 20 0 16 3. IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ END ! ! ! ! 8.4. IN.2188 15.2188 15. IN. IN.25 30 0 24 5.625 7. IN ! GCP Dimensional Parameters ! Diam Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12 14 3. The table name format that applies to this table is: For TNF=P60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_WOPD_B’ Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ TNF=P60B By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ SN=ZZZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN. IN. Table Formats Example Table_Data_Definition ’VAABAHCCGR_WOPD_B’ Description=Crane 47 gate valve with gear operator 3X-N for 14".10 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves. IN.375 11. 18 & 20". IN.6875 12. Overflow Data (P60B) This table enables you to define overflow parameters for operators/actuators to which table name format P60A applies.5 30 0 END ! ! ! ! ! 351 . & 6X-N for 24" valve.

weights for schedule 60 fitting ! TNF=P63 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=15-Aug-1986 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN. NPD_IN. ! Source= TAYLOR FORGE Cat. P64.P62.11 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61.P64. and P65 apply: The table name formats for this table are: For TNF=P61 For TNF=P62 For TNF=P63 For TNF=P64 For TNF=P65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN. NPD_IN. LB ! Nom Diam Weight ! GCP RCP Empty 14 12 92 16 14 125 16 12 125 18 14 173 18 12 173 20 18 278 20 14 278 20 12 278 22 20 22 18 22 14 - 352 .P65) This table enables you to define empty weights for components to which table name formats P61. P62.P63. P63. 722.4. LB ! Nom Diam Weight ! GCP RCP Empty WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ END Example Table_Data_Definition ’REDC_39_300_S$60_300_S$40_52’ ! Description= Concentric reducer beveled ends weight._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.

P62.Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61. Table Formats 353 .P65) _ _______________ 24 24 END 20 18 397 397 8.P63.P64.

The AABBCC code is defined in the PDS Sort Code attribute of the Piping Specialty Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. The table names are of the format: EQBODY_SPECIFIC_<PSC>_<MC>_A._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8.4. page 355 for more information on these tables. _C .Specialty Body Data EQOPER_SPECIFIC_<PSC>_<MC>_A. _B.Specialty Operator/Actuator Data Refer to Instrument Component Tables. 354 . The tables used to to define the physical data for piping specialty components have the same format as those used to define instrument components. _B.12 Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components Six dimension tables are used for each combination of piping specialty generic name (AABBCC code) and piping specialty model code. _C .

surface area. The default prefix for these table names is Inbody. The instrument pds_sort_code is defined in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database (Table 204 attribute 18). the pds_sort_code is the Instrument AABBCC code as defined in the PDS Component Data Reference Guide.5. and a letter indicating the table (A-C). The entries in the tables must agree with the entries in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database.5 Instrument Component Tables Six dimension tables are used for each combination of instrument name (pds_sort_code) and instrument model code. you must revise the appropriate Piping Eden modules for the instruments. Table Formats 8. 355 . you should define the values for the physical units for length._ _______________ 8. (For the delivered examples. Multiple tables are required since tables with one input are limited to nine outputs. and weight to match the seed data defined for the project. When the tables are created in the Physical Data Library. the instrument pds_sort_code. If you use a user-defined prefix. Instrument Component Tables 8. The prefix is followed by either Specific or Typical. the model code. Each table is limited to approximately 60.) Input to these tables is defined in the physical_data_id attribute of the Instrument Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 17). You can specify a user-defined prefix up to 6 characters for the table names.1 Instrument Body (I80 and P80) Three tables define the instrument body physical and geometric data for each combination of instrument pds_sort_code and the model code in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database.000 bytes or 750 lines.

and the number of connect points for the instrument. Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_B The output fields are the dimensional parameters P7 through P15. as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide. the water weight. The remaining output fields are the dimensional parameters P2 through P6. the dry weight. as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide. 356 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_A The input field is the physical_data_id for the instrument. The first four output fields are the surface area.

_ _______________ Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_C Instrument Component Tables 8. 357 . Table Formats The output fields are the dimensional parameters P16 through P24. as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.

for the table names. For some operators. you must revise the appropriate Piping Eden modules for these instrument operators. You can specify a user-defined prefix. up to 6 characters. If you specify a user-defined prefix. and a letter indicating the table (A . define the center of gravity for the operator in terms of offsets from the instrument center. the first three dimensional parameters. as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide. The operator type must be loaded in the modifier attribute of the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. the instrument pds_sort_code.C). The prefix is followed by either Specific or Typical. The remaining output fields are dimensional parameters Y2 through Y8.2 Instrument Operator (I81 and P81) Three tables are required for the instrument operator/actuator geometric data for each combination of instrument pds_sort_code and model code in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. Y2 through Y4. The default prefix for these table names is Inoper._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 8. 358 . The operator type is the number (such as 411) representing the operator and not the symbol name (such as OP_411).5. the model code. Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_A The first two output fields for this table are the operator weight and the operator type.

_ _______________ Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_B Instrument Operator (I81 and P81) 8. 359 . Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_C The output fields are the dimensional parameters Y18 through Y24. as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide. Table Formats The output fields are the dimensional parameters Y9 through Y17. as prescribed in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 360 .

The material description data in these files is used for reporting and material control and is not required for the interactive placement of symbols in the model. Specialty Material Description Library . 9. Material Description Data Commodity Code The system uses the commodity code as an index to access the descriptions in the material description libraries. This data is only accessed during a batch (non-interactive) process. 361 . This database information tends to be customer-specific. Material Description Data The PDS 3D modules use the Material Description Library and the material data in the Material Reference Database to provide material descriptions for commodity items and specialty items. Short Material Description Library . and pipe supports.This library contains the long bill-of-material descriptions for all piping commodity items.This library contains the short bill-of-material (BOM) descriptions for all piping commodity items and the BOM description addenda for taps._ _______________ 9.These database tables (211 and 212) contain commodity definitions which enable you to further classify the commodity items defined in the Piping Job Specification. Other miscellaneous reporting. Long Material Description Library . Stress analysis. Isometric drawing extraction.This library contains the bill-of-material descriptions for engineered items. This data is accessed for Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database. Interfaces to a material control system. The alphanumeric commodity data is made up of four major parts: Material Description Data Material Tables in the Material Reference Database . You can use the commodity code defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data table (Table 202 attribute 18) or a user-defined commodity code defined in the Size-Dependent Material Data table (Table 211 attribute 7). The long BOM description is only used for requisitions. in-line instruments.

The delivered commodity codes use a 10 character code to fully identify the item. such as a valve or flange._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The source of the commodity code and other processing options for reporting are defined for a model with the Material Takeoff Options form of the Project Data Manager. The first character designations are: 362 . The remaining characters provide a detailed description of the component. The first letter of the commodity code identifies the basic type of component. The commodity code represents that set of parameters that completely describe a commodity item. The character length for the commodity code is determined from the character length of the commodity code in the Size Dependent Data table of the database. exclusive of nominal piping diameter and thickness. or from the character length of the commodity code in the Piping Commodity Data table of the database. depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions.

Material Description Data V A A B A H C C A A V A A B A H CC AA Valve Gate Valve CL150 Raised Face Flanged Ends Carbon Steel Trim 8 Crane 47 Blank Refer to Appendix E of the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a complete listing of the delivered commodity codes. Fittings Fire and Safety Components Steam Specialties Flanges Flanged Specialties Strainers Misc. Wetted Components Misc. You can use the delivered commodity codes or create your own naming scheme. all the codes must be unique and there must be an exact match between the commodity code specified for an item in the Material Reference Database and commodity codes used to define the material descriptions in the Material Descriptions Library. Non-Wetted Components Tubing and Hose Pipe Q R S T U V W X Y Socket End Fittings Tubing Fittings Socketwelded Fittings Threaded Fittings Underground Fittings Valves Welded Fittings Gaskets Bolting Material Description Data Examples 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 _____________________________ P A D A A B C A A E P AD AA BC AAE Pipe Pipe. Plain Ends Seamless X-Strong (s-xs) ASTM A106 Gr. B 9._ _______________ B D E F G H M N O P Flanged and Misc. 363 . Regardless of the scheme used.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Tap Commodity Codes The delivered tap codes use a 10 character code to full identify the tap’s material description addendum. but have been modified so that they are less than 18 characters. user-defined value. $75. ($ represents a decimal point.) End preparation value as defined in code list set 330. or 001. The use of leading and trailing zeroes is specific to this table naming convention. Example Tri-Clover part number: BS14AM-4"-316L-PL BS14AM 4" 316L PL = = = = Part Description Size Material Grade Surface Finish Description 364 .5 inches SWE . the nominal diameter value of the tap such as $50. The basic format of the tap commodity code is A BBB CCC DDD where A BBB E if English.socketwelded end unique number Tri-Clover Commodity Code Logic The Tri-Clover commodity codes are based on Tri-Clover part numbers. CCC DDD Example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 _____________________________ E $ 5 0 4 2 1 0 6 4 E $50 421 064 English NPD = 0.

The commodity code description lists the full part number. 9. the dashes ("-") and size are removed so that the commodity code is less than 18 characters._ _______________ Tri-Clover commodity code: BS14AM316LPL Material Description Data In the Tri-Clover commodity code. Material Description Data 365 .

for information on loading material data into these database tables via neutral files. nominal piping diameter. 366 . for information on the structure of these database tables. Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on both the Piping Commodity Library code and nominal piping diameter range.1 Material Data in the Material Reference Database The Material Reference Database contains two database tables which contain Material Data. or gaskets. It is also used for reporting the implied components of a commodity item (such as cap screws). It is used for miscellaneous batch reporting. This data is used strictly for generating implied material for MTO reporting and material control. page 56. page 145. Also refer to the description of the Piping Job Specification Manager. and schedule/thickness. bolts. and isometric drawing extraction. It is not used for welds. but is reserved for other types of implied material. and interfaces to material control. Refer to Material Reference Database Structure. for a specific commodity item. such as caps or stubs. stress analysis. nuts._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 9. Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on the commodity code. such as construction cost reports and requisition orders.

Nominal piping diameter is not included in this description. 9. The commodity code identifies the Piping Commodity Library code or customer’s commodity code. It also contains the chain wheel descriptions and implied material descriptions associated with a commodity item. The neutral file contains unique Commodity Codes followed by at least one space and a description enclosed in single quotes. The chain wheel number is defined in the component and instrument analysis entities of the TDB. depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions.l . This parameter is required during the creation of the Piping Job Specification. The tap code identifies the unique identification of a tap. Material Description Data 367 . For chain wheels the commodity code has the format CHAIN_xx. The short material descriptions are delivered in the files \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_shbom. CHAIN_12). The neutral files for the delivered material descriptions are contained in the text library. A neutral file containing the material description addenda for taps.object library The short material descriptions can be up to 240 characters in length.2 Short Material Description Library Short Material Description Library This library contains the short bill of materials description for all piping commodity items and the description addenda for taps. Neutral Files You can use neutral files to insert data into the Short Material Description Library or replace existing data. where xx represents the chain wheel number (for example. or from the character length of the commodity library code in the Piping Commodity Data table of the database. The short BOM description is used for MTO reporting and for reporting from the Piping Job Specification. This file contains the tap code and the text for the tap description._ _______________ 9. (These can be created with a text editor such as EMACS or vi. The character length for this code is determined from the character length of the commodity code in the Size Dependent Data table of the database.) A neutral file containing the short material descriptions for commodity items. You can use the in the following files: The Short Material Description Library is created from two neutral files.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The following conventions are used to identify different types of information in the material descriptions: ˆ All information to the left of the carat (ˆ) is used in MTO reporting and isometric extraction. || [] The following label types are provided in the product delivery: Label No 400 401 402 403 406 407 409 412 414 416 417 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 Data in Label Comp cmdty code Piping sch/thk 1 Tag no Component sch/thk 1 Component sch/thk 1 b Component sch/thk 2 Component sch/thk 2 b Component sch/thk 1 x 2 Component sch/thk 1 x 2 b Component sch/thk 1 x 3 Component sch/thk 1 x 3 b Bonnet length Piping chain length Reinforcing weld size Instr chain length RPAD width x thick Comp NPD 1 Monitor elev length Hydrant cover Blank/spacer thk Source of Data Component Pipe Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Data Retrieval The system uses the commodity code to retrieve the short material descriptions from the Material Description Library. This information is excluded from the descriptions for MTO reporting and isometric extraction. 368 . The system uses the label format to determine the information to be included in the material description for MTO reporting and isometric extraction. but is excluded from Spec reporting. The label information is never used in Spec reporting. Information appearing in |Pipes| indicates information for Spec descriptions only. Information appearing in [brackets] indicates a label type from the Label Description Library.

[409]|bore to match|’ FAABBAWIIA ’Flange. S-160 bore’ FAABBAWAAA ’Flange. ANSI-B16. CL150.5. 125 Ra finish. ANSI-B16. CL300. WN. CL300. RFFE/BE. CL300. ˆstation type. RFFE/BE. FFFE/BE. [427]. S-80S bore’ FAABBADIIB ’Flange. CL300. CL150 FFFE. RFFE/BE.5. WN. S-XXS bore’ FAABDADIIJ ’Flange. RFFE/BE. RFFE/BE. CL300.75" coupling in base. S-160 bore’ 9. S-160 bore’ FAAABAOFFH ’Flange. CL150. wall mount. ANSI-B16. S-80S bore’ FAABDAOAAA ’Flange.5. MTE. WN. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAABAWABB ’Flange. 125 Ra finish. CL150. WN. ˆASTM-A182-F316. ANSI-B16. CL150.5.5. supported. ˆASTM-A182-F11. WN. ˆASTM-A182-F5. Stang BB2999-’ DACBAXABBD ’Monitor. ANSI-B16. CL300. CL150. RFFE/BE. RFFE/BE. CL300. CL300. CL150. CL600. w/fog nozzle.5" NHT stainless steel outlet. w/drain coupling. ANSI-B16. S-160 bore’ FAAADAWAAA ’Flange. S-80S bore’ FAADBAOAAA ’Flange. ANSI-B16. 125 Ra finish. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABBAWIIB ’Flange. ANSI-B16. ˆASTM-A182-F5. 125 Ra finish. WN. CL300. ANSI-B16.5.5.5. WN. WN. WN. CL300. S-80S bore’ FAABBAOAAA ’Flange. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAADAWFFC ’Flange. ˆASTM-A350-LF2. RFFE/BE. ANSI-B16.5. Mulsifyre Projector S-1’ FAAAAAWAAA ’Flange. RFFE/BE. CL150. ˆASTM-A182-F11. ANSI-B16. ANSI-B16.5. 4. ANSI-B16.5. WN. WN. RFFE/BE. ˆASTM-A182-F321.5. CL150.5. WN. WN. 125 Ra finish.5.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0. CL300. S-80S bore’ FAAABADNPF ’Flange.5. CL300._ _______________ Commodity Material Descriptions ! ! ! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 23 14:16:58 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_shbom. ANSI-B16. CL300. ˆASTM-A182-F316. ANSI-B16. ANSI-B16. Stang BB3561’ DBAAAXBAAB ’Fire hydrant. RFFE/BE. CL150. ˆASME-SA182-F11. ANSI-B16. RFFE/BE. CL150. ANSI-B16. WN. RFFE/BE. WN.5. CL300. w/shapertip nozzle. 6" CL300 in-let by 2. two 2. CL125 FFFE. RFFE/BE. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAABAWNPF ’Flange. WN. WN. WN. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAABAWIIF ’Flange.5. CL300 FFFE.5. ˆw/valve. American Darling B-50-B’ DCBGDXEADA ’Hose rack.5. ˆASTM-A105. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAABAWFFH ’Flange. ˆASTM-A182-F9. CL150. ANSI-B16. ˆASTM-A350-LF2. ˆASTM-A105. RFFE/BE. CL150. ANSI-B16. free standing. CL600. ˆelevated type. ANSI-B16. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAABADIIA ’Flange. CL150.5. S-160 bore’ FAABBAOABB ’Flange. WN. S-160 bore’ FAABBAOFFH ’Flange. RFFE/BE. S-80S bore’ FAAABAOAAA ’Flange. WN.5. [409]|bore to match|’ FAADBADIIA ’Flange. RFFE/BE.5" hose nozzles equipped w/caps and chains. FFFE/BE.5. RFFE/BE. ANSI-B16. WN. ANSI-B16.5. ˆASTM-A182-F316. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAABBDAAA ’Flange. ˆASTM-A182-F304. CL150. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAABAWIIA ’Flange.5" NHT stainless steel outlet. WN. CL150. CL150. [427].5. RFFE/BE. ˆASTM-A105. ˆASTM-A182-F11. CL300. RFFE/BE. S-80S bore’ FAADBADIIF ’Flange. CL300. ˆASTM-A105. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABBAWNPF ’Flange. ˆASTM-A350-LF2. ANSI-B16.5" steamer nozzle. ANSI-B16. ANSI-B16. rt hand w/100 ft hose & fog nozzle Powhatan 30-333’ DDAXCJDAAA ’Spray sprinkler. ˆASTM-A182-F5. WN. WN. CL150 FFFE. RFFE/BE. ANSI-B16. WN.5. Material Description Data 369 . ˆASTM-A105. RFFE/BE. ANSI-B16.5. CL150 FFFE. ANSI-B16. 4" CL150 in-let by 2. WN. RFFE/BE.5. RFFE/BE. 125 Ra finish. WN. ANSI-B16. CL150. ANSI-B16. RFFE/BE. WN. cement lined. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABBBDAAA ’Flange.5. ˆstation type 4" CL150 in-let by 2. CL150.5. ANSI-B16. RFFE/BE. S-80S bore’ FAAABADIIF ’Flange. Stang BB0309-21’ DACBAXABBC ’Monitor. RFFE/BE. WN. ˆASTM-A105. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABBAWFFC ’Flange. CL300. CL150. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABDAWFFH ’Flange. ANSI-B16. ˆASTM-B166-600. ˆASTM-B166-600. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAABAWGFD ’Flange. RFFE/BE. ANSI-B16. RFFE/BE. S-80S bore’ FAABBADIIF ’Flange. WN. ˆASTM-A105. ˆASTM-A182-F304.5. WN. ˆASTM-A182-F11. ˆASTM-A182-F321. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAAAAWWAA ’Flange. S-160 bore’ FAAABAOABB ’Flange. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABBAWIIF ’Flange. RFFE/BE.5. ˆASTM-A105.5. ˆASTM-A182-F316.5. CL300. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABBAWABB ’Flange. ˆASTM-A182-F304L. 125 Ra finish. ˆASTM-A182-F5. ˆASTM-A182-F304. RFFE/BE.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0. RFFE/BE. RFFE/BE. WN. RFFE/BE. WN. ˆASTM-A182-F5. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABDAWIIJ ’Flange. S-160 bore’ FAABDAWAAA ’Flange. w/shapertip nozzle. 125 Ra finish.5. ˆASTM-A105. ANSI-B16. ˆASTM-A105. FTE. ˆ5" size. ANSI-B16. ANSI-B16. RFFE/BE. WN. counterclockwise open. ANSI-B16. WN. w/drain coupling. ˆASTM-A350-LF2. CL300. CL150.5. RFFE/BE. ANSI-B16. RFFE/BE. S-160 bore’ FAABDAOFFC ’Flange.5. 125 Ra finish. RFFE/BE.5. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABDAWFFC ’Flange. WN. ANSI-B16. S-XXS bore’ FAABBADIIA ’Flange. WN. RFFE/BE. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAABAWFFL ’Flange. WN.75" coupling in base. CL600. ˆASTM-A182-F11. ANSI-B16. Stang BB0309-21’ DAABAXAABF ’Monitor. 304. 4" CL150 in-let by 2. ˆASTM-A105. ANSI-B16. 125 Ra finish. ˆASTM-A182-F304. ANSI-B16. ˆelevated type.5. 300#. S-160 bore’ FAABBAOFFC ’Flange.5. ANSI-B16.5. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABBAWFFH ’Flange. ˆASTM-A182-F11. RFFE/BE. [409]|bore to match|’ FAAADBDFFC ’Flange.5.5. WN.5. CL150. WN. ANSI-B16. CL300. RFFE/BE. WN.5. WN. WN. WN. RFFE/BE. 125 Ra finish. CL300. ˆASTM-B166-600. RFFE/BE.5. RFFE/BE.5. WN. CL150.5. ˆASTM-A182-F304L. WN. Grinnell. [428]. WN. ANSI-B16. ˆASTM-A182-F9. 125 Ra finish. S-160 bore’ FAAADAOFFC ’Flange. ANSI-B16. ANSI-B16.l Short Material Description Library !Cmdty Code ====================================Description======================================== CHAIN_1003 ’Chainwheel operator each with [422] of total chain length for [426] NPD valve with commodity code [400]’ CHAIN_1005 ’Chainwheel operator each with [422] of total chain length for [426] NPD valve with commodity code [400]’ CHAIN_1251 ’Chainwheel operator each with [424] of total chain length for valve with tag no [402]’ DAABAXAABE ’Monitor. [409]|bore to match|’ FAABBAWFFL ’Flange. S-XXS bore’ FAAADAOAAA ’Flange. ˆASTM-A182-F316. RFFE/BE. WN. ˆASTM-A105. CL300.5. RFFE/BE. CL300. w/shapertip nozzle and two reaction supports. WN. RFFE/BE. ANSI-B16. ˆASTM-A182-F304.5. filled cone w/rupture disc. CL300. ˆASTM-A105. ˆASTM-A182-F11. S-160 bore’ FAAABAWAAA ’Flange.

CL300 RFFE tap’ E$75021036 ’0. Sch 80 SE tap’ E002421064 ’2" NPD. CL600. CL9000 SWE tap’ E002441056 ’2" NPD.5" NPD. ’Flange. WN. WN. CL6000 SWE tap’ E002421076 ’2" NPD. ’Flange. [409]|bore to match|’ ˆASME-SA105. CL600. CL6000 FTE tap’ E002591XXX ’2" diam hole’ E003021018 ’3" NPD.5. ’Flange. CL600. CL3000 FTE tap’ E002441072 ’2" NPD.5" NPD. WN.75" diam hole’ E001021018 ’1" NPD._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 FAADBAOABE FAADBAWAAA FAADBAWABE FAADBAWFFC FAADBAWFFH FAADBAWFFL FAADBAWIIA ’Flange.5. ANSI-B16. Sch 80 SE tap’ E$50421064 ’0. CL6000 FTE tap’ E001591XXX ’1" diam hole’ E002021018 ’2" NPD.5" NPD. Sch 80 SE tap’ E$75421064 ’0. CL3000 FTE tap’ E$75441072 ’0. ANSI-B16. ANSI-B16. [409]|bore to match|’ Tap Material Descriptions ! ! ! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 23 12:09:23 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_shbom.75" NPD.5" NPD. CL2000 FTE tap’ E002441064 ’2" NPD. [409]|bore to match|’ ˆASTM-A182-F304. CL6000 FTE tap’ E$75591XXX ’0. CL300 RFFE tap’ E001021036 ’1" NPD. ANSI-B16. CL600 RFFE tap’ E002401093 ’2" NPD. CL300 RFFE tap’ E002021036 ’2" NPD. [409]|bore to match|’ ˆASTM-A182-F5. RFFE/BE. WN. CL3000 SWE tap’ E001421072 ’1" NPD. Sch 80 SE tap’ E001421064 ’1" NPD.5" NPD.75" NPD.75" NPD. CL6000 FTE tap’ E$50591XXX ’0. CL2000 FTE tap’ E001441064 ’1" NPD.75" NPD. WN.75" NPD.5.5. CL600 RFFE tap’ E$50401093 ’0.375" diam hole’ E$50021018 ’0. CL300 RFFE tap’ E$50021036 ’0. CL6000 SWE tap’ E001421076 ’1" NPD. ANSI-B16. CL6000 SWE tap’ E$50421076 ’0. WN.5" NPD. CL3000 FTE tap’ E$50441072 ’0. CL6000 SWE tap’ E$75421076 ’0.5. RFFE/BE. CL3000 SWE tap’ 370 . CL3000 FTE tap’ E001441072 ’1" NPD.75" NPD. CL9000 SWE tap’ E$75441056 ’0. CL600. RFFE/BE. CL600 RFFE tap’ E$75401093 ’0.5" NPD. CL150 RFFE tap’ E001021028 ’1" NPD. [409]|bore to match|’ ˆASTM-A182-F11.75" NPD.25" diam hole’ E$37591XXX ’0. CL9000 SWE tap’ E$50441056 ’0. CL3000 SWE tap’ E$75421072 ’0. CL150 RFFE tap’ E$50021028 ’0. CL300 RFFE tap’ E003021036 ’3" NPD. CL600. RFFE/BE.5" diam hole’ E$75021018 ’0.125" diam hole’ E$25591XXX ’0. CL2000 FTE tap’ E$50441064 ’0. Sch 80 SE tap’ E003421064 ’3" NPD. RFFE/BE.5" NPD. RFFE/BE.5" NPD. CL150 RFFE tap’ E002021028 ’2" NPD. RFFE/BE. ’Flange. CL150 RFFE tap’ E003021028 ’3" NPD. ANSI-B16. CL3000 SWE tap’ E002421072 ’2" NPD. ’Flange. ’Flange.75" NPD.75" NPD. ˆASME-SA105.5" NPD. CL600.l !Cmdty Code ====================================Description================================ E$12591XXX ’0. CL2000 FTE tap’ E$75441064 ’0. CL600 RFFE tap’ E003401093 ’3" NPD. CL600. CL3000 SWE tap’ E$50421072 ’0. CL9000 SWE tap’ E001441056 ’1" NPD.5. [409]|bore to match|’ ˆASTM-A182-F9. CL150 RFFE tap’ E$75021028 ’0.75" NPD. WN. CL600 RFFE tap’ E001401093 ’1" NPD. ANSI-B16. S-160 bore’ ˆASTM-A105.5.

_ _______________ E003441056 E003441064 E003441072 E003591XXX E004021018 E004021028 E004021036 E004401093 E004421064 E004441056 E004441064 E004441072 E004591XXX ’3" ’3" ’3" ’3" ’4" ’4" ’4" ’4" ’4" ’4" ’4" ’4" ’4" NPD. NPD. NPD. diam NPD. NPD. NPD. Material Description Data 371 . NPD. NPD. NPD. NPD. NPD. diam CL2000 FTE tap’ CL3000 FTE tap’ CL6000 FTE tap’ hole’ CL150 RFFE tap’ CL300 RFFE tap’ CL600 RFFE tap’ Sch 80 SE tap’ CL3000 SWE tap’ CL2000 FTE tap’ CL3000 FTE tap’ CL6000 FTE tap’ hole’ Short Material Description Library 9.

The long bill of materials description is only used for requisitions. You can use neutral files to insert data into the Long Material Description Library or replace existing data. 372 . depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions.3 Long Material Description Library This library contains the long bill of materials description for all piping commodity items. Data Retrieval The system uses the Piping Commodity Library code or commodity code to access the text for the long description in the Long Material Description Library. Neutral Files The Long Material Description Library is created through a neutral file which contains the long material descriptions for commodity items. This required that long descriptions be continued on multiple lines. The neutral file contains unique commodity codes followed by at least one space and a description enclosed in single quotes.l.0 release. The long description can be up to 500 characters. the reported (compiled) length of the description can be up to 600 characters. or from the character length of the commodity library code in the Piping Commodity Data table of the PJS database. The long material descriptions can be up to 500 characters in length._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 9. This data is used strictly for MTO reporting and material control. With the 5. The long material descriptions are delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_lgbom. It is usually a very long description such as a paragraph. The commodity code identifies the Piping Commodity Library code or customer’s commodity code. a neutral file for long material descriptions may contain up to 600 characters per line. Prior to the 5.0 release there was a restriction that no more than 255 characters could be specified per line in the neutral file. Because this description may include label numbers which are translated to text strings. Nominal piping diameter is not included in the description. The character length for this code is determined from the character length of the commodity code in the Size Dependent Data database table.

F304. raised face flanged end. Sch 80S bore’ FAABBADIIB ’Flange. ANSI-B16.5 CL150. station type 4" CL150 in-let by 2. elevated type.5 CL150. ANSI-B16. 4" CL150 in-let by 2. [409]’ FAAABAWABB ’Flange.F11. weld neck.F316. 125 Ra finish. regular rating. Mulsifyre Projector S-1 50-12 or approved equal’ FAAAAAWAAA ’Flange. weld neck. female threaded end. 125 Ra finish. weld neck. ASTM-A182 Gr. flat face flanged end. 750 GPM at 100 psig. weld neck. bituminous paint below grade. right hand w/100 ft synthetic single jacketed hose. American Darling B-50-B or approved equal’ DCBGDXEADA ’Hose rack w/bronze angle valve.F304L.5" NHT stainless steel outlet. [409]’ FAAADBDFFC ’Flange. raised face flanged end.5" NHT stainless steel outlet.5 CL150. [409]’ FAAABAWIIA ’Flange. 4" CL150 in-let by 2. ANSI-B16. [409]’ FAAADAWFFC ’Flange.F11. ANSI-B16. 125 Ra finish.5 CL150.l Long Material Description Library !Cmdty Code ====================================Description======================================== DAABAXAABE ’Monitor. weld neck. Sch 80S bore’ FAAABADNPF ’Flange. raised face flanged end. red epoxy paint above grade.5 CL150. raised face flanged end. [409]’ FAAABAWIIF ’Flange.5 CL150. ANSI-B16.75" coupling in base. raised face flanged end. ANSI-B16. two 2. [409]’ FAAABAWFFL ’Flange. 5" size.F304. Sch 80S bore’ FAAABADIIF ’Flange.5 CL150.F316. Sch 160 bore’ FAAABAWAAA ’Flange.5 CL150. weld neck. cement lined. weld neck. [428]. ANSI-B16. Stang BB2999-[427] high or approved equal’ DACBAXABBD ’Monitor. ANSI-B16. Grinnell Fire Protection. ASTM-A105.5 CL150. ASTM-A182 Gr. w/shapertip nozzle. 125 Ra finish. bronze trim. 125 Ra finish. hot finish. w/drain coupling. hot finish. ASTM-B166 Gr.5 CL150.75" coupling in base. elevated type.5 CL150. CL125 flat face flange end. ANSI-B16.5 CL150. 6" CL300 in-let by 2. ASTM-A105. CL150 flat face flange end. ASTM-A182 Gr. ASTM-A105. ASTM-B166 Gr. ASTM-A105.5 CL150. Stang BB3561-[427] high or approved equal’ DBAAAXBAAB ’Fire hydrant. raised face flanged end. raised face flanged end. CL150 flat face flange end. ASTM-A350 Gr. raised face flanged end. ASTM-A105. w/fog nozzle. weld neck. station type.5 CL150.F11. weld neck. 4. ductile iron barrel. weld neck. ASTM-A182 Gr.LF2.5 CL150. Sch 80S bore’ FAAABAOAAA ’Flange. wall mount.600 UNS N06600. [409]’ FAAABAWFFH ’Flange. w/shapertip nozzle and two reaction supports.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0. weld neck.F5. raised face flanged end. raised face flanged end. ANSI-B16. ASTM-A182 Gr. weld neck.313" orifice. . ASTM-A182 Gr.5 CL150.F304. ASTM-A105. male threaded end. w/shapertip nozzle. ASTM-A182 Gr. raised face flanged end. Powhatan 30-333 or approved equal’ DDAXCJDAAA ’Spray sprinkler. ANSI-B16.5 CL300. raised face flanged end. [409]’ FAAAAAWWAA ’Flange. ANSI-B16. ASTM-A182 Gr. raised face flanged end. raised face flanged end. ANSI-B16. ANSI-B16. Material Description Data 373 . ASTM-A182 Gr. weld neck. CL300 flat face flange end.F11.5 CL150. Sch 80S bore’ 9. counterclockwise open. Stang BB0309-21 or approved equal’ DACBAXABBC ’Monitor. ASTM-A182 Gr.5 CL150. ANSI-B16. raised face flanged end. raised face flanged end.5 CL150. XX-strong bore’ FAAADAOAAA ’Flange. weld neck. weld neck. ASTM-A105. 750 GPM at 100 psig.F5. Sch 160 bore’ FAAABAOABB ’Flange. 300#. CL150 flat face flange end. weld neck. ANSI-B16. Sch 160 bore’ FAAADAWAAA ’Flange. ANSI-B16. Sch 160 bore’ FAAADAOFFC ’Flange. [409]’ FAAABADIIA ’Flange. ANSI-B16. rack nipple & fog nozzle. ANSI-B16.5" NHT stainless steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0. ASTM-A182 Gr.5 CL150. weld neck. ANSI-B16. weld neck. ANSI-B16. weld neck. ANSI-B16. flat face flanged end. weld neck.5" hose nozzles equipped w/caps and chains. weld neck. ASTM-A182 Gr. w/drain coupling. XX-strong bore’ FAABBADIIA ’Flange. free standing. Sch 160 bore’ FAAABAOFFH ’Flange. 750 GPM at 100 psig.5 CL300. [409]’ FAAABAWGFD ’Flange. weld neck. raised face flanged end. Type 304 stainless steel. 750 GPM at 100 psig.5 CL150. ASME-SA182 Gr. raised face flanged end. raised face flanged end. [409]’ FAAABAWNPF ’Flange.600 UNS N06600. raised face flanged end. weld neck. supported. raised face flanged end. ANSI-B16. filled cone w/rupture disc. weld neck.5 CL150. raised face flanged end.LF2. ASTM-A350 Gr. [409]’ FAAABBDAAA ’Flange. ANSI-B16.5" steamer nozzle. Stang BB0309-21 or approved equal’ DAABAXAABF ’Monitor.F9._ _______________ Listing for Long Material Descriptions ! ! ! DEFINE LONG DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Fri Apr 24 10:48:13 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_lgbom.

’ SPECIAL_ENGR 8 ’SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET. in-line instruments. Material descriptions for pipe supports. (commodity code = tag).’ INSTR ’Instrument’ PSPECIALTY ’Piping specialty component’ PSUPPORT ’[970]’ ! ! ! DEFINE SPECIALTY DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:39 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_spbom. Neutral Files Three neutral files are used to insert data into or replace data for the specialty material descriptions. This data is used strictly for MTO reporting and material control. The descriptions in Specialty Material Description Library tend to be customer-specific.’ SPECIAL_ENGR @O ’SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET. The following is a listing of sample neutral files for the specialty data._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 9. The specialty tag number is appended by a specialty type which is used to distinguish between engineered items.4 Specialty Material Description Library This Library contains the material descriptions for any engineered items or in-line instruments which are reported by MTO or material control. Material descriptions for engineered items (engineered item number = tag). (instrument tag number = tag). These material descriptions are job specific and are accessed by the specialty item’s tag number.’ 374 . The specialty material descriptions can be up to 240 characters in length.l !Cmdty Code ====================================Description============================== SPECIAL_ENGR ’SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET.l !Cmdty Code ====================================Description============================== 38-VI-9 ’RELIEF CONTROL VALVE. and pipe supports. ! ! ! DEFINE SPECIALTY DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:24 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_spbom. These files contain the specialty tag number and the text for the material description. Material descriptions for instruments.

l ====================================Description============================== ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1._ _______________ ! ! ! DEFINE SPECIALTY DESCRIPTIONS Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:56 1992 Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_spbom. Material Description Data 375 .’ @O ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1.’ ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 2.’ 8 ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 2.’ @O ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 3.’ ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 3.’ !Cmdty Code SUPP1 SUPP1 SUPP1 SUPP2 SUPP2 SUPP2 SUPP3 SUPP3 SUPP3 Specialty Material Description Library Data Retrieval The system uses the specialty tag number and specialty type to access the text for the material descriptions in the Specialty Material Description Library.’ @O ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 2.’ 8 ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1. 9.’ 8 ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 3.

The system displays the Material Description Library Manager form. You can initialize libraries. Short Material Description Library Long Material Description Library Specialty Material Description Library 376 .5 Material Description Library Manager The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create and modify alphanumeric commodity data. create material description data. revise (delete and replace) existing data. and delete existing data. Select Material Description Library Manager from the Reference Data Manager form. 2. Operating Sequence 1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 9. append new data to existing material description data. Select the option for the library to be modified. You can use the copy and paste commands to copy existing library data from another project and make the necessary revisions using the Material Description Library Manager.

_ _______________
3. The data manipulation options for each of the libraries is similar. You can perform the following activities for each of the libraries.

Material Description Library Manager

Create Library — Creates a new (empty) Short Material Description Library, Long Material Description Library, or Specialty Material Description Library. Unapprove ==> Approve — Copies data from the unapproved library to the approved library. Load/Revise Interactive — Adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in an existing Material Description Library or revises an existing table in the library. Load/Revise Batch — Adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in an existing Material Description Library or revises an existing table in the library. Replace Interactive — Deletes all entries in the respective Material Description Library file and then loads new entries from a neutral file. Replace Batch — Deletes all entries in the respective Material Description Library file and then loads new entries from a neutral file. Report — Used to create a report file or a neutral file of the contents of the material description library.

9. Material Description Data

377

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002

9.5.1

Create Library
This option is used to create a new Material Description Library. This option is disabled if the library already exists. 1. Select Create Library from the Material Description Library Manager form. The system displays the approved and unapproved Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data.

2.

The system prompts Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files.

9.5.2

Unapproved ==> Approved
This option is used to copy the data in the unapproved material description library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the library file to the approved library. If the approved and unapproved library names are the same, the system displays an error message.

378

_ _______________
9.5.3 Load/Revise Interactive

Load/Revise Interactive

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Description Library. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data. This option adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in the library or revises an existing table in the library. The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered material description libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutral files.

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Load/Revise option. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

9. Material Description Data

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed.

4.

Accept to Create New Records or Exit Select Accept to begin processing the neutral file. The system begins processing the load/revise request.

379

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002

9.5.4

Load/Revise Batch
This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Description Library via batch processing. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data. This option adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in the library or revises an existing table in the library. The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered material description libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutral files.

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Load/Revise option. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed and select Accept.

4.

Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Batch Immediately or Delayed Batch Submit Time. For delayed submission, set the time to process the neutral file.

5.

Select Accept to begin processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

380

_ _______________
9.5.5 Replace Interactive

Replace Interactive

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Description Library. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data. This option deletes all entries in the respective library file and then loads new entries from the neutral file. The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered material description libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutral files.

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Replace Interactive option from the Material Description Library form. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

9. Material Description Data

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed.

4.

Accept to Create New Records or Exit Select Accept to begin processing the neutral file.

381

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002

9.5.6

Replace Batch
This option enables you to load entries from a neutral file into the Material Description Library via batch processing. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data. This option deletes all entries in the respective library file and then loads new entries from the neutral file. The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered material description libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutral files.

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Replace Batch option from the Material Description Library form. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed and select Accept.

4.

Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Batch Immediately or Delayed Batch Submit Time. For delayed submission, set the time to process the neutral file.

5.

Select Accept to begin processing. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

382

_ _______________
9.5.7 Report Option
The Report option enables you to create neutral files or report files using the information in the Material Description Library. Refer to the description of the Short Material Description Library, Long Material Description Library, and Specialty Material Description Library for more information on the types of neutral files.

Report Option

Operating Sequence
1. 2. Select the Report option from one of the library forms. Select File Type Select the type of material data to be extracted from the specified library from the display list and select Accept.

9. Material Description Data

3.

Specify Neutral File Name Key in the name of the neutral file to be created. You can change the Node Name and File Path information.

4.

Accept or Toggle to Create Report Select Accept to create the specified neutral file.

5.

Set the toggle to Unapproved Library or Approved Library to define the source of information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. Set the toggle to Create Neutral File to create a neutral file which can be revised and reloaded into the library. — OR — Set the toggle to Create Report to create a report file of the information in the library. The report output is the same as the neutral file except that the system aligns subsequent lines of the material description left-justified to the beginning of the material description rather than the commodity code.

6.

383

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 For the report selection, the system displays the following options.

7.

Select the reporting option. Print / Delete — submit the generated report output file to the specified print queue and delete the output file. Print / Save — submit the generated report output file to the specified print queue and save the output file. Save — save the output file and suppress printing. For either of the Print options, the system displays a list of queues based on information in the project Queue Description Library. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide, for more information on the Queue Description Library and setting up print queues. Select the queue for the required output device.

8.

Select Accept to begin processing the request.

384

_ _______________
10. Table Checker

Table Checker

The Table Checker enables you to verify that all the commodity spec tables, entries, and Eden modules for a piping materials class exist in the graphic data libraries for the project. This process accesses the Eden code for each commodity item in the piping material class and checks that the table names created in the physical dimension modules exist in the project Physical Data Library. This routine checks for the existence of the tables and checks the contents of the tables. For Table Checker to function, there MUST be at least one piping model file created in the project, and it must have a piping materials class (spec) defined in the Active Segment Parameters. The Type 63 settings of the model with the highest alphanumeric name are used as defaults for the Table Checker reports. If weight tables are set to ’yes’ for this model, then Table Checker will search for and report on found and missing weight tables. If MTO Bolt Calculation is set to ’almost precise,’ Table Checker will search for the ’almost precise’ tables (table naming format = G12). If set to ’precise,’ Table Checker will search for ’precise’ tables (table naming format = G12T).

When the spec contains PIPING/TUBE and PIPE/TUBING, Table Checker will report as per Type 63 data settings. If Component Placement is set to PIPING for Pipe Commodity Name and TUBE for Tube Commodity Name, Table Checker uses these commodity names and searches for PDPIPING and PDTUBE in the Graphic Commodity Library. If there are any other PIPE and TUBING values found in the spec that do not match with Type 63, Table Checker assumes that this is a regular commodity item. It uses the model_code and searches for SPmodel_Code in the Graphic Commodity Library. If Component Placement is set to PIPE for Pipe Commodity Name and TUBING for Tube Commodity Name, Table Checker uses these commodity names and searches for PDPIPE and PDTUBING in the Graphic Commodity Library. If there are any other PIPING and TUBE values found in the spec that do not match with Type 63, Table Checker assumes that this is a regular commodity item. It uses the model_code and searches for SPmodel_code in the Graphic Commodity Library. In such cases, if the model_code of the item is the same as the commodity_name that matches with Type 63 data, the Table Checker may report the same value under both Eden Found and Eden Not Found. In other words, Table Checker reports the commodity_name under Eden Found and the model_code under Eden Not Found.

10. Table Checker

385

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002

Features
The Table Checker provides the following features. Reports on one piping material class selected from the available entries in the Specification/Material Database. Reports on all valid sizes in the size range for each piping commodity using the Nominal Piping Diameter table for that piping materials class. Reports dimensional tables used during the placement of each piping commodity in the piping materials class. This includes the table names, the types of tables, the existence of those tables (found or not found), and the output values from those tables. Reports Piping Eden modules used during the placement of each piping commodity in the piping materials class. This includes the Piping Eden module names and the existence of those modules (found or not found). Reports dimensional tables used for all piping commodities in the entire report (the piping materials class). This includes the table names, the revision dates for those tables, and the source Dimension Table Library. Reports bolt tables for each piping commodity with bolted ends. Reports Piping Eden modules used for all piping commodities in the entire report (the piping materials class). This includes the Piping Eden module names and the existence of those modules (found or not found). Verifies that a material description exists in the Material Description Library for any piping commodities defined in the Material Reference Database. The commodity code as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table (PDtable_202) or the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table (PDtable_211) is used to verify the material description. Verifies that a material description exists in the Material Description Library for any implied component defined in the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data Table (PDtable_212) of the Material Reference Database. Verifies that a material description exists in the Specialty Material Description Library for any piping specialty or instrument defined in the Material Reference Database. Provides a detailed error report of any tables or table entries that were found missing during the processing of the piping materials class. For tables containing schedule thickness calculations as part of the name, the calculations are replaced with preferred thickness unless no preferred thickness is found for that size or PMC thickness table. If any errors are encountered during execution, the system appends the errors to the end of the report output. In the case of severe errors, it creates a file named RPT_ERR.LOG.

386

_ _______________
Commodity items with option codes greater than 5000 (spec implied components) are not checked.

Table Checker

Format Files
The Table Checker uses report format files to define the report output. It uses the same reporting indices as any other report from the Piping Job Specification data (the C indices). Refer to Format Files in the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on these indices. The following example report formats for the Table Checker are included in the PD_DATA sample directory (\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format/). Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on report type. tbl_chk_1.fmt This report format reports on virtually all data generated by the Table Checker. It is a combination of the following sample report formats: tbl_chk_2.fmt, tbl_chk_3.fmt, and tbl_chk_4.fmt. It reports the piping commodities in the selected piping materials class with the dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used, including a list of all entries read in the dimension tables. It also lists all dimension tables and Piping Eden modules required for those piping commodities, but not available in the Reference Database. tbl_chk_2.fmt This report format reports the dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used by each piping commodity in the applicable piping materials class.

10. Table Checker

tbl_chk_3.fmt This report lists all entries read in dimension tables for the applicable piping materials class. tbl_chk_4.fmt This report format reports a total list of dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used for the applicable piping materials class. It also lists all dimension tables and Piping Eden modules required for those piping commodities, but not available in the Reference Database. tbl_chk_5.fmt This report verifies the reference data for any piping specialties defined in the Reference Database (pdtable_203). tbl_chk_6.fmt

387

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 This report verifies the reference data for any instruments defined in the Reference Database (pdtable_204). Table format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination file is created with the No Piping Material Class button selected.

388

_ _______________
10.1 Table Checker Form
The Report Manager form enables you to generate reports from the project, design, and reference database files with the report definition data. The report record and the location records for each discrimination data file and format file are stored in the project control database. These numbered records are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.

Table Checker Form

Options
Report Format — Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For more information, see Report Format Form, page 392. Report Discrimination Data — Displays the Discrimination Data form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well as the file itself. For more information, see Discrimination Data Form, page 398. Report — Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, and approve report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page 406. Report Management Data — Displays the Report Management Defaults form, which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the default nodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used for setup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 420.

10. Table Checker

389

and places it in the specified directory on the specified node. The format record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific format file. the format record is created interactively. format files. Format File and Record The format file is a user-defined. you can create a numbered record for each format file so that it can be accessed for report processing. Table Checker reports cannot be processed. and search criteria data files. The following definitions explain all of the files and records in the reporting process. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report. Discrimination Data File and Record The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. Using the Report Format option._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. Without the format file(s). There is a uniquely-numbered record for each discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. Unlike the format file. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file.1. discrimination. Report Output and Record The Table Checker creates a report using the specified format. including the report output. This is the same way that the format record is used to access a format file. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file. and database records that represent these files to generate reports. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in the report and how the data is sorted. A set of basic format files is delivered for each type of reporting.) 390 . The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a report.1 Using the Report Commands Understanding Report Files and Records The Table Checker uses the discrimination data files. ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside of the Table Checker. It is an ASCII file that is created interactively using the Table Checker. The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific discrimination data file.

Reports cannot be generated until the format file. you can prevent keying in a nodename and path on each form. Table Checker 391 . Finally. simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification. and their corresponding records have been established. use the Report Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report definition files. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default. The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record. discrimination data record. By defining the defaults first. First. and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination Data options._ _______________ Group Workflow Using the Report Commands There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. 10. the discrimination data file. use the Report option to create the actual report.

Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the file’s location has been entered into the project control database. see Format Creation/Revision Form. see Format Creation/Revision Form.1. For more information. revise. page 394. This form enables you to create. or delete a record of the location of the format file in the project control database. copy. which modifies a record of an existing format file in the project control database. which enables you to add a new record of a format file in the project control database.2 Report Format Form When you choose the Report Format option from the Report Manager form. The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be displayed. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a record and its corresponding ASCII format files. the Report Format form is displayed. see Format Creation/Revision Form. which copies the record of an existing format file from the project control database along with the corresponding ASCII format file. For more information. 392 . Copy — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form. page 394. For more information. Revise — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form. Options Create — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. page 394.

see Format Deletion Form._ _______________ Delete — Displays the Deletion form. For more information. page 396. which deletes an existing record of a format file from the project control database. Table Checker 393 . reporting cannot be performed. If the record of the format file is deleted. Report Format Form 10.

Description — A description of up to 40 characters for the format file.2. File Specification — The file name of the format file to reference.1 Format Creation/Revision Form When you choose Create. Path — The disk location of the format file. Node — The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. 394 . This form creates or revises a record in the project control database. Specifies the short name in the project control database used to identify the record of the format file. Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10.1. this record defines the location of a format file. Copy. Field Descriptions Number — A unique number of up to 24 characters. This field retains the active setting. or Revise from the Report Format form. the Format Creation/Revision form is displayed. This field retains the active setting.

Table Checker 395 . A set of basic format files is delivered with the PD_Data product in the ˜\pddata\sample\format directory. Format Creation/Revision Form Operating Sequence 1. Specify Report Format Data Type information in each of the displayed fields. The file for MTO reporting is named piping_#. or Revise._ _______________ Before Using this Form You must have created an ASCII format file. Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information.fmt. 3. taking care to press return in each field. Then click Accept. Copy. To create a database record. 2. Select Create. Then click Accept. Select Report Format From the displayed list. select the record to be copied or revised. go to Step 3. The project control database is updated. A list of available records displays for copy or revision. 10.

This form is used with format files and their database records. 396 .2 Format Deletion Form When you choose Delete. This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted. Fields and Options Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. only the database record is deleted. the Deletion form is displayed. the database record is deleted along with the associated file. select the database record to be deleted. and search criteria files and their database records. When set to Do Not Delete File. Select Report Format From the displayed list.1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. When set to Delete File. Operating Sequence 1.2. discrimination data files and their database records.

The specified record is deleted. Format Deletion Form 10. Then click Accept. Table Checker 397 . If specified. the associated file is also deleted._ _______________ 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed.

The associated record in the project control database is also copied. That is._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. page 400. For more information. A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a report. For more information. The project control database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be associated with a specific report. page 402. Copy — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form.3 Discrimination Data Form When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form. discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. copies. which copies an existing data file. see Discrimination Data Creation Form. and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified directory. see Discrimination Data Revision Form. the location of the discrmination file. or deleted as needed. This form creates. which creates a new discrimination data file. revised.1. The associated project control database record is also created. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination data file. the Discrimination Data form is displayed. revises. The associated project control database record is also copied. Revise — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form. which modifies discrimination data. and the associated record in the project 398 . Options Create — Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form.

For more information. For more information. Discrimination Data Form 10._ _______________ control database. page 402. Table Checker 399 . which deletes a discrimination data file as well as its associated record in the project control database. Delete — Displays the Deletion form. page 404. see Discrimination Data Revision Form. see Discrimination Data Deletion Form.

1. of the discrimination data record in the project control database.3. you can use this form to specify segment and component search criteria. Description — The description. It also creates a corresponding record in the project control database.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form When you select Create from the Discrimination Data form. This field retains the active settings. that is the short name of the discrimination data record in the project control database. up to 24 characters. File Path — The disk location of the discrimination data file. Fields and Options Number — The unique number. the data specified using the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence. the Discrimination Data Creation form is displayed. up to 40 characters. In addition. 400 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. File Specification — The file name of the discrimination data record to be created. This form creates a discrimination data file in a specified directory. If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option.

however. Approved Piping Job Spec — Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. 10. path. select Create The Discrimination Data Creation form displays. Because you must accept many forms while specifying the discrimination data. Even though you may have accepted many of the specifications. Discrimination Data Creation Form Operating Sequence 1. Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided. Table Checker 401 . key in the number. No Piping Materials Class — When selected. indicates to the system that either the piping specialties or instruments will be verified by Table Checker. it is easy to forget this step._ _______________ File Node — The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is located. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Select Piping Materials Class — Sets the piping materials class(es) in the Specification/Material Reference Database which defines the tables to be checked. be sure to select the final Accept. Then select Accept. 2. 3. description. From the Report Discrimination Data form. and file specification. Either format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination data is created with the No Piping Materials Class button selected. and node. Piping Materials Class — Key in up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the piping materials class. After including any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file. the discrimination data file is not actually created until you select Accept on the Report Discrimination Data form. This field retains the active settings.

Piping Materials Class — Select one or more piping materials classes from this list of loaded classes.1. File Node — The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file is located. It also copies an existing discrimination data file. up to 24 characters.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form When you select Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form. up to 40 characters. of the discrimination data record in the project control database. This field retains the active settings. options are provided for you to modify segment and component search criteria data. Fields and Options Number — The unique number. Description — The description. In addition. The corresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed. If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify search criteria data using the Report Search Criteria option. 402 . File Specification — The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.3. This field retains the active settings. you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. that is the short name of the discrimination data record in the project control database. This form revises an existing discrimination data file. the data specified using the Report Search Criteria option takes precedence. the Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed. File Path — The disk location of the discrimination data file.

Specify Discrimination Data In the fields provided. 10. Then select Accept. however. path. Either format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination data is created with the No Piping Materials Class button selected. The Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed. description. 3. From the Report Discrimination Data form. Because you must accept many forms while specifying the discrimination data. No Piping Materials Class — When selected. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data._ _______________ Approved Piping Job Spec — Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. and node. Table Checker 403 . key in the number. Discrimination Data Revision Form Operating Sequence 1. select Copy or Revise. it is easy to forget this step. indicates to the system that either the piping specialties or instruments will be verified by Table Checker. 2. the discrimination data file is not actually updated until you select Accept on the Report Discrimination Data form. and file specification. be sure to select the final Accept. Select Piping Materials Class — Sets the piping materials class(es) in the Specification/Material Reference Database which defines the tables to be checked. Even though you may have accepted many of the specifications. After updating any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file.

When set to Delete File. When set to Do Not Delete File. Operating Sequence 1. This form is used with format files and their database records. and search criteria files and their database records. the Deletion form is displayed._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. the database record is deleted along with the associated file. This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. 404 . Select Report Format From the displayed list. Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted. discrimination data files and their database records. Fields and Options Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database. select the database record to be deleted.3. only the database record is deleted.1.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form When you choose Delete.

Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. The specified record is deleted. Discrimination Data Deletion Form 10. Table Checker 405 ._ _______________ 2. the associated file is also deleted. Then click Accept. If specified.

and file location (node. and file name. the Report form is displayed. and search criteria data file to use to generate a report. The report name is not the title that is printed on the report. volume (if applicable). path. Discrimination Data — The report discrimination data number. A report record holds specifications for a report. search criteria (if applicable). and file name. and report node. and file name. path. path. The following discrimination data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline). and sorting sequence. The following search criteria data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline). path. and which format file. volume (if applicable). Format — The report format number. search criteria (if applicable). 406 . the title is included in the format file. these specifications include the report name.1. and deletes report records and report files._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. description. description. report title. This form creates. revises. and file name). the report description. and sorting sequence.4 Report Form When you select Report from the Report Manager form. description. and node. and file location (network address. a parameters page is included that contains the following information: Report Output — The report number. At the end of each report. Search Criteria — The report search criteria number. report creation/revision date. discrimination data file.

For more information. Revise — Displays the Revise Report form. which creates a report record and generates a report. see Report Deletion Form. Multi-Create — Displays the Report Multiple Submit form. page 408._ _______________ Options Create — Displays the Report Creation form. which deletes an existing report record and the corresponding report. page 416. For more information. which approves an existing report. see Report Multiple Submit Form. Report Form 10. which submits multiple reports to the printer. page 411. page 414. see Report Creation Form. see Report Approval Form. Table Checker 407 . Approve — Displays the Report Approval form. page 418. Delete — Displays the Deletion form. For more information. which regenerates a report from an existing or revised report record. For more information. For more information. see Revise Report Form.

1. The title of the report is contained in the format file. For more information. see Report Management Defaults Form. This field retains the active settings. This is not the title in the actual report.4. and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Dataform. Report Title — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. but is rather the title of the report record. Report File Spec — The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. 408 . the report will not be submitted to the batch queue. Because report records are stored in the project control database.1 Report Creation Form When you select Create from the Report form. If there are spaces in the number. page 420. Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. The Table Checker Report Number must not contain spaces. you can use them over and over again as needed. the Report Creation form is displayed. Fields and Options Report Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10.

When you select this field. a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Table Checker 409 . This field is optional. Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report. Select the appropriate discrimination data file. When you select this option. When you select this field._ _______________ Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. click Accept without selecting a file. the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. a list of available format files is displayed. Report Creation Form Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings. a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. When you select this option. page 420. Last Revision Number — The revision number of the last report generated. Click on a queue to select it. and click Accept. see Report Management Defaults Form. Select a search criteria file. and click Accept. This field is optional. and click Accept. When you select this field. Click on a queue to select it. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed. additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. Select the appropriate format file. Revised By — The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. and you specify a search criteria in this field. Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. Report Discrimination File — The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. For more information. To clear a specification. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it. Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed — Specifies when the report will be processed. Revision Number – The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. 10. you cannot edit it. Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. Revision Description — The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. This is a read-only field. a list of available print queues is displayed. and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. a list of available print queues is displayed.

specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Click Accept to save the report file. discrimination data file. From the Report form. Then select the appropriate report format file. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Operating Sequence 1. The Report Creation form is displayed. If you choose delayed submission. 3. and search criteria data file. 4. select Create. Specify Report Data Key in the report record information. 5. and select a queue if the report is to be printed. 2. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). 410 .

the Revise Report form is displayed. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without generating a report output file. Similarly. Report Title — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This field retains the active settings. Table Checker Fields and Options Report Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database._ _______________ 10.4. This field retains the active settings. you can choose to generate an updated report output file without updating the report record. This is not the title in the actual report.2 Revise Report Form When you select Revise from the Report form. Report File Spec — The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters). The title of the report is contained in the format file. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name. Revise Report Form This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control database. but is rather the title of the report record. 411 . Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. 10.1. Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will be located.

and you specify a search criteria in this field. This field is optional. Select the appropriate discrimination data file. and click Accept. Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch — Specifies when the report will be processed. Select the appropriate format file. Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. Report Discrimination File — The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data — Specifies revision of the report data only (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise Report and Data). Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch. This is a read-only field. and click Accept. a list of available print queues is displayed. a list of available print queues is displayed. This field is optional. Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report. click Accept without selecting a file. a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. a list of available format files is displayed. additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it. and click Accept. you cannot edit it. Click on a queue to select it. To revise the report output file only. When you select this field. To clear a specification. Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. make the necessary changes. and click Accept. and click Accept. When you select this field. Revised By — The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Revision Description — The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. Select a search criteria file. Click on a queue to select it. Last Revision Number — The revision number of the last report generated. Revision Number – The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. When you select this field. set this toggle to Revise Data Only. To modify both the report 412 . set this toggle to Revise Report and Data without modifying any of the fields. When you select this option. To revise the report specification without updating the report output file. When you select this option.

5. Table Checker 413 . Revise Report Information Update the report record information as needed. The fields update to display the selected report file specifications. Select Report From the displayed list. 3. Then click Accept._ _______________ file and the report output file. select Revise. and the report output file is generated. make the necessary changes. set this toggle to Revise Data Only. and click Accept. Revise Report Form Operating Sequence 1. Click Accept to save the report file. specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. 10. and select a queue if the report is to be printed. 6. From the Report form. this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option. 2. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title. The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files. 4. select the report to be revised. If you choose delayed submission.

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. the Deletion form is displayed. and search criteria files and their database records. Select Report Format From the displayed list. Fields and Options Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Do Not Delete File. When set to Delete File. 414 . Operating Sequence 1.1. select the database record to be deleted.4. the database record is deleted along with the associated file. discrimination data files and their database records. This form is used with format files and their database records.3 Report Deletion Form When you choose Delete. only the database record is deleted.

If specified. Report Deletion Form 10. The specified record is deleted. the associated file is also deleted. Then click Accept. Table Checker 415 ._ _______________ 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed.

From the Report form. Operating Sequence 1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. The Report Approval form is displayed. select Approve. Description — The 40-character description of the report record. Options Number — The 24-character unique name (as called short name) of the report record. 416 .4 Report Approval Form When you select Approve from the Report form. This approval status provides a way for you to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a report is revised. Use this form to select a report to approve.1. Approving a report means that a database attribute is set from not approved (the default) to approved. the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.4. the Report Approval form is displayed.

For more information. Report Approval Form 10. see the Approve Report section of the PD_Report User’s Guide. select a report to approve._ _______________ 2. Table Checker 417 . From the displayed list. The Approval form is displayed. Then click Accept.

When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch. Description — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch — Specifies when the report will be processed. When you select this option. 418 .4._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name.5 Report Multiple Submit Form When you select Multi-Create from the Report form. Click on a queue to select it. Fields and Options Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report.1. Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. a list of available print queues is displayed. When you select this option. the Report Multiple Submit form is displayed. a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file.

Highlighed reports are selected. select Multi-Create._ _______________ Operating Sequence 1. Table Checker 419 . 3. and select a queue if the report is to be printed. specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. Select Reports for Submission From the displayed list. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or later (Delayed Submit to Batch). 2. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option. If you choose delayed submission. select the reports to submit. Report Multiple Submit Form 4. 5. From the Report form. The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed. select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report. 10. Click Accept to submit the reports.

This option is used primarily for setup. It is recommended that you not send output reports to your system’s temporary (that is. Report Format Path — Specifies the default path of the format files. Fields Report Path — Specifies the default path of the report output files.5 Report Management Defaults Form When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form. the Report Management Defaults form is displayed. Report Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output files are located._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the report definition files. tmp or temp) directory. 420 .1. Report Format Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which format files are located. Report Discrimination Data Path — Specifies the default path of the discrimination data files.

From the Report Manager form. format files. Report Search Criteria Data Path — Specifies the default path of the report search criteria data files. Accept or Exit In the fields provided._ _______________ Report Discrimination Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which discrimination data files are located. key in the default paths and node names for the report output files. Table Checker 421 . 10. Report Management Defaults Form Operating Sequence 1. Report Search Criteria Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which report search criteria data files are located. discrimination data files. select Report Management Data. and search criteria data files. Then click Accept. The Report Management Defaults form is displayed. 2.

CL800.2 21-Apr-92 Sample Table Checker Output Page: SIZE-INDEPENDENT SPEC DATA __________________________ 1 The following is a listing of selected pages from the table checker output for Piping Materials Class 1C0031._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 10. OS&Y. BB. Description: Gate valve. SWE. ASTM-A105. Smith 800 1C0031 1st 2nd 3/4IN 1-1/2IN - Piping Class: Size Range: Option: End Preparation(s): Rating(s): End geometry standard(s): Body geometry standard: Maximum allowable temperature: Material Grade: Modifier: Fabrication category: Note 1: Note 2: SWE (421) CL800 Default (5) Smith 1 (4625) -9999 A105 (150) 3 CSFF (7) PDS Reference data AABBCC: Commodity Code: Weight Code: EDEN Modules GATR V1_AMS VALVE_2_AMS V1 OP_3 OPERATOR_3 OP3 6Q1C01 VAUSAHGAAA 490 pcf (52) Tables ______ FEM_420_800_5 GATR_4625_420_800_A VAUSAHGAAA GATR_FEM_800_3_A 422 . trim 8.

Smith 888 1C0031 1st 2nd 3/4IN Full port (24) SWE (421) CL800 Default (5) Smith 1 (4625) -9999 A105 (150) 3 CSFF (7) 1-1/2IN Page: 2 Piping Class: Size Range: Sample Table Checker Output Option: End Preparation(s): Rating(s): End geometry standard(s): Body geometry standard: Maximum allowable temperature: Material Grade: Modifier: Fabrication category: Note 1: Note 2: - PDS Reference data AABBCC: Commodity Code: Weight Code: EDEN Modules GATF V1_AMS VALVE_2_AMS V1 OP_3 OPERATOR_3 OP3 6Q1C01 VAUSAHGCAA 490 pcf (52) Tables ______ FEM_420_800_5 GATF_4625_420_800_A VAUSAHGCAA GATF_FEM_800_3_A 10. ASTM-A105. Table Checker 423 . trim 8. OS&Y. SWE. CL800. full port._ _______________ 21-Apr-92 SIZE-INDEPENDENT SPEC DATA __________________________ Description: Gate valve. BB.

CL150. Smith 815 1C0031 1st 2nd 3/4IN RFFE (221) RFFE (21) CL150 Default (5) ANSI-B16. trim 8._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 21-Apr-92 SIZE-INDEPENDENT SPEC DATA __________________________ Description: Gate valve. OS&Y. ASTM-A105. - PDS Reference data AABBCC: Commodity Code: Weight Code: EDEN Modules GAT V1_AMS VALVE_2_AMS V1 OP_3 OPERATOR_3 OP3 6Q1C01 VAABAHGGAA 490 pcf (52) Tables ______ BLT_20_150_5 GAT_40_20_150_A VAABAHGGAA GAT_BLT_150_3_A STUD_20_150_5 424 . BB. RFFE.10 (40) -9999 A105 (150) 3 CSFF (7) 1-1/2IN Page: 3 Piping Class: Size Range: Option: End Preparation(s): Rating(s): End geometry standard(s): Body geometry standard: Maximum allowable temperature: Material Grade: Modifier: Fabrication category: Note 1: Note 2: Use at flanged equipment connections.

1.75Lb 2nd Size ________ 3/4IN Sub-Component _____________ 11In.1715In. Undefined.75Lb 1-1/2IN 21.0575In. Table Checker 425 . 5.5625In Undefined. 1. Undefined. Undefined. 0.4375In 1-1/2IN 2.5625In Page: SIZE-DEPENDENT SPEC DATA ________________________ 1C0031 6Q1C01 Physical Data Generic _______ 1.25Lb 1-1/2IN 12Lb 21-Apr-92 2nd Size ________ 3/4IN Sample Table Checker Output Sub-Component _____________ 11In. 1.4375In Undefined.4538In. 1. Undefined. 0.4375In 1IN 1.4538In.1715In. Undefined.4375In Undefined.4375In 1IN 1.125In. Undefined.375In Specific ________ Undefined.5Lb 1IN 6._ _______________ 21-Apr-92 SIZE-DEPENDENT SPEC DATA ________________________ 1C0031 6Q1C01 Physical Data Generic _______ 1.5In 16.75In 10. 0.5In 16.4375In 1-1/2IN 2.125In Page: 133 Piping Class: AABBCC: 1st Size Weight ________ 3/4IN 4.125In. 5.0575In.25Lb 1IN 9. 0. 5. 1. 0. 0.375In Specific ________ Undefined.75In Piping Class: AABBCC: 1st Size Weight ________ 3/4IN 6. 4In 13In. 5. 4In 13In. 1.125In 134 Undefined.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 21-Apr-92 TABLES NOT FOUND ________________ Tables Not Found ________________ REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$XS_52 REDE_39_300_S$10_300_S$XS_52 STUD_120_150_5 STUD_120_150_80 STUD_120_300_5 STUD_160_150_5 STUD_160_150_80 Table Library _____________ Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Page: 376 426 .

Table Checker 3 09:28:59 1991 3 09:28:51 1991 3 09:28:54 1991 3 09:28:57 1991 3 09:29:00 1991 3 10:17:06 1991 3 10:17:06 1991 3 10:17:09 1991 3 10:17:23 1991 3 10:17:24 1991 3 10:17:29 1991 427 ._ _______________ 21-Apr-92 TABLES FOUND ____________ Tables Found ____________ BALR_3028_420_600_A BALR_FEM_600_9_A BALSP_40_20_150_A BALSP_BLT_150_9_A BFYHP_4200_160_150_A BFYHP_BLT_150_17_A BLPAD_1026_120_150_A BLPAD_1026_120_150_NREQD_52 BLPAD_146_120_150_A BLPAD_146_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPA_1026_120_150_A BLSPA_1026_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPA_146_120_150_A BLSPA_146_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPC_146_120_150_A BLSPC_146_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPC_146_120_300_A BLSPC_146_120_300_NREQD_52 BLSPO_146_120_150_A BLSPO_146_120_150_NREQD_52 BLSPO_146_120_300_A BLSPO_146_120_300_NREQD_52 BLT_120_150_5 BLT_120_150_80 BLT_120_300_5 BLT_160_150_5 BLT_160_150_80 BLT_20_150_5 Table Library _____________ Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Table Revision Date ___________________ Thu Jan 3 09:46:45 1991 Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 10:16:28 1991 3 10:01:23 1991 3 10:16:28 1991 3 10:08:15 1991 3 10:16:33 1991 3 09:28:00 1991 3 09:28:01 1991 3 09:28:48 1991 3 09:28:51 1991 3 09:28:01 1991 3 09:28:02 1991 3 09:28:49 1991 3 09:28:52 1991 3 09:28:50 1991 3 09:28:53 1991 3 09:28:56 1991 Page: 377 Sample Table Checker Output 10.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 BLT_20_150_80 BLT_20_150_81 BLT_20_300_29 BLT_20_300_5 BLT_20_300_80 CAPBV_5150_300_A CAPBV_5150_300_S$10_52 CAPBV_5150_300_S$STD_52 CAPBV_5150_300_S$XS_52 CAPOT_5375_420_3000_A CAPOT_5375_420_3000_NREQD_52 CKLR_4625_420_800_A CKS_40_20_150_A CKWF_40_120_150_A CPL_41_420_3000_A CPL_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 E45LR_39_300_A E45LR_39_300_S$10_52 E45LR_39_300_S$STD_52 E45LR_39_300_S$XS_52 E45_41_420_3000_A E45_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 E90LR_39_300_A E90LR_39_300_S$10_52 E90LR_39_300_S$STD_52 E90LR_39_300_S$XS_52 E90SR_58_300_A E90SR_58_300_S$STD_52 E90_41_420_3000_A E90_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 10:17:30 1991 3 10:17:31 1991 3 10:17:38 1991 3 10:17:40 1991 3 10:17:42 1991 3 10:10:17 1991 3 10:10:51 1991 3 10:11:03 1991 3 10:11:07 1991 3 10:11:19 1991 3 10:11:22 1991 3 10:09:40 1991 3 10:01:26 1991 3 10:01:12 1991 3 10:06:46 1991 3 10:06:49 1991 3 09:52:46 1991 3 09:54:04 1991 3 09:59:04 1991 3 10:00:12 1991 3 10:06:46 1991 3 10:06:50 1991 3 09:52:47 1991 3 09:54:04 1991 3 09:59:30 1991 3 10:00:12 1991 3 10:11:49 1991 3 10:11:58 1991 3 10:06:47 1991 3 10:06:51 1991 428 .

Table Checker 429 ._ _______________ EOLLR_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_52 EOLLR_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_A Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 09:39:37 1991 3 09:39:42 1991 Sample Table Checker Output 10.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 21-Apr-92 TABLES FOUND ____________ Tables Found ____________ FBLD_254_20_150_NREQD_52 FBLD_35_20_150_NREQD_52 FEM_420_150_5 FEM_420_3000_5 FEM_420_300_5 FEM_420_600_5 FEM_420_800_5 FEM_440_800_5 FOLHC_1575_300_NREQD_420_3000_52 FOLHC_1575_300_NREQD_420_3000_A FOWNAW_66_20_300_300_300_52 FOWNAW_66_20_300_300_A FRSW_6_20_150_420_150_A FRSW_6_20_150_420_150_S$160_52 FRSW_6_20_300_420_300_A FRSW_6_20_300_420_300_S$160_52 FSW_35_20_150_420_150_A FSW_35_20_150_420_150_S$160_52 FSW_35_20_150_420_150_S$XS_52 FSW_35_20_300_420_300_A FSW_35_20_300_420_300_S$XS_52 FWN_165_20_150_300_150_52 FWN_165_20_150_300_A FWN_254_20_150_300_150_52 FWN_254_20_150_300_A FWN_254_20_300_300_300_52 FWN_254_20_300_300_A FWN_35_20_150_300_150_52 Table Library _____________ Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Table Revision Date ___________________ Thu Jan 3 09:44:58 1991 Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 09:48:28 1991 3 10:20:07 1991 3 10:20:10 1991 3 10:20:48 1991 3 10:20:50 1991 3 10:20:51 1991 3 10:21:03 1991 3 09:31:30 1991 3 09:31:44 1991 3 10:12:47 1991 3 10:12:51 1991 3 10:14:14 1991 3 10:14:15 1991 3 10:14:18 1991 3 10:14:19 1991 3 09:48:17 1991 3 09:48:17 1991 3 09:48:20 1991 3 09:48:41 1991 3 09:49:04 1991 3 09:43:17 1991 3 09:43:18 1991 3 09:44:57 1991 3 09:44:57 1991 3 09:44:59 1991 3 09:44:59 1991 3 09:48:13 1991 Page: 378 430 .

Table Checker Thu Mar 21 15:55:49 1991 Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 10:11:31 1991 3 10:23:25 1991 3 09:27:27 1991 3 10:06:29 1991 3 10:06:37 1991 3 09:52:38 1991 3 09:53:51 1991 3 09:54:02 1991 431 ._ _______________ FWN_35_20_150_300_A FWN_35_20_300_300_300_52 FWN_35_20_300_300_A GATF_4625_420_800_A GATF_FEM_800_3_A GATR_4625_420_800_440_800_A GATR_4625_420_800_A GATR_FEM_800_3_A GAT_40_20_150_A GAT_40_20_300_A GAT_BLT_150_3_A GAT_BLT_300_3_A GLOR_4625_420_800_A GLOR_FEM_800_3_A GLO_40_20_150_A GLO_BLT_150_3_A LOL_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_52 LOL_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_A MALWT_300_S$10_5_52 MALWT_300_S$STD_5_52 MALWT_300_S$XS_5_52 MAL_300_5 NEE_5375_420_800_A NEE_FEM_800_3_A NIP_100_300_S$160_52 PLUG_41_300_A PLUG_41_300_NREQD_52 REDC_39_300_300_A REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$10_52 REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 09:48:16 1991 3 09:48:39 1991 3 09:48:41 1991 3 10:09:40 1991 3 10:21:14 1991 3 10:09:39 1991 3 10:09:41 1991 3 10:21:18 1991 3 10:01:27 1991 3 10:01:46 1991 3 10:21:30 1991 3 10:21:32 1991 3 10:09:41 1991 3 10:21:42 1991 3 10:01:28 1991 3 10:21:52 1991 3 09:39:39 1991 3 09:39:44 1991 3 10:22:48 1991 3 10:23:07 1991 3 10:23:10 1991 Sample Table Checker Output 10.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 REDC_39_300_S$STD_300_S$10_52 REDC_39_300_S$STD_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Physical Data Library Thu Jan Thu Jan 3 09:58:40 1991 3 09:58:52 1991 432 .

Table Checker 433 ._ _______________ 21-Apr-92 EDEN ACCESSED _____________ EDEN Not Found ______________ EDEN Found __________ BALR BALSP BFYHP BLPAD BLSPA BLSPC BLSPO CAPBV CAPOT CKLR CKS CKWF CPL E45 E45LR E45TLR E90 E90LR E90SR E90TLR EOLLR F10_1 F10_2 F122_1 F122_1_AMS F13 F13_AMS F173 F173_AMS F177 F177_AMS F178 F178_AMS F179 F17D F17D_AMS F180 F180_AMS F182 F182_AMS F188 F188_AMS F19 F19_AMS F1A F1A_AMS F25 F25_AMS F27 F27_AMS F28 F39 F39_AMS F47 F47T_AMS F47_AMS F6 Page: 381 Sample Table Checker Output 10.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 F6_AMS F8 F8_AMS 434 .

Table Checker 435 ._ _______________ 21-Apr-92 EDEN ACCESSED _____________ EDEN Not Found ______________ EDEN Found __________ FBLD FITTING_1_AMS FITTING_2_AMS FITTING_3_AMS FLANGE_AMS FOLHC FOWNAW FRSW FSW FWN GAT GATF GATR GLO GLOR LOL NEE NIP OLET_1_AMS OP3 OP9 OPERATOR_3 OPERATOR_33 OPERATOR_9 OP_17 OP_3 OP_33 OP_331 OP_332 OP_9 PIPING PLUG REDC REDE RPAD RWELD SOL SWGC SWGE T TRB UN V1 V11 V1_AMS V26 V38 V6 VALVE_2_AMS WOL Page: 382 Sample Table Checker Output 10.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 . -3 -4 -7 Eden Module Not Found Entry Not Found in Table Table Not Found 436 .*****.EDEN error (-3) for pmc ’1C0031’ item ’6Q1C26’ with 1st size ’32IN’ and 2nd size ’32IN’ Error in module ’ MGOP_32768’ 2 .ERROR .EDEN error (-3) for pmc ’1C0031’ item ’6Q1C26’ with 1st size ’34IN’ and 2nd size ’34IN’ Error in module ’ MGOP_32768’ Error Codes The following error codes are used in the reported error messages. REPORT ERROR LOG CREATION TIME: Tuesday 04/21/92 15:35 1 .ERROR .

Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager The Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager provides access to the Tutorial Definition Files (TDFs) used in placing pipe supports in the model. The TDFs define the pipe support’s modeling requirements. 11. TDF Library 437 ._ _______________ 11. For more information on TDFs. refer to the Pipe Supports Modeler Reference Guide.

Compress Library — Used to compress the Tutorial Definition Library. or delete data in the library. You can also create reports of the data in the library. Create Data — Used to compile source files and add the resulting code to the Tutorial Definition Library. Before using this command Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library files in the Reference Database Management Data.1 Support Tutorial Definition Manager The Support Tutorial Definition Manager is used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library or to create. Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Tutorial Definition Library to the approved library. 438 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 11. modify. You can create a single tutorial definition file or specify a list of tutorial definition files to be created. Select the Support Tutorial Definition Manager from the Reference Data Manager form. Options Create Library — Used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path.

TDF Library 439 . 11. Report Data — Used to create a report file of the library contents. Node Name — Key in the node name of the location of the table definition files for pipe supports. Delete Data — Used to delete a specified tutorial definition file from the library. Support Tutorial Definition Manager Extract Data — Used to extract a tutorial definition file from the library for editing or printing. Full List returns all the definition in the Tutorial Definition Library._ _______________ Revise Data — Used to select a tutorial definition file from the library for editing and compile the revised tutorial definition file. File Path — Key in the path to the location where you store table definition files for pipe supports. Sub-string limits the list to those files that contain the substring you enter in the corresponding box. Full List/Sub-string — Use this toggle to determine the data to be listed. List Data — Used to list the files contained in the library.

2 Compress This option is used to compress the Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library.1.1. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.3 Unapproved ==> Approved This option copies the unapproved Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library to the approved library. The system displays the approved and unapproved Tutorial Definition Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. the system displays an error indicating the library already exists. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.1.1 Create Library This option is used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library. If you specify an existing library file._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 11. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. 440 . 11. 11.

_ _______________ 11. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation. If a fatal error occurs while loading files.1. 3. Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file to begin processing. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. 11.4 Create Data This option enables you to create a new tutorial definition file. The system displays the default node name and path for the tutorial definition files as specified in the Default Project Control Data at the bottom of the form. TDF Library 441 . 2. Create Data Operating Sequence 1. 4. 5. the Tutorial Definition File Library is left unchanged. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the source file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library. Select the Create Data option. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created.

Operating Sequence 1. edit the file. 2. and then compile the file and put it back in the library. Select Table for Revision Select the tutorial definition files to be revised and select Accept.5 Revise Data This option enables you to replace an existing tutorial definition file. The system displays the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library. 442 . This option enables you to select a tutorial definition file from the library. Select the Revise option. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor to enable you to modify the file.1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 11.

Revise Data When you exit the text editor. Make any changes to the displayed file._ _______________ 3. (If you quit the text editor.) 11. TDF Library 443 . the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. the file is not recompiled.

For the Print/Delete or Print/Save options.6 Report Data This option enables you to create a report on the contents of the Tutorial Definition Library. Print/Delete or Print/Save. 3. Select Accept to create the report. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used.1. This report lists all the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library. 2. Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the source of information to be reported. select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Select the report option: Save. the system generates a report named ppsm_tdf in the default directory based on the contents of the Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library. 4. For the Save or Print/Save options. Select the Report Data option from the Library/Data Management form. 444 . Operating Sequence 1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 11.

3.1._ _______________ 11. The system displays the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library. 2. Select Cancel to exit the form.7 List Data This option displays all the tutorial definition files for the Tutorial Definition Library. 11. TDF Library 445 . You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Select the List option. List Data Operating Sequence 1.

2. The system displays the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library. The system deletes the tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 11. Select Table for Deletion Select the tutorial definition file to be deleted from the list of files. 3. Select the Delete option. Operating Sequence 1.1. Accept or Select Other Table(s) Accept the selected tutorial definition file.8 Delete Data This option enables you to delete a tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library. 446 .

Select Extract Data from the Library/Data Management form. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Extract Data Operating Sequence 1.1. 11. 2. page 53. TDF Library 447 .9 Extract Data This option enables you to extract a tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library for editing or printing. — OR — Select the Extract All button to extract all the available files. Select Table for Extraction Select the tutorial definition file from the list of files and select Accept. See Default Project Control Data. The system pulls the file out of the library and places it in the default directory defined in the Default Project Control Data._ _______________ 11.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 448 .

An entry is a single input/output record. Neutral File Format N499 . The accompanying source listing for this file is contained in the file std_note. a blank character is automatically appended to the end of the previous line._ _______________ 12. 200-499 WWW = ’ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ’ WWW = ’ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ’ WWW = ’ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ’ . Standard Note Library Neutral File Description A neutral file is an ASCII text file which contains standard notes or code lists to be placed in the Standard Note Library. 12. .l. including standard notes. The standard code list text is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\std_note. or revise code list sets in the library to reflect your own practices. . delete. terminology. When an entry continues onto a new line. Piping Notes 1 = ’ ’ Notes Applicable to the Piping Materials Class. . the entire entry must be enclosed in single quotes (’).t. Standard Note Library 449 . . 2-199 WWW = ’ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ’ WWW = ’ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ’ WWW = ’ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ’ Notes Applicable to a Piping Component. You can add. Entries in these files are in the form Standard Note Type xxxx where xxxx is the number of the code list set.l. If an embedded blank is contained within an entry. One entry (or word) is retrieved each time a neutral file is read. The entries in a neutral file must be separated by at least one space. and language. 2 = ’Hydrogen Gas’ Entries enclosed in single quotes can take up more than one line. It enables you to define standard text required to support the piping design effort. Standard Note Library The Standard Note Library contains the code list text for code-listed attributes. Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the delivered Standard Note Library.

This number must be a valid short integer. 700-899 WWW = ’ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ’ . The first entry can contain additional characters following the TYPE. . Notes Applicable to a Piping Specialty. Instrument Item: note numbers 800 through 999. Piping Commodity Item: note numbers 200 through 599._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 . Additionally. C100 This is a comment line !!!!!! This file contains a code list for type 100. General Rules EACH standard note type or code list type should be contained in a separate neutral file. Specialty Item: note numbers 600 through 799. The following numbering conventions are used for standard note type 499: Piping Job Specification: note numbers 1 through 199. <Note/Code number> <equal sign> <Note/code description> 2 = ’Sulfuric Acid’ 450 . 1 = ’Inert Gas’ 2 = ’Natural Gas’ 5 = ’Oxygen Gas’ 6 = ’Standard note or code list descriptions can extend beyond one line of text up to a maximum of 80 characters’ 12 = ’Purge Gas’ 14 = ’Waste Gas’ The first entry in each neutral file should be the note/code TYPE (C100 in the above example). You can include the keyword PID_RDB in the neutral file on the line following the standard note type to load the standard note into both the Piping Reference Database and the P&ID Reference Database simultaneously. but they are all ignored. . this entry should also include the text used for extracting information from the Standard Note Library. This text may contain up to 80 characters. 500-699 WWW = ’ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ’ Notes Applicable to an Instrument Specialty. Neutral files should have the following basic format: . (Optional) Each note/code entry is comprised of three parts (triplet) which must appear in the following sequence. The first letter must be either: C for a codelist set or N for a standard note This character is followed by a number which identifies the specific codelist set or standard note.

Invalid Comments . The description text can extend for more than one line. 3 = ’Hydrogen Sulfide’ . Another Comment line. . Another Comment line. 12. The equal sign must have a blank character on either side of it.The note/code number can be on a line by itself. Standard note description text can contain up to 400 characters._ _______________ The description text must be enclosed in single quotes. These comments can appear anywhere in the neutral file except within a description. The equal sign can be on a separate line by itself. ! 1 = ’Caustic’ Comment line. Modifications to this field affect only the display of the text. Code list description text can contain up to 80 characters. it cannot be on the same line with any part of another triplet. Note/code numbers need not be in sequential order. These lines are ignored. These comment lines can only occur following a description. Standard Note Library 451 . ’Sulfur’ Any text enclosed in < angle brackets > is considered a comment and is ignored. Each entry can begin at any point along an input line but must be separated from adjacent entries by one or more spaces.) or exclamation point (!). degrees) cannot be modified. You cannot add any entries to code lists 1056 and 1064. ’Caustic’ 2 = ! Invalid Comment line. Any information on a line to the right of either of these characters is considered a comment and is ignored. the actual units (i. The note/code number must be a valid I*2 integer. The note/code number must begin a new line. 1 = Invalid Comment line. 2 = ’Sulfur’ ! Another Comment line. Blank lines can occur anywhere in a neutral files for readability. they cannot break up a triplet.e. Standard Note Library Comments are indicated with a semicolon (. The Note/code description text can be on a line by itself. Valid Comments . The only valid edit you can make to code list 1056 (temperature units) and code list 1064 (pressure units) is to modify the displayed text string.

452 . The specified title will display in a list of standard note types or a list of the selections for a specific standard note type._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Defining Text for Standard Note Types You can specify the text for the various standard note types by loading the standard note titles as standard note type 999.

Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Standard Note Library to the approved library. or delete data in the library. Standard Note Library 453 . Compress Library — Used to compress the Standard Note Library. Select the Standard Note Library Manager from the Reference Data Manager form. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path. 12. Standard Note Library Manager Before using this command Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Standard Note Library files in the Reference Database Management Data. You can also create reports of the data in the library. Options Create Library — Used to create a new Standard Note Library. Create — Used to compile source files and add the resulting code to the Standard Note Library.1 Standard Note Library Manager The Standard Note Library Manager is used to create a new Standard Note Library or to create. modify._ _______________ 12. You can create a single standard note set or specify a list of standard notes to be created.

454 . Extract — Used to extract a standard note set from the library for editing or printing. Report — Used to create a report file of the library contents. List — Used to list the files contained in the library. Delete — Used to delete a specified standard note set from the library._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Revise — Used to select a standard note set from the library for editing and compile the revised standard note definition. Load Database — Used to load the contents of the Standard Note Library into the applicable schemas of the project’s relational database to support DBAccess reporting of PDS data.

If you specify an existing library file.3 Unapproved ==> Approved This option copies the unapproved Standard Note Library to the approved library. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. 12.l. It automatically creates the object library (. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library. the system displays an error indicating the library already exists. Create Library The system displays the approved and unapproved Standard Note Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data.l) and the text library (._ _______________ 12. Standard Note Library 455 . 12.1.1. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.t) for the library that is being created.2 Compress This option is used to compress the Standard Note Library.1. 12.1 Create Library This option is used to create a new Standard Note Library.

1. 3. 5. If a fatal error occurs while loading neutral files. Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file to begin processing. See Default Project Control Data. the Standard Note Library is left unchanged. 2. The system displays the default node name and path for the standard note neutral files as specified in the Default Project Control Data at the bottom of the form. a specialty item. page 53. Before using this command To add more than one standard note type to the library.4 Create Standard Note Type This option enables you to create a new standard note set by inserting the data in a neutral file into the Standard Note Library. Operating Sequence 1. 456 . create a list file which identifies the names of the standard note source files to be added. Select the Create option. Specify Filename for processing Key in the name of the source file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. 4. The neutral file enables you to define piping notes required to support the piping design effort. or an instrument. You can define the default path for standard note neutral files using the Default Project Control Data option._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 12. You can define code list sets. You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location for this operation. or standard notes applicable to: a piping materials class. a piping commodity.

The system displays the standard note types in the Standard Note Library. Select the Revise option. edit the file. Select Module Name Select the standard note types to be revised and select Accept. and then compile the file and put it back in the library. Revise Standard Note Type Operating Sequence 1. This option enables you to select a standard note type from the library. Standard Note Library 457 .1._ _______________ 12. 2. 12.5 Revise Standard Note Type This option enables you to replace an existing standard note type.

Make any changes to the displayed file. the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library.sh file) to enable you to modify the file. When you exit the text editor. (If you quit the text editor. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.) 458 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 3. the file is not recompiled.

Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the source of information to be reported. For the Save or Print/Save options. Report Standard Note Library Contents Operating Sequence 1. 3.rpt in the default directory based on the contents of the Standard Note Library. Select the Report option from the Data Management form. select the print queue from the list of displayed queues._ _______________ 12. This report list all the standard note types in the Standard Note Library. Select the report option: Save. Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the report file for the delivered Standard Note Library. 12.1. the system generates a report named stnotelib. For the Print/Delete or Print/Save options.6 Report Standard Note Library Contents This option enables you to create a report on the contents of the Standard Note Library. Standard Note Library 459 . 2. Print/Delete or Print/Save. 4. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. Select Accept to create the report.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 12.7 List Standard Note Data This option displays all the standard note types for the Standard Note Library. 460 . 3. Select Cancel to exit the form. Select the List option.1. The system displays the Standard note types in the Standard Note Library. 2. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Operating Sequence 1.

Select the Delete option. 12. The system deletes the standard note type from the Standard Note Library. The system displays the Standard note types in the Standard Note Library. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.1. 2._ _______________ 12. Delete Standard Note Data Operating Sequence 1.8 Delete Standard Note Data This option enables you to delete a Standard note type from the Standard Note Library. 3. Accept or Select Other Note Type Accept the selected standard note type. Standard Note Library 461 . Select Note Type Select the Standard note type to be deleted from the list of note types.

Operating Sequence 1.9 Extract Standard Note Type This option enables you to extract a neutral file from the Standard Note Library for editing or printing.1. Select Extract from the Data Management form. See Default Project Control Data. 2. page 53. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. 462 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 12. Select Note Type Select the standard note type from the list of files and select Accept. The system pulls the file out of the library and places it in the default directory defined in the Default Project Control Data.

— OR — 12. the data for that standard note type will not be loaded. 2. This is the same file used in the Project Administrator to modify the database structure to support DBAccess. A default note length file is delivered with the PD_Shell product in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\stnote_max_len. Select Submit to Batch Immediately to begin processing as soon as you exit the form. This maximum length is used to load the standard note data in the relational database. The note type and the maximum length are separated by one or more spaces or tabs. You can determine which standard note data is loaded or not loaded into the relational database. Entries in this file consist of one line for each standard note type with the following format._ _______________ 12. It must reside in the project directory. you should exercise discretion in specifying the maximum length. These maximum lengths were determined on the basis of the long option of standard note data reporting. If the maximum length for a standard note type is defined as zero (0) or the standard note type is not included in stnote_max_len. !note type 35 36 max length 15 10 short? * Load Database This option loads the contents of the Standard Note Library into the applicable schemas of the project’s relational database to support DBAccess reporting of PDS data. An asterisk (*) following the maximum length indicates that the short version of the standard note data be loaded into the relational database.1. Operating Sequence 1. The default is that the long version be loaded. The maximum length for any standard note type is restricted to 240 characters by RIS. Select Load Database from the Data Management form. 463 . You must specify the maximum length of the text for each standard note type in the Standard Note Library in an ASCII file namedstnote_max_len. Refer to the description of the Project Setup Manager in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Users Guide for more information.10 Load Database Before using this command You must create the necessary database structure for DBAcess reporting through the Project Administrator. To minimize relational database size. Comments can be placed anywhere in the file and must be preceded by an exclamation point (!). Standard Note Library Select Delayed Submit to Batch to specify a day and time to process the request.

Accept the specified time. 464 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 3. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

) Refer to Label Types. 465 .S._ _______________ 13. Drawing View Identification Labels (50-69) User Input Labels (200-219) Displayable Attribute Labels (300-399) Commodity Code Labels (400-899) U. Drawing View Specific Labels (1-129. The default label description library is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\labels. French. (550-599) European B . etc.Australian (650-699) International A (800-849) International B (850-899) Company practice (700-749) Isometric Drawing Labels (900-999) Report Labels (1150-2149) Clash Management Labels (2200. 70130) to reflect the latest data in the database. (The numbers in parentheses indicate the range of label numbers for each group of label types. etc. practice (400-449) European . You can update existing drawing view specific labels (1-49.DIN (450-499) European .(750-799) International .British Standard (500-549) European A . 2500-2599) System Reserved Labels (1-29) User Defined Piping/Equipment Labels (30-49) User Defined Structural Labels (70-89) User Defined Miscellaneous Labels (90-109) User Defined Electrical Raceway Labels (110-129) User Defined PLANTGEN Labels (2500-2599) Label Description Library 13.l.Finnish. All changes to the library are performed interactively using the Label Description Library Manager. Label Description Lib. Label Description Library The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following basic types of labels. page 466 for more information.).2399) These labels are intelligent graphics which represent information from the non-graphical data (databases. user data.JIS (600-649) International .

A displayable attribute label consists of the text and optionally. Drawing View Identification Label labels with attribute linkages to the Drawing View Data (table 122) that report information about the drawing view such as drawing view name and view scale Drawing View Specific Labels are further divided into subcategories for Piping. This description identifies the label characteristics such as level. and font. 13. Unlike the other label types. 13. Therefore. a leader line. and font.1 Label Types Displayable Attribute Labels Each type of displayable attribute label has a description in the Label Description Library. color code. you cannot define label description data such as color. Structural._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 13. There are four sub-types of Displayable Attribute Labels: Drawing View Specific Label displayable attribute labels for named model items which are placed in a drawing.1. HVAC. a leader line.3 Displayable Attribute Message Each type of displayable attribute message has a description in the Label Description Library. 466 . weight. Drawing View Specific Labels for Piping and View Independent Labels are divided into sub-ranges for system-defined labels and user labels. and text size for a displayable attribute message. a line terminator. and Raceway. PDS delivers Design Review Labels (317-330). and the attribute data associated with the label.2 Alphanumeric Labels Alphanumeric labels are non-intelligent user-defined labels. These labels are the only ones processed by PDS Design Review. but the system will not access them. and some label enclosure graphics. color code.1. style. a line terminator. style. You can create new Design Review labels.1. style. A displayable attribute message has all or part of its text derived from the alphanumeric data that is linked to a specified named item in the model. An alphanumeric label consists of the text and optionally. the description of a displayable attribute message only contains the attribute data.1 13. and some label enclosure graphics. This description identifies the label characteristics such as level. Each type of alphanumeric label has a description in the Label Description Library.

4 Commodity Code Attribute Message Commodity code attribute messages are the same as displayable attribute messages.Australian International practice A International practice B Company practice 13. 467 . Other messages are displayed temporarily in the model. practice DIN practice British Standard European practice A European practice B International practice . you cannot define label description data such as color. There are 10 categories of Material Description Attribute Messages U. 13. The text size of these labels is always the same regardless of the screen view scale. the Line Number Label attribute. and text size. Label Types A displayable attribute message is displayed temporarily at the terminal either as an identification message or as a reporting message. Some of these messages are displayed in the terminal’s refresh message fields. Label Description Lib.JIS International practice . Displayable attribute messages also define the hard-coded values for Design Review labels. All or part of the messages text is derived from the alphanumeric data in the database.1. except they are used for bill of materials reporting._ _______________ A displayable attribute message can also be used to create a value for another attribute. style. A material description attribute message only contains attribute data. for example. weight.1. The system does not place any graphics in the model for this type of label.S.5 Isometric Drawing Labels The isometric drawing labels are similar to the commodity code attribute messages and are used by the isometric extraction software. 13.

piping component PLANTGEN .3 cp’s Piping .primary description for piping commodity . 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204 2205 2206 2207 2208 2220 2221 2222 2223 2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2260 2262 2261 2263 Piping .pipe PLANTGEN . (Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for information on the report indices.HVAC PLANTGEN .2 cp’s Piping . The label to be used is determined on the basis of the model’s discipline and the type of component.nozzle PLANTGEN .Straight Secondary Label Raceway .Straight Primary Label Raceway .primary description for nozzle Equipment .3 cp’s Piping .primary description for piping specialty . Envelope builders for disciplines other than piping and equipment do not implement the labels reserved below.raceway PLANTGEN .1.primary description for instrument component . This is accomplished by using the special report indices for the Label Description Library.primary description for pipe support Piping .Fitting Secondary Label 468 . you can sort on the complete report label. However.3 cp’s Piping .primary description for equipment Equipment .equipment/miscellaneous PLANTGEN .structural/civil PLANTGEN .primary description for instrument component .secondary description for nozzle PLANTGEN .primary description for piping/tubing Piping . you cannot sort on an individual attribute used to form the report label.secondary description for equipment Equipment .) When report labels are used._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 13. The following label numbers are reserved in the Label Description Library for use in clash management.pipe support Raceway . 13.secondary description for piping segment Equipment .6 Report Labels A range of report labels (1150-2149) is reserved in the Label Description Library for use in formatting fields in a report.2 cp’s Piping .Fitting Primary Label Raceway .1.primary description for piping specialty .primary description for piping commodity .2 cp’s Piping .7 Clash Management Labels A range of labels (2200-2299) is reserved in the Label Description Library for use by the Envelope Builder in creating the primary description and the secondary description for clash management.

Panel Primary Label Raceway .Secondary Label for Damper HVAC .Secondary Label for Fitting HVAC .Primary Label for Duct HVAC . is greater than or equal to three.Primary Label for Equipment HVAC .Panel Secondary Label Raceway .Secondary Label for Connector HVAC .Secondary Label for Grille HVAC .Primary Label for Humidifier HVAC . is less than or equal to two.Secondary Label for Coil HVAC .Ductbank Secondary Label HVAC .Primary Label for Damper HVAC . The primary description is limited to 20 characters and the secondary description is limited to 40 characters.Secondary Label for Equipment HVAC .Primary Label for Register HVAC ._ _______________ 2264 2265 2266 2267 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286 2287 2288 2289 2290 2291 2292 2293 2294 2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305 Raceway .Primary Label for Connector HVAC .Primary Label for Hood HVAC .Primary Label for Filter HVAC .Primary Label for Grille HVAC . excluding taps. The 2 CP clash management labels are used when the number of connect points. 469 .Primary Label for Coil HVAC .Primary Label for Terminal Device HVAC . Label Description Lib.Secondary Label for Terminal Device HVAC .Secondary Label for Register HVAC .Secondary Label for Hood Label Types 13.Primary Label for Diffuser HVAC .Primary Label for Fitting HVAC .Ductbank Primary Label Raceway .Secondary Label for Diffuser HVAC .Secondary Label for Filter HVAC . The 3 CP clash management labels are used when the number of connect points.Secondary Label for Humidifier HVAC . excluding taps.Secondary Label for Duct HVAC .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 470 .

Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Label Description library to the approved library. revise.2 Label Description Library Manager The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for a label (such as level. Label Description Library Manager 13. Create Label Data — Used to create a new label description and insert it in the Label Description Library._ _______________ 13. 471 . edit the file. Label Description Lib. and color code) and to define the format of the label (what information comprises the label). Report Label Data — Used to create a report of the library contents. Delete Label Data — Used to remove a label description from the library. and put the revised file back into the library. Revise Label Data — Used to select a label from the library. or delete label descriptions in an existing library. Options Create Library — Used to create a new Label Description Library. line weight. You can create a new (empty) label description library or create. Compress Library — Used to compress the Label Description library.

2.1 Create Library This option is used to create a new Label Description Library. If you specify an existing library file.3 Unapproved ==> Approved This option copies the unapproved Label Description library to the approved library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.2. 13. The system displays the approved and unapproved Label Description Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. 472 . Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library file. Any labels which have been deleted from the library will be removed.2 Compress Library This option is used to compress the Label Description library. This option will be deactivated if the specified library already exists. 13.2. the system displays an error indicating the library already exists._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 13.

page 478 for more information._ _______________ 13. Label Description Lib.2.4 Create Label Data This option enables you to add a label description of a specified type to the Label description Library. Create Label Data 13. Select Create Label Data from the data management form. 2. See Label Types for a description of all the label types and subtypes. The system displays a form listing the types of labels which can be created. and activates one of the following screens to enable you to define the description data and/or attribute data for the label to be created. Operating Sequence 1. For Drawing View Specific Labels and Drawing View Identification Labels you can define both graphic data and attribute data. Refer to Create Label Graphic Data. Select Option Select the type of label to be created. Displayable Attribute Labels. page 475 for more information. Report Labels or Clash Management you can define attribute data only. For User Input Labels you can define graphic data only. Commodity Code Labels. The system adds a label number in the range for the selected label type. Refer to Create Label Attribute Data. 473 . For Isometric Drawing Labels.

Drawing View Specific Labels Commodity Code Labels 474 . the system may activate one of the following screens to further classify the type of label to be created._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Label Subtypes Depending on the Option selected.

Label Description Lib.4. and line terminator. Field Descriptions Label Type — Number of the label being created. Refer to Mass Annotation Options. Refer to Create Label Attribute Data. and line terminator. Graphics Color — Activates the Select Color form used to set the color for the label enclosure. page 478 for more information._ _______________ 13. (This field is filled in automatically by the system. leader line.1 Create Label Graphic Data This form enables you to define the graphic parameters for the selected label type.2.) Label Description — Short description for the label (up to 20 characters). 475 . page 484 for more information. Create Label Graphic Data 13. Mass Annotation Options — Enables you so set up the Mass Annotation options for use with PD_Draw. Graphics Weight — Line weight (0-31) for the label enclosure. Options Create Label Attribute Data — Enables you to specify the attributes which make up the label and the format of the label. leader line.

Character Size — Activates the Define Active Character Size form used to set the character plot size (text height and text width). leader line. the Leader Line Option toggle is no longer available. Text Weight — Line weight (0-31) for the label text. The default settings are defined in the drawing’s type 63 data. The default is No Label Enclosure. . Text Font — Font (0-255) for the label text. Cell Name — (Used with Label Enclosure Option 8) Name of the Label Enclosure cell. The default is the same as the Graphics Style.). Also used to determine label enclosure size. This setting is also used to determine the label enclosure size. You can select one of the default settings (A . Maximum Length — Maximum line length (1-80) for the text. Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting the default sizes. Alternate Style — Alternate (centerline) line style (0-7) for name label leader lines. with no Leader Line. Diameter — (Used with Label Enclosure Options 2 and 3) Diameter of the circle enclosure graphic. — Character that represents the line terminator symbol in the attached Font Library.J) or key in a size. Terminator Font — Font (0-255) for the line terminator. Text Color — Activates the Select Color form used to set the color for the label text. When this option is chosen._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Graphics Style — Line Style (0-7) for the label enclosure. Also used to determine label enclosure size.10. and line terminator. Line Spacing — Line spacing between label text represented as a fraction of text height (0. Terminator Char. The User Defined Enclosure Option places as a cell. Enclosure Option — Displays a set of options at the bottom of the form for setting the type of label enclosure. Leader Line Option — Toggle to define whether to use a Leader Line for the label. Maximum Lines — Maximum number of lines in the label text (1-30). 476 .

The text for the drawing annotation categories is extracted from the drawing category descriptions (drwcats. If your project will be using the Mass Annotation command in PD_Draw to simplify label placement._ _______________ Underline Spacing — Underline spacing below text represented as a fraction of text height (0.10. select the Mass Annotation Options command on to set up the Mass Annotation options. select Attribute Label Data to specify the attributes which make up the label and the format of the label (or select Accept for graphics only labels). Label Description Lib. the system skips over any nonrequired parameters.txt) in the project directory. The default category is that of the name label category. You can select one of the 20 user-defined drawing annotation categories or use the default category. All of these parameters do not apply to each label type. Refer to Mass Annotation Options. page 484 for more details. . no underlining is performed. Once you have defined all the applicable parameters. 477 . Label Category — The form displays the name label category and the user-defined drawing annotation categories. Create Label Graphic Data 13.). If this value is 0.

used to delete a selected line or item from the label description.2. — OR — Select an item field to create a new item in the current line (before or after) the selected item. Insert Data 1. The Line and Item fields are used to define the attributes that make up the label and the order of the attributes within the label.4.2 Create Label Attribute Data This form enables you to specify the attributes which make up the label and the format of the label. Set the option to Insert Data. Select Line or Item to Insert Data Select a line field to create a new line (before or after) the selected line. 2. used to revise a selected line or item in the label description. 3. Set the option at the upper left of the form Insert Data Delete Data Edit Data used to add a line or item to the label description. 478 . Set the toggle to Insert after or Insert before._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 13.

) Create Label Attribute Data 13. You can select Other Data to select the attribute data type for Raceway data. 4. Select Option Select the attribute data type for the label._ _______________ The system activates a form that displays the Attribute Data Types. (The second form appears when Other Data is selected. 479 . Label Description Lib. The following forms illustrates the displays for a drawing view specific label.

you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify text to be entered by the user at label creation. Enter Data Select the attribute to be reported from the form. 5. — OR — For drawing view specific labels. For labels that include a distance attribute (such as the face-to-face dimension of a piping component). For labels that include an angle value (such as the bend angle of a piping component). This option is restricted to those decimal attributes that represent dimensions. 480 . The system sets the Format Data automatically. you can select Fraction to format decimal attributes as a coordinate readout. You can modify the total length and the number of decimal places (if applicable). — OR — Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label. The angle units are determined by the angular format defined through the Project Data Manager._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The system displays the attributes for the selected data type. select the Angle format to display the value in angle units (such as degrees and minutes). — OR — Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing between attributes.

481 . Label Description Lib. 2. Create Label Attribute Data Repeat the previous step to add additional attribute text information. You can modify the total length and the number of decimal places (if applicable). This allows you to combine attribute values and pre-formatted text. Delete Data 1. — OR — Select the Format Data option. The active setting is highlighted or shown in the display fields._ _______________ 6. Select the line or item to be deleted. Accept the specified attribute data. 8. Master Units = MicroStation master units. — OR — Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label. The system displays the attributes definition form for the selected item. Select an attribute from the form to change the type of data. 13. Sub Units = MicroStation sub units. Set the option to Delete Data. 2. 3. Select one of the Optional Data options to specify a modifier to the active format. — OR — For drawing view specific labels. — OR — Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing between attributes. you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify text to be entered by the user at label creation. Set the option to Edit Data. Edit Data 1. You can only define one user-defined keyin in a specific label. the system deletes all the associated items. 7. 3. When you select a line. Select Item to Edit Select the item to be revised. Select Accept to delete the highlighted line or item.

’Line no: ’ line_number_label .’Steam out temp: ’ steam_outlet_temp .0) nor_op_temp_units .Real (8. Repeat the previous steps to edit additional items.Character (5) . ".IN.Character (30) .Character 6 .0) nor_op_temp_units .’-’ [9] insulation_purpose . Examples **************** Label Type = 310 **************** Label Name = Line Number Label [1][2][3]-[5]-[7]-[9] Piping Segment Data [1] fluid_code .’-’ [7] piping_mater_class .’Nor oper press: ’ nor_oper_pres .Character (3) (2) (16) (7) (6) (3) **************** Label Type = 317 **************** Label Name = Dgn review segment Line no: [2] Construction status: [4] Nor oper press: [6][7] Nor oper temp: [9][10] Steam out temp: [12][13] Heat tracing: [15] Insulation: [17] Cleaning: [19] Piping Segment Data 1 [2] 3 [4] 5 [6] [7] 8 [9] [10] 11 [12] [13] 14 [15] 16 [17] .Real (5.’Nor oper temp: ’ nor_oper_temp .Character [2] unit_code .MM._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 4.Character (15) .Character (10) .2) with sub units (ex.Character 4 .Character [3] line_sequence_no .2) nor_op_pres_units .Character (5) . — THEN — Accept the edits.Character (5) .’Construction status: ’ construction_stat .) 482 .Real (5.’Heat tracing: ’ heat_tracing_media .Character 8 .etc.’Insulation: ’ insulation_thick .’-’ [5] nominal_piping_dia .Real (5.

Character (10) Create Label Attribute Data 13. Label Description Lib._ _______________ 18 . 483 .’Cleaning: ’ [19] cleaning_reqmts .

4. 484 .2.3 Mass Annotation Options Selecting the Mass Annotation Options command activates the Mass Annotation Options form. 2._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 13. Accept the selections and return to the Create Label Graphic Data form. Place a data point on the desired selection under each question. This form allows you to specify the following options for use with the Mass Annotation command in PD_Draw: Are Previously Labeled Objects to be Labeled? Are Objects Clipped by Drawing View Bounds to be Labeled? Are Objects Hidden by Other Objects to be Labeled? Steps 1.

Select Label Type Select the specific label description to be revised. See Label Types for a description of all the label types and subtypes. For example. Label Description Lib. The system activates the following form which enables you to select the type of label to be modified. the system displays the following form.5 Revise Label Data This option enables you to revise the graphic data or attribute data for an existing label description. 485 . the system displays the graphic data form or the attribute data form. 3. Depending on the label type selected._ _______________ 13. Operating Sequence 1. The system displays the existing label for the selected label type. if you select label type 011. Select Option Select the type of label to be revised. Revise Label Data 13.2. Select Revise from the Data Management form. 2.

select Accept to save the changes and return to the Revise Label Description form. Set the option to Insert Data. 6. The default is Edit Data. 486 . 7._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 4. Refer to Create Label Attribute Data for information on these options. Select the parameter to be modified and key in the new value for that parameter. Delete Data. When finished. 5. — OR — Select Cancel to exit without saving the changes. or Edit Data. You can select Attribute Label Data to activate the attribute data form.

The system activates the following form which enables you to select the type of label to be deleted. 4. The system deletes the description and refreshes the selection screen to enable you to delete another label type.2. 487 . 3. See Label Types for a description of all the label types and subtypes. The system displays the existing labels for the selected label type. Delete Label Data 13. Select Delete Label Data from the Data Management form. Select Option Select the type of label to be deleted. Accept to Delete Label Type xxx Select Accept to delete the selected label type._ _______________ 13. 2. Operating Sequence 1. Select Label Type Select the specific label description to be deleted.6 Delete Label Data This option enables you to delete an existing label description. Label Description Lib.

488 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5. Select Cancel to return to the Data Management form.

For either of the Print options. the system displays a list of queues based on information in the Project Queue Description Library. Report Completed 489 . Report Label Data 13._ _______________ 13. Select Accept to submit the report for processing. Set the toggle to Unapproved or Approved to define the source of information to be reported. Select Report Label Data from the Data Management menu.2.7 Report Label Data This option creates a listing of the label types defined in the Label Description Library. Operating Sequence 1. Select the reporting option. Label Description Lib. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapproved library are being used. 2. Print/Save — submits the generated report output file to the specified print queue and saves the output file. Print/Delete — submits the generated report output file to the specified print queue and deletes the output file. 3. 4. Save — saves the output file without printing.

000000 [1] Piping Segment Data [1] line_number_label .Character (40) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 2 **************** Label Name = Piping Component No Graphics Color = 4 Graphics Weight = 1 Graphics Style = 0 Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 20 Text Space = 0.400000 Number Line = 1 Text Font = 0 Enclosure Option = 9 Cell Enclosure Name = Leader Line = 1 Line Terminator Char = > Text Font = 125 Under Line = 0. Portions of the listing for the delivered labels are provided below. A RIS error may be displayed if an Electrical Raceway Database has not been created as part of the PDS database.RPT in the default directory.000000 [1] Piping Component Data 490 . the system creates a file named LABEL. The error will only be reported the first time the report is run each PDS session. **************** Label Type = 1 **************** Label Name = Line Number Label Graphics Color = 4 Graphics Weight = 1 Graphics Style = 0 Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 40 Text Space = 0._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 For either of the Save options.300000 Number Line = 1 Text Font = 0 Enclosure Option = 9 Cell Enclosure Name = Leader Line = 1 Line Terminator Char = > Text Font = 125 Under Line = 0.

Character (6) 491 .5 space(s) 5 .Character (6) .Character (20) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 200 **************** Label Name = No Label Enclosure Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 10 Text Space = 0.Character (6) .250000 Number Line = 2 Text Font = 0 Under Line = 0.’Connect Point . Label Description Lib.’ / ’ [3] model_code 4 .250000 Number Line = 2 Text Font = 0 Under Line = 0.000000 Attribute Data *************************************** **************** Label Type = 300 **************** Label Name = Piping Component ID [1] / [3] Connect Point Piping Component Data [1] commodity_name 2 ._ _______________ [1] piping_comp_no .’ / ’ [3] model_code 4 . *************************************** **************** Label Type = 301 **************** Label Name = Piping Comp Center [1] / [3] Component Center Piping Component Data [1] commodity_name 2 .5 space(s) .000000 **************** Label Type = 201 **************** Label Name = Rectangle Enclosure Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 10 Text Space = 0.Character (6) ’ Report Label Data 13.

[10] PMC: [12] Weld Attributes 1 .’Piping NPD/OD: ’ [8] nom_pipe_diam_A .’Weld Type: ’ [6] weld_type_A .Character (8) 5 .Character (16) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 401 **************** Label Name = Pipe sch/thk 1 [1] Piping/Tubing Data [1] schedule_thickness .Character (16) 3 .Character (16) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 400 **************** Label Name = Comp cmdty code [1] Piping Component Data [1] commodity_code .Character (20) 7 .’ ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5 .Real (15.’Component Center’ *************************************** **************** Label Type = 353 **************** Label Name = Dgn Rvw Weld Label Weld Number: [2] .4) 11 .’ [10] outside_diam_A .[4] Weld Type: [6] Piping NPD/OD: [8] .’Weld Number: ’ [2] weld_id .’ [4] weld_no_A .Character (20) 9 .Character (8) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 404 **************** Label Name = 1/2CP COMP GCP [1] Piping Component Data [1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM 492 .’PMC: ’ [12] piping_mater_class .’ .

Character (3) .1 space(s) [3] preparation . *************************************** 493 .’-’ [4] fluid_code [5] design_area_number . Label Description Lib._ _______________ *************************************** **************** Label Type = 405 **************** Label Name = 2CP RED COMP GCP X RCP [1] X [3] Piping Component Data [1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM 2 ’X’ [3] CP_2_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 408 **************** Label Name = 3CP RED COMP GCP x RCP [1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM 2 ’X’ [3] CP_3_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 410 **************** Label Name = 3CP COMP RCP [1] CP_3_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 950 **************** Label Name = MAL nozzle descr [1] [3] Nozzle Data [1] nominal_piping_dia .Character (8) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 951 **************** Label Name = Iso continuation [1][2]-[4][5] Piping Segment Data [1] unit_code [2] line_sequence_no 3 .Character (9) 2 .Character (12) Report Label Data 13.Character (5) .Character (16) .

Character (16) .Character (12) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 2200 **************** Label Name = Specialty 2cp (1st) [1] Piping Component Data [1] piping_comp_no .Character (16) ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 **************** Label Type = 1150 **************** Label Name = Line ID [1][2]-[4] Piping Segment Data [1] unit_code [2] line_sequence_no 3 .Character (20) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 2201 **************** Label Name = Specialty 3cp (1st) [1] Piping Component Data [1] piping_comp_no .Character (5) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 1151 **************** Label Name = Iso no [1][2]-[4][5] Piping Segment Data [1] unit_code [2] line_sequence_no 3 .Character (5) .Character (3) .Character (20) *************************************** 494 .’-’ [4] fluid_code [5] design_area_number .’-’ [4] fluid_code .Character (3) .

13.1 Label Library Merger Interface This section contains descriptions of the Label Library Merger interface. including information on all dialog boxes and commands. 495 .3 Label Library Merger Label Library Merger 13. The Label Library Merger commands are available from the toolbar and from menus._ _______________ 13. Compress the destination library. Label Description Lib. Validate the destination library. You can only add and remove labels with this command. To edit an existing label or create a new label definition. use the Label Description Library Manager command. The Label Library Merger utility allows PDS users to copy labels from one or two label description libraries into another library and to modify the destination library as necessary.3. Rename an existing label in the destination library. Features Copy labels from one library to another. Delete an existing label from the destination library.

The bottom pane of the Label Library Merger dialog box is the message window. Number and Description. The two views on the left display the contents of the source libraries. and the view on the right displays the contents of the destination library. You can click a heading in any library view to sort the labels by that heading. which display the appropriate data for each label. 496 . Each library view is divided into two columns._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The Label Library Merger dialog box contains three label description library views. which displays errors and other informational messages during the library merge workflow.

l Opened as Destination Label L 497 .1. Example MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\labels. The system will then create the new label description library in the specified location.l Opened as Source Label Library 1 MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\company_labels.3.4 Information This command displays information in the Message Window regarding the source and destination libraries.3. where labels from the source libraries are copied.1. To create a new destination library. and exit the Label Library Merger.1. You can key in or browse to the location of a source library. 13. 13.1.1. File Menu 13.1 File Menu The commands on the File menu allow you to open libraries. The system displays the copied label numbers and descriptions in the Destination Library View. The system displays the label number and description in the Library 2 View.2 Open Source Label Library 2 This command opens a second label description library from which to copy labels.3._ _______________ 13. browse to the appropriate folder in the Open Destination Library dialog box. type a new library name in the File name text box. and click Open. The system displays the label number and description in the Library 1 View.3.l Opened as Source Label Li MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\all_labels. display information in the Message Window.1. and not required for the use of this command.3. Using a second source library is optional. 13. 13.1.1 Open Source Label Library 1 This command opens a label description library from which to copy labels.1.1.3 Open Destination Library This command opens a new or existing destination library. Label Description Lib.

5 Exit This command closes the Label Library Merger utility._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 13. 498 .3.1.1.

3 Invert Selection This command switches the selection status of the labels in the active view.2 Unselect All This command resets selections so that no labels in the active view are selected.2.2 Edit Menu The commands on the Edit menu allow you to modify your selections in the various views on the Label Library Merger dialog box.3. Edit Menu 13.3. 13. 13.6 Delete This command removes the selected labels from the destination library.4 Edit Label Number This command allows users to modify the label number of the selected label in the Destination Library View.1 Select All This command selects all the labels in the active view.3. Label Description Lib.2.3.3. 13.1. 13. 499 . and reports any invalid label numbers in the Message Window.2.3.7 Validate This command checks the labels in the destination library for valid label numbers.1.2. 13.2. and labels that are currently not selected become selected. modify and delete the label information in the destination library. 13.1.2.1.1. so that labels that are currently selected become unselected.1.5 Edit Label Description This command allows users to modify the label description of the selected label in the Destination Library View._ _______________ 13.2.1. and check the destination library for errors. 13.1.3.3.

500 . Refer to Label Description Library. the label is copied with a new label number.3. page 465 for more information on label categories. the system adds 5000 to the label number and copies the label. The Validate command reports any such label numbers in the Message Window. the system assigns the next available label number in that category.2.3. which is assigned using the following criteria: — If there is an unassigned label number in the copied label’s category in the destination library. — If there is no unassigned label number in the copied label’s category in the destination library.2. For example._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 13.9 Copy to Destination This command copies the selected labels from the source libraries to the destination library.1. Label numbers above 5000 generate errors in PDS.8 Compress Destination Library This command removes the deleted labels from the destination library. label number 23 in the source library is copied to label 5023 in the destination library. If there is a label in the destination library with the same label number as the label being copied. 13. the label is copied with its original label number.3.10 Clear Error Messages This command refreshes the Message Window.2.1. The system uses the following criteria to determine label numbers: If there is no label in the destination library with the same label number as the label being copied. 13.1.

_ _______________ 13.1. Label Description Lib. 13.3. 13.3.3.3.3 Help Menu The commands in the Help menu display online Help and other information about the Label Library Merger utility. including the version number and copyright date.3. 501 .1. Help Menu 13.1 Contents This command displays the Label Library Merger online Help file.2 About Library Merger This command displays the About dialog box with information about the Label Library Merger utility.1.

and click Open. 502 .2 Workflow This section describes the general workflow for the Label Library Merger utility._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 13. select the library. The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 1 View. 2. 1.3. The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 2 View. The Label Library Merger interface displays. 3. The system displays the contents of the destination library in the Destination Library View. 5. You can either open an existing library for update or create a new library. Click Start > Programs > PD_Shell > PDS Label Library Merger to start the Label Library Merger utility. Browse to the location of the first label description library. 4. Repeat the previous two steps for the second label description library. Click File > Open Destination Library. Click File > Open Source Label Library 1.

Click Edit > Copy to Destination to copy the selected labels to the destination library. or SHIFT+click to select a range of labels._ _______________ 6. Click Edit > Validate to check the destination library for errors. Label Description Lib. The system displays any warnings in the Message View. 11. Use CTRL+click to select multiple labels. The system displays the copied labels in the Destination Library View. 10. Click Edit > Compress Destination Library to compress the destination library. 7. The system displays any warnings in the Message View. or invert your selections. Click Edit > Edit Label Number or Edit > Edit Label Description to modify labels in the destination library as necessary. When you are finished modifying the destination library. 503 . Use the selection commands on the Edit menu to select all labels. click File > Exit to exit the Label Library Merger utility. Workflow Select labels in the existing label description libraries to copy to the destination library. unselect all labels. 8. 13. 9.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 504 .

This function is most useful for a commonly placed group of components. Piping Assembly Lib. Piping Assembly Library The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model.l The PAL definition must be processed and stored in the Piping Assembly Library. 505 . A Piping Assembly Library which contain the definitions for basic assemblies (macros) is included in the product delivery. Piping Assembly Library 14._ _______________ 14. The PAL definition is compiled and stored in Piping Assembly Language object library and its text stored in the text library. \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\assembly.

Keywords followed by a number in (parentheses) such as NPD_A (3221). If not documented. You can create a PAL definition outside the PDS environment using a text editor.off (NOT the default) Notify at Initial Selection . The characteristics form in the Form Builder should have the following settings. The Edit Field Options setting in the Form Builder should be Change Mode. 506 .1 Piping Assembly Language The Piping Assembly Language provides a set of functions to define the placement operation. (Therefore.) Formbuilder Guidelines You can customize forms for the purpose of inputting data in the creation of a piping assembly. You can use the gadget numbers for the corresponding input fields. Notify Upon Completion . The following list the form builder data for the standard form gadgets. NPD_C (3223) are used to create form gadgets for defining and placing piping assemblies. the key entry field number for NPD_A is 221. All input fields should be sequenced and must have the following characteristics. The number represents the application command number for the keyword.1 PAL Keywords The following list outlines all the keywords that can be used to create a PAL definition.1. such as a control station. NPD_B (3222).off The forms delivered by Intergraph can be used as examples for customization. The key entry field number is this number minus 3000. 14. You must adhere to the following conventions when customizing form input fields for the applicable piping assembly. any other gadgets on the form should remain consistent with those delivered by Intergraph._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 14.

Piping Assembly Lib.for active segment data display gadget number: characters: lines deep: edit mode: font size: Material description display gadget number: characters: lines deep: edit mode: font size: 150 80 3 review only 12 254 40 3 review only 12 507 . Message Area B ._ _______________ Help key: gadget number: button: Form Size key: gadget number: button: Exit key: gadget number: button: Accept key: gadget number: button: Message Area A .for messages gadget number: characters: lines deep: edit mode: font size: 251 40 3 review only 12 4002 999 manual 4001 998 manual 403 997 automatic 456 995 automatic Piping Assembly Language 14.

Example: PLACE FITTING . Examples: # Control Station Commands COMMAND This keyword is used with other keywords to initiate a defined action. It can be used at the end of a PLACE statement._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Description # This keyword is used to specify a description for the piping assembly from within the assembly language file. Examples: COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA COMMAND = UPDATE_APP COMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE CONNECT This keyword defines the active point for the next component placed in the PAL definition. Refer to the PLACE Command Component keywords for a list of component/instrument types. Example: CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A PLACE This keyword defines the type of item to be placed. BY CP1 STEM This keyword is used with an orientation keyword to define the direction of the secondary axis. The specified reference point must be defined before using this option. BY This keyword is used with the PLACE keyword to set the placement mode to be used in placing the specified component. Place a # in the first column of any line followed by a description of as many as 100 characters. Example: PLACE FITTING . 508 . Refer to the Connect Point keywords for a list of viable placement modes. 6Q2C01 . 6Q2C01 .

Piping Assembly Lib. CP2. TAP These keywords are used with the PLACE keyword to define the type of item to be placed. Example: PLACE RDB_INSTRUMENT. They can be used with the BY keyword to indicate the means of placement. FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP2. CP4. RDB_SPECIALTY These keywords are used to place instruments and specialty items that have been defined in the PJS using the tag number. INSVLV1. BRANCH. 6Q2C01. BY CP1 Connect Point CENTER. BY CP1 BRANCH ._ _______________ Example: PLACE FITTING . BY CP1 INLET_ELEVATION This keyword set the starting elevation or point of connection. BY CP1 . CP1. FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP3 These keywords identify the connect point for an operation. SPECIALTY. STEM = UP Piping Assembly Language PLACE Command Components FITTING. 6Q2C01 . PIPE. 6Q2C01 . 90_DEG . Example: PLACE PLACE PLACE PLACE FITTING . CP5 ACTIVE_PP FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP1. Example: REF_PNT_A = ACTIVE_PP COORDINATE_1 = INLET_ELEVATION 509 . INSTRUMENT. FLANGE. BY CP2 14. RDB_INSTRUMENT. BY CP1 PIPE TO REF_PNT_A OPTIONAL . OPTIONAL. 6Q1C38. CP3. Example: PLACE VALVE. VALVE.

Example: REF_PNT_A = CP_1 Once a reference point is defined. REF_PNT_T ACTIVE_PP. UP WEST. it can be used by a following statement in the PAL definition to indicate a coordinate location (for example. . An assembly end definition is used to define the endpoints of an assembly. REF_PNT_B. NORTH.valve . Example: ASSEMBLY_END_A = REF_PNT_A Reference Point Keywords REF_PNT_A. NOZZLE These keywords set reference points at specified coordinate values.flange). Assembly End Keywords ASSEMBLY_END_A. DOWN These keywords identify the orientation direction. STEM = UP No Material TakeOff NO_MTO=1 This keyword can be used immediately before a PLACE statement to specify that the component is not reportable. ASSEMBLY_END_B These keywords define an assembly end point as a specified coordinate value. 6Q2C01.. 510 . This is required when the assembly is being placed into a pipe so that the pipe is broken properly and the assembly inserted (as in the case of a valve assembly: flange . Example: PLACE FITTING. SOUTH._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Orientation ACTIVE EAST. CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A). The system automatically resets MTO processing after placement.. BY CP1. You can define up to 20 points on the assembly for future reference in the PAL definition.

Example: IF (NUMBER_CPS . Piping Assembly Lib. MALE These keywords specify the generic termination type for use in conditional testing. Example: COMPONENT_TAG = USER_INPUT UORs per Model Subunit UORS_PER_SUBUNIT This keyword defines the number of UORs per Subunit defined in the model. Example: ITEM_NAME = xxxxxxx COMPONENT_TAG (3246) This keyword defines the tag for the component to be placed. FEMALE._ _______________ Generic End Types NULL_GEN_TYPE.EQ. 2.0) THEN REF_PNT_A = CP2 ELSE REF_PNT_A = CP3 ENDIF 14. It can be used in branch placement to determine whether to use CP2 or CP3 as a reference point. You can prompt for the tag or use the tutorial interface using the designated field and command numbers. Commodity Item Name ITEM_NAME This keyword defines an item name to be used for placement. It can be used to calculate tap location. BOLTED. Piping Assembly Language Number of Connect Points NUMBER_CPS This keyword contains the number of connect points of the component just placed. 511 .

COORDINATE_1 (3191) ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Local Coordinates and Orientation APP_X. not Easting or Northing values. APP_Y. They are automatically set internally at the start of placement and cannot be modified. Dimension Definition DIMENSION_1 (3141). Example: MOVE_DISTANCE = DIMENSION_1 PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_A 512 . DIMENSION_20 (3160) The Dimension keywords identify distances and offsets. LOCAL_Z These keywords are defined as the active primary.. These keywords are initially set to the active placement point of the assembly at the start of the assembly placement.. secondary and normal axis at the time the assembly is placed.. The Coordinate keywords are only used for elevation values.. LOCAL_Y. DIMENSION_2 (3142). It is useful in placing a variable length pipe by moving out a specified distanced and calling place pipe. COORDINATE_12 (3203) DIMENSION_1 .DIMENSION_20 These keywords are used to receive user input from the tutorial to define the active placement point. . The Coordinate keywords identify actual points and the Dimension keywords identify distances and offsets. Example: APP_Z = COORDINATE_1 COORDINATE_2 = INLET_ELEVATION LOCAL_X. Move Specified Distance MOVE_DISTANCE This keyword moves a specified distance in the direction of the active primary. APP_Z These keywords define the active placement point which can be used in the connect to segment and point in space routines.

. _Z CP_1_LOCATION_X. NPD_STEP_UP.. GEN_TYPE_2. _Y. (The system uses the next entry in the NPD table from the active size as the first/second size for a step up or next higher size and uses the previous entry in the NPD table from the active size as the first/second size for a step down or lower size). 6Q2C01 . _Z These keywords define coordinate values for the component just placed.. PR_RATING_2.. BY CP2 ENDIF Piping Assembly Language 14. BOLTED ) THEN OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1 OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1 PLACE OPTIONAL . . . If you do not include a line size in the PAL definition. PR_RATING_5 GEN_TYPE_1. GEN_TYPE_5 Example: LOAD_SPEC_DATA = ’6Q1C80’ IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 . _Y. Example: TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y + DELTA_DISTANCE * UORS_PER_SUBUNIT 513 . _Y.. until the active size is redefined. Example: FIRST_SIZE = NPD_STEP_DOWN Coordinates of Component Just Placed COMPONENT_CENTER. _Z CP_2_LOCATION_X. This particular statement in PAL is used as the active size (first or second) in the placement of all the following components.EQ. CP_2_LOCATION COMPONENT_CENTER_X. TERM_TYPE_5 PR_RATING_1._ _______________ Load Spec Data LOAD_SPEC_DATA This keyword reads the spec record for the commodity item and assigns values for the following keywords: TERM_TYPE_1.. Piping Assembly Lib. Setting First and Second Size FIRST_SIZE. TERM_TYPE_2. SECOND_SIZE. the active size at the time of placement of the piping assembly will be used. NPD_STEP_DOWN These keywords set the active first size or second size placement parameter a step down/up in the NPD piping material class table. CP_1_LOCATION. .

0 FLANGE_OD_CP1. and Z values of the current active placement point. These values can be used to calculate a tap location. Y. GET_ASCII._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Outside Diameter PIPE_OD_CP1.PIPE_OD_CP2 ) / 4. GET_DECIMAL. DISPLAY_NUMERIC DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = ’PALCST’ PROMPT_MESSAGE = ’Keyin coordinates and valve data’ DISPLAY = prompt_message used to display any ascii keyword. DISPLAY_NUMERIC = npd_a used to display any numeric keyword. COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA used to get data from the user at placement via a tutorial. PIPE_OD_CP2 These keywords contain the pipe outside diameter at each connect point for the component just placed. These values can be used to calculate a tap location. This command is useful for variable distance changes in assemblies. APP_Y. 514 . DISPLAY. Example: DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 . FLANGE_OD_CP2 These keywords contain the flange outside diameter at each connect point for the component just placed. Prompt for ASCII Input USER_INPUT Updating Active Place Point Example: COMMAND = UPDATE_APP The variables APP_X. GET_INTEGER These keywords get data of a specified type from a user keyin. and APP_Z are assigned the X. Tutorial Display and Acquisition DISPLAY_TUTORIAL. and you need to know the new coordinates.

These points are assumed to lie on a piping segment whereas a reference point identifies a connect point. ORIENT_PRIMARY. The command syntax is the same as for connecting to a reference point except that the keywords APP_X. If the branch is on a piping segment or in free space. VARIABLE Example: PLACE BRANCH. PROMPT. APP_Y. INVERT ORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_X This statement orients the primary axis to be the same as the primary at the beginning of the assembly placement. If you are placing fitting to fitting. APP_Z are used as the coordinates. You can also use INVERT for the primary axis. Orientation of Primary and Secondary ORIENTATION._ _______________ Point in Space Example: COMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE The values of the keywords APP_X. ORIENT_SECONDARY. These keywords need to be set before POINT_IN_SPACE is called. 515 . Piping Assembly Lib. Piping Assembly Language Connect to Piping Segment Example: CONNECT TO APP 14. Placement of BRANCH using Table Lookup 90_DEG. APP_Z are used to define the active placement point that is not connected to piping or a piping segment. ORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_Y This statement orients the secondary to be the same as the secondary at placement. 90_DEG . APP_Y. ORIENT_SECONDARY = INVERT This statement allows the secondary to be inverted from its current position. you should specify connect point placement (BY CP1). then Placement BY CENTER should be used. 45_DEG. The keywords should be set before this command is called. BY CENTER This statement performs a table lookup on the 90 degree branch table to determine the branch component type given the current first and second size.

. when the flange is being placed by its welded end. CHECK_MARK_2 (3163). CHECK_MARK_20 (3180) 516 . END_PREP_5 TBL_SUFFIX_A (301). END_PREP_2.LE. Otherwise the option code is hard-coded. TBL_SUFFIX_E (305) These keywords provide the ability to select the correct optional flange. Placement of Optional Components OPTION_CODE Examples: OPTION_CODE = PROMPT OPTION_CODE = 790 This keyword sets the option code for the next component placed.and. 2. ...0 .. ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Placement of OPTION flange OPTION_RATING... . OPTION_TBL_SUFFIX TBL_SUFFIX_GREEN. OPTION_END_PREP Example: IF ( END_PREP_A . TBL_SUFFIX_B (302). BY CP2 ENDIF The keywords OPTION_RATING and OPTION_END_PREP values are used to determine which option to use for the specified flange. 199) THEN OPTION_RATING = RATING_A OPTION_END_PREP = END_PREP_A PLACE OPTIONAL. END_PREP_A . TBL_SUFFIX_RED END_PREP_1. If the PROMPT keyword is used.GE. the system activates the Option Code Selection tutorial at placement to enable the user to select the option code. Placement of Variable length pipe Example: PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_E Logical Marks CHECK_MARK CHECK_MARK_1 (3161). 6Q2C01 .

hard-coded in the PAL definition. MATERIALS_CLASS_J (3270) Example: MATERIALS_CLASS_B = USER_INPUT ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS = MATERIALS_CLASS_B The values for materials class can be: . Initially they are all set to true._ _______________ The check marks are logical keywords that can be accessed through the tutorial. END_PREP_A (3231). MATERIALS_CLASS_C (3208) 14.. MATERIALS_CLASS_E (3265). NPD_J (3290) These keywords store nominal piping diameter values. This enables you to obtain up to three different classes from the tutorial at the start which can be used as needed in the definition. RATING_B (3237) These keywords store pressure rating values. NPD_C (3223) NPD_D (3284). through _J are stored locally until a statement with ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS is executed.. RATING_A (3236). MATERIALS_CLASS_B (3207).defined by prompt (USER_INPUT) . the Materials Class in the active data is updated to the assigned value. . The values for MATERIALS_CLASS_A. SCHEDULE_A (3241). NPD_B (3222).obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields . SCHEDULE_B (3242) These keywords store schedule/thickness values. etc. 517 . END_PREP_B (3232) These keywords store end preparation values. NPD_E (3285). Component Attributes NPD_A (3221). They can be used for testing for placement of components.. At that time. Piping Assembly Lib. Piping Assembly Language Changing Piping Materials Class within an Assembly ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS (3205) MATERIALS_CLASS_A (3206). .. MATERIALS_CLASS_D (3264).

Local Variables You can use local variables to store values for use in defining a piping assembly. BEND_ANGLE_B (3213). ON.hard-coded in the PAL definition The active bend angle in the model is not set until a statement with ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE is executed. 518 . This number is assigned to the component group number attribute of each subsequent component placed until the statement COMPONENT_GROUP = OFF is executed or the assembly is completed. OFF Example: COMPONENT_GROUP = ON This statement causes the system to search for the next available component group number.Piping Component Data T50C# .Pipe Data T67C# ..obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields . the active bend angle is assigned the appropriate value and the next component placed uses that value.. At that time._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Setting Bend Angle ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE (3211) BEND_ANGLE_A (3212).Piping Segment Data T34C# . Component Group COMPONENT_GROUP. The active bend angle is set to 0 after placement. . The active component data is represented by the last component placed or the component to which the user is connected. You can use any alphanumeric string as long as it is not reserved as a keyword. Test Attribute Values T12C# .Instrument Component Data You can use these keywords to test specific values of the active segment data or active component data. BEND_ANGLE_E (3216) Example: BEND_ANGLE_A = PROMPT ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE = BEND_ANGLE_B The values for bend angle can be .defined by prompt . where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable database table.

where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable database table.Instrument Component Data You can use these keywords to pre-define specific values for the component to be placed. such as a small diameter control valve. Piping Assembly Lib. 519 . If you pre-define a value for fabrication category. Having the ability to pre-define the fabrication category within a control station piping assembly will enable you to automatically override the RDB specification of the fabrication category of a single field component. Piping Assembly Language 14._ _______________ Pre-Define Attribute Values T34C# .Pipe Data T67C# .Piping Component Data T50C# . the component will be designated as having the fabrication category defined by user versus by system such that reconstructing the component will not override the user value with the value in the Reference Database. in what would otherwise be a shop spool. This functionality is similar to the Pre-Define Component Data option of the Place Component command.

and FLANGE_OD_CP2 can be used to calculate the delta distance. The active orientation at time of placement (tap) is used.0 is the tap NPD and 1 is the option code.delta_distance delta_distance delta_distance +. TAP_LOCATION = COMPONENT_CENTER CP_1_LOCATION CP_2_LOCATION COMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP1 COMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP2 — OR — TAP_LOCATION_X = COMPONENT_CENTER_X CP_1_LOCATION_X +CP_2_LOCATION_X +TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y CP_1_LOCATION_Y +CP_2_LOCATION_Y +TAP_LOCATION_Z = COMPONENT_CENTER_Z CP_1_LOCATION_Z +CP_2_LOCATION_Z +- +. These values are based on the component just placed in the assembly. _Y. and Z represent a local coordinate system that is analogous to the orientation at Connect point 1 of the component flipped to point towards the inside of the component. the X. The tap orientation should also be set before making the PLACE TAP request using the PAL orientation commands.0 . FLANGE_OD_CP1.2 Placing Taps in Assemblies The syntax for placing taps in assemblies is outlined below: PLACE TAP . 1 where 2. 520 .delta_distance delta_distance delta_distance +. 2. PIPE_OD_CP2. PLACE TAP BY CPn CPn designates the connect point from which to obtain the tap data.delta_distance delta_distance delta_distance The keywords PIPE_OD_CP1. The following PAL definitions should be used to specify the tap location before making the PLACE TAP request._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 14.1. Y. For TAP_LOCATION_X. _Z.

! PLACE VALVE. ! OPTION_CODE = 163 PLACE FITTING. BY CP1 IF ( GEN_TYPE_2 ._ _______________ 14. MALE) ! LOAD_SPEC_DATA = ’6Q1C76’ ! ! This ’IF’ statement determines if an optional flange is needed before ! the gate valve is placed. Piping Assembly Lib. Sample Piping Assembly Files DRAIN # Drain assembly PAL ’DRAIN’ ! ! This assembly will place a drain. BY CP1 END 14.3 Sample Piping Assembly Files This section presents sample PAL files from the delivered Piping Assembly Library. BY CP1 ! ! The data from the component spec is read into the keywords. BOLTED ) THEN OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1 OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1 PLACE OPTIONAL . 6Q3C88 . It lists the files and shows the resulting graphics created by the file. BY CP1 ENDIF ! ! This command allows the user to pick which component to place. In this instance. ! without the OPTION_CODE command will cause an error because there are no ! option 1 attributes available for 6Q2C16. ! PLACE FITTING. The user needs to place a 1" ! sockolet at the point the drain is desired. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing piping assemblies with the Place Component command. BOLTED ) THEN OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_2 OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_2 PLACE OPTIONAL . 521 . Another possiblilty would be to ! use OPTION_CODE = PROMPT.EQ. 6Q1C76 . The user will be prompted for which component is ! desired. 6Q2C01 . If the ! option command is not used the s/w will choose option 1. 21) ! PR_RATING_1 TO 5 gets the pressure rating ! GEN_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the textual value for end preparation (eg. 6Q2C16 . 6Q2C01 .1. ! IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 . ! TERM_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the numeric value for end preparation (eg. Notice in the spec that this type of gate valve ! is different than a 6Q2C01. BY CP2 ENDIF ! ! Places a gate valve.EQ.

6Q2C23 . 90_DEG .5 .DELTA_DISTANCE * UORS_PER_SUBUNIT ORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_Y ORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_X PLACE TAP BY CP1 REF_PNT_A = CP1 REF_PNT_B = CP3 CONNECT TO REF_PNT_B NPD_C = SECOND_SIZE DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_C PROMPT_MESSAGE = ’Enter Branch Size DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGE COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA SECOND_SIZE = NPD_C PLACE BRANCH .0 PLACE FITTING .5) / 2. 6Q3C88 . BY CP1 ’ ’ 522 . BY CP1 FIRST_SIZE = NPD_A DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 * 0.PIPE_OD_CP2 * 0._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Graphics Placed by Drain Assembly Pump Discharge Assembly # Pump Discharge PAL ’PDISC1’ ! ! Pump Discharge ! ! DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = ’PAS010’ NPD_A = FIRST_SIZE DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_A NPD_B = SECOND_SIZE DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_B PROMPT_MESSAGE = ’Enter Reducer First Size DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGE COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA PLACE FLANGE . BY CP1 OPTION_CODE = PROMPT PLACE FITTING . 6Q2C01 . BY CP2 TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y .

BY CP1 END Sample Piping Assembly Files 14. BY CP1 ORIENTATION = PROMPT PLACE VALVE . Graphics Placed by Pump Discharge Assembly 523 . Piping Assembly Lib._ _______________ ORIENTATION = PROMPT PLACE VALVE . 6Q2C01 . 6Q2C01 . 6Q1C01 . BY CP1 CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A PLACE FLANGE . BY CP2 PLACE VALVE . 6Q1C38 . BY CP1 PLACE FLANGE . 6Q1C80 .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 524 .

14. revise. See page 527. page 505. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path. 525 . This function is most useful for a commonly placed group of components. for more information on this library and refer to Piping Assembly Language. for more information on the PAL files. 14.2. Refer to Piping Assembly Library. Unapproved ==> Approved — used to copy the unapproved Piping Assembly library to the approved library.2 Piping Assembly Library Manager Piping Assembly Library Manager The Piping Assembly Library Manager enables you to create a new (empty) piping assembly library or create. See page 527. and delete piping assembly definitions in an existing library. Compress — used to compress the Piping Assembly library. Piping Assembly Lib. See page 527._ _______________ 14. Before using this command Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Assembly Library files in the Reference Database Management Data. page 506. The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model.1 Options Create Library — used to create a new Piping Assembly Library.

Delete Data — used to remove an PAL module from the library. and put the revised file back into the library. See page 528. See page 530. Revise Data — used to select an PAL module from the library. Full List lists all the assembly definitions in the Assembly Library._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Create/Interactive Data — used to compile Piping Assembly Language source files and insert them in the Piping Assembly Library. 526 . List Data — used to display the Eden modules in the library. See page 535. See page 533. Report Data — used to create a report of the library contents. Full List / Sub-string — You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the assembly data tables to be listed. Extract Data — used to extract an Eden module from the library for editing or printing. Create/Batch Data — used to compile Piping Assembly Language Source files via batch processing. edit the file. See page 529. See page 532. Sub-string limits the list to those files which contain a specified substring. See page 534.

3 Compress This option is used to compress the Piping Assembly library. Create Library The system displays the approved and unapproved Piping Assembly Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data. Piping Assembly Lib.2. 14. Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files.t) for the library that is being created. It automatically creates the object library (.2. 527 .2.l) and the text library (.2 Create Library This option is used to create a new Piping Assembly Library. Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library. 14._ _______________ 14. If you specify an existing library file.l.4 Unapproved ==> Approved This option copies the unapproved Piping Assembly library to the approved library. 14. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed. the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.

The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files at the bottom of the form. Operating Sequence 1. Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the location of the assembly source files. 2._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 14. 4. 528 . Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. You can use the default options or override the values for this operation. Select the Create/Interactive option. 3.5 Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specified files into the Piping Assembly library. Refer to the description of the Piping Assembly Library for more information on Piping Assembly Language modules.2. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. 5. Specify Filename for Processing Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library. create a list file which identifies the names of the source files to be added. Before using this command To add more than one PAL file to the library. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created. Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file to begin processing.

Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. Accept the file to begin processing. 6.2. 529 . Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. Select the Create/Batch option. Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the location of the assembly source files. 2. Specify Filename for Processing Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library and select Accept. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference. For Delayed Submit set the time and day to process the files. Operating Sequence 1. 4.6 Create/Batch Assembly Data This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specified files into the Piping Assembly library. The specified files are submitted to the batch queue PDreference for processing. Create/Batch Assembly Data Before using this command To add more than one PAL file to the library. 3. You can use the default values or override the values for this operation._ _______________ 14. Piping Assembly Lib. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. 5. The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files at the bottom of the form. create a list file which identifies the names of the source files to be added. 14.

Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed. The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.2. and then compile the file and put it back in the library. Select the Revise option._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 14.7 Revise Piping Assembly Data This option enables you to select a PAL module from the library. edit the file. 530 . Select Assembly for Revision Select the PAL modules to be revised and select Accept. Operating Sequence 1. 2.

_ _______________ 3. 531 . Make any changes to the displayed file.) If an error occurs in revising a piping assembly. 4. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control. You can select other files to edit or select exit to return to the data management form. the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library.sh file) to enable you to modify the file. Piping Assembly Lib. the system invoke the editor automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem. (If you quit the text editor. Revise Piping Assembly Data 14. the file is not recompiled. When you exit the text editor.

2. Operating Sequence 1. 532 .8 Delete Piping Assembly Data This option enables you to delete a PAL module or set of PAL modules from the Piping Assembly Library. The system deletes the modules from the Piping Assembly Library. Accept or Select Other Option Accept the modules and begin processing. Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed. 2. Select Module for Deletion Select the modules to be deleted from the list of modules._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 14. The system displays the table files in the active library. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. Select the Delete option. 3.

Select Print or Print/Save. 4. Report Assembly Data Operating Sequence 1. Revise Report Parameters Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created.9 Report Assembly Data This option enables you to create a list file of all the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library._ _______________ 14. If you select the Print/Save option.2. the system will create a file named assemblies in the default source file location. 533 . 3. Accept to Form Report Select Accept to create the specified report file. Select the Report option from the Data Management form. Refer to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting up multiple print queues. Piping Assembly Lib. 14. 2. Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues.

You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 14. Operating Sequence 1. Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL modules to be listed. 534 . 2. Select the List option.10 List Assembly Data This option displays all the PAL modules for the Piping Assembly Library. 3.2. Select Cancel to exit the form.

You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.11 Extract Assembly Data This option enables you to extract an PAL module out of the Piping Assembly Library for editing or printing. The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default directory specified in the Project Control Data. the system appends the entries to the file. Select Assembly for Extraction Select the modules from the list of files and select Accept. If the list file is less than 24 hours old. Select Extract from the Data Management form.2. 535 . Operating Sequence 1. otherwise it overwrites the file. 2._ _______________ 14. Extract Assembly Data Before using this command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed. Define the node name and path for the location of the PAL files in the Default Project Control Data or using the fields at the bottom of the Assembly Data Management form. Piping Assembly Lib. 14. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named PD_pal_list.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 536 .

Piping Specialty Data. Refer to the section entitled Hierarchy of Reported Discrepancies found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order of significance of reported problems. The RDB Conflict Report file has an extension of . 537 . The summary report is created and named according to user-specified information provided on the Reference Database Revision Manager form. Revision Manager Options Reference Data Conflict Report — Creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing) in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict with the appropriate Piping Commodity Data. Each of the four reports listed is created in the directory for the applicable model._ _______________ 15.rpt and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.rpt . Reference Database Revision Manager 15. Reference Database Revision Manager This command creates a set of reports used to coordinate revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are required in the model. Creation of any of these reports also generates a summary report. or Instrument Data of the Material Reference Database. Selecting the option to print the summary report will also force the printing of the individual report that initiated the creation of the summary report.

pcs . Report Path — Specifies the directory in which the summary report will be created. Proposed RDB Changes Report — Creates a single report assessing the effect of multiple changes in the unapproved Material Reference Database. Save — Saves the report in the model directory.tcr . of the effects of modifying individual component attributes in the current approved RDB.pcs and is created in the model directory as <model_number>. based on user-defined search criteria. the Piping Job Spec Tables. The Table Change Report file has an extension of . This report does not update the model. Reference Data Impact Report — Creates a report. The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of . This option does not print the summary report.0. Selecting this option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select the appropriate print queue.imp and is created in the model directory as <model_number>. Print/Delete — This option deletes the summary report after it is printed. 538 . Both geometric changes as a result of revisions to dimension tables and changes in weight data as a result of revisions to weight tables are reported._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 You should run this report when segment data or RDB data (such as in the Piping Job Specification Database. use the Reference Data Conflict Report instead. Selecting this option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select the appropriate print queue. The Proposed RDB Changes Report file has an extension of .tcr and is created in the model directory as <model_number>. Field Descriptions Report Node — Specifies the node on which the summary report will be created. Report Name — Specifies the name that will be used for the summary report file. Print/Save — This option does not delete the summary report after it is printed. and the Physical Dimension Tables) have been changed and you wish to determine which components need to be reconstructed or updated from the RDB. If your project was created with PDS version 6. and saves the summary report in the user-specified directory.imp . Table Change Report — Creates a report of all piping or instrument components (including pipes) in any model within the project that are affected by a change to a specific table for a specific input or set of inputs.

Discrepancy between model and RDB for any of the following attributes: end preparation . In all cases. 3. the most severe problem will be the problem that is reported. 539 ._ _______________ Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy The following chart summarizes some of the parameters used in the processing and creation of the reports available form this command: Reference Database Revision Manager Discrepancies are reported according to the significance of the problem they represent. Discrepancy between component connect point NPD and segment NPD.red pressure rating .green pressure rating . 2.green table suffix .green schedule/thickness . Dimension tables have changed. 4. Item not found in the spec. Revision Manager 1.green end preparation . Weight tables have changed.red schedule/thickness . The hierarchy of the problems reported is as follows: 15.red commodity code model code modifier geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade 5.red table suffix .

In support of this review capability. the RDB Revision Management Component List will be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process. The Reference Data Conflict Report will clear the requirement to reconstruct (or recalculate) flag if it determines there are no discrepancies for the component associated with that piping segment. will not be included in any future reports or in the RDB Revision Management Component List. Likewise. the RDB Revision Management Component List. an indexed file. Any component. 540 . This command is used to coordinate between revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are required in the model. previously reported as having required reconstructing or updating._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 15.rdb. The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDB as the result of changing any attributes of an Implied Item. or Instrument Data of the Material Reference Database. The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDB solely on the basis of the requirement to reconstruct flag being set for the piping segment associated with that component. is created in the same directory as the model with the name <model_number>. The Re-Compute Thickness command is required for any component which has been reported as requiring calculations as a result of changes in the material tables or thickness tables.rpt. The output file for this report has an extension of . This command allows you to review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or replacement as a result of RDB changes or deletions from the Material Reference Database. The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which has geometric type specification data revised.1 Reference Data Conflict Report This option creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing) in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict with the appropriate Piping Commodity Data. You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command to review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or an update of the specification data as a result of changes to the Material Reference Database. It also reports piping and instrument components that require reconstruction or recalculations as a result of piping segment data changes in the model. The Update from Reference Database command is required for any component which has non-geometric specification data (such as commodity code or weight table) revision. Piping Specialty Data. which has been deleted from the model. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on this command.

the system reads the appropriate branch table from the Piping Materials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for the branch.red * schedule/thickness .green * end preparation . If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch table from the Reference Database. this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction. Revision Manager Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included in the report. That data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.green * pressure rating . piping materials class commodity name first size second size option code maximum temperature The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from the component itself. This is the same data that is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity.red * commodity code * model code * modifier * geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade 15. The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping commodities. 541 .red * pressure rating . * end preparation .green * table suffix . If so.red * table suffix ._ _______________ Before using this command You should not access any piping model for an interactive design session while a Reference Database Revision Management report is being created.green * schedule/thickness . Reference Data Conflict Report Processing Piping Commodities The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading piping commodity specification data from the Material Reference Database.

instrument_comp_no is used for instruments. For example. 542 . changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined. Piping Specialties and Instruments The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading piping specialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database. which may be different from 0. Refer to the section entitled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order of significance of reported problems. changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. The report compares the component gasket thickness in the model (0) with the component gasket thickness defined in the reference data. the gasket thickness is set to zero in the model._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. Such errors should be ignored. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum: the application of the schedule/override in the model. The component number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or an instrument. the Reference Data Conflict Report may report a gasket thickness error for such components. As a result. If a value is defined in the Reference Database. without considering the mating component data. and piping_comp_no is used for piping specialties. changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database. The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of the segment. that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end. The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placed in the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps. changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. When a component is placed next to an integral gasket. the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value.

if any. changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database. The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect point properties. that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.green * table suffix . Revision Manager The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points. changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database.red * table suffix . The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placed in the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps.red * pressure rating . If a value is defined in the Reference Database. 15. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum: the application of the schedule/override in the model. the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value._ _______________ * end preparation . changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. 543 .red * schedule/thickness .green * end preparation . The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty or instrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data.red * physical data id * model code * modifier * geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade Reference Data Conflict Report The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping specialties and instruments.green * schedule/thickness .green * pressure rating . That data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. which are designated as having red connect point properties. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined.

The system activates the Reference Data Conflict form. and Report Name for the summary report output or use the default location and name. or Save. Piping Design Area — process the selected piping design areas. 3. If you will be printing the summary report. 6. Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request. select a queue from the pick list. Project — process all piping models for the entire project. Select Accept to submit the request for processing. 544 . 4. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete. Models — process the selected models within a selected design area. 2._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Operating Sequence 1. 5. Accept to Submit Job. Print/Save. Select the extent of the project to be processed. You can key in changes to the Report Node. Report Path. Select the Reference Data Conflict Report option. The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management Data of the Report Manager.

this report will also be printed. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The Reference Data Conflict report file has an extension of . Reference Data Conflict Report 15. Revision Manager 545 .rpt .rpt and is created in the model directory as <model_number>. If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report._ _______________ The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport.

The system searches all piping and instrument components in all piping models within the project for the use of such tables and creates a report. The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which has a dimension table revised and the Update from Reference Database command is required for any component which has a weight table revised. piping model number line id component number (if applicable) commodity name (if applicable) model code dimension or weight tables 546 .2 Table Change Report This option creates a report of all piping or instrument components (including pipes) in any model within the project that are affected by a change to a specific table for a specific input or set of inputs. which is sorted by the piping model number and the line id within each piping model. In searching the model for components that have dimensional and weight data derived from the list of revised tables. You will need to know the date the RDB was modified in order to find which components require reconstruction as a result of the RDB change. Then you upgraded the project to PDS version 6. we recommend using this report only when the RDB is changed prior to upgrading to PDS version 6.0.0.tcr. This report may return false discrepancies because it will include those items that were placed after the RDB was changed. the first size and second size are determined from the component’s data .not the piping segment data. if the nominal piping diameter of any segment associated with the component differs from the corresponding connect point size. This report should be used only in the following situation: The RBD was revised and you did not reconstruct the affected components. at which time all components were updated to have the new last_placed_date attribute set to the date the upgrade occurred. In short. This is due to the fact that reconstruction of the component will be required. and affected components have not been reconstructed to reflect the RDB change. The output file for this report has an extension of . Processing The system performs a virtual component placement for each component in a piping model (in a manner similar to that used by the Table Checker) to determine if that component has had any of its geometric or weight data derived from the specified tables. The contents of this report include the following data. Both geometric changes as a result of revisions to dimension tables and changes in weight data as a result of revisions to weight tables are reported._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 15.

Table Change Report 15.rdb. if any._ _______________ The title page for the report will include the sub-title. Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when the specification data and the geometry data have been defined by the user (not defined in the Reference Database). Piping and instrument components in any model which do not have a corresponding record in the applicable table of the Piping Design Database are ignored and excluded from the report. These components. are reported through the Database Verification command of the Project Administrator. Table Change Report. in the same directory as the model with the name <model_number>. the RDB Revision Management Component List will be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process. which has been deleted from the model. Likewise. the RDB Revision Management Component List. the system creates an indexed file. The system displays a list of Physical Data Libraries. You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command to review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or updating as a result of the component’s geometric or weight data being changed by a table revision. Any component. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on the Review Reference Data Revision Report command. Revision Manager Operating Sequence 1. 547 . Select the Table Change Report option. In support of this review capability. will not be included in any future reports or in the RDB Revision Management Component List. previously reported as needing reconstructing or updating.

For Sub-String. 548 . Re-enter Date or Choose Extent Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-String. — THEN — Select Accept to begin processing.S. 3. such as U. Accept. DIN. Practice. or Company Practice and select Accept. 4. Enter Date for Search ( dd-mmm-yy ) Key in a date (such as 10-Aug-95) in the Revision Date field to list all the tables that have been revised since the specified date. key in a string to limit the tables to be listed. The system displays a list of all dimension and weight tables (or those which match a specified substring)._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2. Select Table Library Select the Physical Data Library to process.

Revision Manager 6. 549 . you may create significant. Although the performance of the Reference Data Manager in creating the report will not be impacted by the number of dimension table entries that are to be considered for revision management. — THEN — Select Accept to process the selected tables. unnecessary work. For example. if you inadvertently identify entries which had not actually changed. Select Tables or Exit Select the dimension tables to be considered in the creation of the revision management report. Table Change Report 15. you can specify which entries (up to a total of 200 entries) in the table have been revised. — OR — You can select Process All to process all the listed tables (those which meet the specified revision date and substring). Select Table Entry For each table._ _______________ 5. For each of the selected tables. the system displays the table data in the Table Data Display form. the list of components in the model will be impacted.

The summary report path and report node are determined by the settings defined with the Report Manager._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 7. Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request.tcr and is created in the model directory as <model_number>. 9. The table change report file has an extension of . Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete. this report will also be printed. 10. Piping Design Area — process the selected piping design areas. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. or Save. 550 . Select Accept to begin processing the request.tcr . 8. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. Accept to Submit Job. Select the extent of the project to be processed. If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report. You can change the location or name for the summary report output or use the defaults. 11. Project — process all piping models in the entire project. Models — process the selected models within a selected design area. Print/Save.

etc. Revision Manager This report is based on user-defined search criteria of attributes such as piping materials class._ _______________ 15.1 Examples Example 1 As an example. You could define the search criteria to find all instances of valves with that specific geometric industry standard that would need to be reconstructed if the vendor were changed. commodity name. The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of . maximum temperature. Reference Data Impact Report 15. end preparation. nominal diameter.imp .3. assume that you want to know the impact of changing the vendor for a specific type of valve. 15. table suffix. option code.imp and is created in the model directory as <model_number>. This report does not include a graphical review capability. The purpose of this report is to find which components (constrained by your search criteria) will be impacted by a change in the attributes as they exist in the current approved RDB. commodity code. 551 . schedule thickness.3 Reference Data Impact Report Selecting the Reference Data Impact Report command activates the Search Criteria form. The RDB Impact Report search criteria are valid for Piping Material Class Data (pdtable_201) and Piping Component Specification Data (pdtable_202).

because the occurrences of those valves in the model did not match the occurrences in the RDB (due to the model not being updated after the spec change). The system activates the Search Criteria form. Select the Reference Data Impact Report command from the Reference Data Revision Manager form. check the portions of the design you specified for occurrences of vendor X. then report the matching occurrences back to you. the system displays the selected attribute in a separate field and displays a list of operators. Operating Sequence 1. would be only those placed from spec A). After selecting attribute from the attribute display list. Select Attribute Select the attribute to be restricted. A model has been created that uses both spec A and B. The resulting report would not list those valves from vendor X that were placed from spec B. assume that you are working with a project that uses spec A and spec B. Both of these specs contain the value X. Select Operator Select an operator to define the search criteria. and valves have been placed from both of these specs. key in a string to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards). for the vendor of gate valves. and the model has not been updated to reflect this spec change. 3. If the Reference Data Impact Report was run now to determine the impact of changing the vendor X. which prompts you to select the attribute to be restricted. the system would scan the RDB for all occurrences of vendor X (which. 552 . Also. The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value. at this time. 4._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Example 2 As a second example. Enter Attribute Value Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search. 2. assume that spec B has been modified since the valves have been placed so that the vendor in spec B now has a value of Y (instead of X).

15._ _______________ 5. 553 . Select the value and select Accept. the system displays a list of values from the Standard Note Library. The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria in the Search Criteria display field. Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternative condition. — OR — Select the extent of the project to be processed. — OR — Accept the defined search criteria and activate the Reference Database Revision Manager form. 6. using the Revise Search Criteria option. Revision Manager 7. Project — Process all piping models for the entire project. Accept or Select And/Or Operator Reference Data Impact Report If the attribute is code-listed. if necessary. Revise the search criteria.

You can key in changes to the Report Node. 554 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Piping Design Area — Process the selected piping design areas. Print/Save. If you will be printing the summary report. 10. Select Accept to submit the request for processing. 11. The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management Data of the Report Manager. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. 8. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete. Report Path. Models — Process the selected models within a selected design area. select a queue from the pick list.imp and is created in the model directory as <model_number>. Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request. or Save. this report will also be printed. 9. Accept to Submit Job. If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The reference data impact report file has an extension of . and Report Name for the summary report output or use the default location and name.imp .

You must make changes to the unapproved Material Reference Database in order to assess the effect of these changes. piping materials class commodity name first size second size option code maximum temperature 555 . This is the same data that is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity._ _______________ 15. Proposed RDB Changes Report 15.4 Proposed RDB Changes Report This command creates a report assessing the impact of multiple changes in the unapproved RDB. Selecting this command from the Reference Data Revision Manager form activates the Proposed RDB Changes Report form. Revision Manager Processing Piping Commodities The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading piping commodity specification data from the Material Reference Database. Refer to the section entitled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order of significance of reported problems. You are responsible for restoring the unapproved Material Reference Database to its original state if you decide not to pursue these changes.

556 . this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction. * end preparation .green * end preparation . If a value is defined in the Reference Database._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from the component itself.green * schedule/thickness . The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. That data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database. The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of the segment. The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping commodities. If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch table from the Reference Database.green * table suffix . changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.red * schedule/thickness . The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum: the application of the schedule/override in the model. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database.red * commodity code * model code * modifier * geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included in the report.green * pressure rating .red * pressure rating . The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping commodity which has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data (either the specification data from the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from another connect point. the system reads the appropriate branch table from the Piping Materials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for the branch.red * table suffix . If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined. changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. If so. the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value.

green * schedule/thickness .green * pressure rating .red * table suffix . Refer to the section entitled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order of significance of reported problems. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points.red * pressure rating . For example. that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end. The component number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or an instrument.green * table suffix . the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. which are designated as having red connect point properties.red * schedule/thickness . Revision Manager The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty or instrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping specialties and instruments. The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping specialty or instrument which has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data. That data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. i. Proposed RDB Changes Report Piping Specialties and Instruments The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading piping specialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database._ _______________ changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. instrument_comp_no is used for instruments. if any. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum: 557 . Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when the specification data and the geometry data is defined by the user (not defined in the Reference Database). The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect point properties.red * physical data id * model code * modifier * geometric industry standard weight code fabrication category materials grade 15. If a value is defined in the Reference Database. and piping_comp_no is used for piping specialties.e. either the specification data from the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from another connect point. * end preparation . If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined.green * end preparation .

Report Path. 3. Piping Design Area — process the selected piping design areas. and Report Name for the summary report output or use the default location and name. The system activates the Proposed RDB Changes form. You can key in changes to the Report Node. 2. Operating Sequence 1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 the application of the schedule/override in the model. Models — process the selected models within a selected design area. changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. Select the extent of the project to be processed. changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. Select the Proposed RDB Changes Report option. changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database. changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database. 558 . Project — process all piping models for the entire project.

_ _______________ The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management Data of the Report Manager.pcs . It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. Restart or Exit 5. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete. The proposed RDB changes report file has an extension of . If you will be printing the summary report. If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report. Print/Save. select a queue from the pick list. Revision Manager 559 . Accept to Submit Job. The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. Proposed RDB Changes Report Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request. Select Accept to submit the request for processing. 6. 15. this report will also be printed. 4.pcs and is created in the model directory as <model_number>. or Save.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 560 .

16. the data problem that resulted may have persisted beyond that release. a problem existed in the Reference Data Manager. Steps 1.2 PDS release. Verify RDB Library The system activates the Reference Database Library Verification Utility form.2 PDS release. Although the software problem was corrected in the 4. both interactively and in the upgrade log. the system verifies the integrity of the binary tree structure within each of the reference data libraries. 561 . double-click on this icon to activate the command. As a final step within the project upgrade process. particularly if the library has not been compressed. In this event._ _______________ 16. a specific warning message will be reported. such that the binary tree structure in a reference data library (such as the Graphic Commodity Library) could be corrupted without the user immediately detecting any problems with that library. Verify RDB Library Verify RDB Library For releases prior to the 4. you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library. The Verify RDB Library utility has been provided to allow the capability to verify the integrity of the binary tree structure on demand. Execute the command by double-clicking on the Verify RDB Library icon in the PD_Shell program group. and prompts you to select the appropriate project number from the list. If an error is detected. The Verify RDB Library icon is located in the PD_Shell program group on systems upon which the PD_Data software has been loaded locally.

the system returns a message similar to the one shown below: 562 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2. When processing is complete. The system begins the verification process and displays the Verifying RDB Library Files message. Select the desired project number. then select the Verify Reference Database Library command.

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l header number keys = 2877 tree number keys = 2877 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618lgbom.t header number keys = 110 tree number keys = 110 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.l Empty file.l.t header number keys = 234 tree number keys = 234 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb. .l. .l header number keys = 1509 tree number keys = 1509 Verify RDB Library 16.l header number keys = 2629 tree number keys = 2629 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618spbom._ _______________ A typical output file has been excerpted below.l. No errors were found in this example.l header number keys = 110 tree number keys = 110 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.l header number keys = 234 tree number keys = 234 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.r header number keys = 234 tree number keys = 234 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618shbom.l header number keys = 217 tree number keys = 217 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.l. no keys.l header number keys = 4162 tree number keys = 4162 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note. Counting implied keys for code2000 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618label. Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note. Verify RDB Library 563 .t header number keys = 65 tree number keys = 65 Counting implied keys for code31 Counting implied keys for code35 Counting implied keys for code36 Counting implied keys for code37 Counting implied keys for code50 Counting implied keys for code69 Counting implied keys for code125 .

t header number keys = 1509 tree number keys = 1509 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.t header number keys = 4820 tree number keys = 4820 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l.l header number keys = 4820 tree number keys = 4820 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.r header number keys = 4820 tree number keys = 4820 Total files with errors : 0 564 .l.l._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.

msg — error and warning messages pdsmp. pdsmc._ _______________ Appendix A: Reference Data Manager Error Messages Appendix A Reference Data Manager Error Messages The PDS 3D products share common message files contained in the win32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory.msg — prompts and messages pdsms.msg — status messages. Error Messages 565 .msg — command field messages pdsme. A.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 566 .

The data contained within this appendix is for informational purposes only and may not exactly match the codelists delivered with the product. Codelists 567 . Subject CL31 CL35 CL36 CL37 CL50 CL69 CL125 CL130 CL145 CL148 CL160 CL180 CL190 CL200 CL210 CL220 CL230 CL330 CL332 CL340 CL360 CL365 CL366 CL380 CL390 CL400 CL420 CL425 CL430 CL499 CL530 CL550 CL570 CL572 CL575 Description Object Types for Orthographic Drawings Approval Status Structural Approval Status HVAC Approval Status Hold Status Equipment Divisions/Form Code Fluid Code/Connector Type Construction Status Materials Grade Piping Materials Class Description Responsibility Fabrication Category Coating Requirements Heat Tracing Requirements Heat Tracing Media Insulation Purpose Cleaning Requirements CP Type/Termination/Preparation Schedule/Thickness Override Safety Classification Stress Analysis Requirements Reporting Requirements Requirement to Reconstruct Piping Component Type Action Option Piping Component Type/Source Piping/Tubing Type Instrument Component Type/Source Piping Notes Accessory/Item Type Operator/Actuator Type Design Standard Wall Thickness Equation Geometry Standard Page 572 573 573 573 574 574 574 578 578 603 611 611 611 612 612 613 613 613 616 618 618 618 618 618 625 625 631 632 632 632 634 634 635 636 636 B._ _______________ Appendix B: Codelists Appendix B Codelists This section details the codelists used in PDS.

Green Table Suffix/End Standard ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 CL576 CL577 CL578 CL990 CL999 CL1010 CL1028 CL1056 CL1064 CL1074 CL1100 CL1162 CL1201 CL1202 CL1203 CL1204 CL1205 CL1207 CL1208 CL1209 CL1310 CL1312 CL1410 CL1605 CL1610 CL1620 CL1630 CL1710 CL1720 CL1900 CL2000 Table Suffix/End Standard .Red Weight Code Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms Standard Note Title Area Units Mass Units Temperature Units Pressure Units Density Units Weld Type Force Units Drawing Scale Drawing Size Interference Manager Approval Status Interference Clash Type Interference Manager Action Interference Manager Approval Method Clash Checking Option Clash Checking Volume Filter Option Report Source Report Type Design Review Type Model Status Force Units for FrameWorks Plus Drawing View Direction Drawing View Composition Status Document Source Document Type Isometric Drawing Type PD_Draw Document Type 647 650 654 656 656 657 658 658 658 659 659 659 659 660 660 660 660 661 661 661 661 661 662 662 662 662 662 662 663 665 666 568 .

_ _______________ Appendix B: General Comments B. the maximum number of entries that may be expected for a specific codelist set is shown in parenthesis following the name of the codelist set. The values stored in the codelist sets will exclude this bracketed information from the codelist descriptions. cannot revise a codelist set from a work session. 569 . terminology and language.2 Comments Specific to Units of Measure Codelist Sets The PDS system of units is derived from the 1980 Edition of API-2564. however. A task user. This has the advantage of resulting in the best organized set of codelisted definitions. This will minimize possible conflicts assigned numbers but will require compiling of the codelists and of the associated databases. the total compressed length of a label part can not exceed 36 characters. The net length of a codelist entry cannot exceed 50 characters. Increase the maximum number of entries allowed for the codelist set and make additions to it in the range of extended numbers.1 General Comments Codelist sets in this document define the values for all codelisted attributes used in the PDS Piping Task which are specific to US plant design practices. Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards. You can add. The disadvantage is that numbers added by the User may conflict with numbers added in future versions of software. In listings that follow. The formats of specification type reports for the Instrument Task require that applicable codelist descriptions do not exceed 25 characters. Codelists B. Other considerations may. Chapter 15 "Guidelines for the Use of the International System of Units (SI) in the Petroleum and Allied Industries". Revisions to a codelist set. require that a shorter description be made. however. two approaches are possible: Make the modifications within the range of codelist numbers defined in the codelist library delivered with the PDS software. can only be made in the General RDB or Standard Note Library. B. Values enclosed in brackets [ ] in pages that follow represent descriptive information. For PDS users that wish to modify codelist files delivered with the PDS software to reflect their own practices. For example: For the P&ID Task. delete or revise codelist sets to reflect your own practices.

All conversion factors are taken or derived from API Publication 2564. For example.0304. summation may also be required to effect the desired conversion. For example.290 304 x 10ˆ2 = 929. If a conversion factor happens to end in several zeros but does not have an asterisk. In some cases. 3.290 304 E+02 = 9. such as temperature. Similarly.048 000 E-01 = 3. An asterisk (*) indicates that all following digits are zeros. Groups of three digits are separated by spaces with no commas. to convert a mass measurement in "lb" to "kg". 9. in codelist set 1028. codelist number 1 in codelist set 1028 refers to the "lb" units of measure. Codelist set This is the number of the codelist set that identifies a specific quantity. 570 .535 924 E-01. This code is not explicitly shown in the tables. Any of these names can be used to define the quantity.048 000 x 10ˆ-1 = 0._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 The tables in this document include the following information. codelist set 1028 includes the units of measure that apply to the quantity "mass". For example. multiply the value in the former units by the conversion factor. 4. Two sets of columns define the conversion of variables expressed in the units shown under the column "Unit Name" to the unit shown under the column "Destination Unit". Those shown to fewer than six significant figures are limited by the precision of the known or determinable value of a physical property. reference to unit type 28 refers to "mass". Entries in this column define the quantity whose units of measure are being defined. This is the number that defines a specific unit of measure within a codelist set. For example.3048000. any subsequent digits would not necessarily be zeros. For example. The column captioned Factor provides the actual conversion factor to be used for the conversion. The unit type equals the number of the codelist set minus 1000. The following explanations apply: Codelist no Unit type Quantity name Unit name: Conversion to destination unit: The column captioned Destination Unit defines the unit to which the unit included under the column Unit Name will be converted using the value shown under the column Factor. Most of the conversion factors are shown to six or seven significant figures. such as the density of distilled water at a reference temperature. Several unit names are provided for a given codelist set.

x applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the column captioned Unit Name. The conversion is done per the equation: B. Nomenclature: Symbol bar degC g kg m min Pa t Name bar degree Celsius gram kilogram metre minute pascal metric ton Quantity pressure temperature mass mass length time pressure mass 571 . y applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the first line of the column captioned Unit Name. A is the factor in the column captioned Factor A. The blank space is used to silence the units in the formation of labels. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. a blank space is provided as the first character in the unit name. In all codelist sets for units. Codelists In editing any of the codelist sets for units. B is the factor in the column captioned Factor B._ _______________ Appendix B: Conversion to first unit in CL: y= A + Bx where. The distinction between upper case and lower case symbols is very important. For example: K= k= M= m= m= N= n= kelvin kilo= 10ˆ3 mega= 10ˆ6 milli= 10ˆ-3 (when m is used as a prefix) metre (when m is used alone) newton nano= 10ˆ-9 General Comments Two sets of columns define the conversion of the units shown under the column Unit Name to the first unit shown in that column.

ENT’ MAX=999 0031.dwg and labels. and/or deleted by the user. 101 110 120 124 128 130 135 140 = = = = = = = = ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment Group’ Nozzle’ Platform’ Handrail’ Penetration’ Stair’ Ladder’ Davit’ Piping 205 207 210 215 220 = = = = = Category Object Types (200-249) ’Piping ’Pipe’ ’Piping ’Piping ’Piping Segment’ Component’ Specialty’ Support’ Instrument Category Object Types (250-279) 250 252 255 260 = = = = ’Control Valves and Regulators’ ’Relief Devices’ ’Other In-Line Instruments’ ’Off-Line Instruments’ HVAC Category Object Types (359-399) 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC Coil Data’ Connector Data’ Damper Data’ Diffuser Data’ Duct Data’ DEquipment Data’ Filter Data’ Fitting Data’ Grille Data’ Hood Data’ Humidifier Data’ Register Data’ Terminal Devices’ 572 . If modified the user must also revise the contents of the file eqp_object.xxx (where xxx is the drawing type number defined in CL2000 ) in the project directory. Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40) Equipment Category Object Types (100-149) The Range of 100-149 for the equipment category is divided into two parts: 101-110 These entries are reserved by INTERGRAPH and may not be changed by the user. 111-149 Codelist entries in this range may be created._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 CL31. revised. Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40) C31 DF=’WRK_DD_CODLST:CODE0031.

0= 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = ’New’ ’Existing’ ’Future’ ’User 1’ ’User 2’ CL37. Codelists NOTE: In editing this codelist set. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 2 3 4 = = = = ’New’ ’Existing’ ’Dismantle’ ’Future’ 573 . Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown._ _______________ Appendix B: EERWAY Category Object Types (300-306) 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 = = = = = = = = = ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY Connect Point’ OneLine’ Straight’ Fitting’ Space Envelope’ To_Equipment’ To_Support’ Eqp Panel’ Duct Bank’ General Comments CL35. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values." 2 reserved for ’approved’ 3 reserved for ’not approved’ 11-20 reserved for ’approved’ 21-30 reserved for ’not approved’ 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’A =Approved’ 3 = ’NA=Not approved’ CL36. HVAC Approval Status (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. The following are the requirements in use of the "approval status. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown. other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Structural Approval Status (15) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. Approval Status (10) B.

Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = = = = = = = = ’A= ’B= ’C= ’D= ’E= ’F= ’H= ’I= All’ Vessels’ Heat transfer’ Mechanical’ Civil/Structural’ Piping’ Electrical’ Other’ CL125. other data displays require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. do not change the meaning of codelist value "All". other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Fluid Code/Connector Type (999) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. 1 = ’NH=Not held’ 2 = ’H =Hold’ CL69. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 = [Blank] 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 40 71 75 79 83 87 91 100 101 103 105 107 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’A’ ’AC’ ’AE’ ’AI’ ’AO’ ’AP’ ’APU’ ’AR’ ’AS’ ’AZ’ ’C’ ’CA’ ’CE’ ’CF’ ’CLP’ ’CPR’ ’CZ’ ’D’ ’DC’ ’DCH’ ’DGR’ [Air] [Combustion air] [Aeration air] [Instrument air] [Operational air] [Plant air] [Purge air] [Regeneration air] [Starting air] [Other air] [Refrigerant] [Ammonia refrigerant] [Ethylene refrigerant] [Freon refrigerant] [LP refrigerant] [Propylene refrigerant] [Other refrigerant] [Sewer] [Caustic sewer] [Chemical sewer] [Drain to grade] 574 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 CL50. Equipment Divisions/Form Code (99) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. Labels always require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Hold Status (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values 950-999.

oily water or sanitary sewer] [Storm or oily water sewer] [Other sewer] [Foam] [Gas] [Carbon dioxide gas] [Chlorine gas] [Chlorination gas] [Fuel gas] [Flue gas] [Hydrogen gas] [Hydrogen sulphide gas] [Inert gas] [LP gas] [Make-up gas] [Natural gas] [Nitrogen gas] [Oxygen gas] [Purge gas] [Reformed gas] [Synthesis gas] [Sour gas] [Sweet gas] [Waste gas [Other gas] [Solvent] [Glycol] [Furfural] [Dewaxing] [Other solvent] [Chemical] [Chemical injection] [Anhydrous ammonia] [Aluminum chloride] [Aqueous ammonia] [0-50% caustic solution] [Dry chlorine] [Ethylene oxide] [Hydrogen chloride] [Inhibitor A] [Inhibitor B] [Lube oil additives] [Methyl alcohol] [Sulfur] [Liquid sulfur] [Other chemical] General Comments 161 = ’F’ 191 194 197 198 200 203 206 209 212 215 218 221 224 227 230 233 236 239 242 245 250 341 346 351 356 370 401 402 405 409 413 417 421 425 429 433 434 440 444 448 452 460 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’G’ ’GCD’ ’GCL’ ’GCN’ ’GF’ ’GG’ ’GH’ ’GHS’ ’GI’ ’GLP’ ’GM’ ’GN’ ’GNI’ ’GOX’ ’GP’ ’GR’ ’GS’ ’GSO’ ’GSW’ ’GW’ ’GZ’ ’K’ ’KG’ ’KF’ ’KD’ ’KZ’ ’M’ [Blank] ’MAA’ ’MAC’ ’MAW’ ’MC5’ ’MCL’ ’MEO’ ’MHC’ ’MIA’ ’MIB’ ’MLA’ ’MMA’ ’MS’ ’MSL’ ’MZ’ B._ _______________ Appendix B: 109 111 113 115 117 119 121 123 125 127 128 130 = = = = = = = = = = = = ’DOW’ ’DP’ ’DPH’ ’DS’ ’DSP’ ’DST’ ’DW’ ’DWS’ ’DX’ [Blank] [Blank] ’DZ’ [Oily water sewer] [Process sewer] [Heated process sewer] [Sanitary sewer] [Press sanitary sewer] [Storm sewer] [Clean water sewer] [Sour water sewer] [Acid sewer] [Storm. Codelists 575 .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 491 493 495 497 499 500 503 505 507 509 511 513 515 520 521 522 524 527 530 533 536 539 542 545 550 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’O’ ’OD’ ’ODS’ ’OF’ ’OFR’ ’OFS’ ’OH’ ’OL’ ’OLS’ ’OS’ ’OSO’ ’OSW’ ’OWS’ ’OZ’ ’P’ [Blank] ’PA’ ’PAS’ ’PB’ ’PH’ ’PHH’ ’PHW’ ’PL’ ’PS’ ’PZ’ [Oil] [Diesel fuel oil] [Dry slop oil] [Flushing oil] [Fuel oil return] [Fuel oil supply] [Hydraulic oil] [Lube] [Lube and seal oil] [Seal oil] [Sour oil] [Sweet oil] [Wet slop oil] [Other oil] [Process] [Special process] [Process w/ rich/lean amine] [Process w/ severe amine] [Process w/ benzene] [Process w/ H2] [Process w/ H2 & H2S] [Process w/ aqueous H2S] [Low temperature process] [Process w/ S] [Other process] [Relief to atmosphere] [Relief to flare] [Other relief] [Steam] [Boiler feed water or steam] [Boiler feed water. steam or condensate] [Steam or condensate] [Extr press CL1500 steam] [High press CL900 steam] [Low press CL150 steam] [Med press CL600 steam] [Nor press CL300 steam] [Superheated steam] [Vacuum steam] [Exhaust CL125 steam] [Other steam] [Steam condensate] [Atmospheric CL125 steam condensate] [Extr press CL1500 steam condensate] [High press CL900 steam condensate] [Low press CL150 steam condensate] [Med press CL600 steam condensate] [Nor press CL300 steam condensate] [Vacuum steam condensate] [Other steam condensate] [Vent] [Vent to atmosphere] [Vent to flare] [Other vent] 581 = ’RA’ 591 = ’RF’ 610 = ’RZ’ 611 613 615 617 621 623 625 627 629 631 633 635 640 641 643 645 647 649 651 653 655 660 721 731 741 750 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’S’ [Blank] [Blank] [Blank] ’SE’ ’SH’ ’SL’ ’SM’ ’SN’ ’SS’ ’SV’ ’SX’ ’SZ’ ’SC’ ’SCA’ ’SCE’ ’SCH’ ’SCL’ ’SCM’ ’SCN’ ’SCV’ ’SCZ’ ’V’ ’VA’ ’VF’ ’VZ’ 576 .

_ _______________ Appendix B: 751 753 755 757 759 761 763 764 765 767 768 771 772 773 775 777 779 781 783 785 786 789 791 792 795 797 798 801 803 805 807 809 811 812 815 817 819 830 831 835 839 843 847 851 853 860 861 865 869 873 877 881 890 950 951 953 955 956 960 961 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’W’ ’WB’ ’WBA’ ’WBB’ ’WC’ [Blank] ’WCH’ ’WCL’ ’WCF’ ’WCR’ ’WCS’ ’WPT’ [Blank] ’WDM’ ’WFA’ ’WFI’ ’WFU’ ’WG’ ’WGL’ ’WGR’ ’WGS’ ’WH’ ’WHR’ ’WHS’ ’WI’ ’WIR’ ’WIS’ ’WK’ ’WN’ ’WP’ ’WR’ ’WS’ ’WSR’ ’WSS’ ’WT’ ’WU’ ’WW’ ’WZ’ ’X’ ’XH’ ’XN’ ’XSD’ ’XS3’ ’XS8’ ’XS9’ ’XZ’ ’Y’ ’YA’ ’YG’ ’YH’ ’YL’ ’YW’ ’YZ’ ’ODPC’ ’OUPC’ ’UODPC’ ’ODIC’ ’OUIC’ ’OVPC’ ’OSPC’ [Water] [Boiler feed water] [Ballast water] [Water boiler blowdown] [Cooling water] [Cooling or utility water] [Chlorinated water] [Chlorine in water] [Clarified water] [Cooling water return] [Cooling water supply] [Potable water] [Potable water or instrument air] [Demineralized water] [Aboveground fire water] [Filtered water] [Underground fire water] [Glycol water] [Gland water] [Glycol water return] [Glycol water supply] [Hot water] [Hot water return] [Hot water supply] [Chilled water] [Chilled water return] [Chilled water supply] [Treated water] [Brine water] [Process water] [Raw water] [Sea water] [Sea water return] [Sea water supply] [Test water] [Utility water] [Waste water] [Other water] [Acid] [Hydrofluoric acid] [Nitric acid] [Dilute sulfuric acid] [30% sulfuric acid] [75-80% sulfuric acid] [93-97% sulfuric acid] [Other acid] [Catalyst] [Catalyst addition] [General catalyst] [Catalyst w/ H2] [Catalyst lift lines] [Catalyst withdrawal lines] [Other catalyst] [Off-dwg piping connectors] [Off-unit piping connectors] [Utility off-dwg piping connectors] [Off-dwg instr connectors] [Off-unit instr connectors] [Off-vol piping connectors] [Off-site piping connectors] General Comments B. Codelists 577 .

In addition. 10 = 12 = 15 = 16 = 17 = 18 = 19 = 20 = 21 = 22 = 23 = 25 = 30 = 31 = 32 = 35 = 40 = 41 = 42 = 43 = 44 = 45 = 46 = 47 = 48 = 55 = 60 = 62 = 70 = 75 = 76 = 10-99 ’A47-32510’ ’A47-35018’ ’A48-20’ ’A48-25’ ’A48-30’ ’A48-35’ ’A48-40’ ’A48-45’ ’A48-50’ ’A48-55’ ’A48-60’ ’A74’ ’A126-A’ ’A126-B’ ’A126-C’ ’A197’ ’A278-20’ ’A278-25’ ’A278-30’ ’A278-35’ ’A278-40’ ’A278-50’ ’A278-60’ ’A278-70’ ’A278-80’ ’A338’ ’A395-Ductile’ ’A395-Ferritic Ductile’ ’A571’ ’AWWA-C110-Ductile’ ’AWWA-C151-Ductile’ 578 . codelist values 4-7 must imply an "existing" construction status. Construction Status (15) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. 3 and 8. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values 2. 1 = [Blank] Irons. Materials Grade (4500) NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown. other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 999 = ’TERM’ [Terminator piping connector] CL130. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = = = = = = = = [Blank] ’New’ ’Existing’ ’Revamp’ ’Relocate’ ’Temporary’ ’Dismantle’ ’Future’ CL145. Codelist values 9-15 inherit the color symbology from the construction status of the item previously placed in the model.

Codelists 579 . 100-499 ’API-5L-A’ ’API-5L-A25’ ’API-5L-B’ ’API-5L-X42’ ’API-5L-X46’ ’API-5L-X52’ ’API-5L-X65’ ’A36’ ’A53-A’ ’A53-B’ ’A53-Type F’ ’A105’ ’A106-A’ ’A106-B’ ’A106-C’ ’A120’ ’A134-A36’ ’A134-A283-A’ ’A134-A283-B’ ’A134-A283-C’ ’A134-A283-D’ ’A134-A285-A’ ’A134-A285-B’ ’A134-A285-C’ ’A134-A570-30’ ’A134-A570-33’ ’A134-A570-36’ ’A134-A570-40’ ’A134-A570-45’ ’A134-A570-50’ ’A135-A’ ’A135-B’ ’A139-A’ ’A139-B’ ’A139-C’ ’A139-D’ ’A139-E’ ’A179’ ’A181-CL60’ ’A181-CL70’ ’A211-A570-30’ ’A211-A570-33’ ’A211-A570-36’ ’A211-A570-40’ ’A211-A570-45’ ’A211-A570-50’ ’A216-WCA’ ’A216-WCB’ ’A216-WCC’ ’A234-WPB’ ’A234-WPC’ ’A283-A’ ’A283-B’ ’A283-C’ ’A283-D’ ’A285-A’ ’A285-B’ ’A285-C’ ’A333-1’ ’A333-6’ ’A334-1’ General Comments B._ _______________ Appendix B: Carbon 110 = 114 = 116 = 118 = 120 = 122 = 124 = 135 = 140 = 142 = 144 = 150 = 160 = 162 = 164 = 170 = 180 = 182 = 183 = 184 = 185 = 186 = 187 = 188 = 190 = 191 = 192 = 193 = 194 = 195 = 200 = 202 = 210 = 212 = 214 = 216 = 218 = 220 = 230 = 234 = 240 = 241 = 242 = 243 = 244 = 245 = 250 = 252 = 254 = 264 = 266 = 270 = 272 = 274 = 276 = 280 = 282 = 284 = 290 = 293 = 295 = Steels.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 298 300 302 305 310 312 320 321 322 323 325 327 334 340 342 344 346 350 352 354 356 360 361 362 363 364 365 370 372 375 380 390 392 394 396 398 400 402 404 406 408 410 420 422 424 426 428 430 432 434 436 438 440 442 444 446 448 460 464 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’A334-6’ ’A350-LF1’ ’A350-LF2’ ’A352-LCB’ ’A369-FPA’ ’A369-FPB’ ’A381-Y35’ ’A381-Y42’ ’A381-Y46’ ’A381-Y48’ ’A381-Y50’ ’A381-Y52’ ’A420-WPL6’ ’A515-55’ ’A515-60’ ’A515-65’ ’A515-70’ ’A516-55’ ’A516-60’ ’A516-65’ ’A516-70’ ’A520-30’ ’A520-33’ ’A520-36’ ’A520-40’ ’A520-45’ ’A520-50’ ’A524-I’ ’A524-II’ ’A537-CL1’ ’A587’ ’A671-CA55’ ’A671-CB60’ ’A671-CB65’ ’A671-CB70’ ’A671-CC60’ ’A671-CC65’ ’A671-CC70’ ’A671-CD70’ ’A671-CE55’ ’A671-CE60’ ’A671-CK75’ ’A672-A45’ ’A672-A50’ ’A672-A55’ ’A672-B55’ ’A672-B60’ ’A672-B65’ ’A672-B70’ ’A672-C55’ ’A672-C60’ ’A672-C65’ ’A672-C70’ ’A672-D70’ ’A672-E55’ ’A672-E60’ ’A672-N75’ ’A691-CMS75’ ’A691-CMSH70’ 580 .

3’ 521 = ’A182-F6a Cl.1’ 519 = ’A182-F6a Cl. 500-899 510 = ’A182-F1’ 512 = ’A182-F2’ 514 = ’A182-F5’ 516 = ’A182-F5a’ 518 = ’A182-F6a Cl.4’ 523 = ’A182-F6b’ 524 = ’A182-F7’ 526 = ’A182-F9’ 528 = ’A182-F11’ 530 = ’A182-F12’ 532 = ’A182-F21’ 534 = ’A182-F22’ 536 = ’A182-F22a’ 540 = ’A202-A’ 542 = ’A202-B’ 550 = ’A203-A’ 552 = ’A203-B’ 554 = ’A203-D’ 556 = ’A203-E’ 560 = ’A204-A’ 562 = ’A204-B’ 564 = ’A204-C’ 576 = ’A217-C5’ 578 = ’A217-C12’ 580 = ’A217-CA15’ 582 = ’A217-WC1’ 584 = ’A217-WC4’ 586 = ’A217-WC5’ 588 = ’A217-WC6’ 590 = ’A217-WC9’ 600 = ’A225-A’ 602 = ’A225-B’ 610 = ’A234-WP1’ 614 = ’A234-WP5’ 616 = ’A234-WP7’ 618 = ’A234-WP9’ 620 = ’A234-WP11’ 622 = ’A234-WP12’ 624 = ’A234-WP22’ 630 = ’A302-A’ 632 = ’A302-B’ 634 = ’A302-C’ 636 = ’A302-D’ 644 = ’A333-3’ 646 = ’A333-4’ 648 = ’A333-7’ 650 = ’A333-8’ 652 = ’A333-9’ 664 = ’A334-3’ 666 = ’A334-7’ 668 = ’A334-8’ 670 = ’A334-9’ 680 = ’A335-P1’ 682 = ’A335-P2’ 684 = ’A335-P5’ 686 = ’A335-P5b’ 687 = ’A335-P5c’ 690 = ’A335-P7’ General Comments B. Codelists 581 ._ _______________ Appendix B: Low and Intermediate Alloy Steels.2’ 520 = ’A182-F6a Cl.

2’ ’A387-21 Cl.1’ ’A387-11 Cl.2’ ’A420-WPL3’ ’A420-WPL8’ ’A426-CP1’ ’A426-CP2’ ’A426-CP5’ ’A426-CP5b’ ’A426-CP7’ ’A426-CP9’ ’A426-CP11’ ’A426-CP12’ ’A426-CP15’ ’A426-CPCA15’ ’A426-CP21’ ’A426-CP22’ ’A553-Type I’ ’A553-Type II’ ’A645’ ’A671-CF70’ ’A671-CF71’ ’A672-L65’ ’A672-L70’ ’A672-L75’ ’A691-CM65’ ’A691-CM70’ ’A691-CM75’ 582 .1’ ’A387-5 Cl.1’ ’A387-2 Cl.2’ ’A387-9 Cl._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 692 694 696 698 700 702 710 720 722 724 730 740 742 744 746 748 750 752 754 756 758 760 761 770 771 774 775 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 794 798 800 802 804 806 808 810 812 814 816 817 820 822 830 832 835 840 842 850 852 854 860 862 864 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’A335-P9’ ’A335-P11’ ’A335-P12’ ’A335-P15’ ’A335-P21’ ’A335-P22’ ’A350-LF3’ ’A352-LC1’ ’A352-LC2’ ’A352-LC3’ ’A353’ ’A369-FP1’ ’A369-FP2’ ’A369-FP3b’ ’A369-FP5’ ’A369-FP7’ ’A369-FP9’ ’A369-FP11’ ’A369-FP12’ ’A369-FP21’ ’A369-FP22’ ’A385-7 Cl.2’ ’A387-5 Cl.2’ ’A387-12 Cl.2’ ’A387-11 Cl.1’ ’A387-21 Cl.1’ ’A387-12 Cl.1’ ’A385-7 Cl.2’ ’A387-2 Cl.1’ ’A387-22 Cl.1’ ’A387-9 Cl.2’ ’A387-22 Cl.

Codelists 583 . 900-1324 920 = ’A167-301’ 922 = ’A167-302’ 923 = ’A167-302B’ 926 = ’A167-304’ 927 = ’A167-304L’ 930 = ’A167-305’ 932 = ’A167-308’ 934 = ’A167-309’ 935 = ’A167-309S’ 938 = ’A167-310’ 939 = ’A167-310S’ 942 = ’A167-316’ 943 = ’A167-316L’ 946 = ’A167-317’ 947 = ’A167-317L’ 950 = ’A167-321’ 952 = ’A167-347’ 954 = ’A167-348’ 960 = ’A182-F10’ 964 = ’A182-F304’ 965 = ’A182-F304H’ 966 = ’A182-F304L’ 968 = ’A182-F310’ 970 = ’A182-F316’ 971 = ’A182-F316H’ 972 = ’A182-F316L’ 974 = ’A182-F321’ 975 = ’A182-F321H’ 978 = ’A182-F347’ 979 = ’A182-F347H’ 982 = ’A182-F348’ 983 = ’A182-F348H’ 990 = ’A240-X8M’ 992 = ’A240-302’ 994 = ’A240-304’ 995 = ’A240-304L’ 996 = ’A240-304H’ 998 = ’A240-305’ 1000 = ’A240-309S’ 1004 = ’A240-310S’ 1006 = ’A240-316’ 1007 = ’A240-316L’ 1010 = ’A240-317’ 1011 = ’A240-317L’ 1014 = ’A240-321’ 1016 = ’A240-347’ 1018 = ’A240-348’ 1020 = ’A240-405’ 1022 = ’A240-410’ 1023 = ’A240-410S’ 1026 = ’A240-429’ 1028 = ’A240-430’ 1040 = ’A268-TP329’ General Comments B.25Cr’ ’A691-2.25Cr’ ’A691-3Cr’ ’A691-5Cr’ ’A691-9Cr’ Stainless Steels.5Cr’ ’A691-1Cr’ ’A691-1._ _______________ Appendix B: 866 868 870 872 874 876 878 = = = = = = = ’A691-0.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 1044 1046 1048 1050 1051 1054 1056 1060 1061 1064 1065 1066 1070 1071 1072 1074 1076 1078 1079 1080 1082 1084 1085 1088 1089 1092 1095 1100 1102 1104 1106 1108 1110 1112 1113 1114 1116 1118 1120 1122 1124 1126 1128 1130 1140 1141 1144 1146 1148 1149 1152 1154 1156 1160 1162 1163 1166 1167 1170 1171 1174 1175 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’A268-TP405’ ’A268-TP409’ ’A268-TP410’ ’A268-TP430’ ’A268-TP430Ti’ ’A268-TP443’ ’A268-TP446’ ’A269-TP304’ ’A269-TP304L’ ’A269-TP316’ ’A269-TP316L’ ’A270-TP316L’ ’A312-TP304’ ’A312-TP304H’ ’A312-TP304L ’A312-TP309’ ’A312-TP310’ ’A312-TP316’ ’A312-TP316H’ ’A312-TP316L’ ’A312-TP317’ ’A312-TP321’ ’A312-TP321H’ ’A312-TP347’ ’A312-TP347H’ ’A312-TP348’ ’A351-CA15’ ’A351-CF3’ ’A351-CF3A’ ’A351-CF3M’ ’A351-CF8’ ’A351-CF8A’ ’A351-CF8C’ ’A351-CF8M’ ’A351-CF10’ ’A351-CF10MC’ ’A351-CN7M’ ’A351-CH8’ ’A351-CH10’ ’A351-CH20’ ’A351-CK20’ ’A351-HK30’ ’A351-HK40’ ’A351-HT30’ ’A358-304’ ’A358-304L’ ’A358-309S’ ’A358-310S’ ’A358-316’ ’A358-316L’ ’A358-321’ ’A358-347’ ’A358-348’ ’A376-16-8-2H’ ’A376-TP304’ ’A376-TP304H’ ’A376-TP316’ ’A376-TP316H’ ’A376-TP321’ ’A376-TP321H’ ’A376-TP347’ ’A376-TP347H’ 584 .

light drwn’ ’B75 Cl. hrd drwn’ ’B75 Cl. annld’ ’B68 Cl.C12000.5-12’ ’B42 Cl. drwn. annld’ ’B75 Cl.C12000. drwn._ _______________ Appendix B: 1178 1179 1190 1191 1192 1194 1196 1198 1199 1200 1202 1204 1205 1206 1207 1210 1220 1222 1224 1226 1228 1230 1232 1234 1240 1241 1244 1245 1248 1249 1252 1253 1260 1262 1264 1266 1268 1270 1272 1280 1282 1284 1300 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’A376-TP348’ ’A376-TP348H’ ’A403-WP304’ ’A403-WP304H’ ’A403-WP304L’ ’A403-WP309’ ’A403-WP310’ ’A403-WP316’ ’A403-WP316H’ ’A403-WP316L’ ’A403-WP317’ ’A403-WP321’ ’A403-WP321H’ ’A403-WP347’ ’A403-WP347H’ ’A403-WP348’ ’A409-TP304’ ’A409-TP309’ ’A409-TP310’ ’A409-TP316’ ’A409-TP317’ ’A409-TP321’ ’A409-TP347’ ’A409-TP348’ ’A430-FP304’ ’A430-FP304H’ ’A430-FP316’ ’A430-FP316H’ ’A430-FP321’ ’A430-FP321H’ ’A430-FP347’ ’A430-FP347H’ ’A451-CHP10’ ’A451-CHP20’ ’A451-CPF8C’ ’A451-CPF8M’ ’A451-CPF10MC’ ’A451-CPH8’ ’A451-CPK20’ ’A452-TP304H’ ’A452-TP316H’ ’A452-TP347H’ ’ASME SA479-316L’ and Copper Alloys.C10200. NPD 2.C10200. 1325-1549 ’AISI-CDA Alloy 377’ ’B42 Cl.0625-2’ ’B42 Cl.5-12’ ’B42 Cl.C12200.C10200. NPD 2.C23000. NPD 2.C12000.C10200. annld’ ’B75 Cl.C12200. annld’ General Comments B.C12000. drwn.0625-2’ ’B42 Cl.C83600’ ’B68 Cl.0625-2’ ’B42 Cl.C92200’ ’B62 Cl. Codelists Copper 1325 = 1330 = 1331 = 1334 = 1335 = 1338 = 1339 = 1342 = 1346 = 1350 = 1354 = 1356 = 1358 = 1362 = 1363 = 1364 = 1368 = 585 . drwn. drwn.C10200. NPD 0.C12200.5-12’ ’B43 Cl. annld’ ’B61 Cl. NPD 0. annld’ ’B68 Cl. NPD 0.C10200. drwn.

C61400. annld’ ’B467 Cl.5in OD’ ’B467 Cl.C12000. annld.C86400’ ’B584 Cl.C90300’ ’B584 Cl.C70600. >4.C10200.5in OD’ ’B467 Cl. hrd drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C71500. annld’ ’B402 Cl. annld’ ’B152 Cl. <=4._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 1369 1370 1374 1375 1376 1380 1381 1382 1386 1387 1392 1393 1398 1399 1404 1408 1410 1412 1414 1416 1418 1422 1430 1432 1434 1436 1438 1440 1442 1450 1452 1456 1458 1462 1463 1466 1467 1472 1474 1476 1478 1480 1482 1484 1486 1488 1490 1492 1494 1496 1498 1500 1502 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’B75 Cl.C46400’ ’B283 Cl. drwn’ ’B88 Cl.C12000. hrd drwn’ ’B75 Cl. annld’ ’B75 Cl.C12200.C10200. annld’ ’B75 Cl.C10400.C86500’ ’B584 Cl.C97600’ ’B584 Cl. annld’ ’B152 Cl.C37700’ ’B283 Cl.C71500.C10700. annld’ ’B169 Cl.C95600’ ’B584 Cl. annld’ ’B88 Cl. annld’ ’B152 Cl.C86300’ ’B584 Cl. >4. light drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C95500’ ’B584 Cl.C10500.C14200. annld’ ’B88 Cl.C86200’ ’B584 Cl.C92300’ ’B584 Cl.C14200. annld’ ’B152 Cl.C70600.C12200. annld.C95300’ ’B584 Cl.C12200. <=5in OD’ ’B161-200 (N02200) annld. annld’ ’B152 Cl. annld. annld. annld’ ’B88 Cl.C12000.C63900’ ’B283 Cl.C48500’ ’B283 Cl.C14200.C71500.C71500. light drwn’ ’B88 Cl. annld’ ’B466 Cl. drwn’ ’B88 Cl. annld’ ’B466 Cl.C92200’ ’B584 Cl. soft’ ’B283 Cl.C10200.C97300’ ’B584 Cl. >5in OD’ Nickel 1560 = 1561 = 1564 = 1565 = 1568 = 1572 = 1573 = 586 . drwn’ ’B96 Cl. <=4.C11000’ ’B283 Cl.C86700’ ’B584 Cl.5in OD’ ’B467 Cl.C12200.C70600. hrd drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C12300.C90500’ ’B584 Cl. light drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C65500’ ’B283 Cl. annld’ ’B152 Cl.C12200.C95200’ ’B584 Cl.C70600.C67500’ ’B402 Cl.C12200.C12000.5in OD’ ’B584 Cl.C97800’ and Nickel Alloys 1550-1774 ’B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt annld’ ’B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt AR’ ’B160-200 (N02200) annld’ ’B160-200 (N02200) hot fin’ ’B160-201 annld’ ’B161-200 (N02200) annld.C65500.

>5in OD’ ’B161-201 (N02201) stress rlvd’ ’B162-200 (N02200) hot rolled plt annld’ ’B162-201 (N02201) hot rolled plt annld’ ’B162-201 (N02201) hot rolled plt AR’ ’B164-400 (N04400) annld forged’ ’B164-400 (N04400) hot fin’ ’B165-400 (N04400) annld. >5in OD’ ’B165-400 (N04400) stress rlvd’ ’B166-600 (N06600) annld’ ’B166-600 (N06600) hot fin’ ’B167-600 (N06600) cold drwn annld. <=5in OD’ ’B167-600 (N06600) cold drwn annld. >5in OD’ ’B167-600 (N06600) hot fin/hot fin annld. <=5in OD’ ’B167-600 (N06600) hot fin/hot fin annld. >5in OD’ ’B168-600 (N06600) hot rolled plt annld’ ’B168-600 (N06600) hot rolled plt AR’ ’B333-B (N10001) sln annld plt’ ’B333-B (N10001) sln annld sheet’ ’B333-B-2 (N10665) sln annld’ ’B335-B-2 (N10665) sln annld’ ’B366-WPHB (N10001)’ ’B366-WPHX (N06002)’ ’B366-WPN (N02200)’ ’B366-WPNC (N04400)’ ’B366-WPNC1 (N06600)’ ’B366-WPNL (N02201)’ ’B366-WPNLWX’ ’B366-WPNWX’ ’B407-800 (N08800) cold drwn annld’ ’B407-800 (N08800) hot fin/hot fin annld’ ’B407-800H (N08810) cold drwn sln annld/hot fin’ ’B443-625 (N06625) annld’ ’B444-625 (N06625) annld’ ’B446-625 (N06625) annld’ ’B464-20Cb (N08020) annld’ ’A494-CW-12M-1’ ’A494-CW-12M-2’ ’A494-CY-40’ ’B574-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’ ’B574-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’ ’B575-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’ ’B575-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’ ’B581-G (N06007) sln annld’ ’B582-G (N06007) sln annld’ ’B612-200 (N02200) hot rolled plt AR’ ’B619-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld’ ’B619-B (N10001) sln annld’ ’B619-B-2 (N10665) sln annld’ ’B619-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’ ’B619-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’ ’B619-G1 (N06007) sln annld’ ’B619-X (N06002) sln annld’ ’B620-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld’ ’B621-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld’ ’B622-B (N10001) sln annld’ ’B622-B-2 (N10655) sln annld’ ’B622-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’ ’B622-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’ B. <=5in OD’ ’B161-201 (N02201) annld. Codelists 587 ._ _______________ Appendix B: 1574 1576 1577 1578 1582 1586 1587 1590 1591 1594 1595 1596 1600 1601 1604 1605 1606 1607 1610 1611 1614 1615 1616 1620 1624 1626 1628 1630 1632 1634 1636 1638 1642 1643 1646 1648 1650 1652 1654 1656 1658 1660 1664 1666 1670 1672 1676 1680 1684 1688 1700 1702 1704 1706 1708 1710 1714 1718 1722 1724 1726 1728 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = General Comments ’B161-200 (N02200) stress rlvd’ ’B161-201 (N02201) annld. <=5in OD’ ’B165-400 (N04400) annld.

wld’ 1890 = ’B209-6061 temper T6’ 1892 = ’B209-6061 temper T6._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 1730 = ’B622-G (N06007) sln annld’ 1732 = ’B622-X (N06002) sln annld’ Aluminum Alloys 1775-2299 1780 = ’B26-356. wld’ 1894 = ’B209-6061 temper T651’ 1896 = ’B209-Alclad 3003 temper 0’ 1898 = ’B209-Alclad 3003 temper H12’ 588 .0 temper T71’ 1784 = ’B26-443.0 temper F’ 1790 = ’B209-1060 temper 0’ 1792 = ’B209-1060 temper H12’ 1794 = ’B209-1060 temper H14’ 1796 = ’B209-1060 temper H112’ 1798 = ’B209-1100 temper 0’ 1800 = ’B209-1100 temper H12’ 1802 = ’B209-1100 temper H14’ 1804 = ’B209-1100 temper H112’ 1806 = ’B209-3003 temper 0’ 1808 = ’B209-3003 temper H12’ 1810 = ’B209-3003 temper H14’ 1812 = ’B209-3003 temper H112’ 1814 = ’B209-3004 temper 0’ 1816 = ’B209-3004 temper H32’ 1818 = ’B209-3004 temper H34’ 1820 = ’B209-3004 temper H112’ 1822 = ’B209-5050 temper 0’ 1824 = ’B209-5050 temper H32’ 1826 = ’B209-5050 temper H34’ 1828 = ’B209-5050 temper H112’ 1830 = ’B209-5052 temper 0’ 1832 = ’B209-5052 temper H32’ 1834 = ’B209-5052 temper H34’ 1836 = ’B209-5052 temper H112’ 1838 = ’B209-5652 temper 0’ 1840 = ’B209-5652 temper H32’ 1842 = ’B209-5652 temper H34’ 1844 = ’B209-5652 temper H112’ 1846 = ’B209-5083 temper 0’ 1848 = ’B209-5083 temper H321’ 1850 = ’B209-5086 temper 0’ 1852 = ’B209-5086 temper H32’ 1854 = ’B209-5086 temper H34’ 1856 = ’B209-5086 temper H112’ 1858 = ’B209-5154 temper 0’ 1860 = ’B209-5154 temper H32’ 1862 = ’B209-5154 temper H34’ 1864 = ’B209-5154 temper H112’ 1866 = ’B209-5254 temper 0’ 1868 = ’B209-5254 temper H32’ 1870 = ’B209-5254 temper H34’ 1872 = ’B209-5254 temper H112’ 1874 = ’B209-5454 temper 0’ 1876 = ’B209-5454 temper H32’ 1878 = ’B209-5454 temper H34’ 1880 = ’B209-5454 temper H112’ 1882 = ’B209-5456 temper 0’ 1884 = ’B209-5456 temper H321’ 1886 = ’B209-6061 temper T4’ 1888 = ’B209-6061 temper T4.0 temper T6’ 1782 = ’B26-356.

wld’ T6’ T6._ _______________ Appendix B: 1900 1902 1904 1906 1908 1910 1912 1914 1916 1918 1920 1922 1930 1932 1934 1936 1938 1940 1942 1944 1946 1948 1950 1952 1954 1956 1958 1960 1962 1964 1966 1968 1970 1972 1974 1976 1978 1980 1982 1984 1986 1988 1990 1992 1994 2010 2012 2014 2016 2018 2020 2022 2024 2026 2028 2030 2032 2034 2036 2038 2040 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad ’B209-Alclad 3003 3003 3004 3004 3004 3004 6061 6061 6061 6061 6061 6061 temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper temper H14’ H112’ 0’ H32’ H34’ H112’ T4’ T4. wld’ T451’ T651’ General Comments ’B210-1060 temper ’B210-1060 temper ’B210-1060 temper ’B210-3003 temper ’B210-3003 temper ’B210-3003 temper ’B210-3003 temper ’B210-5052 temper ’B210-5052 temper ’B210-5052 temper ’B210-5083 temper ’B210-5083 temper ’B210-5086 temper ’B210-5086 temper ’B210-5086 temper ’B210-5086 temper ’B210-5154 temper ’B210-5154 temper ’B210-5456 temper ’B210-5456 temper ’B210-6061 temper ’B210-6061 temper ’B210-6061 temper ’B210-6061 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-Alclad 3002 ’B210-Alclad 3003 ’B210-Alclad 3003 ’B210-Alclad 3002 ’B221-1060 temper ’B221-1060 temper ’B221-1100 temper ’B221-1100 temper ’B221-3003 temper ’B221-3003 temper ’B221-5052 temper ’B221-5053 temper ’B221-5086 temper ’B221-5154 temper ’B221-5454 temper ’B221-5456 temper ’B221-6061 temper ’B221-6061 temper ’B221-6061 temper ’B221-6061 temper 0’ H14’ H112’ 0’ H14’ H18’ H112’ 0’ H32’ H34’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H32’ H34’ H112’ 0’ H34’ 0’ H112’ T4’ T4. wld’ B. wld’ T6’ T6. wld’ T6’ T6. wld’ T5. wld’ temper 0’ temper H14’ temper H18’ temper H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ 0’ 0’ 0’ 0’ 0’ T4’ T4. Codelists 589 . wld’ T4’ T4. wld’ T6’ T6.

wld’ T4’ T4. wld’ T6. wld’ temper 0’ temper H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H18’ H112’ 0’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ T4’ T4. wld’ T6. wld’ T5’ T5. <NPD 1’ T6. =>NPD 1’ T6. wld’ 0’ H112’ H112. wld’ T5’ T5. wld’ T4’ T4. =>NPD 1’ T6. wld’ T6’ T6. wld’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H18’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ T4’ T4. <NPD 1’ T6. wld’ T6’ T6. wld’ temper 0’ temper H112’ H112’ H112. wld’ 590 . wld’ T6’ T6._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 2042 2044 2046 2048 2050 2052 2054 2056 2070 2072 2074 2076 2078 2080 2082 2084 2086 2088 2090 2092 2094 2096 2098 2100 2102 2104 2106 2108 2110 2112 2114 2116 2118 2120 2122 2124 2126 2128 2130 2140 2142 2144 2146 2148 2150 2152 2160 2162 2164 2166 2168 2170 2172 2174 2176 2178 2180 2182 2184 2186 2188 2190 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-Alclad 3003 ’B221-Alclad 3003 ’B241-1060 temper ’B241-1060 temper ’B241-1100 temper ’B241-1100 temper ’B241-3003 temper ’B241-3003 temper ’B241-3003 temper ’B241-5052 temper ’B241-5083 temper ’B241-5083 temper ’B241-5086 temper ’B241-5086 temper ’B241-5454 temper ’B241-5454 temper ’B241-5456 temper ’B241-5456 temper ’B241-5462 temper ’B241-5462 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-Alclad 3003 ’B241-Alclad 3003 ’B247-3003 temper ’B247-3003 temper ’B247-5083 temper ’B247-5083 temper ’B247-5083 temper ’B247-6061 temper ’B247-6061 temper ’B345-1060 temper ’B345-1060 temper ’B345-3003 temper ’B345-3003 temper ’B345-3003 temper ’B345-5083 temper ’B345-5083 temper ’B345-5086 temper ’B345-5086 temper ’B345-6061 temper ’B345-6061 temper ’B345-6061 temper ’B345-6061 temper ’B345-6061 temper ’B345-6063 temper ’B345-6063 temper T4’ T4.

wld’ ’B361-WP6061 temper T6’ ’B361-WP6061 temper T6. 3079 = ’G79’ [Flat. wld’ ’B361-WP6063 temper T6’ ’B361-WP6063 temper T6. 3231 = ’G231’ [Flat. org fib. Codelists Other Materials 2300-2999 2310 = ’B337-1’ 2311 = ’B337-2’ 2313 = ’B337-3’ 2317 = ’B337-7’ 2320 = ’C76-CLIII’ 2325 = ’C443’ 2350 = ’C700’ 2400 = ’D1785-PVC1120’ 2402 = ’D2467-PVC1120’ 2440 = ’F439-CPVC4120’ 2442 = ’F441-CPVC4120’ Gaskets 3000-3999] 3051 = ’G51’ [Flat._ _______________ Appendix B: 2192 2194 2196 2198 2200 2202 2220 2222 2224 2226 2228 2230 2232 2234 2236 2238 2240 2242 2244 2246 2248 2250 2252 2254 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’B345-6063 temper T5’ ’B345-6063 temper T5. wld’ ’B345-Alclad 3002 temper 0’ ’B345-Alclad 3002 temper H112’ ’B361-WP1060 temper 0’ ’B361-WP1060 temper H112’ ’B361-WP1100 temper 0’ ’B361-WP1100 temper H112’ ’B361-WP3003 temper 0’ ’B361-WP3003 temper H112’ ’B361-WP5154 temper 0’ ’B361-WP5154 temper H112’ ’B361-WP6061 temper T4’ ’B361-WP6061 temper T4. 3111 = ’G111’ [Flat. nitrile binder] org fib. 3236 = ’G236’ [Flat. 3204 = ’G204’ [Flat. 3076 = ’G76’ [Flat. 3102 = ’G102’ [Flat. 3175 = ’G175’ [Flat. 3077 = ’G77’ [Flat. 3154 = ’G154’ [Flat. 3195 = ’G195’ [Flat. 3103 = ’G103’ [Flat. 3234 = ’G234’ [Flat. 3112 = ’G112’ [Flat. full face] Buna-N] Hypalon] Kel-F] neoprene] polyethylene] Teflon] Viton] soft-iron] 304] 321/347 591 . 3078 = ’G78’ [Flat. 3101 = ’G101’ [Flat. wld’ ’B345-6063 temper T6’ ’B345-6063 temper T6. nitrile binder. 3189 = ’G189’ [Flat. full face] graph] graph. full face] graph. 3210 = ’G210’ [Flat. wld’ ’B361-WP6063 temper T4’ ’B361-WP6063 temper T4. 3171 = ’G171’ [Flat. 304 wire mesh reinf] asb] asb. 3052 = ’G52’ [Flat. wld’ ’B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper 0’ ’B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper H112’ General Comments B. 304 tang reinf] graph. full face] asb. wire mesh reinf] blue-asb] blue-asb.

ring. jktd. 120 BHN max] 5Cr-0. graph-F] 321/347-J. ring. 140 BHN max] I-X-750 [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag ring._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 3241 = ’G241’ 3244 = ’G244’ 3246 = ’G246’ 3251 3256 3261 3262 3266 3267 3271 3272 3276 3277 3281 3282 3286 3306 3307 3311 3312 3316 3317 3321 3322 3326 3327 3331 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’G251’ ’G256’ ’G261’ ’G262’ ’G266’ ’G267’ ’G271’ ’G272’ ’G276’ ’G277’ ’G281’ ’G282’ ’G286’ ’G306’ ’G307’ ’G311’ ’G312’ ’G316’ ’G317’ ’G321’ ’G322’ ’G326’ ’G327’ ’G331’ [Corr.5Mo. ring. jktd. 304] [Corr. asb-chords [O [O [O [O [O [O [O [BX [BX [BX [BX [BX [BX [RX [RX [RX [RX [RX [RX ring. jktd. 304-J. 140 BHN max] I-X-750 soft-iron. ring. asb-F] 304-J. asb-chords] [Inlaid corr. ring. Buna-N] butyl] EDPM] nitrile] Saran] synthetic rubber] Viton soft-iron. jktd. asb-F] 321/347-J. jktd. graph-F] I600-J. ring. ring. ring. ring. 140 BHN max] 321. asb-F] I800-J. jktd. jktd. 140 BHN max] 347. ring. low-C-steel-J. 140 BHN max] 316. 140 BHN max] 321. ring. 130 BHN max] 304. graph-F] low-C-steel-J. jktd. 120 BHN max] 304. 140 BHN max] 316. asb-F] I800-J. graph-F] 304-J. jktd. jktd. jktd. ring. soft-iron-J. jktd. asb-F] I600-J. asb-chords] [Inlaid corr. graph-F] 321/347-J. 140 BHN max] 321. graph-F] I600-J. 120 BHN max] 304. jktd. jktd. ring. 90 BHN max] lo-C. ring. ring. jktd. 90 BHN max] lo-C. graph-F 3356 = ’G356’ 3361 = ’G361’ 3366 = ’G366’ 3403 3404 3408 3429 3435 3436 3441 3451 3452 3463 3466 3468 3473 3476 3477 3488 3491 3493 3498 3551 3552 3556 3563 3566 3568 3569 3573 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’G403’ ’G404’ ’G408’ ’G429’ ’G435’ ’G436’ ’G441’ ’G451’ ’G452’ ’G463’ ’G466’ ’G468’ ’G473’ ’G476’ ’G477’ ’G488’ ’G491’ ’G493’ ’G498’ ’G551’ ’G552’ ’G556’ ’G563’ ’G566’ ’G568’ ’G569’ ’G573’ [Inlaid corr. jktd. graph-F soft-iron-J. asb-F] low-C-steel-J. ring. ring. ring. jktd. jktd. 321/347 [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl jktd. graph-F] soft-iron-J. graph-F] soft-iron-J. 90 BHN max] lo-C. graph-F] 304-J. ring. asb-F] 304-J. graph-F] low-C-steel-J. 140 BHN max] 316. PTFE-J. 592 . asb-F] Teflon-J. asb-F] low-C-steel-J. blue-asb-F] soft-iron-J. jktd. ring. 140 BHN max] I-X-750 soft-iron. asb-F] I600-J. ring. soft-iron] [Corr. ring. jktd. ring. ring. asb-F] 321/347-J. jktd. jktd. ring. jktd.

304-W. CS-CR. CS-CR] graph-F. 140 BHN max] 347. CS-CR. 321-IR] asb-F. 304-W. 304-W. 316-IR] asb-F. CS-CR] graph-F. 304-IR] Teflon-F. 316-W. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. 347-IR mica/graph-F. 321-W. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. 347-W. 316-W. 321-W. CS-CR] graph-F. [Sprl-wnd. 140 BHN max] 316. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. I600-W. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR] mica/graph-F. CS-CR] asb-F. [Sprl-wnd. 316-W. CS-CR] asb-F. CS-CR] Teflon-F. [Sprl-wnd. 316L-IR] Teflon-F. 120 BHN max] 5Cr-0. 347-W. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. ring. [Sprl-wnd. 316L-W. 304-W. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. 316-W. 304-W. CS-CR. 321-W. CS-CR. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. 316L-IR] graph-F. [Sprl-wnd. 316-W. 316-IR mica/graph-F. CS-CR. ring. 304-IR] asb-F. CS-CR. [Sprl-wnd. ring. ring. 316L-W. Codelists 593 . [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR] Teflon-F. 347-IR] graph-F. CS-CR] asb-F. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. 321-W. CS-CR] mica/graph-F. ring. [Sprl-wnd. 321-IR mica/graph-F. [Sprl-wnd. 304-W. CS-CR. ring. CS-CR. [Sprl-wnd. 321-IR] graph-F. I600-O&IR] graph-F. [Sprl-wnd. 321-W. [Sprl-wnd. 316-W. I600-O&IR B. 316-W. CS-CR. CS-CR] asb-F. [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR._ _______________ Appendix B: 3601 3602 3606 3608 3610 3613 3616 3618 3619 3623 3651 3653 3655 3657 3659 3661 3663 3665 3669 3671 3673 3675 3677 3679 3681 3683 3685 3689 3691 3693 3695 3699 3701 3703 3705 3709 3711 3713 3715 3719 3721 3723 3725 3729 3731 3733 3735 3739 3741 3743 3745 3749 3751 3753 3755 3761 3763 3765 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’G601’ ’G602’ ’G606’ ’G608’ ’G610’ ’G613’ ’G616’ ’G618’ ’G619’ ’G623’ ’G651’ ’G653’ ’G655’ ’G657’ ’G659’ ’G661’ ’G663’ ’G665’ ’G669’ ’G671’ ’G673’ ’G675’ ’G677’ ’G679’ ’G681’ ’G683’ ’G685’ ’G689’ ’G691’ ’G693’ ’G695’ ’G699’ ’G701’ ’G703’ ’G705’ ’G709’ ’G711’ ’G713’ ’G715’ ’G719’ ’G721’ ’G723’ ’G725’ ’G729’ ’G731’ ’G733’ ’G735’ ’G739’ ’G741’ ’G743’ ’G745’ ’G749’ ’G751’ ’G753’ ’G755’ ’G761’ ’G763’ ’G765’ [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval ring. 347-W. 140 BHN max] I-X-750 304-W. CS-CR. 130 BHN max] 410. 347-W. soft-iron. CS-CR] mica/graph-F. I600-W. CS-CR] Teflon-F. 321-W. 304-W. 316L-W. CS-CR. CS-CR] Teflon-F. 130 BHN max] 9Cr-1Mo. I600-O&IR] asb-F. CS-CR] mica/graph-F. CS-CR. [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR. [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR] graph-F. 316L-W. I600-W. 316L-W. 316-W. 347-IR] asb-F. [Sprl-wnd. 316-IR] graph-F. [Sprl-wnd. 347-W. CS-CR. 304-IR mica/graph-F. ring. 90 BHN max] lo-C. [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. 316L-IR] asb-F. ring. CS-CR] Teflon-F. [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR] asb-F. mica/graph-F. 316L-IR mica/graph-F. CS-CR] graph-F. CS-CR] mica/graph-F. [Sprl-wnd. 304-W. General Comments [Sprl-wnd. [Sprl-wnd. 140 BHN max] 321. CS-CR. 316-IR] Teflon-F. CS-CR. CS-CR. 316L-W. [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR] crodidolite asb-F. [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR. I600-W.5Mo. 321-W. CS-CR] blue-asb-F. 170 BHN max] 304. 321-W. 321-IR] Teflon-F. 347-IR] Teflon-F. 347-W. 347-W. 316-W. [Sprl-wnd. 304-IR] graph-F. ring. 347-W. CS-CR] asb-F. I600-W. [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR] mica/gra-F. [Sprl-wnd. 316L-W. CS-CR] graph-F. CS-CR. I600-W. 316L-W.

w/A194-3] 4064 = ’B64’ [A193-B16. >=1. lub. I800-W. lub. w/A194-B8] 4080 = ’B80’ [A320-B8T Cl. lub. I800-W. w/A194-4] 4076 = ’B76’ [A320-B8.5" lub.5" lub.5" lub. w/A194-8T] 4051 = ’B51’ [A193-B8T Cl.5" lub. w/A194-8] 4044 = ’B44’ [A193-B8C Cl.5" lub. >=1. >=1. I800-O&IR] asb-F.5" lub.5" lub. w/A194-B8] 4081 = ’B81’ [A320-B8T Cl. >=1. >=1. >=1. lub. I800-O&IR Bolting 4000-4999] 4011 = ’B11’ [A193-B5. w/A194-8C] 4046 = ’B46’ [A193-B8 Cl. w/A194-8M] 4048 = ’B48’ [A193-B8M Cl.5" lub. I800-W. >=1.5" lub. lub. w/A194-8M] 4069 = ’B69’ [A193-B16.5" lub.1. w/A194-4] 4066 = ’B66’ [A193-B16. CS-CR] asb-F.5" lub. w/A194-7] 4068 = ’B68’ [A193-B16. w/A194-B8] 4082 = ’B82’ [A325 w/A325] 4084 = ’B84’ [A453-660. lub.1. w/A453-660] 4085 = ’B85’ [A453-660. >=1. w/A194-7] 4067 = ’B67’ [A193-B16. w/A194-4] 4075 = ’B75’ [A320-L7.Ranges used 6000-7999 carbon steel pipes and tubes BS3601 6000 = ’BS3601:BW320’ 6001 = ’BS3601:ERW320’ 6002 = ’BS3601:ERW360’ 6003 = ’BS3601:ERW430’ 6004 = ’BS3601:S360’ 6005 = ’BS3601:S430’ 6006 = ’BS3601:SAW430’ 594 .5" lub. >=1. lub. lub. >=1. lub. >=1. w/A194-8] 4042 = ’B42’ [A193-B8 Cl. [Sprl-wnd. CS-CR] mica/graph-F. >=1. mica/graph-F. w/A194-8C] 4045 = ’B45’ [A193-B8C Cl. w/A194-3] 4062 = ’B62’ [A193-B16. CS-CR] graph-F. w/A194-2H] 4033 = ’B33’ [A193-B7 zinc coated w/A194-2H zinc coated] 4035 = ’B35’ [A193-B7 galv w/A194-2H galv] 4038 = ’B38’ [A193-B7M. w/A194-4] 4015 = ’B15’ [A193-B5.5" lub. w/A194-2H] 4032 = ’B32’ [A193-B7. lub.1 >=1. w/A194-8T] 4061 = ’B61’ [A193-B16._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 3771 3773 3775 3781 3783 3785 = = = = = = ’G771’ ’G773’ ’G775’ ’G781’ ’G783’ ’G785’ [Sprl-wnd. >=1.1. lub. w/A194-4] 4065 = ’B65’ [A193-B16. [Sprl-wnd. w/A194-8M] 4071 = ’B71’ [A307-B w/A563-A] 4074 = ’B74’ [A320-L7.5" lub. lub.5" lub.1. >=1.5" lub. lub. I800-O&IR] graph-F.1.1.1 lub.5" lub. lub. >=1. w/A194-6] 4031 = ’B31’ [A193-B7.1. w/A194-8M 4050 = ’B50’ [A193-B8T Cl. [Sprl-wnd. I800-W.1. w/A194-8] 4077 = ’B77’ [A320-B8. lub.1. lub. w/A453-660 4500 = ’Undefined’ Materials for British Standards . [Sprl-wnd. w/A194-8] 4078 = ’B78’ [A320-B8. [Sprl-wnd. w/A194-4] 4021 = ’B21’ [A193-B6. w/A194-2H] 4041 = ’B41’ [A193-B8 Cl. >=1. w/A194-8] 4047 = ’B47’ [A193-B8M Cl. w/A194-3] 4014 = ’B14’ [A193-B5. I800-W. lub. w/A194-2H] 4039 = ’B39’ [A193-B7M. >=1. w/A194-6] 4022 = ’B22’ [A193-B6. I800-W. w/A194-3] 4012 = ’B12’ [A193-B5. lub.5" lub. w/A194-B8] 4079 = ’B79’ [A320-B8.

_ _______________ Appendix B: steel pipes 6010 = 6011 = 6012 = 6013 = 6014 = 6015 = 6016 = 6017 = 6018 = 6019 = 6020 = 6021 = 6022 = 6023 = 6024 = 6025 = 6026 = 6027 = 6028 = 6029 = steel pipes 6030 = 6031 = 6032 = 6033 = steel pipes 6040 = 6041 = 6042 = 6043 = 6044 = 6045 = 6046 = 6047 = 6048 = 6049 = 6050 = 6051 = 6052 = 6053 = 6054 = 6055 = steel pipes 6060 = 6061 = 6062 = 6063 = 6064 = 6065 = 6066 = 6067 = 6068 = 6069 = 6070 = 6071 = 6072 = 6073 = 6074 = and tubes BS3602 part 1 1987 ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 2’ and tubes elevated temp prop BS3602 part 2 ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 2’ ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 1’ ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 2’ and tubes low temp prop BS3603 1977 ’BS3603 HFS410 LT 50 Cat 1’ ’BS3603 HFS410 LT 50 Cat 2’ ’BS3603 CFS410 LT 50 Cat 1’ ’BS3603 CFS410 LT 50 Cat 2’ ’BS3603 ERW410 LT 50 Cat 1’ ’BS3603 ERW410 LT 50 Cat 2’ ’BS3603 CEW410 LT 50 Cat 1’ ’BS3603 CEW410 LT 50 Cat 2’ ’BS3603 HFS503 LT 100 Cat 1’ ’BS3603 HFS503 LT 100 Cat 2’ ’BS3603 CFS503 LT 100 Cat 1’ ’BS3603 CFS503 LT 100 Cat 2’ ’BS3603 HFS509 LT 196 Cat 1’ ’BS3603 HFS509 LT 196 Cat 2’ ’BS3603 CFS509 LT 196 Cat 1’ ’BS3603 CFS509 LT 196 Cat 2’ and tubes elevated ’BS3604:HFS620-460 ’BS3604:CFS620-460 ’BS3604:ERW620-460 ’BS3604:CEW620-460 ’BS3604:HFS620-460 ’BS3604:CFS620-460 ’BS3604:ERW620-460 ’BS3604:CEW620-460 ’BS3604:HFS620-440 ’BS3604:CFS620-440 ’BS3604:ERW620-440 ’BS3604:CEW620-440 ’BS3604:HFS620-440 ’BS3604:CFS620-440 ’BS3604:ERW620-440 temp prop BS3604 Cat 1’ Cat 1’ Cat 1’ Cat 1’ Cat 2’ Cat 2’ Cat 2’ Cat 2’ Cat 1’ Cat 1’ Cat 1’ Cat 1’ Cat 2’ Cat 2’ Cat 2’ General Comments B. Codelists 595 .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080 6081 6082 6083 6084 6085 6086 6087 6088 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 6094 6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’BS3604:CEW620-440 ’BS3604:HFS621 Cat ’BS3604:CFS621 Cat ’BS3604:ERW621 Cat ’BS3604:CEW621 Cat ’BS3604:HFS621 Cat ’BS3604:CFS621 Cat ’BS3604:ERW621 Cat ’BS3604:CEW621 Cat ’BS3604:HFS660 Cat ’BS3604:CFS660 Cat ’BS3604:HFS660 Cat ’BS3604:CFS660 Cat ’BS3604:HFS622 Cat ’BS3604:CFS622 Cat ’BS3604:HFS622 Cat ’BS3604:CFS622 Cat ’BS3604:HFS625 Cat ’BS3604:CFS625 Cat ’BS3604:HFS625 Cat ’BS3604:CFS625 Cat ’BS3604:HFS629-470 ’BS3604:CFS629-470 ’BS3604:HFS629-470 ’BS3604:CFS629-470 ’BS3604:HFS629-590 ’BS3604:CFS629-590 ’BS3604:HFS629-590 ’BS3604:CFS629-590 ’BS3604:HFS762 Cat ’BS3604:CFS762 Cat ’BS3604:HFS762 Cat ’BS3604:CFS762 Cat Cat 1’ 1’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ SS pipes and tubes for pressure purposes BS3605:1973 6110 = ’BS3605 304S14’ 6111 = ’BS3605 304S18’ 6112 = ’BS3605 304S59’ 6113 = ’BS3605 304S22’ 6114 = ’BS3605 304S25’ 6115 = ’BS3605 316S14’ 6116 = ’BS3605 316S18’ 6117 = ’BS3605 316S59’ 6118 = ’BS3605 316S22’ 6119 = ’BS3605 316S26’ 6120 = ’BS3605 321S18’ 6121 = ’BS3605 321S59(1010)’ 6122 = ’BS3605 321S59(1105)’ 6123 = ’BS3605 321S22’ 6124 = ’BS3605 347S18’ 6125 = ’BS3605 347S59’ 6126 = ’BS3605 347S17’ plates BS1501 part 1 1980 6200 = ’BS1501-141 360A’ 6201 = ’BS1501-151 360A’ 6202 = ’BS1501-151 400A’ 6203 = ’BS1501-151 430A’ 6204 = ’BS1501-151 360B’ 6205 = ’BS1501-151 400B’ 6206 = ’BS1501-151 430B’ 6207 = ’BS1501-154 360A’ 596 .

Codelists 597 ._ _______________ Appendix B: 6208 6209 6210 6211 6212 6213 6214 6215 6216 6217 6218 6219 6220 6221 6222 6223 6224 6225 6226 6227 6228 6229 6230 6231 6232 6233 6234 6235 6236 6237 6238 6239 6240 6241 6242 6243 6244 6245 6246 6247 6248 6249 6250 6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256 6257 6258 6259 6260 6261 6262 6263 6264 6265 6266 6267 6268 6269 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’BS1501-154 ’BS1501-154 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 400A’ 430A’ 360A’ 400A’ 430A’ 360B’ 400B’ 430B’ 360A RT’ 360A LT0’ 360A LT20’ 360B RT’ 360B LT0’ 360B LT20’ 400A RT’ 400A LT0’ 400A LT20’ 400B RT’ 400B LT0’ 400B LT20’ 460A RT’ 460A LT0’ 460A LT15’ 460A LT30’ 460B RT’ 460B LT0’ 460B LT15’ 460B LT30’ 490A RT’ 490A LT0’ 490A LT15’ 490A LT30’ 490B RT’ 490B LT0’ 490B LT15’ 490B LT30’ 400A RT’ 400A LT0’ 400A LT20’ 400A LT30’ 400A LT40’ 400A LT50’ 400B RT’ 400B LT0’ 400B LT20’ 400B LT30’ 400B LT40’ 400B LT50’ 430A RT’ 430A LT0’ 430A LT20’ 430A LT30’ 430A LT40’ 430A LT50’ 430B RT’ 430B LT0’ 430B LT20’ 430B LT30’ 430B LT40’ 430B LT50’ 460A RT’ 460A LT0’ General Comments B.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 6277 6278 6279 6280 6281 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286 6287 6288 6289 6290 6291 6292 6293 6294 6295 6296 6297 6298 6299 6300 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 460A 460A 460A 460A 460B 460B 460B 460B 460B 460B 490A 490A 490A 490A 490A 490A 490B 490B 490B 490B 490B 490B 460A 460A 460A 460A 460B 460B 460B 460B 490A 490A 490A 490B 490B 490B LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ LT20’ LT30’ LT50’ LT60’ LT20’ LT30’ LT50’ LT60’ LT20’ LT30’ LT50’ LT20’ LT30’ LT50’ steel plates BS1501 part 2 1988 6310 = ’BS1501-243’ 6311 = ’BS1501-271’ 6312 = ’BS1501-281’ 6313 = ’BS1501-620’ 6314 = ’BS1501-621’ 6315 = ’BS1501-622-515’ 6316 = ’BS1501-622-690’ 6317 = ’BS1501-660’ 6318 = ’BS1501-503’ 6319 = ’BS1501-510’ 6320 = ’BS1501-828’ steel plates BS1501 part 3 1973 6321 = ’BS1501-403S17A’ 6322 = ’BS1501-405S17A’ 6323 = ’BS1501-304S12A’ 6324 = ’BS1501-304S15A’ 6325 = ’BS1501-304S49A’ 6326 = ’BS1501-321S12A’ 6327 = ’BS1501-321S49A’ 6328 = ’BS1501-347S17A’ 6329 = ’BS1501-347S49A’ 6330 = ’BS1501-316S12A’ 6331 = ’BS1501-316S16A’ 598 .

_ _______________ Appendix B: 6332 6333 6334 6335 6336 6337 6338 6339 6340 6341 6342 6343 6344 6345 6351 6352 6353 6354 6355 6356 6357 6358 6359 6360 6361 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’BS1501-316S37A’ ’BS1501-316S49A’ ’BS1501-320S17A’ ’BS1501-310S24A’ ’BS1501-NA15A’ ’BS1501-NA16A’ ’BS1501-460S52A’ ’BS1501-304S62A’ ’BS1501-304S65A’ ’BS1501-304S87A’ ’BS1501-347S67A’ ’BS1501-316S62A’ ’BS1501-316S66A’ ’BS1501-316S82A’ ’BS1501-403S17B’ ’BS1501-405S17B’ ’BS1501-304S12B’ ’BS1501-304S15B’ ’BS1501-304S49B’ ’BS1501-351S12B’ ’BS1501-351S49B’ ’BS1501-347S17B’ ’BS1501-347S49B’ ’BS1501-316S12B’ ’BS1501-316S16B’ ’BS1501-316S37B’ ’BS1501-316S49B’ ’BS1501-320S17B’ ’BS1501-310S24B’ ’BS1501-NA15B’ ’BS1501-NA16B’ ’BS1501-460S52B’ ’BS1501-304S62B’ ’BS1501-304S65B’ ’BS1501-304S87B’ ’BS1501-377S67B’ ’BS1501-316S62B’ ’BS1501-316S66B’ ’BS1501-316S82B’ ’BS1501-460S52A LT70’ General Comments B. Codelists steel forgings to BS1503 1980 6380 = ’BS1503 164-490’ 6381 = ’BS1503 221-410’ 6382 = ’BS1503 221-430’ 6383 = ’BS1503 221-460’ 6384 = ’BS1503 221-490’ 6385 = ’BS1503 221-510’ 6386 = ’BS1503 221-530’ 6387 = ’BS1503 221-550’ 6388 = ’BS1503 223-410’ 6389 = ’BS1503 223-430’ 6390 = ’BS1503 223-460’ 6391 = ’BS1503 223-490’ 6392 = ’BS1503 223-510’ 6393 = ’BS1503 224-410’ 6394 = ’BS1503 224-430’ 6395 = ’BS1503 224-460’ 6396 = ’BS1503 224-490’ 6397 = ’BS1503 224-510’ 599 .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6398 6399 6400 6401 6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 6407 6408 6409 6410 6411 6412 6413 6414 6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 6422 6423 6424 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429 6430 6431 6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444 6445 6446 6447 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 245-420’ 620-440’ 620-540’ 621-460’ 660-460’ 271-560’ 622-490’ 622-560’ 622-650’ 625-520’ 625-590’ 503-490’ 509-690’ 410S21’ 420S29’ 403S17’ 405S17’ 304S11’ 304S31’ 304S51’ 347S31’ 347S51’ 321S31’ 321S51-490’ 321S51-510’ 316S11’ 316S13’ 316S31’ 316S33’ 316S51’ 320S33’ 310S31’ 164-490E’ 221-430E’ 221-460E’ 221-490E’ 221-510E’ 221-530E’ 221-550E’ 223-410E’ 223-430E’ 223-460E’ 223-490E’ 223-510E’ 224-410E’ 224-430E’ 224-460E’ 224-490E’ 224-510E’ 245-420E’ 620-440E’ 620-540E’ 621-460E’ 660-460E’ 271-560E’ 622-490E’ 622-560E’ 622-650E’ 625-520E’ 600 .

Codelists 6499 = ’BS1503 503-490-LT80’ 6500 = ’BS1503 509-690-LT196’ 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510 = = = = = = = = = = ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 304S11-LT196’ 304S31-LT196’ 347S31-LT196’ 321S31-LT196’ 321S51-490’ 321S51-510’ 316S11-LT196’ 316S13-LT196’ 316S31-LT196’ 316S33-LT196’ steel casting to BS1504 1976 6520 = ’BS1504-161 grade 430A’ 6521 = ’BS1504-161 grade 480A’ 601 ._ _______________ Appendix B: 6457 6458 6459 6460 6461 6462 6463 6464 6465 6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472 6473 6474 6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 6480 6481 6482 6483 6484 6485 6486 6487 6488 6489 6490 6491 6492 6493 6494 6495 6496 6497 6498 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 625-590E’ 410S21E’ 420S29E’ 403S17E’ 405S17E’ 304S11E’ 304S31E’ 304S51E’ 347S31E’ 347S51E’ 321S31E’ 321S51-490E’ 321S51-510E’ 316S11E’ 316S13E’ 316S31E’ 316S33E’ 316S51E’ 223-410-LT10’ 223-410-LT20’ 223-410-LT50’ 223-430-LT10’ 223-430-LT15’ 223-430-LT40’ 223-460-LT0’ 223-460-LT10’ 223-460-LT20’ 223-490-LT0’ 223-490-LT10’ 223-510-LT0’ 224-410-LT10’ 224-410-LT20’ 224-410-LT50’ 224-430-LT10’ 224-430-LT15’ 224-430-LT40’ 224-460-LT0’ 224-460-LT10’ 224-460-LT20’ 224-490-LT0’ 224-490-LT10’ 224-510-LT0’ General Comments B.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 6522 6523 6524 6525 6526 6527 6528 6529 6530 6531 6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547 6548 6549 6550 6551 6552 6553 6554 6555 6556 6557 6558 6559 6560 6561 6562 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’BS1504-161 grade 540A’ ’BS1504-161 grade 430E’ ’BS1504-161 grade 480E’ ’BS1504-161 grade 430A-LT40’ ’BS1504-245A’ ’BS1504-245B’ ’BS1504-245A-LT50’ ’BS1504-503-LT60’ ’BS1504-621A’ ’BS1504-622A’ ’BS1504-622E’ ’BS1504-623A’ ’BS1504-625A’ ’BS1504-625E’ ’BS1504-629A’ ’BS1504-660A’ ’BS1504-420C29A’ ’BS1504-425C11A’ ’BS1504-304C15A’ ’BS1504-304C15A-LT196’ ’BS1504-304C12A’ ’BS1504-304C12A-LT196’ ’BS1504-347C17A’ ’BS1504-347C17A-LT196’ ’BS1504-315C16A’ ’BS1504-315C16A-LT196’ ’BS1504-316C12A’ ’BS1504-316C16A’ ’BS1504-316C71A’ ’BS1504-318C17A’ ’BS1504-316C16E’ ’BS1504-316C71E’ ’BS1504-316C12A-LT196’ ’BS1504-316C16A-LT196’ ’BS1504-316C71A-LT196’ ’BS1504-317C12A’ ’BS1504-317C16A’ ’BS1504-364C11A’ ’BS1504-332C11A’ ’BS1504-310C40A’ ’BS1504-330C11A’ steel bars and billets for bolting BS1506 1986 6570 = ’BS1506-162’ 6571 = ’BS1506-253’ 6572 = ’BS1506-253-LT100’ 6573 = ’BS1506-509-650’ 6574 = ’BS1506-509-650-LT196’ 6575 = ’BS1506-509-690’ 6576 = ’BS1506-509-690-LT196’ 6577 = ’BS1506-630-790’ 6578 = ’BS1506-630-790-LT100’ 6579 = ’BS1506-630-790-LT75’ 6580 = ’BS1506-630-860’ 6581 = ’BS1506-630-860-LT100’ 6582 = ’BS1506-630-690’ 6583 = ’BS1506-630-690-LT100’ 6584 = ’BS1506-631-850’ 6585 = ’BS1506-670-860’ 6586 = ’BS1506-671-850’ 6587 = ’BS1506-681-820’ 6588 = ’BS1506-410S21-690’ 602 .

Brnz Trim’ Brnz Trim’ CS Cement Lined’ CS. RFFE. Piping Materials Class Description (31999) NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-7999 are reserved for values that apply to US practices. FFFE. DI Cement Lined’ ’AWWA 150# MJ. Codelists 7999 = ’undefined’ CL148. RFFE. Codelist numbers 8000-31999 are reserved for values that apply to practices in other countries. 2-7999 ’Gravity Head. RFFE._ _______________ Appendix B: 6589 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 6595 6596 6597 6598 6599 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 6614 6615 6616 6617 6618 6619 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’BS1506-410S21-720’ ’BS1506-410S21-760’ ’BS1506-410S21-750’ ’BS1506-410S21-770’ ’BS1506-416S29’ ’BS1506-286S31’ ’BS1506-286S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-304S31’ ’BS1506-304S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-304S51’ ’BS1506-304S61’ ’BS1506-304S61-LT196’ ’BS1506-304S71’ ’BS1506-304S71-LT196’ ’BS1506-303S22’ ’BS1506-316S31’ ’BS1506-316S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S33’ ’BS1506-316S33-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S51’ ’BS1506-316S53’ ’BS1506-316S61’ ’BS1506-316S61-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S63’ ’BS1506-316S63-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S65’ ’BS1506-316S65-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S67’ ’BS1506-316S67-LT196’ ’BS1506-321S31’ ’BS1506-321S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-321S51-490’ ’BS1506-321S51-520’ ’BS1506-347S31’ ’BS1506-347S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-347S51’ General Comments B. Trim 8’ CS. RFFE. Trim 8’ CS. Trim 8’ CS. DI Cement Lined’ ’CL125 ’CL125 ’CL150 ’CL150 ’CL300 ’CL600 ’CL150 FFFE. C [CAA5UA] [AC0014] [CAA5VA] [AC0016] [CAALV1] [1C0019] [CAC5C1] [1C0031] [CAC5C2] [2C0032] [CAC5C4] [4C0033] [CAC5G1] [1C0035] Descriptions. FFFE. 1 = [Blank] US Piping Material Class Irons. F 2 = [FAY1W8] [8F0002] 3 = [FDYLW8] [8F0003] 6 = [FDYLU9] [9F0006] Carbon 14 = 16 = 19 = 31 = 32 = 33 = 35 = Steels. Trim 8’ 603 . Gray CI’ ’Gravity Head. CS.

Killed CS. Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE. CS. Galv CS. Trim 8’ ’CL150 RFFE. NACE. Trim 9’ ’CL150 RFFE. CS. Trim 5. CS’ ’CL150 FFFE. Trim 12’ ’CL900 RFFE. CS. Trim 8’ ’CL150 BE. Trim 8’ ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 5. Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE. NACE. (ASME-I)’ ’CL300 BE/RFFE. Killed CS. NACE. NACE. Trim 5. Trim 5.1)’ ’CL600 BE/RFFE.1)’ ’CL900 BE/RFFE. Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE. Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE.3)’ ’CL600 BE/RFFE. NACE. Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE. Trim 8. Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF. Trim 8’ ’CL600 RFFE. CS.1)’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. Killed CS. (ANSI-B31. CS. Trim 8. 316 Trim’ ’CL150 RFFE-SF. Trim 8’ ’CL900 RFFE. CS. Killed CS. (ANSI-B31. Brnz Trim’ ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 12’ 604 .1)’ ’CL150 RFFE. CS. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF.3)’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. Killed CS. Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE. CS. CS’ ’CL300 BE. Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE. CS. CS. NACE. Killed CS. CS. Trim 12’ ’CL900 RFFE-SF. (ANSI-B31. CS. NACE. Trim 5. Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE-SF.1)’ ’CL300 BE/RFFE. (ANSI-B31. Killed CS. CS. Galv CS.3)’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF. Trim 8’ ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 8. Trim 13’ ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 8’ ’CL150 RFFE-SF. Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE. Killed CS. NACE. Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE. (ANSI-B31. 316 Trim’ ’CL600 BE/RFFE. Killed CS. Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE-SF._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 43 45 48 49 50 51 65 66 73 74 75 76 105 106 146 153 171 176 177 182 183 185 186 320 389 390 391 394 395 396 397 400 401 402 403 405 407 458 459 460 461 548 549 551 557 564 577 593 600 601 602 609 610 611 618 619 620 630 722 723 724 730 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [CAC5Q1] [CAC5R1] [CAC5U1] [CAC7C1] [CAC7C2] [CAC7C4] [CAC8C1] [CAC8C2] [CAC9C1] [CAC9C2] [CAC9C4] [CAC9C5] [CAD7K1] [CAD7K2] [CAF5S1] [CAF7J1] [CAFYC1] [CAH5C1] [CAH5C2] [CAH5G1] [CAH5G2] [CAH7C1] [CAH7C2] [CALYC2] [CAU5P4] [CAU5P5] [CAU5P6] [CAU5Q2] [CAU5Q4] [CAU5Q5] [CAU5Q6] [CAU5R2] [CAU5R4] [CAU5R5] [CAU5R6] [CAU5RF] [CAU7C6] [CAYYC1] [CAYYC2] [CDA1U1] [CDA5U1] [CJD7K1] [CJD7K2] [CJD7K5] [CJD8K2] [CJD9K1] [CJE7C2] [CJE9C2] [CJF5C1] [CJF5C2] [CJF5C4] [CJF7C1] [CJF7C2] [CJF7C4] [CJF9C1] [CJF9C2] [CJF9C4] [CJH7C4] [CJL7C2] [CJL7C4] [CJL7C5] [CJL9C2] [1C0043] [1C0045] [1C0048] [1C0049] [2C0050] [4C0051] [1C0065] [2C0066] [1C0073] [2C0074] [4C0075] [5C0076] [1C0105] [2C0106] [1C0146] [1C0153] [1C0171] [1C0176] [2C0177] [1C0182] [2C0183] [1C0185] [2C0186] [2C0320] [4C0389] [5C0390] [6C0391] [2C0394] [4C0395] [5C0396] [6C0397] [2C0400] [4C0401] [5C0402] [6C0403] [FC0405] [6C0407] [1C0458] [2C0459] [1C0460] [1C0461] [1C0548] [2C0549] [5C0551] [2C0557] [1C0564] [2C0577] [2C0593] [1C0600] [2C0601] [4C0602] [1C0609] [2C0610] [4C0611] [1C0618] [2C0619] [4C0620] [4C0630] [2C0722] [4C0723] [5C0724] [2C0730] ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 9’ ’CL300 RFFE. NACE. SS/TFE Trim’ ’CL150 RFFE.3)’ ’CL800 BE/RFFE. Killed CS. Trim 9’ ’CL300 RFFE. CS. Trim 8’ ’CL150 RFFE.3)’ ’CL900 BE/RFFE. CS. (ASME-I)’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. Trim 8. CS. Killed CS. CS. CS. CS. CS. Killed CS. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 8’ ’CL150 RFFE. CS. CS. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF. NACE. Trim 8. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF. (ASME-I)’ ’CL900 BE/RFFE. Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE. CS. NACE. Killed CS. (ANSI-B31. CS. NACE. Killed CS. Brnz Trim’ ’CL150 FFFE. Trim 5. Trim 9’ ’CL150 RFFE. CS. CS. CS. Trim 8’ ’CL600 RFFE. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE. Killed CS. Killed CS. Killed CS. CS. CS. CS. (ANSI-B31. Trim 5. CS. Killed CS. CS. NACE. Killed CS. Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 8’ ’CL150 RFFE-SF. CS. (ANSI-B31. Trim 8. Killed CS. CS. NACE. CS. CS. CS. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE. Killed CS. NACE. (ANSI-B31. (ANSI-B31. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF.

25Cr-0. 1. 316 Trim’ 1670 = [LPTYG2] [2L1670] ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 2’ ’CL150 RFFE.5Mo. 304L/316 Valves. Killed CS. Trim 8’ ’CL600 RFFE. 5Cr-0. 1. 304/CS Valves. NACE. 1. Killed CS. 304. Trim 8’ 1673 = [LPH5B4] [4L1673] ’CL600 RFFE-SF.5Mo. Trim 5.25Cr-0._ _______________ Appendix B: 731 732 785 794 800 803 841 842 = = = = = = = = [CJL9C4] [CJL9C5] [CJU7C6] [CJV5C6] [CJV7C6] [CJV7K6] [CPD5D1] [CPD5D2] [4C0731] [5C0732] [6C0785] [6C0794] [6C0800] [6C0803] [1C0841] [2C0842] General Comments ’CL600 RFFE-SF. Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE.25Cr-0.5Mo. Trim 12’ 605 . Trim 8’ 3748 = [LVC9B4] [4L3748] ’CL600 RFFE. Killed CS. Trim 8’ 3013 = [LTC5B1] [1L3013] ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 5. 304/316 Valves. Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 8’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. 5Cr-0. 304. Trim 8’ 1691 = [LPH9B4] [4L1691] ’CL600 RFFE-SF. Trim 8’ 1864 = [LPU5B6] [6L1864] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. Trim 8’ 3747 = [LVC9B2] [2L3747] ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 8’ 1678 = [LPH7B2] [2L1678] ’CL300 RFFE-SF. Trim 8’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE.5Mo. Trim 8’ ’CL900 RFFE. Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 8’ 1677 = [LPH7B1] [1L1677] ’CL150 RFFE-SF.5Mo. Killed CS. Trim 12’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. L 1669 = [LPFYG2] [2L1669] ’CL300 RFFE. Killed CS.25Cr-0. 1. 5Cr-0. Low Temp CS. 5Cr-0. Trim 8’ 3726 = [LVC7B2] [2L3726] ’CL300 RFFE.25Cr-0. 1.5Mo. Low Temp CS. Trim 2’ ’CL150 RFFE.5Mo. 5Cr-0.5Mo. Trim 8’ 3014 = [LTC5B2] [2L3014] ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 8’ 3027 = [LTC7B1] [1L3027] ’CL150 RFFE.5Mo. 5Cr-0. 304/316 Valves. 1. 1.5Mo. Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 8’ 3203 = [LTH9B2] [2L3203] ’CL300 RFFE-SF.5Mo. (ASME-I)’ 1869 = [LPU5P6] [6L1869] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. Trim 8’ 1868 = [LPU5P5] [5L1868] ’CL900 BE/RFFE. Trim 5. 9Cr-1Mo. 304. Trim 8’ 3746 = [LVC9B1] [1L3746] ’CL150 RFFE.5Mo.5Mo.25Cr-0.5Mo.25Cr-0.5Mo. Trim 8’ 3028 = [LTC7B2] [2L3028] ’CL300 RFFE. 1. 1. 9Cr-1Mo. 9Cr-1Mo.1) 1875 = [LPU5Q6] [6L1875] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. Trim 2’ Low and Intermediate Alloy Steels.5Mo. 1. 5Cr-0.5Mo. 304/316 Valves. Trim 2’ ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 5.25Cr-0.5Mo.5Mo. Trim 8’ 3749 = [LVC9B5] [5L3749] ’CL900 RFFE. Trim 8’ 3049 = [LTC9B2] [2L3049] ’CL300 RFFE.5Mo. 304/CS Valves. NACE. Trim 12’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE.25Cr-0. Trim 8’ B. Trim 8’ 3193 = [LTH7B5] [5L3193] ’CL900 RFFE-SF. 304/CS Valves. 5Cr-0. 5Cr-0. NACE. 5Cr-0. 304/CS Valves. 5Cr-0. 1. (ASME-I)’ 1874 = [LPU5Q5] [5L1874] ’CL900 BE/RFFE. 9Cr-1Mo.5Mo. Trim 8’ 3390 = [LTU7B6] [6L3390] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. 1. Trim 8’ 3040 = [LTC8B1] [1L3040] ’CL150 RFFE. 1. Trim 8’ 1672 = [LPH5B2] [2L1672] ’CL300 RFFE-SF. Killed CS. 5Cr-0. (ANSI-B31. Trim 8’ 3029 = [LTC7B4] [4L3029] ’CL600 RFFE. Trim 8’ 3048 = [LTC9B1] [1L3048] ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 8’ ’CL150 RFFE.25Cr-0.5Mo. Trim 8’ 3042 = [LTC8B4] [4L3042] ’CL600 RFFE. NACE. 316 Trim’ ’CL1500 RJFE.25Cr-0.25Cr-0. 316 Trim’ 1671 = [LPH5B1] [1L1671] ’CL150 RFFE-SF.5Mo.5Mo. (ANSI-B31.3 1885 = [LPU7B6] [6L1885] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. 9Cr-1Mo. 304. 1.5Mo.25Cr-0.25Cr-0. Trim 8’ 3204 = [LTH9B4] [4L3204] ’CL600 RFFE-SF. S 3977 = [SAC3T1] [1S3977] 3978 = [SAC3T2] [2S3978] 3979 = [SAC3T4] [4S3979] 3980 = [SAC3T5] [5S3980] 3984 = [SAD3C1] [1S3984] 3985 = [SAD3C2] [2S3985] 3988 = [SAD3E1] [1S3988] 3989 = [SAD3E2] [2S3989] 3991 = [SAD3F1] [1S3991] 4104 = [SAFYG1] [1S4104] 4218 = [SAM3T6] [6S4218] 4396 = [SBD3C2] [2S4396] 4488 = [SBF3U1] [1S4488] 5135 = [SED5C1] [1S5135] ’CL150 RFFE.5Mo.5Mo. 5Cr-0. 1.5Mo. 304/CS Valves. Trim 2’ ’CL300 RFFE. Codelists Stainless Steels. 1.25Cr-0. Trim 5. Trim 8’ 3041 = [LTC8B2] [2L3041] ’CL300 RFFE. Trim 12’ ’CL900 RFFE-SF.1 1882 = [LPU5R6] [6L1882] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. Trim 8’ 3725 = [LVC7B1] [1L3725] ’CL150 RFFE. Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE. 5Cr-0. Trim 8’ 1679 = [LPH7B4] [4L1679] ’CL600 RFFE-SF.5Mo. 9Cr-1Mo.25Cr-0. Trim 2’ ’CL150 RFFE. 316.5Mo. (ANSI-B31. NACE.

Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE... X 7687 = [XCY1W8] [8X7687] ’Gravity Head. Vitrified Clay’ 7689 = [XEY1W8] [8X7689] ’Gravity Head... 321/347 Valves.. 8000-9999 8000 = ’Carbon steel’ 8001 = ’Stainless steel’ 8002 = ’Forged steel’ 8010 = ’Ferritic steel’ 8011 = ’Austenitic steel’ 8020 = ’Plastic’ 8021 = ’Fiber glass’ 8030 = ’Glass lined’ 8031 = ’Cement lined’ 8032 = ’Chloroprene (CR) lined’ 9999 = ’Undefined’ The names of Piping Materials Classes are determined as follows: o A list includes possible Piping Materials Classes. 316. PVC’ European Piping Material Class Descriptions. It consists of six ch names which are established on the basis of the naming convention ABCDEF.. Reinforced Concrete’ 7733 = [XTY1U9] [9X7733] ’SCH-80.. A Other Materials.. 347HF Trim’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF... Inconel 600....materials group B... SE... 316. 321/347 Valves...... Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE... 321/347 Valves. meaning of each of the characters in this code is defined below... Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF.....service description F.corrosion allowance or type of lining E.pressure rating o The name of a Piping Materials Class is then determined from the conventi FAXXX. Corresp values are given in the lists included in subsequent pages. 347HF Trim’ ’CL600 RFFE-SF.... 321/347 Valves.._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 5187 5188 5189 5197 6246 6247 6258 6449 6450 6457 = = = = = = = = = = [SEF3C1] [SEF3C2] [SEF3C4] [SEF3G1] [SHJ3B2] [SHJ3B4] [SHJ5B2] [SHV3B5] [SHV3B6] [SHV5B6] [1S5187] [2S5188] [4S5189] [1S5197] [2S6246] [4S6247] [2S6258] [5S6449] [6S6450] [6S6457] ’CL150 RFFE. Inconel Trim’ Aluminum Alloys. 316..... 316.. K Nickel Alloys. 347HF Trim’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. 347HF Trim’ ’CL900 BE/RFFE-SF..... where: F. 321/347 Valves.detail features D. N 7540 = [NGF5G1] [1N7540] ’CL150 RFFE.sequence number from list in 2090-41-SN MATERIALS GROUP AND TYPE: (1st and 2nd character) 606 ...materials type C. 347HF Trim’ Copper Alloys. A. 347HF Trim’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE. 321/347 Valves..material group XXX. Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE.......pressure rating A.

25Cr-1Mo 3Cr-1Mo 5Cr-0. C A= CS D= CS.25Cr-0. jacketed P= CS._ _______________ Appendix B: Irons.5Mo 2Cr-0. F A= Gray iron D= Ductile iron G= Ferritic ductile iron J= Austenitic ductile iron Z= Other 1 Carbon Steels.5Mo 2.5Mo 1Cr-0. killed M= CS. killed.75Cr-0.5Mo 7Cr-0.5Mo 1.5Ni 5Ni 9Ni C-0.5Mo 0. L 2Ni-1Cu 3. galvanized G= CS. S A= 304 B= 304L C= 304H D= 310 E= 316 F= 316L G= 316H H= 321 J= 321H K= 410S L= CHP10 M= CHP20 N= CPF10MC O= CPH8 P= CPK20 Q= UNS S31200 R= UNS S31250 S= UNS S31500 T= UNS S31803 U= UNS S32304 V= UNS S32550 W= Alloy 20 X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 607 . jacketed J= CS. low temp X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Low A= C= D= G= J= M= N= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= X= Y= Z= and Intermediate Alloys. Codelists Stainless Steels.5Mo 9Cr-1Mo Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 General Comments B.

X A= Asbestos cement B= Borosilicate glass C= Clay. K A= Brass F= Bronze K= Copper P= 90Cu-10Ni R= 70Cu-30Ni X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Nickel Alloys. A C= 3002 aluminum D= 3003 aluminum E= 3004 aluminum F= 5050 aluminum G= 5052 aluminum Q= 6061 aluminum R= 6063 aluminum S= Alclad X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Other Materials. reinforced F= CPVC G= Epoxy/Glass fib J= Furan/Carbon K= Furan/Glass fib L= Kynar N= Nylon P= Polyester/Glass fib Q= Polyethylene. high dens R= Polyethylene. vitrified D= Concrete._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Copper Alloys. low dens S= Polypropylene T= PVC U= Teflon V= Titanium 608 . prestressed E= Concrete. N A= Low C Ni D= Monel E= K-Monel F= R-Monel G= Inconel 600 H= Inconel 601 J= Inconel 625 L= Incoloy 800 M= Incoloy 800H N= Incoloy 801 P= Incoloy 802 Q= Incoloy 825 T= Hastelloy B U= Hastelloy C V= Hastelloy G X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Aluminum Alloys.

SS trim RFSF. Codelists CA OR LINING TYPE: (4th character) 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H= J= L= M= N= O= P= Q= R= S= T= None 0. SS trim MJ.10" 0.125" 0. other Other 1 Other 2 General Comments B.030" 0. std trim BE. SS trim RTJ. std trim MJ. other RTJ. SS trim BE._ _______________ Appendix B: W= X= Y= Z= Zirconium Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 MATERIALS CLASS DETAILS: (3rd character) A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H= J= K= L= M= N= 0= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= W= X= Y= Z= Std FF. other Std RF.250" 405 clad 410S clad 304 clad 304L clad 316 clad 316L clad 317 clad 317L clad 321 clad Cement lined Epoxy lined Glass lined Kynar lined Polyester lined Polypropylene lined PTFE lined Saran lined Teflon lined 609 .020" 0.188" 0. other RFSF.050" 0. Monel trim Std RF. std trim RTJ. Monel trim RTJ. SS trim Std RF. other Std RF. std trim Std FF. std trim Std RF. Monel trim BE. other MJ. Monel trim MJ.063" 0. other BE. std trim RFSF. Monel trim RFSF.

hot (-20 to 800 degF) Process._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 U= V= W= X= Y= Z= TK31 lined R11 lined R15 lined R18 lined Other 1 Other 2 SERVICE: (5th character) A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H= J= K= L= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= W= X= Y= Z= Process.1 Steam B31.degF) Process. hotter (-20 to 1000+/. hottest (-20 to 1500+/. colder (-20 to -150 degF) Process. seal oil Category D Firewater Sewer Instrument Other 1 Other 2 RATING: (6th character) 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= A= F= G= H= J= K= L= M= N= R= T= V= CL150 CL300 CL400 CL600 CL900 CL1500 CL2500 GRAVHD OTHER CL125 CL800 CL2000 CL3000 CL4500 CL5000 CL6000 CL9000 CL10000 CL15000 CL20000 CL30000 610 . cold (-20 to -50 degF) Process. coldest (-20 to -425 degF) Process.degF) Process. other Category M Acid Caustic/Amine LPG Steam ASME-I Steam B31. fuel oil Lube oil.3 Fuel gas.

08’ ’PS1. Contractor supplied.04’ ’PS1. field fabricated’ ’BSSF. Contractor supplied. Fabrication Category (99) NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown._ _______________ Appendix B: General Comments CL160. Coating Requirements (99) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] ’None’ ’Galv’ ’PS1. Codelists CL180.01’ ’PS4.02’ ’PS4. shop fabricated’ ’SSFF. Owner supplied.13’ ’PS2. Field supplied. field fabricated’ ’SSSF.04’ ’PS4. Owner supplied. field fabricated’ ’FSSF.03’ ’PS2. shop fabricated’ ’ASFF. Shop supplied. shop fabricated’ ’BSFF. A supplied.03’ ’PS4. field fabricated’ ’ASSF. Responsibility (25) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 25 = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] ’By Contractor’ ’By Owner’ ’By A’ ’By B’ ’By C’ ’By D’ ’By E’ ’By Equip Vendor’ ’By Vendor’ ’By Piping’ ’By Instruments’ ’By Others’ B. Field supplied. field fabricated’ CL190. shop fabricated’ ’OSFF. shop fabricated’ ’FSFF. other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.05’ 611 . Shop supplied.10’ ’PS1. A supplied. B supplied. field fabricated’ ’OSSF. B supplied. 1 5 7 15 17 25 27 35 37 45 47 95 97 = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] ’CSSF. shop fabricated’ ’CSFF.12’ ’PS1.09’ ’PS1.11’ ’PS1.07’ ’PS1.05’ ’PS4.

40-60 40 = ’FAJ’ [Heat transfer fluid A] 41 = ’FBJ’ [Heat transfer fluid B] 42 = ’FCJ’ [Heat transfer fluid C] 50 = ’SHJ’ [Steam high pressure. Heat Tracing Media (60) NOTE: Codelist numbers 3-39 have been reserved for heat tracing media used for non-jacketed pipe heat tracing. CL300] 54 = ’SSJ’ [Steam superheated] 612 .01’ ’PS13.01’ ’PS10. CL300] 24 = ’SS’ [Steam superheated] For Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing. Heat Tracing Requirements (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set.01’ ’PS18.01’ ’PS10.02’ ’PS11. CL900] 21 = ’SL’ [Steam low pressure.01’ ’PS16. CL600] 23 = ’SN’ [Steam normal pressure. 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’N’ [None] For Non Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing.01’ ’PS14. CL900] 51 = ’SLJ’ [Steam low pressure.01’ ’PS9.01’ ’Varies’ CL200._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 40 = = = = = = = = = = = ’PS8. It is important that this allocation be respected. 1 2 3 4 = = = = [Blank] ’NT’ [Not heat traced] ’HT’ [Heat traced] ’PHT’ [Partially heat traced] CL210. CL150] 52 = ’SMJ’ [Steam medium pressure. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Codelist numbers 40-60 have been reserved for heat tracing media used for jacketed pipe heat tracing. CL600] 53 = ’SNJ’ [Steam normal pressure. CL150] 22 = ’SM’ [Steam medium pressure.01’ ’PS12. 3-39 3 = ’E’ [Electric] 10 = ’FA’ [Heat transfer fluid A] 11 = ’FB’ [Heat transfer fluid B] 12 = ’FC’ [Heat transfer fluid C] 16 = ’I’ [Impedance] 17 = ’MI’ [Magnetic induction] 18 = ’SKE’ [Skin effect] 20 = ’SH’ [Steam high pressure.

26-29 for ends with [Raised-face flanged termination type] [Raised-face flanged end] [Raised-face flanged end with integral gasket] Use 31-35 for ends without integral gaskets. erosion] B._ _______________ Appendix B: General Comments CL220. 30 = ’RJFTP (31-39)’ [RTJ-face flanged termination type] 31 = ’RJFE’ [RTJ-face flanged end] 613 . 300-399 for male types and 400-599 for female types. CP Type/Termination/Preparation (999) NOTE: Use 2-199 for bolted types. insulation/erosion] [Refractory lined. Codelists CL230. Cleaning Requirements (99) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 = = = = = = = = [Blank] ’None’ ’CC1’ ’CC2’ ’CC3’ ’CC4’ ’CC5’ ’Varies’ CL330. 20 = ’RFTP (21-29)’ 21 = ’RFFE’ 26 = ’RFFEWG’ [Flanged end] integral gaskets. 16-19 for ends with [Flat-face flanged termination type] [Flat-face flanged end] [Flat-face flanged end with integral gasket] integral gaskets. 10 = ’FFTP (11-19)’ 11 = ’FFFE’ 16 = ’FFFEWG’ Use 21-25 for ends without integral gaskets. Refer to Reference Data Manager (PD_DATA) Reference Guide for additional data. 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’FE’ Use 11-15 for ends without integral gaskets. 36-39 for ends with integral gaskets. insulation] [Refractory lined. Insulation Purpose (40) 1 2 3 4 5 11 14 15 16 17 18 20 21 22 30 32 34 40 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] ’N’ ’P’ ’H’ ’HS’ ’HF’ ’AS’ ’C’ ’CV’ ’CS’ ’CH’ ’CF’ ’S’ ’SV’ ’R11’ ’R15’ ’R18’ ’Varies’ [Not insulated] [Personnel protection insulated] [Hot insulated] [Hot insulated with sound attenuation] [Hot insulated with fire protection] [Anti-sweat insulated] [Cold insulated] [Cold insulated vacuum type] [Cold insulated with sound attenuation] [Cold and hot insulated] [Cold insulated with fire protection] [Sound attenuation insulated] [Sound attenuation insulation with vapor barrier] [Refractory lined.

80 = ’RJFLFTP (81-89)’ [RTJ-face lap-flanged termination type] 81 = ’RJLFE’ [RTJ-face lap-flanged end] Use 91-95 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets. 46-49 for ends with [Tongue/male-face flanged termination type] [Small-tongue-face flanged end] [Large-tongue-face flanged end] [Small-male-face flanged end] [Large-male-face flanged end] integral gaskets. 70 = ’RFLFTP (71-79)’ [Raised-face lap-flanged termination type] 71 = ’RFLFE’ [Raised-face lap-flanged end] Use 81-85 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets. 136-139 for ends with integral gaskets. 76-79 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 116-119 for ends thru-bolted termination type] thru-bolted end] thru-bolted end with integral gasket] Use 111-115 for ends without integral with integral gaskets. 126-129 for ends with integral gaskets. 110 = ’FFTBTP (111-119)’[Flat-face 111 = ’FFTBE’ [Flat-face 116 = ’FFTBEWG’ [Flat-face Use 121-125 for ends without integral gaskets. 56-59 for ends with [Groove/female-face flanged termination type] [Small-groove-face flanged end] [Large-groove-face flanged end] [Small-female-face flanged end] [Large-female-face flanged end] Use 61-65 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets. 96-99 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 130 = ’RJTBTP (131-139)’[RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type] 131 = ’RJTBE’ [RTJ-face thru-bolted end] 614 . 106-109 lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 120 = ’RFTBTP (121-129)’[Raised-face thru-bolted termination type] 121 = ’RFTBE’ [Raised-face thru-bolted end] 126 = ’RFTBEWG’ [Raised-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket] Use 131-135 for ends without integral gaskets. 90 = ’TMFLFTP (91-99)’ [Tongue/male-face lap-flanged termination type] 91 = ’STLFE’ [Small-tongue-face lap-flanged end] 92 = ’LTLFE’ [Large-tongue-face lap-flanged end] 93 = ’SMLFE’ [Small-male-face lap-flanged end] 94 = ’LMLFE’ [Large-male-face lap-flanged end] Use for 100 101 102 103 104 101-105 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets. 86-89 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 40 = ’TMFTP (41-49)’ 41 = ’STFE’ 42 = ’LTFE’ 43 = ’SMFE’ 44 = ’LMFE’ Use 51-55 for ends without integral gaskets. 66-69 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. = ’GFFLFTP (101-109)’[Groove/female-face lap-flanged termination type] = ’SGLFE’ [Small-groove-face lap-flanged end] = ’LGLFE’ [Large-groove-face lap-flanged end] = ’SFLFE’ [Small-female-face lap-flanged end] = ’LFLFE’ [Large-female-face lap-flanged end] gaskets. 60 = ’FFLFTP (61-69)’ [Flat-face lap-flanged termination type] 61 = ’FFLFE [Flat-face lap-flanged end] Use 71-75 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Use 41-45 for ends without integral gaskets. 50 = ’GFFTP (51-59)’ 51 = ’SGFE’ 52 = ’LGFE’ 53 = ’SFFE’ 54 = ’LFFE’ integral gaskets.

166-169 for ends with integral gaskets. 6" field fit] (401-409)’[Socket termination type] [Socket end] 400 = ’STP 401 = ’SE’ Use 421-429 for welded ends only 420 = ’SWTP (421-429)’[Socketwelded termination type] 421 = ’SWE’ [Socketwelded end] 615 . 3" field fit] = ’6"FFPE’ [Plain end. 140 = ’MRJTBTP (141-149)’[Male RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type] 146 = ’MRJTBEWG’ [Male RTJ-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket] gaskets. 150 = ’FFTBCSTP (151-159)’[Flat-face 151 = ’FFTBCSE’ [Flat-face 156 = ’FFTBCSEWG’ [Flat-face General Comments Use 141-145 for ends without integral gaskets._ _______________ Appendix B: Use 151-155 for ends without integral with integral gaskets. 176-179 for ends with integral gaskets. 186-189 with integral gaskets. 160 = ’RFTBCSTP (161-169)’[Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination 161 = ’RFTBCSE’ [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end] 166 = ’RFTBCSEWG’ [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with int Use 171-175 for ends without integral gaskets. 156-159 for ends thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination ty thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end] thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with integ Use 161-165 for ends without integral gaskets. Codelists (190-199)’[Mechanical joint termination type] [Mechanical joint end] (301-399)’[Male termination type] Use 301-309 for welded ends only 301 = ’BE’ [Beveled end] 302 = ’OLET’ [Olet beveled end] Use 311 321 331 341 351 355 361 371 381 Use 391 393 395 311-319 for welded ends only = ’TBE’ [Tapered and beveled end] = ’MFE’ [Male flared end] = ’MTE’ [Male threaded end] = ’MGE’ [Male grooved end] = ’MQCE’ [Male quick connect end] = ’MCE’ [Male clamp end] = ’MFRE’ [Male ferrule end] = ’MHE’ [Male hose end] = ’SPE’ [Spigot end] 391-399 for welded ends only = ’PE (391-399)’[Plain end] = ’3"FFPE’ [Plain end. 170 = ’RJTBCSTP (171-179)’[RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination typ 171 = ’RJTBCSE’ [RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end] Use 181-185 for ends without integral gaskets. 180 = ’FFFTBTP (181-189)’[Flat-full-face thru-bolted 181 = ’FFFTBE’ [Flat-full-face thru-bolted 186 = ’FFFTBEWG’ [Flat-full-face thru-bolted 190 = ’MJTP 191 = ’MJE’ 300 = ’MTP for ends termination type] end] end with integral gasket] B. 146-149 for ends with integral gaskets.

4375’ ’. Schedule / Thickness Override NOTE: Schedule/thickness override values for metric projects must have codelist values between 499 and 1000.8125’ 616 . The value provided by the User will be used for initial placement of the component as well as for subsequent recreations of the piping system.625’ ’. it will prompt the User to define the actual CP preparation to use.3125’ ’._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 440 = ’FTTP 441 = ’FTE’ 460 = ’FGTP 461 = ’FGE’ 470 = ’FCTP 471 = ’FCE’ 480 = ’FQCTP 481 = ’FQCE’ 500 = ’FFRTP 501 = ’FFRE’ 520 = ’FHTP 521 = ’FHE’ 540 = ’BLTP 541 = ’BLE’ 542 = ’MJBE’ 590 = ’HTP (441-449)’[Female threaded termination type] [Female threaded end] (461-469)’[Female grooved termination type] [Female grooved end] (471-479)’[Female clamp termination type] [Female clamp end] (481-489)’[Female quick connect termination type] [Female quick connect end] (501-509)’[Female ferrule termination type] [Female ferrule end] (521-529)’[Female hose termination type] [Female hose end] (541-549)’[Bell end termination type] [Push-on bell end] [Mechanical joint bell end] (581-599)’[Hole end termination type] Use 591-599 for welded ends only 591 = ’HCE’ [Circular hole end] 600 = ’NTP 601 = ’NE’ 650 = ’UDTP 651 = ’UD’ (600-605)’[Null termination type] [Null end] (651-659)’[User defined termination type] [User defined end] (When a "UD" preparation end is detected by the system in the piping materials class.25’ ’.125’ ’.1875’ ’.5’ ’.75’ ’.5625’ ’.) CL332.375’ ’. 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] ’.0625’ ’.6875’ ’.

875’ ’2.625’ ’1.125’ ’2.9375’ ’1’ ’1.5625’ ’1.1875’ ’1.25’ ’1._ _______________ Appendix B: 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 100 101 102 103 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 130 131 132 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’.5625’ ’2.9375’ ’2’ ’2.375’ ’2.0625’ ’2.875’ ’1.5’ ’2.6875’ ’2. Codelists 617 .3125’ ’1.125’ ’1.75’ ’1.75’ ’2.3125’ ’2.375’ ’1.6875’ ’1.4375’ ’2.8125’ ’2.25’ ’2.4375’ ’1.625’ ’2.8125’ ’1.5’ ’1.9375’ ’3’ ’S-5S’ ’S-10S’ ’S-40S’ ’S-80S’ ’S-10’ ’S-20’ ’S-30’ ’S-40’ ’S-60’ ’S-80’ ’S-100’ ’S-120’ ’S-140’ ’S-160’ ’S-STD’ ’S-XS’ ’S-XXS’ General Comments B.1875’ ’2.0625’ ’1.875’ ’.

0 = ’None’ 1 = ’reconstruct’ 2 = ’re-calculate’ CL380. Reporting Requirements (25) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. Requirement to Reconstruct (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 = ’Reportable by MTO’ 2 = ’Not Reportable by MTO’ CL366. Piping Component Type (2500) 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’Piping’ 3 = ’Piping’ 4 = ’Piping’ [Primary single line] [Secondary single line] [Primary double line] 618 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 CL340. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown. Labels always require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’ANR =Analysis not required’ 3 = ’ATBP=Analysis to be performed’ 4 = ’AC =Analysis completed’ CL365. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Safety Classification (99) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] ’SC1’ ’SC2’ ’SC3’ ’SC4’ ’SC5’ ’SC6’ ’SC7’ ’SC8’ ’SC9’ CL360. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Stress Analysis Requirements (15) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.

_ _______________ Appendix B: 5 = ’Piping’ 6 = ’Hose’ 8 = ’Tubing’ 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 39 43 47 49 50 51 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 67 68 70 71 73 74 75 79 86 89 90 93 97 98 99 117 119 120 122 124 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Double line] ’Gate valve’ ’Extended body gate valve’ ’Conduit gate valve’ ’Blank gate valve’ ’3-way valve’ ’Ball valve’ [2-way] ’2-way valve’ ’3-way ball valve’ ’Globe valve’ [2-way] ’Angle globe valve’ [2-way] ’3-way globe valve’ ’Y globe valve’ ’Plug valve’ [2-way] ’4-way valve’ ’3-way plug valve’ ’4-way plug valve’ ’Needle valve’ ’Butterfly valve’ ’Diaphragm valve’ ’Knife gate valve’ ’Slide valve’ [2-way] ’3-way slide valve’ ’Angle valve’ ’Check valve’ ’Wafer check valve’ ’Angle check valve’ ’Stop check valve’ ’Angle stop check valve’ ’Y stop check valve’ ’Backflow preventer’ ’Automatic recirculation valve’ ’Angle blowdown valve’ ’Y blowdown valve’ ’Pinch valve’ ’Float valve’ ’Foot valve’ ’Tank drain valve’ ’Deluge valve’ ’Hose valve’ ’Angle hose valve’ ’Vent/drain valve’ ’Instrument root valve’ ’3-way instrument root valve’ ’4-way instrument root valve’ ’Flange’ ’Reducing flange’ ’Expander flange’ ’Orifice flange’ ’Blind flange’ ’Open spectacle blank’ ’Closed spectacle blank’ ’Blank disc’ ’Blind spacer’ ’Tapered spacer’ ’Open spacer’ ’End’ ’Head’ General Comments B. Codelists 619 .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 135 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 148 151 152 155 156 157 159 160 162 163 165 167 169 171 172 173 175 176 177 179 181 182 184 189 191 192 193 195 196 198 200 202 204 206 207 209 210 216 218 220 222 223 224 229 231 233 237 239 240 242 243 246 249 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’Plug’ ’Cap’ ’Diameter change’ ’Concentric diameter change’ ’Eccentric diameter change’ ’Coupling/connector’ ’Half coupling’ ’Concentric reducer’ ’Eccentric reducer’ ’Reducing coupling’ ’Concentric swage’ ’Eccentric swage’ ’Union’ ’Orifice union’ ’Dielectric union’ ’Hose connection’ ’Bushing’ ’Reducing insert’ ’Pipe bend’ ’5.25 deg elbow’ ’22.5 deg elbow’ ’<45 deg direction change’ ’45 deg direction change’ ’45 deg elbow’ ’45 deg LR elbow’ ’45 deg long tangent elbow’ ’45 deg 3D elbow’ ’45 deg union elbow’ ’45 deg street elbow’ ’45 deg short elbow’ ’45 deg long elbow’ ’60 deg elbow’ ’45-90 deg direction change’ ’90 deg direction change’ ’90 deg elbow’ ’90 deg SR elbow’ ’90 deg LR elbow’ ’90 deg LR long tangent elbow’ ’90 deg reducing elbow’ ’90 deg 3D elbow’ ’90 deg union elbow’ ’90 deg street elbow’ ’90 deg reducing street elbow’ ’90 deg short elbow’ ’90 deg long elbow’ ’180 deg return’ ’180 deg SR return’ ’180 deg LR return’ ’180 deg close return’ ’180 deg medium return’ ’180 deg open return’ ’Miter’ ’45 deg miter’ ’90 deg miter’ ’Tee’ ’Reducing branch tee’ ’Reducing run and branch tee’ ’On-run union tee’ ’On-branch union tee’ ’Street tee’ ’Reducing instrument tee’ 620 .625 deg elbow’ ’11.

Codelists 621 ._ _______________ Appendix B: 251 253 260 262 264 265 267 268 269 270 275 277 278 279 285 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 297 299 303 304 310 312 313 315 316 317 318 319 320 324 325 327 338 339 340 344 345 346 352 353 354 374 380 513 515 516 517 518 519 521 523 524 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’Drip ring tee’ ’Basin tee’ ’True Y’ ’Lateral’ ’Reducing branch lateral’ ’Reducing run and branch lateral’ ’90 deg short Y-branch’ ’90 deg reducing short Y-branch’ ’90 deg long Y-branch’ ’90 deg reducing long Y-branch’ ’Cross’ ’Reducing branches cross’ ’Reducing run and branches cross’ ’Basin cross’ ’Saddle’ ’Sweepolet’ ’Weldolet’ ’Sockolet’ ’Thredolet’ ’Nippolet’ ’Elbolet’ ’Latrolet’ ’Endolet’ ’Reinforcing pad’ ’Reinforcing weld’ ’Buttweld’ ’Branch nipple’ ’In-line nipple’ ’Gasket’ ’Stud’ ’Nut’ ’Fire monitor’ ’Elevated fire monitor’ ’Remotely operated fire monitor’ ’Foam monitor’ ’Elevated foam monitor’ ’Remotely operated foam monitor’ ’Fire hydrant’ [2-way] ’Fire hydrant w/monitor nozzle’ [2-way] ’3-way fire hydrant’ ’Hose reel’ ’Hose rack station’ ’Foam chamber’ ’Wet sprinkler’ ’Pre-action sprinkler’ ’Spray sprinkler’ ’Eye wash’ ’Safety shower’ ’Safety shower and eye wash’ ’Siamese’ [2-way] ’90 deg siamese’ [2-way] ’Flame arrestor’ ’Hammer arrestor’ ’Vent silencer’ ’In-line silencer’ ’Vent’ ’Exhaust head’ ’Breather vent’ ’Free vent w/o screen’ ’Free vent w/screen’ General Comments B.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 525 527 529 533 535 540 542 544 546 548 552 556 557 559 561 563 564 565 567 569 571 576 582 583 584 586 588 590 611 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’Motor operated valve’ ’Mixing T’ ’Spray nozzle’ ’Removable spool’ ’Swing elbow’ ’Expansion joint’ ’Hinged expansion joint’ ’Swivel joint’ ’Mechanical coupling’ ’Flexible hose’ ’Sample cooler’ ’Strainer/filter’ ’Single basket strainer’ ’Duplex basket strainer’ ’T strainer’ ’Y strainer’ ’Temporary strainer’ ’Basket strainer’ ’Cone strainer’ ’Flat plate strainer’ ’Sump strainer’ ’Filter’ ’Steam trap’ ’Float steam trap’ ’Inverted bucket steam trap’ ’Thermostatic steam trap’ ’Thermodynamic steam trap’ ’Impulse steam trap’ ’Generic component’ 613 = ’Pip seg heat tracing brk/comp 2’ 747 748 749 750 823 824 825 833 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 909 911 913 923 927 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’Air utility station’ ’Nitrogen utility station’ ’Water utility station’ ’Steam utility station’ ’Vent/drain detail 1’ ’Vent/drain detail 2’ ’Vent/drain detail 3’ ’Vent/drain detail H’ ’Connection detail 1’ ’Connection detail 2’ ’Connection detail 3’ ’Connection detail 4’ ’Connection detail 5’ ’Connection detail 6’ ’Connection detail 7’ ’Connection detail 8’ ’Anchor’ ’1-way support’ ’2-way support’ ’Spring support’ ’Damping support’ 1008 = ’Tie-in marker’ 1018 1019 1020 1038 1039 = = = = = ’Utility connector’ ’Drain connector’ ’Utility station connector’ ’TRM off-dwg piping connector’ ’TLM off-dwg piping connector’ 622 .

_ _______________ Appendix B: 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1047 1049 1053 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1079 1083 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’TTM off-dwg piping connector’ ’TBM off-dwg piping connector’ ’FRM off-dwg piping connector’ ’FLM off-dwg piping connector’ ’FTM off-dwg piping connector’ ’FBM off-dwg piping connector’ ’Utility off-dwg pip connector’ ’To off-vol piping connector’ ’From off-vol piping connector’ ’TRM off-unit piping connector’ ’TLM off-unit piping connector’ ’TTM off-unit piping connector’ ’TBM off-unit piping connector’ ’FRM off-unit piping connector’ ’FLM off-unit piping connector’ ’FTM off-unit piping connector’ ’FBM off-unit piping connector’ ’To off-site piping connector’ ’From off-site piping connector’ General Comments B. 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1529 1530 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’Valve generic’ ’Angle plug valve’ ’Non-return valve’ ’Check valve’ ’Valve with continous action’ ’4-way globe valve’ ’4-way valve.generic’ ’Steam throttling angle valve’ ’Steam throttling 3-way globe valve’ ’Butterfly valve with continous action’ [Blank] [Blank] ’Globe valve with continous action’ ’Gate valve with continous action’ ’Plug valve with continous action’ ’Angle globe valve with continous action’ ’Free wheel check valve’ ’Safety check valve’ ’Fire safety butterfly valve’ ’Aeration and deaeration armature’ ’Angle ball valve’ ’4-way ball valve’ ’Taper plug valve’ ’Taper angle plug valve’ ’3-way taper plug valve’ ’4-way taper plug valve’ ’Flat seal bottom’ ’Blank disk’ ’Flange connection’ ’Screwed connection’ ’Angle diaphragm valve’ 1533 = ’Safety valve’ 1534 = ’Safety valve regulated with spring’ 1535 = ’Safety valve regulated with weight’ 623 . Codelists 1108 = ’Piping node marker’ 1117 = ’Terminator piping connector’ Entries above 1500 are reserved for DIN components.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1542 1543 1544 1545 1546 1548 1549 1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1555 1556 1557 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1579 1580 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1587 1588 1590 1591 1592 1593 1594 1595 1596 1597 1598 1599 1600 1601 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’Angle safety valve’ ’Angle safety valve regulated with spring’ ’Rupture disk’ ’Aeration with screw cap’ ’Inspection glass’ ’Aeration with plug’ ’Flanged aeration’ ’90 deg earation’ ’180 deg earation’ ’Tapered filter’ ’Discharge valve with blind flange’ ’Discharge valve’ ’Discharge with blind flanged gate valve’ ’Discharge with gate valve’ ’Bellow expansion joint’ ’Lyra expansion joint’ ’90 degree elbow for JP’ ’T connection for JP’ ’Flange between JP’ ’Valve for connecting JP media’ ’Blindflange JP’ ’Skewed connection JP’ ’Y connection JP’ ’flanged connection segment/comp type 1’ ’flanged connection segment/comp type 2’ ’flanged connection segment/comp type 3’ ’flanged connection segment/comp type 4’ ’Flange from JP to normal pipe’ ’Valve for JP media supply’ ’Flange connection for JP’ ’Bypass for JP media’ ’Flange for bypassing JP’ ’Syphon’ ’Ball linkage’ ’Mixing component’ ’Flow straightener’ [Blank] ’Spring clip’ ’Fire extinguishing equipment powder’ ’Fire extinguishing equipment halogen’ ’Fire extinguishing equipment carbonic acid’ ’Fire extinguishing equipment foam’ ’Fire extinguishing equipment floor connection’ ’Fire extinguishing equipment overhead conn.’ ’Fire extinguishing connector’ ’Fire extinguishing water supply’ ’Fire brigade accessory’ ’Hydrant ground floor’ ’Hydrant overhead’ ’Wall hydrant’ ’Sprinkler equipment’ ’Flooding spray equipment’ ’Spraying equipment’ ’Refrigerating unit’ ’Globe valve with open function’ ’Angle valve with open function’ ’Clamp joint’ ’Taper pipe thread’ [Blank] ’Socket joint’ ’Taper pipe joint’ ’Cool box’ 624 .

Option (999) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. do not change the meaning of the indicated codelist ranges. 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’Bypass PMC’ Use to bypass PMC access Types Options. The number of codelist numbers used in this codelist set must not exceed 5000. 21-60 21 = ’Red port’ 24 = ’Full port’ 27 = ’Tight SO’ 30 = ’Dbl disc’ 32 = ’Y pattern’ 33 = ’Wafer’ 34 = ’Lug’ 36 = ’Single flange’ 38 = ’1/8" hole’ 39 = ’Non lube’ 40 = ’3/16" hole’ [Reduced port valve] [Full port valve] [Tight shutoff valve] [Double disc valve] [Y pattern valve] [Wafer valve] [Lug pattern] [Single flange valve] [1/8" diam hole in flapper] [Non-lubricated valve] [3/16" diam hole in flapper] 625 . Codelists [Energize to [Energize to [De-energize [De-energize CL400. Action (40) 1 = [Blank] 2 3 5 6 10 11 15 16 18 19 20 24 30 31 34 35 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’NO’ ’NC’ ’CSO’ ’CSC’ ’LO’ ’LC’ ’FO’ ’FC’ ’FL’ ’FLO’ ’FLC’ ’FI’ ’EO’ ’EC’ ’DEO’ ’DEC’ [Normally open] [Normally closed] [Car seal open] [Car seal closed] [Locked open] [Locked closed] [Fail [Fail [Fail [Fail [Fail [Fail open] closed] locked] locked open] locked closed] indeterminate] open] close] to open] to close] B._ _______________ Appendix B: 1602 = ’Ball float valve’ 1603 = ’Ball check valve’ 1604 = ’Flanged joint’ General Comments CL390. 11-19 11 = ’Type 1’ 12 = ’Type 2’ 13 = ’Type 3’ 14 = ’Type 4’ 15 = ’Type 5’ 16 = ’Type 6’ 17 = ’Type 7’ 18 = ’Type 8’ 19 = ’Type 9’ Valve Type Options.

5D bend’ [1._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 49 50 56 57 58 59 60 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’1/4" hole’ ’Lube’ ’Quick close’ ’Quick open’ ’Al chk’ ’Excess flow’ ’Limit stop’ ’Hor chk’ ’Vert chk’ ’Tap lcn G’ ’Tap lcns G & ’Tap lcns G & ’Tap lcns G & ’Tap lcns G & [1/4" diam hole in flapper] [Lubricated valve] [Quick closing valve] [Quick opening valve] [Alarm check valve] [Excess flow check valve] [Limit stop valve] [Horizontal check valve] [Vertical check valve] [Tap at location G] [Tap at locations G & H] [Tap at locations G & I] [Tap at locations G & J] [Tap at locations G & K] H’ I’ J’ K’ Valve Operator Options.5D pipe bend] = ’3D bend’ [3D pipe bend] = ’4D bend’ [4D pipe bend] = ’5D bend’ [5D pipe bend] = ’6D bend’ [6D pipe bend] = ’10D bend’ [10D pipe bend] Type Options. top mounted handwheel] 76 = ’GSM op’ [Gear operator. 161-170 161 = ’Housing’ [Housing] 163 = ’After vlv’ [After isolating valve] 165 = ’Match branch nipple’ [Match branch nipple] 167 = ’Straight ends’ [Straight ends] 168 = ’Hor’ [Horizontal] 169 = ’Vert’ [Vertical] Flange 171 = 173 = 175 = 177 = 179 = Type Options. 171-200 ’WN’ [Weld neck flange] ’LWN’ [Long weld neck flange] ’SO’ [Slip-on flange] ’LJ’ [Lap joint flange] ’PL’ [Plate flange] 626 . top mounted handw 91 = ’EXGSM op’ [Extended stem and gear operator. 61-100 61 = ’HW op’ [Handwheel] 64 = ’WR op’ [Wrench operator] 67 = ’LV op’ [Lever operator] 70 = ’T op’ [T-handle operator] 73 = ’GTM op’ [Gear operator. side mounted handwheel] 79 = ’EM op’ [Electric motor operator] 82 = ’ESHW op’ [Extended stem and handwheel] 88 = ’ESGTM op’ [Extended stem and gear operator. 141-150 = ’Hemi hd’ = ’Ellip hd’ = ’2:1 hd’ [Hemispherical head] [Ellipsoidal head] [2:1 elliptical head] Miter Options. 151-160 151 = ’1 cut’ 152 = ’2 cuts’ 153 = ’3 cuts’ 154 = ’4 cuts’ [1-cut miter] [2-cuts miter] [3-cuts miter] [4-cuts miter] Miscellaneous Options. 121-140 = ’1D bend’ [1D pipe bend] = ’1. side mounted hand 100 = ’Post ind’ [Post indicator] Bend 121 124 127 130 133 134 136 Head 141 143 145 Radius Options.

slip-on flange] [Long-stub-end. lap joint flange] [Short-stub-end. lap joint flange] [Filler flange] [Socket flange] [Socketwelded flange] [Socketwelded reducing flange] [Threaded flange] Bolted 202 = 211 = 216 = 221 = 226 = 231 = 241 = 242 = 243 = 244 = 251 = 252 = 253 = 254 = 261 = 271 = 281 = 291 = 292 = 293 = 294 = 301 = 302 = 303 = 304 = 311 = 316 = 321 = 326 = 331 = 346 = 351 = 356 = 361 = 366 = 371 = 381 = 386 = 391 = Male 401 402 411 421 431 441 451 455 461 [Flanged end] [Flat-face flanged end] [Flat-face flanged end w/ integral gasket] [Raised-face flanged end] [Raised-face flanged end w/ integral gasket] [RTJ-face flanged end] [Small-tongue-face flanged end] [Large-tongue-face flanged end] [Small-male-face flanged end] [Large-male-face flanged end] [Small-groove-face flanged end] [Large-groove-face flanged end] [Small-female-face flanged end] [Large-female-face flanged end] [Flat-face lap-flanged end] [Raised-face lap-flanged end] [RTJ-face lap-flanged end] [Small-tongue-face lap-flanged end] [Large-tongue-face lap-flanged end] [Small-male-face lap-flanged end] [Large-male-face lap-flanged end] [Small-groove-face lap-flanged end] [Large-groove-face lap-flanged end] [Small-female-face lap-flanged end] [Large-female-face lap-flanged end] [Flat-face thru-bolted end] [Flat-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket] [Raised-face thru-bolted end] [Raised-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket] [RTJ-face thru-bolted end] [Male RTJ-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket] [Flat-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end] [Flat-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end w/ integra [Raised-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end] [Raised-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end w/ integ [RTJ-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end] [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end] [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket] [Mechanical joint end] B. 401-500 = ’BE’ = ’OLET’ = ’TBE’ = ’MFE’ = ’MTE’ = ’MGE’ = ’MQCE’ = ’MCE’ = ’MFRE’ [Beveled end] [Olet beveled end] [Tapered and beveled end] [Male flared end] [Male threaded end] [Male grooved end] [Male quick connect end] [Male clamp end] [Male ferrule end] 627 . Codelists End Options._ _______________ Appendix B: 181 183 185 187 189 191 193 195 196 197 = = = = = = = = = = ’SS-SO’ ’SS-LJ’ ’SS-PL’ ’LS-SO’ ’LS-LP’ ’Filler’ ’Socket’ ’SW’ ’SW Red’ ’Thd’ End Options. slip-on flange] [Short-stub-end. plate flange] [Long-stub-end. 201-400 ’FE’ ’FFFE’ ’FFFEWG’ ’RFFE’ ’RFFEWG’ ’RJFE’ ’STFE’ ’LTFE’ ’SMFE’ ’LMFE’ ’SGFE’ ’LGFE’ ’SFFE’ ’LFFE’ ’FFLFE’ ’RFLFE’ ’RJLFE’ ’STLFE’ ’LTLFE’ ’SMLFE’ ’LMLFE’ ’SGLFE’ ’LGLFE’ ’SFLFE’ ’LFLFE’ ’FFTBE’ ’FFTBEWG’ ’RFTBE’ ’RFTBEWG’ ’RJTBE’ ’MRJTBEWG’ ’FFTBCSE’ ’FFTBCSEWG’ ’RFTBCSE’ ’RFTBCSEWG’ ’RJTBCSE’ ’FFFTBE’ ’FFFTBEWG’ ’MJE’ General Comments [Short-stub-end.

0" [4. long.0" [4.0" [4.0" [4.0"(100mm) MTE’ ’4. long. long.0"(125mm) BE’ ’5.0" [5.0"(100mm) PE’ ’4.0"(75mm) PE’ ’3.0" [3.0" [3.0"(75mm) BE’ ’3.0"(75mm) BE x MTE’ ’3.0"(125mm) BE x MTE’ [3. 718-755 ’3.0" [4. 3" field fit] [Plain end. long. 699-699 699 = ’UD’ [User defined] Mixed End Options. (697-697) 697 = ’NE’ [Null end] User Defined End Options.0" [5.0"(125mm) MTE’ ’5.0"(75mm) BE x PE’ ’3.0" [3. long._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 471 481 491 493 495 = = = = = ’MHE’ ’SPE’ ’PE’ ’3"FFPE’ ’6"FFPE’ End Options.0" [3. long.0"(75mm) MTE x PE’ ’4. long. long. 701-717 701 = ’FE x MJE’ 702 = ’FE x BE’ 703 = ’FE x PE’ 705 = ’BE x MTE’ 706 = ’BE x PE’ 707 = ’BE x SWE’ 708 = ’BE x FTE’ 709 = ’OLET x FTE’ 710 = ’MTE x PE’ 711 = ’PE x MTE’ 712 = ’PE x SWE’ 713 = ’PE x FTE’ 714 = ’SWE x FTE’ 715 = ’OLET x SWE’ 716 = ’MTE x FTE’ 717 = ’FE x FTE’ [Flanged end by mechanical joint end] [Flanged end by beveled end] [Flanged end by plain end] [Beveled end by male threaded end] [Beveled end by plain end] [Beveled end by socketwelded end] [Beveled end by female threaded end] [Olet beveled end by female threaded end] [Male threaded end by plain end] [Plain end by male threaded end] [Plain end by socketwelded end] [Plain end by female threaded end] [Socketwelded end by female threaded end] [Olet beveled end by socketwelded end] [Male threaded end by female threaded end] [Flanged end by female threaded end] The following options have been modified to include mm in lengths and add British metric pressure ratings (PN).0" long. long.0" [4.0"(100mm) MTE x PE’ ’5. long.0"(125mm) PE’ ’5. long. Nipple 720 = 721 = 722 = 723 = 724 = 725 = 726 = 727 = 728 = 729 = 730 = 731 = 732 = 733 = 734 = 735 = Options.0" [5.0"(100mm) BE’ ’4.0" [5. long.0"(75mm) MTE’ ’3.0"(100mm) BE x PE’ ’4. long. 6" field fit] Female 501 = 521 = 541 = 561 = 581 = 601 = 621 = 641 = 642 = 691 = [Socket end] [Socketwelded end] [Female threaded end] [Female grooved end] [Female quick connect end] [Female ferrule end] [Female hose end] [Push-on bell end] [Mechanical joint bell end] [Circular hole end] User Defined Null End Options. long. BE] MTE] PE] BE x MTE] BE x PE] MTE x PE] BE] MTE] PE] BE x MTE] BE x PE] MTE x PE] BE] MTE] PE] BE x MTE] 628 .0"(100mm) BE x MTE’ ’4.0" [3. 501-696 ’SE’ ’SWE’ ’FTE’ ’FGE’ ’FQCE’ ’FFRE’ ’FHE’ ’BLE’ ’MJBE’ ’HCE’ [Male hose end] [Spigot end] [Plain end] [391-399] [Plain end. long.

0"(150mm) MTE’ ’6.0" long.0"(150mm) MTE x PE’ ’7.0"(175mm) PE’ ’7. MTE x PE] [7. PE] [9. BE x PE] [6.0"(200mm) PE’ ’9.0"(250mm) PE’ ’11.0" long. PE] [Hexagon] General Comments B.0"(150mm) BE’ ’6. MTE x PE] [6. BE x PE] [7.0" long.0"(125mm) BE x PE’ ’5. MTE x PE] [8. BE] [6.0"(175mm) MTE x PE’ ’8._ _______________ Appendix B: 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’5.0" long.0"(175mm) BE x MTE’ ’7.0"(125mm) MTE x PE’ ’6.0"(175mm) BE’ ’7.0"(175mm) MTE’ ’7.0" long. BE x MTE] [6.0" long. PE] [6.0" long. 756-849 ’CL25’ ’PN2. PE] [10.0" long.0" long.0"(150mm) PE’ ’6.0"(300mm) PE’ ’HEX’ Options.5’ ’CL50’ ’CL75’ ’86#’ ’CL100’ ’CL125’ ’CL150’ ’175#’ ’PN6’ ’PN10’ ’CL200’ ’PN16’ ’CL250’ ’275#’ ’CL300’ ’350#’ ’PN25’ ’PN40’ ’CL400’ ’PN64’ ’CL600’ ’PN100’ ’CL800’ ’CL900’ ’PN160’ ’1000#’ ’PN250’ ’PN320’ ’PN400’ ’CL1500’ ’CL2000’ ’CL2500’ ’CL3000’ ’CL4500’ ’CL5000’ ’CL6000’ ’CL9000’ ’CL10000’ ’CL15000’ [5.0"(275mm) PE’ ’12. BE] [7. PE] [12.0"(175mm) BE x PE’ ’7.0" long.0"(150mm) BE x MTE’ ’6.0" long.0"(225mm) PE’ ’1O.0" long. BE x MTE] [7.0" long. MTE] [6.0" long.0" long. PE] [7.0"(150mm) BE x PE’ ’6.0" long.0" long. BE x PE] [5. Codelists Rating 756 = 757 = 758 = 759 = 760 = 761 = 762 = 763 = 764 = 765 = 766 = 767 = 768 = 769 = 770 = 773 = 774 = 775 = 776 = 777 = 778 = 781 = 782 = 785 = 789 = 790 = 792 = 794 = 795 = 796 = 797 = 801 = 805 = 809 = 813 = 815 = 817 = 821 = 823 = 827 = 629 . PE] [11. MTE] [7.0" long.0" long.

3’ = ’ANSI-B1. 910-910 910 = ’ID basis’ Code 912 915 922 923 924 929 930 933 937 945 949 950 955 Options.9375"(24mm) thck’ 866 = ’1.5625"(14mm) thck’ 860 = ’0.20.42’ = ’ANSI-B1. 900-909 900 = ’Spec bolt’ ID Basis Options. 851-869 851 = ’0.875"(22mm) thck’ 865 = ’0.36’ = ’ANSI-B16.375"(9mm) thck’ 857 = ’0. 870-879 870 = ’63 Ra’ 871 = ’60-100 Ra’ 873 = ’80-150 Ra’ 875 = ’200 Ra’ 877 = ’Stock’ Gasket 880 = 881 = 882 = 883 = 884 = 885 = 886 = 887 = 894 = Options._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 831 835 836 838 840 = = = = = ’CL20000’ ’CL30000’ ’SCH 40’ ’SCH 80’ ’GRAVHD’ Thickness Options.12’ = ’ANSI-B16.125"(3mm) thck’ 853 = ’0.1875"(4mm) thck’ 854 = ’0.5"(12mm) thck’ 859 = ’0.6875"(18mm) thck’ 862 = ’0.3125"(8mm) thck’ 856 = ’0. 880-899 ’F gskt’ ’FFF gskt’ ’C gskt’ ’FDJ gskt’ ’CDJ gskt’ ’R gskt’ ’SW gskt’ ’MSS gskt’ ’SP gskt’ [63 Ra finish] [60-100 Ra finish] [80-150 Ra finish] [200 Ra finish] [Stock-finish] [Flat gasket] [Flat full face gasket] [Corrugated gasket] [Flat double jacketed gasket] [Corrugated double jacketed gasket] [Ring gasket] [Spiral-wound gasket] [MSS-SP-44 gasket] [Special gasket] Stud & Nut Options.7’ = ’ASTM-A74’ = ’AWWA-C110’ = ’AWWA-C115’ = ’AWWA-C151’ [Special bolting] [Dimensions based on inside diameter] [Cast iron drainage fittings] [Cast bronze fittings] [Copper solder joint pressure fittings] [Copper solder joint drainage fittings] [Bronze flanges] [Orifice flanges] [Ductile iron flanges and fittings] [Dryseal pipe threads] [Hose coupling screw threads] [Cast iron soil pipe and fittings] [Iron fittings] [Iron pipe and fittings] [Ductile iron pipe] 630 .25"(6mm) thck’ 855 = ’0.0"(25mm) thck’ End Finish Options.0625"(2mm) thck’ 852 = ’0.23’ = ’ANSI-B16.75"(20mm) thck’ 863 = ’0.22’ = ’ANSI-B16.20.4375"(10mm) thck’ 858 = ’0.625"(16mm) thck’ 861 = ’0.15’ = ’ANSI-B16.8125"(21mm) thck’ 864 = ’0. 911-989 = ’ANSI-B16.24’ = ’ANSI-B16.

990-999 ’Tube-Turn’ ’Dow’ ’Aloyco’ ’Yarway’ ’Teledyne Farris 1’ ’R & G Sloane’ ’American DI Pipe’ ’Gladding McBean’ [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings] ’Taylor Forge’ ’ITT VALVES’ B.no spec data input’ 7 = ’Branch reinforcement from user’ 8 = ’Branch reinforcement from branch table’ 631 . In editing this codelist set. CL150.B & D.E. CL150. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values.spec data input’ 6 = ’Piping specialty component from User . 0 = ’Piping cmdty component from PMC’ 1 = ’Piping cmdty component from User’ 2 = ’Piping flanged cmdty component from PJS’ 3 = ’Piping cmdty component from branch table’ 4 = ’Piping specialty component from PJS’ 5 = ’Piping specialty component from User . CL175] [Steel slip-on flanges CL275] [Polyethylene fittings] [Wellhead flanges and fittings] [API-605 flanges] [MSS non-blind flanges] [MSS blind flanges] Vendor 990 = 991 = 992 = 993 = 994 = 995 = 996 = 997 = 998 = 999 = Options. hub’ ’AWWA-C207 Cl. CL175] [Steel slip-on flanges CL86. Codelists European DIN Standards 1001 = ’Spacer length 10 mm’ 1002 = ’Spacer length 15 mm’ 1003 = ’Spacer length 20 mm’ 1004 = ’Spacer length 25 mm’ 1005 = ’Spacer length 30 mm’ 1006 = ’Spacer length 35 mm’ 1007 = ’Spacer length 40 mm’ 1008 = ’Spacer length 45 mm’ 1009 = ’Spacer length 50 mm’ 1010 = ’Spacer length 60 mm’ 1011 = ’Spacer length 70 mm’ 1012 = ’Spacer length 80 mm’ 1013 = ’Spacer length 90 mm’ 1014 = ’Spacer length 100 mm’ CL420.B & D. ring’ ’AWWA-C207 Cl. hub’ ’API-5LE’ ’API-6A’ ’API-605’ ’MSS-SP-44-NB’ ’MSS-SP-44-B’ General Comments [Steel slip-on flanges CL86. Piping Component Type/Source (25) NOTE: This codelist defines the type of piping component involved and the source of the data used in its definition._ _______________ Appendix B: 960 961 962 970 975 979 980 981 = = = = = = = = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.

no spec data input’ CL499.’ 80 = ’All components shall be bored to suit thickness of pipe. Gasket seating surfaces shall have 125 Ra surface finish.’ 50 = ’The Manufacturer shall be consulted for special bolting requirements where both the design temperature is above 800 degF and the valve bonnet is insulated. paint.’ 22 = ’Valves shall be in accordance with NACE MR-01-75.’ 58 = ’Unions shall not be used.’ 60 = ’All welds shall use compatible rod and shall be PWHT regardless of thickness and/or joint configuration. Valves shall be in accordance with NACE MR-01-75. Gasket seating surfaces shall have 125 Ra surface finish. Instrument Component Type/Source (25) NOTE: This codelist defines the type of instrument component involved and the source of the data used in its definition.’ 54 = ’Unions shall not be used. Taper bore flanges to a depth of 1.spec data input’ 2 = ’Instr specialty component from User . do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Piping/Tubing Type (25) NOTE: In editing this codelist set.’ 57 = ’Unions shall not be used._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 CL425. 1 = ’Piping’ 2 = ’Tubing’ 3 = ’Hose’ CL430.’ 61 = ’All welds shall use compatible rod and shall be PWHT regardless of thickness and/or joint configuration unless specifically approved by Contractor and permitted by ANSI-B31.’ 64 = ’Pipe and fittings shall be cement lined.’ 63 = ’Underground pipe and fittings shall be coated and wrapped. or any other type of contact. This includes supports.’ 83 = ’Do not allow galvanized or any other zinc bearing material to come in contact with stainless steel or high nickel alloys components.’ 79 = ’Extra thickness has been included. In editing this codelist set. bolts. 0 = ’Instr specialty component from PJS’ 1 = ’Instr specialty component from User .5 inches as required to match inside diameter of all connecting pipingand valves. Piping Notes (999) 1 = [Blank] Notes Applicable to the Piping Materials Class. weld splatter. Welds shall be ground smooth to match inside diameter of pipe.3 Code.’ 632 . wire.’ 82 = ’Use long radius bends with radius as specified on the P&IDs for all changes in direction. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values.’ 62 = ’Refer to AWWA-C151 for suitable installation types. nipples. 2-199 3 = ’Valve and flange protectors required.’ 56 = ’Gasket seating surfaces shall have 125 Ra surface finish.

’ 259 = ’Double hub fittings are available in 90 degrees and 45 degrees elbows.’ 325 = ’Do not use over 100 degF.’ 331 = ’Do not use over 300 degF.’ 328 = ’Do not use over 180 degF.’ 207 = ’Use for hydrostatic vents and drains. Codelists Notes Applicable to a Piping Specialty.’ 253 = ’Use of unions and threaded fittings shall be limited to a maximum temperature of 500 degF.’ 337 = ’Do not use over 600 degF.75 inch diameter only at orifice flange taps.’ 206 = ’Use at flanged equipment connections.’ 224 = ’To be used only where specifically required._ _______________ Appendix B: General Comments Notes Applicable to a Piping Component. Seal (bridge) weld after testing in accordance with piping job specifications. 700-899 633 .’ 260 = ’Cement lined per AWWA-C205-80.’ 304 = ’For use in deluge systems. Minimum lining thickness shall be 0. Lining shall be flush with ends.’ B.’ 338 = ’Do not use over 650 degF.’ 329 = ’Do not use over 200 degF.’ 223 = ’Use 0.’ 220 = ’Install in the horizontal position only.’ 221 = ’Valve shall be in accordance with NACE MR-01-75.’ 333 = ’Do not use over 400 degF.’ 335 = ’Do not use over 500 degF.’ 205 = ’Use bends for direction changes.’ 211 = ’Use of this component under certain pressure/temperature conditions may provide less than 3/16 inch CA.’ 340 = ’Do not use over 750 degF.’ 330 = ’Do not use over 250 degF. do not seal weld plug.’ 332 = ’Do not use over 350 degF.’ 210 = ’Use threaded plug for vent/drain valve.’ 257 = ’When mating stainless steel flanges to ferritic steel flanges. 500-699 Notes Applicable to an Instrument Specialty. do not seal weld plug.’ 214 = ’Use where full port is required.’ 208 = ’Use threaded plug for vent/drain valve.5 inch diameter only at orifice flange taps.’ 209 = ’To be used only where specifically required and/or between blind flange and gasket.’ 339 = ’Do not use over 700 degF.’ 203 = ’Use for thermowell connections.’ 276 = ’Remove internals of valves containing Teflon seats and/or seals prior to welding or backwelding.’ 202 = ’Use between blind flange and gasket.3125 inch thick. 200-499 201 = ’To be used only where specifically required.’ 334 = ’Do not use over 450 degF. Valve sizes 16" and larger require electric motor operators. use studs corresponding to the ferritic flange. Vent/drain and instrument root valves with 1 inch nominal diameter in carbon steel and 9Cr-1Mo materials provide more than 3/16 inch but less than 1/4 inch CA.’ 341 = ’Do not use over 800 degF.’ 336 = ’Do not use over 550 degF. Lining shall be Type II cement per ASTM-C150 with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.’ 204 = ’Use for hydrostatic vents and drains.’ 222 = ’Use 0.’ 326 = ’Do not use over 150 degF.

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002

CL530, Accessory/Item Type (125)
NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 = [Blank] Accessory 5 = ’AC 10 = ’A 20 = ’C 30 = ’I 45 = ’PO 50 = ’R 55 = ’S 65 = ’T 75 = ’X 80 = ’Y Type, 2-99 =Actuator’ =Alarm’ =Controller’ =Indicator’ =Positioner’ =Recorder’ =Switch’ =Transmitter’ =Unclassified’ =Converter’

Item Type, 100-125 101 = ’Equipment nozzle’ 103 = ’Piping segment’ 105 = ’CV or regulator’ 107 = ’Relief device’ 109 = ’Other-in-line instrument’ 111 = ’Off-line instrument’ 113 = ’System function’ 115 = ’Instr connector’ 117 = ’Function label’ 121 = ’Other’

CL550, Operator Actuator Type (200)
NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-24 apply to operators for piping commodity valves whose dimensions are determined from tables whose names are formed from attributes in the Piping Job Specification. Codelist numbers 25-40 apply to operators for piping commodity valves whose dimensions are determined from tables whose names depend on the commodity codes for the valves. Codelist numbers 41-99 apply to operators and actuators for piping and instrument specialty valves. Codelist numbers 101-150 should be used for user defined operators with only primary orientaions, such as handwheels and post indicators. Codelist numbers 151-200 should be used for user defined operators with both primary orientations and secondary orientations, such as levers and T-handles. 1 = [Blank] Operators with Data Derived from Spec Parameters, 2-24 3 = ’Handwheel’ 4 = ’Handwheel if GCP > RCP’ 5 = ’Handwheel, inclined’ 9 = ’Wrench, short’ 11 = ’Wrench, long’ 17 = ’Lever’ 19 = ’T-handle, short’ 21 = ’T-handle, long’

634

_ _______________
Appendix B:
Operators with Data Derived from Valve Codes, 25-40 25 = ’Handwheel, special’ 27 = ’Wrench, special’ 29 = ’Gear, top mounted handwheel’ 31 = ’Gear, top mounted inclined handwheel’ 33 = ’Gear, side mounted handwheel’ 35 = ’Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel’ 39 = ’Lever, quick-action’ 40 = ’Post indicator’ Actuators, 41-99 41 = ’Diaphragm’ 42 = ’Electro-Pneumatic’ 43 = ’Press-balanced diaphragm’ 45 = ’Regulator’ 49 = ’Single acting cylinder’ 51 = ’Double acting cylinder’ 53 = ’Pilot operated cylinder’ 57 = ’Motor’ 61 = ’Digital’ 65 = ’Electro-hydraulic’ 69 = ’Single solenoid’ 71 = ’Single solenoid w/reset’ 73 = ’Double solenoid’ 77 = ’Pilot’ 81 = ’Weight’ 85 = ’Manual’ 89 = ’Spring’ 91 = ’Capacitance sensor’ 93 = ’Ball float’ 95 = ’Displacement float’ 97 = ’Paddle wheel’

General Comments

B. Codelists

CL570, Design Standard (200)
1 10 11 12 13 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 38 50 51 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Blank] ’ASME-I’ [Power Boilers] ’ASME-III’ [Nuclear] ’ASME-VIII-1’ [Unfired Vessels] ’ASME-VIII-2’ [Unfired Vessels] ’ASME Fld Mets & AGA Rpt 3’ [Instruments] ’ANSI-B31.1’ [Power] ’ANSI-B31.2’ [Fuel Gas] ’ANSI-B31.3’ [Petroleum] ’ANSI-B31.4’ [Oil Transport] ’ANSI-B31.5’ [Refrigeration] ’ANSI-B31.8’ [Gas Transmission] ’ANSI-B31.9’ [Building Services] ’API-2000’ [Tank Venting] ’AWWA’ [Water Services] ’DIN’

60 = ’BS806’ 61 = ’BS3351’

635

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002

CL572, Wall Thickness Equation
1 = [Blank] 21 = ’ANSI B31.1a-1986’ 23 = ’ANSI B31.3-1987’

CL575, Geometry Standard (31999)
NOTE: The symbol "||" at the end of a description in this document signifies that the standard has been used in preparing RDB data. Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows: o US practices 2-6999 o European practices 1 (DIN) 7000-11999 o European practices 2 (British) 12000-16999 o European practices 3 (Finnish, French, etc. 17000-19999 o International practices 1 (JIS) 20000-24999 o International practices 2 (Australian, etc.) 25000-27999 o Company practices 28000-31999 1 = [Blank]

US Practice Geometry Standards, 2-6999 6 = ’PDS-P1’ [REDE, RWELD, RPAD, BLSPC_>24"_API+/- thk varies, BLSPO_>24"_API+/- thk varies] 7 = ’PDS-P2’ [BLSPC_>24"__API+/-_0.375"thk, BLSPO_>24"_API+/-_0.375"th 8 = ’PDS-P3’ [BLSPC_>24"_MSS+/- thk varies, BLSPO_>24"_MSS+/- thk vari 11 = ’PDS-I1’ [BLSPC_>24"_API+/-_1.5"thk, BLSPO_>24"_API+/-_1.5"thk] 12 = ’PDS-I2’ [BLPAD_>24"_MSS+/-_0.75"thk, BLSPA_>24"_MSS+/-_0.75"thk] 13 = ’PDS-I3’ 16 = ’PDS-Op1’ 17 = ’PDS-Op2’ 18 = ’PDS-Op3’ 31 33 34 35 39 40 41 42 44 45 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 58 59 64 66 69 72 73 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’ANSI-B16.1’ ’ANSI-B16.3’ ’ANSI-B16.4’ ’ANSI-B16.5’ ’ANSI-B16.9’ ’ANSI-B16.10’ ’ANSI-B16.11’ ’ANSI-B16.12’ ’ANSI-B16.14’ ’ANSI-B16.15’ ’ANSI-B16.20’ ’ANSI-B16.21’ ’ANSI-B16.22’ ’ANSI-B16.23’ ’ANSI-B16.24’ ’ANSI-B16.25’ ’ANSI-B16.26’ ’ANSI-B16.28’ ’ANSI-B16.29’ ’ANSI-B16.34’ ’ANSI-B16.36’ ’ANSI-B16.39’ ’ANSI-B16.42’ ’ANSI-B16.43’ [Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||] [Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ||] [Cast Iron Threaded Fittings ||] [Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||] [Steel Beveled End Fittings ||] [Dimensions of Ferrous Valves ||] [Forged Steel Socketwelded and Threaded Fittings ||] [Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ||] [Ferrous Pipe Plugs and Bushings] [Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings ||] [RTJ Gaskets and Grooves ||] [Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges ||] [Wrought Copper Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ||] [Cast Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings ||] [Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||] [Beveled End Preparation] [Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubing] [Steel Beveled End Short Radius Elbows and Returns ||] [Wrought Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings] [Valves Flanged and Beveled Ends ||] [Steel Orifice Flanges ||] [Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions ||] [Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fitting ||] [Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Solvent Drainage Systems]

636

_ _______________
Appendix B:
81 82 100 109 114 115 119 120 122 124 126 127 131 132 135 141 145 146 147 153 154 155 157 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 169 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’ANSI-B18.2.1’ ’ANSI-B18.2.2’ ’ANSI-B36.10M’ ’ANSI-B36.19M’ ’API-5A’ ’API-5B’ ’API-5L’ ’API-5LE’ ’API-5LP’ ’API-5LS’ ’API-5LU’ ’API-5LX’ ’API-6A’ ’API-6AB’ ’API-6D’ ’API-526’ ’API-590’ ’API-590Z1’ ’API-590Z2’ ’API-593’ ’API-594’ ’API-595’ ’API-597’ ’API-599’ ’API-600’ ’API-601’ ’API-602’ ’API-603’ ’API-604’ ’API-605’ ’API-606’ ’API-609’

General Comments

[Square and Hex Bolts and Screws ||] [Square and Hex Nuts] [Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe ||] [Stainless Steel Pipe ||] [Casing, Tubing and Drill Pipe] [Casing, Tubing and Line Pipe Threads] [Line Pipe ||] [Polyethylene Line Pipe ||] [Thermoplastic Line Pipe ||] [Spiralweld Line Pipe ||] [Ultra High Test Heat Treated Line Pipe ||] [High Test Line Pipe] [Wellhead Equipment] [30,000 PSI Flanged Wellhead Equipment] [Pipeline Valves, End Closures, Connectors and Swivels] [Flanged Steel Safety Relief Valves] [Steel Line Blanks ||] [Steel Line Blanks - with 0.125" CA ||] [Steel Line Blanks - with 0.25" CA ||] [Ductile Iron Plug Valves] [Wafer Check Valves] [Cast Iron Gate Valves] [Steel Venturi Gate Valves] [Steel Plug Valves] [Steel Gate Valves ||] [Metallic Gaskets for Raised Face Pipe Flanges and Flanged Connections ||] [Compact Steel Gate Valves] [Class 150 Cast Flanged End Gate Valves] [Ductile Iron Gate Valves] [Large Diameter Carbon Steel Flanges ||] [Compact Carbon Steel Gate Valves] [Butterfly Valves Lug and Wafer Type]

B. Codelists

171 = ’ASTM-A74’ 172 = ’ASTM-C76’ 173 = ’ASTM-C700’ 174 = ’ASTM-D2464’ 176 = ’ASTM-D2466’ 177 = ’ASTM-D2467’ 179 181 184 186 190= 191= 192= 193 200 204 206 207 208 220 221 222 230 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’AWWA-C106’ ’AWWA-C110’ ’AWWA-C115’ ’AWWA-C151’

[Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings] [Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe] [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Perforated Clay Pipe] [Threaded PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80] [Socket-Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 40 ||] [Socket-Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80 ||] [Cast Iron Pipe] [Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 3"-48" ||] [Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe] [Ductile Iron Pipe ||]

’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175 ||] ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175 ||] ’AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL275 ||] ’AWWA-C208’ [Steel Water Pipe Fittings] ’AWWA-C500’ [Gate Valves 3"-48" for Water and Sewage Systems] ’AWWA-C504’ [Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves] ’AWWA-C506’ [Backflow Prevention Devices-Check Valves] ’AWWA-C507’ [Ball Valves] ’AWWA-C508’ [Swing Check Valves for Water Works Service 2"-24"] ’AWWA-C900’ [PVC Pipe 4"-12" for Water] ’AWWA-C901’ [Polyethylene Pipe, Tubing and Fittings 1/2"-3" for Water ’AWWA-C902’ [Polybutylene Pipe, Tubing and Fittings 1/2"-3" for Water ’AWWA-C950’ [Glass-Fiber Reinforced Pressure Pipe]

637

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002
235 = ’PFI-ES-24’ 243 = ’ISA-S75.03’ 244 = ’ISA-S75.04’ 252 253 254 255 268 277 278 282 285 288 289 290 291 293 295 297 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’MSS-SP-42’ ’MSS-SP-43’ ’MSS-SP-44’ ’MSS-SP-51’ ’MSS-SP-58’ ’MSS-SP-67’ ’MSS-SP-68’ ’MSS-SP-72’ ’MSS-SP-75’ ’MSS-SP-78’ ’MSS-SP-79’ ’MSS-SP-80’ ’MSS-SP-81’ ’MSS-SP-83’ ’MSS-SP-88’ ’MSS-SP-95’ [Pipe Bending Tolerances ||] [Face to Face Dimensions Globe Control Valves] [Face to Face Dimensions Flangeless Control Valves] [CL150 Valves ||] [Stainless Steel Buttwelding Fittings] [Steel Pipe Line Flanges ||] [CL150LW Cast Flanges and Flanged Fittings] [Pipe Hangers and Supports] [Butterfly Valves] [High Pressure-Offset Seat Butterfly Valves] [Ball Valves with Flanged or Beveled Ends] [Wrought Beveled End Fittings] [Cast Iron Plug Valves] [Socketwelding Reducing Inserts] [Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle & Check Valves] [Flanged, Wafer Knife Gate Valves] [Carbon Steel Socketwelded and Threaded Pipe Unions ||] [Diaphragm Valves] [Swage Nipples and Bull Plugs ||]

298 = ’NFPA-1963’ [Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose connections] 300 = ’ASME BPE-97’ [Geometry standards that follow apply to specific manufacturers. If one of these standards is used to define a component, the following information will be shown in brackets to the right of the geometry standard: o For valves: the applicable model codes and vendor’s designations o For fittings: the applicable model codes will be shown unless the vendor’s designation is required to differentiate between components requiring a different geometry standard to assign them to the proper data table. 1000 = ’Adamson 1’ 1001 = ’Adams 1’ 1025 = ’Aitken 1’ [BLPAD; BLSPA; TDRA; TDRB; TDRBW ||] 1026 = ’Aitken Z1’ [BLPAD; BLSPA - with 0.125" CA ||] 1027 = ’Aitken Z2’ [BLPAD; BLSPA - with 0.25" CA ||] 1050 = ’Allied Pipe Products 1’ 1075 = ’Aldo Colombo 1’ 1100 = ’Aloyco 1’ [GATR-Fig_114; GATR-Fig_114DB; GATR-Fig_114EB; GATR-Fig_124; GATR-Fig_2214A; GLOR-Fig_2310A; GLOR-Fig_2314A; GLOR-Fig_314; GLOR-Fig_31 GLOR-Fig_314EB; GLOR-Fig_504; CKLR-Fig_554; CKLR-Fig_2554A; CKSR-Fig_2374 CKSR-Fig_374; TKDR-Fig_751 ||] 1101 = ’Aloyco 2’ [GATR-Fig_2110; GATR-Fig_2114 ||] 1125 = ’American Darling 1’ [H3W1-Fig_B-50-B ||] 1130 = ’American DI Pipe’ [PIPE; L; LRB ||] 1150 = ’American Valve 1’ 1175 = ’Amri 1’ 1200 = ’Anaconda 1’ 1225 = ’Anderson Greenwood 1’ 1250 = ’Anvil 1’ 1275 = ’A.O.Smith 1’ 1300 = ’Apollo 1’ 1325 = ’Argus 1’ 1350 = ’Armstrong 1’ [S51AC-Fig_K1SC; S70AC-Fig_2011; S70BC-Fig_2011 ||] 1375 = ’Asahi/American 1’ 1400 1425 1450 1475 = = = = ’Babbitt 1’ ’Babcock and Wilcox 1’ ’Badger Meters 1’ ’Bailey Co 1’

638

_ _______________
Appendix B:
1500 1525 1550 1560 1575

General Comments

1576

1577 1585 1590 1600 1625 1650 1675 1700 1725 1750 1775 1800 1825 1850 1875 1900

= ’Balon 1’ = ’Basic Engineering 1’ = ’Bestobel 1’ = ’Bete 1’ [SSP1-Series_N ||] = ’Bonney Forge 1’ [GAT-Fig_9HLF-10; GATR-Fig_9H-10; GATR-Fig_9W-10; GATEXB-Fig_VLL-10; GATEXB-Fig_VOLL-10; GLOR-Fig_HL-30; GLOR-Fig_9HL-30; GLOR-Fig_9WL-30; CKLR-Fig_9HL-40; CKLR-Fig_9HL-50; CKLR-Fig_9HL-60; CKLR-Fig_9WL-40; CKLR-Fig_9WL-50; CKLR-Fig_9WL-60; CKLR-Fig_HL-40; CKLR-Fig_9HLF-40; CKLRY-Fig_9Y-40; CKLRY-Fig_25Y-40; CAPOT; UN; L; LRB; SWOL; WOL; SOL; TOL; NOL; EOLLR; EOLSR; LOL ||] = ’Bonney Forge 2’ [GATR-Fig_9H-10; GATR-Fig_25W-10; GLOR-Fig_9HL-30; GLOR-Fig_9WL-30; GLOR-Fig_25W-30; GLOY-Fig_25Y-30; CKLR-Fig_9HL-40; CKLR-Fig_9HL-50; CKLR-Fig_9HL-60; CKLR-Fig_9WL-40; CKLR-Fig_9WL-50; CKLR-Fig_9WL-60 ||] = ’Bonney Forge 3’ [GATF-Fig_H-10; GATF-Fig_W-10; GATR-Fig_HL-10; GATR-Fig_WL-10; CKLR-Fig_HL-40; CKLR-Fig_WL-40 ||] = ’Boots & Coots 1’ [MN1-Spectrum_Allpha_6235 ||] = ’Bray 1’ = ’Brooks Meters 1’

= ’Cameron 1’ = ’Carbone 1’ = ’Ciba-Geigy 1’ = ’Clark Reliance 1’ = ’Clayton Automatic Valves 1’ [CKBP-Model_D; FLO-Series_427-01 ||] = ’Clayton Mark 1’ = ’Clow 1’ = ’Cochrane 1’ = ’Condren 1’ = ’Continental Emsco 1’ = ’Cooper Valve 1’ = ’Crane 1’ [GATF-Fig_3904U; GATR-Fig_424; GATR-Fig_431UB; BALR-Fig_9302; GLOF-Fig_3944U; GLOR-Fig_14 1/2P; GLOR-Fig_70; GLOY-Fig_7189; NEE-Fig_88; CKS-Fig_373;CKLF-Fig_3973U; CKSR-Fig_36; CKSR-Fig_137; FOOT-Fig_394; FOOT-Fig_395; FLWN; FSO; L; LRB ||] 1925 = ’Crosby 1’ 1950 1975 2000 2025 2050 2075 2100 2150 2155 2175 2200 2225 2250 2275 2300 2325 2350 2375 2400 2425 2450 2475 2500 2525 2550 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’Daniel 1’ ’Demco 1’ ’Dezurik 1’ ’Dixon 1’ ’Dresser 1’ ’Dover 1’ ’DOW 1’ [TRI-Lining_SL; TRI-Lining_PPL, TRI-Lining_KL ||] ’Duo Seal 1’ ’Dur-O-Lock 1’ [CPL ||] ’Durco 1’ ’Elkhart 1’ ’Enpro 1’ ’Epsco 1’ ’Everest 1’ ’Fabri-Valve 1’ [KNF-Fig_36 ||] ’Fairbanks 1’ ’Fasani 1’ ’Fetterolf 1’ ’Fibercast 1’ ’Fike 1’ ’Fisher 1’ ’Flexitallic 1’ ’Flowline 1’ ’FMC 1’ ’Foxboro 1’

B. Codelists

639

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002
2575 2600 2625 2650 2660 2675 2700 2715 2725 2750 2775 2800 2825 2850 2860 2875 2900 2915 2925 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’Garlok 1’ ’General 1’ ’Geosource 1’ ’Gestra 1’ ’Gladding McBean 1’ [REDC; E45; E90; M451; M452; L ||] ’Graylock 1’ ’Grinnell 1’ [BALR-Fig_3022; CAPOT; UNO; E45U; E90RST; TOUB; TOUR ||] ’Grinnell Fire Prot 1’ [DEL-Model_A-4; SSP-Mulsifyre-Projector ||] ’Grove 1’ ’Gulf 1’ ’Hammond 1’ ’Hancock 1’ [BDA-Fig_5505W ||] ’Haws 1’ [SSEW1-Fig_8309; SSEW1-Fig 8309CRP ||] ’Heaton 1’ ’Hex 1’ ’Hindle-Hamer 1’ ’Hitachi 1’ ’Hoke 1’ ’Hydril 1’

2950 = ’Imperial Eastman 1’ 2975 = ’Ishida 1’ 2980 = ’ITT 1’ 3000 = ’Jacoby Tarbox 1’ 3025 = ’Jamesbury 1’ [BALR-Style_B; BALSP-Type_530S; BAL3W-Style_AM150FD; BAL3W-Style_DM150FD ||] 3026 = ’Jamesbury 2’ [BALR-Style_A ||] 3027 = ’Jamesbury 3’ [BALR-Type_2000_Brass ||] 3028 = ’Jamesbury 4’ [BALF-Type_4000; BALR-Type_4000 ||] 3050 = ’Jenkins 1’ 3075 = ’Jerguson 1’ 3100 = ’Judd Valve 1’ 3125 3150 3175 3200 3225 3250 3275 3300 3325 3350 3375 3400 3425 3445 3450 3475 3500 3525 = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’Kamyr-Neles 1’ ’Kemp 1’ ’Kennedy 1’ ’Keystone 1’ ’Kinka Kikai 1’ ’Kitz 1’ ’KTM 1’ ’Kubota 1’ ’L & M Valve 1’ ’Ladish 1’ [CAPOT; L; LRB ||] ’Lamons 1’ ’Lukens 1’ ’Lunkenheimer 1’

= ’Mac-Iron 1’ = ’Magnetrol 1’ = ’Malbranque 1’ = ’Maloney 1’ = ’Mark Controls/Centerline 1’ [BFYLP-Series_A; BFYLP-Series_LT; BYFLP-Series_504 ||] 3550 = ’Mark Controls/Flowseal 1’ [BFYHP-Style_1LB ||] 3575 = ’Mark Controls/Marpac 1’ 3600 = ’Mark Controls/Pacific 1’ [GATSP-Fig_21555; GATSP-Fig_55509; GATSP-Fig_5 GLOSP-Fig_56009; GLOSP-Fig_56015; CKSSP-Fig_58809-5-WE; CKSSP-Fig_58815-7-WE; CKST-Fig_160S ||] 3625 = ’Marlin 1’

640

_ _______________
Appendix B:
3650 3675 3700 3725 3750 3775 3800 3825 3850 3860 3875 3900 3925 = = = = = = = ’Navco 1’ ’Nells 1’ ’Newco 1’ ’Nibco 1’ ’Nicholson 1’ [S78AC-Fig_N302L ||] ’Nippon-Benkan 1’ [BW fittings above 48" ||] ’Nupro 1’

General Comments

= ’Marwin 1’ = ’Masoneilan 1’ = ’Media 1’ [BFYLP] = ’Milwaukee 1’ = ’Mueller/Muessco Brass 1’ = ’Mueller/Muessco Steam Specialty 1’ [S51AC-Fig_761WE; S51AC-Fig_862BC; S51AC-Fig_762 ||]

B. Codelists

3950 = ’OPW 1’ 3975 = ’Orbit 1’ 4000 = ’Oseco 1’ 4025 4030 4050 4075 4100 4125 4150 4175 4200 4225 4250 4275 4300 4325 4335 4350 4375 4400 4425 = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’Pan Korea 1’ ’Parker CPI 1’ ’Parks Cramer 1’ ’Peabody Dore 1’ ’Penberthy 1’ ’Penn-AirCheck 1’ ’Persta 1’ ’Petrolvalves 1’ ’Posi-Seal 1’ [BFYHP-Model A31; BFYHP-Model A21; BFYHP-Model A11 ||] ’Powhatan 1’ [HOS-No_18-217; HOSA-No_18-157; HRST1-No_30-333 ||] ’Powell 1’ ’Pratt 1’ [BFYLP-Model_PIVA & IBV-FM4; Groundhog ||] ’Premafu 1’ ’Protectoseal 1’

4426 4427 4450 4475

4500 4520 4522 4525 4550 4575 4600 4625

= ’R & G Sloane’ [BALF-Fig_1081; CAPOT; FS; INSR1] = ’Resistoflex 1’ [PIN-Code_R6000D1 ||] = ’Ring-O 1’ = ’Rockwell 1’ [DIA-Type_STD_Unlined ||] = ’Rockwell/Edwards 1’ [GLOA-Fig_849; GLOA-Fig_849Y; GLOYR-Fig_848; GLOYR-Fig_848Y; GLOYR-Fig_1048; GLOYR-Fig_1048Y; CKLRY-Fig_36178; CKLRY-Fig_36278; NEE-Fig_4152; CKST-Fig_302; CKST-Fig_302Y; CKAST-Fig_303 CKAST-Fig_303Y; CKAST-Fig_869; CKAST-Fig_869Y; CKYST-Fig_302; CKYST-Fig_6 BDY-Fig_1641; ||] = ’Rockwell/Edwards 2’ [CKLRY-Fig_832Y; GLOY-Fig_36124; GLOY-Fig_36128; CKLRY-Fig_1032Y; CKAST-Fig_605Y; CKAST-Fig_607Y; BDA-Fig_1643Y ||] = ’Rockwell/Edwards 3’ [GLOY-Fig_7514Y ||] = ’Rockwell/McCanna 1’ [BAL3W-Type_500-3WAY ||] = ’Rockwell/Nordstorm 1’ [PLUVP-Fig_4169; PLU3W-Fig_3813; PLU3W-Fig_4812; PLU3W-Fig_4813; PLU3W-Fig_5115; PLU3W-Fig_5119; PLU3W-Fig_5215; PLU3W-Fig_5219; PLU4W-Fig_3823; PLU4W-Fig_4822; PLU4W-Fig_5125; PLU4W-Fig_5129 ||] = ’R P & C 1’ = ’Sarco 1’ = ’Saunders 1’ = ’Sella 1’ = ’Serck Audco 1’ = ’Serfilco 1’ = ’Shoritsu 1’ = ’Smith 1’ [GATF-Fig_888; GATF-Fig_5870; GATR-Fig_800; GATR-Fig_870; GATR-Fig_1500; GATR-Fig_1570; GATEX-Fig_811 & 812 MPE/THD; GATEX-Fig_876

641

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002
4626 4650 4675 4700 4725 4750 4751 4752 4753 4775 4800 4825 4850 4875 4900 4901 4925 4950 4975 5000 5025 5050 5060 5075 5085 5100 5125 5150 5175 5200 5225 5250 5275 5300 5325 5350 5375

& 877 MPE/THD; GATEXB-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/THD; GATXBA-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/S GATXBB-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/THD; GLOR-Fig_G80; GLOR-Fig_G87; GLOR-Fig_G150; GLOR-Fig_G157; CKLR-Fig_B80; CKLR-Fig_C80; CKLR-Fig_C150; CKLR-Fig_SB80; CKLR-Fig_SC80 ||] = ’Smith 2’ [GATEX-Fig_813 & 814 MPE/SW; GATEX-Fig_878 & 879 MPE/SW ||] = ’Spraying Systems 1’ = ’Spirax Sarco 1’ = ’Stanco 1’ = ’Standard Fittings 1’ [CAPOT; SWGC; SWGE ||] = ’Stang Hydronics 1’ [M1-Fig BB0309-21 w/shapertip nozzle; ME1-Fig BB3561 = ’Stang Hydronics 2’ [M1-Fig_BB0309-21 w/fog nozzle; ME1-Fig B22999 ||] = ’Stang Hydronics 3’ [ME1-Fig_BB3561 composite, w/monitor nozzle ||] = ’Stang Hydronics 4’ [ME1-Fig_BB3377 composite, w/monitor nozzle ||] = ’Stockham 1’ = ’Strahman 1’ = ’Swagelok 1’ = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’Tapco 1’ ’Taylor 1’ ’Taylor Forge 1’ ’Taylor Forge 2, Rev 1957’ [L; S-STD WT ||] ’Teledyne Farris 1’ ’Texas Bolt 1’ ’Thevignot 1’ ’Titeflex 1’ ’TK 1’ ’TKM 1’ [GAT-Fig_100 ||] ’Top Line 1’ ’Triangle 1’ ’Tri-Clover 1’ ’Truflo 1’ ’TRW/Mission 1’ [||] ’Tubeturn 1’ [FWN; FEWN; FOWNA; FOWNB; CAPBV; E453D; E90LT; E903D; L; SA ’Tufline 1’ ’Tyler 1’ [CPL; REDC; E45LT; E90LT; L ||]

= ’Valvotecnic 1’ = ’Vanessa 1’ = ’Velan 1’ [S3AC-Fig_N675 ||] = ’Victaulic 1’ = ’Viking 1’ = ’Vitas 1’ = ’Vogt 1’ [GATR-Series_15373; GLOR-Series_15141; CKLR-Series_15701; NEE-Series_22461; NEE-Series_SW22461; CAPOT; UN; E90U; E90ST; L ||]

5400 5425 5450 5475 5500 5525 Fig 5535 5550 5575

= ’Wada 1’ = ’Wallworth 1’ = ’Watts Regulator 1’ = ’Weco 1’ = ’WFI 1’ = ’Winston 1’ [S49AC-T-Strainer Type-59 W/flg’d cover; S53AC-Basket-Strain 51-WIP W/CL150 flg’d cover & 3/4" SWE drain||] = ’Wirt & Knox 1’ = ’WKM 1’ = ’Worcester 1’

5600 = ’Yarway 1’ [CKAR-Fig_5301; CKAR-Fig_5302; BDA-Fig_6909-C; BDY-Fig_6911-C TKDR-Fig_8106 ||] 5625 = ’Yoneki 1’

642

_ _______________
Appendix B:
5650 = ’Zurn 1’ o European practices 1 (DIN) General 7000 = 7001 = 7002 = Pipes 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 7019 7020 = = = = = = = = = = = ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN 2448’ 2458’ 2440’ 2441’ 2442’ 2445’ 2460’ 2462’ 2463’ 2391’ 2393’ ;Steel pipes, seamless ;Steel pipes, welded ;Threaded pipes, medium weight ;Threaded pipes, heavy weight ;Threaded pipes, spec. qualty ;Seamless steel pipes,dyn. load ;Steel pipes for water ;Seamless ferritic steel pipes ;Seamless austenitic steel pipes ;Seamless precision steel tubes ;Welded precision steel tubes ;Flanged lined pipes ;Flanged lined enamelled pipes Specifications ’DIN 2401-1 Pressure, nominal’ ’DIN 2401-2 Pressure, nominal’ ’DIN 2402 Diameter,nominal’

General Comments

7000-11999

B. Codelists

7025 = ’DIN 2848’ 7026 = ’DIN 2873’ 7030 = ’DIN 2462’ 7031 = ’DIN 2463’ 7040 = ’DIN 8062’ 7041 = ’DIN 8077’ Flanges 7100 = 7101 = 7102 = 7103 = 7104 = 7105 = 7106 = 7107 = 7108 = 7109 = 7110 = 7111 = 7112 = 7113 = 7114 = 7115 = 7116 = 7117 = 7118 = 7119 = 7120 = 7121 = 7122 = 7123 = 7124 = 7125 = 7126 = 7127 = 7128 =

;Seamless stainless steel tubes ;Welded austenitic steel pipes and tubes ;Pipes of unplasticized polyvinyl chlor. ;Polypropylen (PP) pipes

’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN

2530’ 2531’ 2532’ 2533’ 2534’ 2535’ 2543’ 2544’ 2545’ 2546’ 2547’ 2548’ 2549’ 2550’ 2551’ 2558’ 2561’ 2565’ 2566’ 2567’ 2568’ 2569’ 2630’ 2631’ 2632’ 2633’ 2634’ 2635’ 2636’

;Cast iron flanges, PN 2,5 ;Cast iron flanges, PN 6 ;Cast iron flanges, PN 10 ;Cast iron flanges, PN 16 ;Cast iron flanges, PN 25 ;Cast iron flanges, PN 40 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 16 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 25 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 40 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 64 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 100 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 160 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 250 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 320 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 400 ;Plain face oval screwed flange PN 6 ;Oval screwed flange w/ socket PN 10,16 ;Screwed flange PN 6 rund ;Screwed flange PN 10,16 ;Screwed flange PN 25,40 ;Screwed flange PN 64 ;Screwed flange PN 100 ;Welding neck flange PN 1 ;Welding neck flange PN 6 ;Welding neck flange PN 10 ;Welding neck flange PN 16 ;Welding neck flange PN 25 ;Welding neck flange PN 40 ;Welding neck flange PN 64

643

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002
7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7150 7160 7161 7162 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN 2637’ 2638’ 2628’ 2629’ 2627’ 2673’ 2667’ 2668’ 2669’ 2573’ 2576’ 2641’ 2642’ 2652’ 2653’ 2655’ 2656’ 2501’ 2512’ 2512’ 2513’ 2514’ 2527’ 2848’ 2873’ ;Welding neck flange PN 100 ;Welding neck flange PN 160 ;Welding neck flange PN 250 ;Welding neck flange PN 320 ;Welding neck flange PN 400 ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 10 ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 160 ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 250 ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 320 ;Flange, soldering or wldg PN 6 ;Flange, soldering or wldg PN 10 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 6 ;Slip-on flange, upturned wldg PN 10 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 6 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 10 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 25 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 40 ;Flanges, Dimensions ;Flanges, tongue & groove ;Rings ;Flanges, projection & recess ;Projection w/ groove & recess ;Flange, blind PN 6,10,16,25,40,64,100 ;Reducing flanges, lined ;Reducing and blind flanges, enamelled

Elbows 7200 = 7201 = 7202 = 7203 = 7204 = 7205 = 7206 = 7210 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7216 7217 7218 7219 = = = = = = = = = =

’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN

2605’ 2606’ 2916’ 2983’ 2987’ 2987’ 2950’ 2605-1’ 2605-1’ 2605-1’ 2605-1’ 2605-1’ 2605-2’ 2605-2’ 2605-2’ 2605-2’ 2605-2’

;Tube bends f. butt wldg ;Tube bends, steel 5d ;Bending radii, seaml.& wld pipes ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, bends ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, elbows ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, elbows, reduced ;Malleable cast iron fittings, elbows ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, bend bend bend bend bend bend bend bend bend bend radius radius radius radius radius radius radius radius radius radius 1d, standard 12.85 1.5d, standard 12.85 2.5d, standard 12.85 5d, standard 12.85 10d, standard 12.85 1d, standard 12.85 1.5d, standard 12.85 2.5d, standard 12.85 5d, standard 12.85 10d, standard 12.85

7230 = ’DIN 2848’ 7231 = ’DIN 2873’ 7240 = ’DIN 16962’ 7241 = ’DIN 16962’ 7242 = ’DIN 16962’ Reducers 7300 = ’DIN 7301 = ’DIN 7302 = ’DIN 7303 = ’DIN 7304 = ’DIN

;Flanged lined steel fittings, Bends ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, Bends ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Pipe bends B1,B2 ;Polypropylen (PP) components,Elb. W1,W2,part 6 ;Polypropylen (PP) components,Elb.W3,W4,part 10

2616’ 2990’ 2988’ 2950’ 2950’

;Steel fittings, reducers ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, Bushings ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, Reducing sockets ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Reducing sockets ; - " - , male and female connections, Bushings

644

_ _______________
Appendix B:
7310 = ’DIN 2848’ 7311 = ’DIN 2873’ 7320 7321 7322 7323 = = = = ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN 16962’ 16962’ 16962’ 16962’ ;Polypropylen ;Polypropylen ;Polypropylen ;Polypropylen (PP) (PP) (PP) (PP) components, components, components, components, Red. Red. Red. Red. Branches 7400 = ’DIN 7401 = ’DIN 7402 = ’DIN 7403 = ’DIN 7404 = ’DIN 7405 = ’DIN 7406 = ’DIN

General Comments

;Flanged lined steel fittings, Reducers ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, Reducers R1, part 9 NRGI, part 9 R2, part 10 R3, part 11

2615’ 2618’ 2618’ 2619’ 2987’ 2987’ 2950’

;Butt wldg steel fittings;T ;Welding saddles, short ;Welding saddles, long ;Bends for welding ;Threaded steel fittings;cross;T ;Threaded steel fittings;cross;T;redcd ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Tees, Crosses ;Flanged lined steel fittings, T ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, T ;Polypropylen ;Polypropylen ;Polypropylen ;Polypropylen (PP) (PP) (PP) (PP) components, components, components, components, Tee, Tee, Tee, Tee,

B. Codelists

7410 = ’DIN 2848’ 7411 = ’DIN 2873’ 7420 7421 7422 7423 = = = = ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN 16962’ 16962’ 16962’ 16962’

T1,T5 part 2 T2, part 7 T2G, part 7 T3, part 10

Caps 7500 = ’DIN 2617’ 7501 = ’DIN 2991’ 7502 = ’DIN 2950’ 7510 = ’DIN 16962’ 7511 = ’DIN 16962’ Other 7600 7601 7602 7603 7604 7605 7606 fittings = ’DIN 2981’ = ’DIN 2982’ = ’DIN 2982’ = ’DIN 2986’ = ’DIN 2990’ = ’DIN 2991’ = ’DIN 2993’

;Butt wldg steel fittings, Caps ;Threaded steel fittings, Caps ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Caps ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Cap K1, part 8 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Cap K2, part 10

;Threaded ;Threaded ;Threaded ;Threaded ;Threaded ;Threaded ;Threaded

steel steel steel steel steel steel steel

fittings with long screw thread fittings, Parallel Nipples fittings, Taper Nipples fittings, Sockets fittings, Hexagon Nipples fittings, Plain plugs fittings, Pipe unions

7610 = ’DIN 2950’

;Malleable cast iron fittings, Sockets, Unions, ;Nipples, Plugs etc. ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Soc. M1,MGI, p. 8 ;Flanged lined steel fittings, spacers ;Flanged lined steel fittings enamelled, spacers

7620 = ’DIN 16962’ 7630 = ’DIN 2848’ 7631 = ’DIN 2873’ Bolts and Nuts 8000 = ’DIN 934’ 8001 = ’DIN 931’ Gaskets 8100 = 8101 = 8102 = 8103 = 8104 = 8105 = 8106 = 8107 =

’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN

2690’ 2691’ 2692’ 2693’ 2695’ 2696’ 2697’ 2698’

;Gasket for plain face C ;Gasket for tongue & groove ;Gasket for recessed faces ;Rings for grooved faces ;Diaphragm ;Lenticular gaskets ;Grooved O- rings ;Corrugated steel sheet

645

_ _______________
Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002
Valves 9000 = 9010 = 9020 = 9030 = 9040 = 9050 = ’Non ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN conform 3202-F’ 3202-S’ 3202-K’ 3202-M’ 3202-F’ DIN 3202’ ; Teil 1 ; Teil 2 ; Teil 3 ; Teil 4 ; Teil 5 Dummy standard 9999 = ’Dummy DIN Std’ ; Used for engineered items and instruments

British Standards geometry standards 12000-16999 sub ranges (provisional) :12000-12099 pipes 12100-12199 flanges 12200-12599 fittings 12600-12999 valves 13000-13199 bolts 13200-13499 gaskets PIPES 12000 12001 12002 12003 12004

= = = = =

’BS3600 ’BS3600 ’BS3600 ’BS3600 ’BS3600

table table table table table

1 2 3 4 5

carbon and low alloy steel tubes’ austenitic stainless steel tubes’ high alloy ferritic steel tubes’ cs tubes for compression fitting - tbi’ ss tubes for compression fitting - tbi’

12010 = ’BS1387 tables 3,4 and 5 light,medium and heavy’ 12015 = ’BS1600 part 2 steel pipe for petroleum industry’ FLANGES 12100 = ’BS4504 p1 steel flanges for pipe,valves and fittings’ 12101 = ’BS4504 p1 iron flanges for pipe,valves and fittings - tbi’ 12110 = ’BS1560 p2 steel pipe flanges Metric dimensions’ FITTINGS 12200 12210 12220 12221 12230 VALVES 12600 12620 12625 12630 12635 12640 12645 12646 12650 12651 12655 12656 = = = = = = = = = = = = ’BS2080 flanged ’BS5150’ ’BS5151’ ’BS5152’ ’BS5153’ ’BS5154’ ’BS5155’ ’BS5155 and app ’BS5156’ ’BS5156 and app ’BS5157’ ’BS5157 and app and butt-welded steel valves’ = = = = = ’BS1740 ’BS1965 ’BS3799 ’BS3799 ’BS1640 part 1 screwed wrought steel pipe fittings ’ part 1 butt welding pipe fittings - CS’ steel pipe fittings screwed and socket welding (mm)’ steel pipe fittings screwed and socket welding (in)’ part 3/4 steel butt-welding pipe fittings ’

A’ A’ A’

646

7’ [Cast iron drainage fittings] [Cast bronze fittings] [Copper solder joint pressure fittings] [Copper solder joint drainage fittings] [Bronze flanges] [Orifice flanges] [Ductile iron flanges and fittings] [Dryseal pipe threads] [Hose coupling screw threads] 40 = ’ASME BPE-97 (PE)’ 41 = ’ASME BPE-97 (MCE)’ 45 = ’ASTM-A74’ 46 = ’ASTM-C76’ 47 = ’ASTM-C700’ [Cast iron S-XH soil pipe and fittings] [Reinforced Concrete Culvert.20. Table Suffix/End Standard .12’ ’ANSI-B16.20.spiral wound for BS4504 flanges’ 13010 = ’BS3381 .15’ ’ANSI-B16.spiral wound for BS1560 flanges’ bolting 13200 = ’BS4882 metric series bolting’ 13210 = ’BS4882 inch series bolting’ dummy 13999 = ’dummy BS code’ General Comments B.22’ ’ANSI-B16. etc. 2-99 5 = ’Default’ [See below for definition] 6 = ’PDS-1’ [See specific table for details] 7 = ’PDS-2’ [See specific table for details] 8 = ’PDS-3’ [See specific table for details] 10 = ’ID Duct’ [Nominal diameter based on inside diameter] 12 15 22 23 24 29 30 33 37 = = = = = = = = = ’ANSI-B16. etc. Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe] [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Perfor Clay Pipe] 647 .36’ ’ANSI-B16.24’ ’ANSI-B16._ _______________ Appendix B: 12660 12661 12665 12666 12670 12671 = = = = = = ’BS5158’ ’BS5158 and app A’ ’BS5159’ ’BS5159 and app A’ ’BS5160’ ’BS5160 and app A’ gaskets 13001 = ’BS4865:part 1 .non-metallic for BS4504 flanges’ 13002 = ’BS4865:part 2 . Codelists CL576.23’ ’ANSI-B16. 300-399 o International practices 1 (JIS) 400-499 o International practices 2 (Australian.Green (999) NOTE: Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows: o US practices 2-99 o European practices 1 (DIN) 100-199 o European practices 2 (British) 200-299 o European practices 3 (Finnish.) 500-599 o Company practices 900-999 1 = [Blank] US Practice Table Suffixes.42’ ’ANSI-B1.3’ ’ANSI-B1. French.

.. Raised-face lap-flanged... B16.5 Flat-face lap-flanged.. in this order of precedence RTJ-face flanged... CL150.....B & D.. 5 is used to define the "Default for end type".ANSI-B16. These are based on API-605 flange bolt diameters and MSS-SP44 flange thicknesses] [MSS non-blind flanges] [MSS blind flanges] ’Crosby’ ’Consolidated’ ’Lonergan’ ’Top Line’ ’Tube-Turn’ ’Dow’ ’Aloyco’ ’Yarway’ ’Teledyne Farris 1’ ’R & G Sloane’ ’American DI Pipe’ ’Gladding McBean’ [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings] ’Taylor Forge’ ’Vendor 4’ CL No...1 or B16. CL175] 62 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl....ANSI-B16... The system will default to table suffix "5" when dimensions from a male termination type table are required in defining the component but the component ends are other than male termination.ANSI-B16.....5 with stub end thickness ignored..5..... Tongue/male-face lap-flanged.5 Groove/female-face flanged... CL175] 61 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl....... hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL275] 70 = ’API-5LE’ 75 = ’API-6A’ 79 = ’API-605-B’ 80 = ’MSS-SP-44-NB’ 81 = ’MSS-SP-44-B’ 85 86 87 88 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Polyethylene fittings] [Wellhead flanges and fittings] [API-605 blind flanges..5 with stub end thickness ignored......5 with stub end thickness ignored.1.....B & D.5 Raised-face flanged..... The basis for this table suffix will be as follows: End Termination Type Basis for Table Values Flat-face flanged. RTJ-face lap-flanged..._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 49 50 55 60 ’AWWA-C110’ [Iron fittings] ’AWWA-C115’ [Iron pipe and fittings] ’AWWA-C151’ [Ductile iron pipe] ’AWWA-C207 Cl......... hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86. which represents the basis on which most US-practice generic piping tables for dimensional parameters will bedefined.ANSI-B16..ANSI-B16...ANSI-B16.5 Tongue/male-face flanged....5 with stub end thickness ignored......... ring’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86..ANSI-B16.......E.ANSI-B16....ANSI-B16...... 648 .......... API-605 or MSS-SP-42...... CL150.

API-5L.. defined in the applicable generic tables...........11 and ANSI-B16...Not applicable Bolt....5..... For sizes and ratings for which APIdoes not apply........ thread engagement will be per Table 2........... Female threaded thread engagement per Table 2..Not applicable User defined.... Female ferrule...................1..........Not applicable Nut...........4 of 2630-33 Female grooved..5 with stub end thickness ignored..............None o European practices 1 (DIN) 100-199 649 ... Female hose........... Codelists RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws... for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs...............ANSI-B16.. the bolt circle diameter from ANSI-B16......5..... All thru-bolted..................Forged steel......................For pressure ratings XXXX#s. less one bolt diameter l 1/8 inch will be used for parameter "P"....4 of 2630-33 descriptions in the applicable generic tables.... Mechanical joint bell................_ _______________ Appendix B: General Comments Groove/female-face lap-flanged....AWWA-C110 Gasket.None Flat-face thru-bolted with cap screws...... for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs..................... per basis defined in the applicable generic tables...... ASTM-D2466 or ASTM-D2467 Socketwelded.....................For sizes and ratings for which API-590 applie the value of parameter "P" shall be taken from API-590..... thread engageme will be per Table 2...DOW Male..... API-5LS or API-5LU PVC & CPVC socket..Victaulic catalog G100E Female quick connect....................... In all cases..........None Flat-full-face thru-bolted... per ANSI and ANSI-B16.......... API-5LP.......... ANSI-B36-19M.ANSI-B36... per ANSI-B16...............For pressure ratings XXXX#s. in th order of precendence.....None Raised-face thru-bolted with cap screws........... In all cases... API-605 or MSS-SP-42..... Male RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws...5...10M........ API-5LE.............API-5LP......................None B.......4 of 2630-33 ..................... B16..

Table Suffix/End Standard .) 500-599 o Company practices 900-999 650 . 300-399 o International practices 1 (JIS) 400-499 o International practices 2 (Australian.Red (999) NOTE: Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows: o US practices 2-99 o European practices 1 (DIN) 100-199 o European practices 2 (British) 200-299 o European practices 3 (Finnish. French. etc._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 Codelist numbers used for DIN European practice Generic dimension data select flag access starts here 105 = ’Gen blt & fem end prep dim’ 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 = = = = = = = = = ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt dim dim dim dim dim dim dim dim dim for for for for for for lap for for cast steel flanges’ cast iron flanges’ oval screwed flanges’ screwed flanges’ sold & weld flanges’ lap flanges’ flanges w/ plain collars’ loose flanges w/ weld neck’ loose flanges in enamelled componnents’ 125 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 1’ 126 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 2’ 129 = ’OD for plastic pipes’ 130 131 132 133 134 140 141 142 143 144 = = = = = = = = = = ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD acc acc acc acc acc acc acc acc acc acc to to to to to to to to to to DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN 2445-1 2445-1 2445-1 2445-1 2445-1 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN 100’ 160’ 250’ 320’ 400’ 64-100’ 160’ 250’ 320’ 400’ 150 = ’OD acc to DIN 2391’ 160 = ’OD acc to DIN 2393’ 170 = ’OD acc to DIN 2440’ 171 = ’OD acc to DIN 2441’ 179 = ’OD for threaded components’ British Standards 205 = ’default metric’ 206 = ’default converted imperial’ 210 = ’plate flanges BS4504’ CL577. etc.

hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86.42’ ’ANSI-B1.24’ ’ANSI-B16. CL175] 62 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.36’ ’ANSI-B16.7’ [Cast iron drainage fittings] [Cast bronze fittings] [Copper solder joint pressure fittings] [Copper solder joint drainage fittings] [Bronze flanges] [Orifice flanges] [Ductile iron flanges and fittings] [Dryseal pipe threads] [Hose coupling screw threads] B. ring’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86.23’ ’ANSI-B16. Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe] [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Perfor Clay Pipe] 49 50 55 60 ’AWWA-C110’ [Iron fittings] ’AWWA-C115’ [Iron pipe and fittings] ’AWWA-C151’ [Ductile iron pipe] ’AWWA-C207 Cl.12’ ’ANSI-B16. CL175] 61 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.20. 2-99 5 = ’Default’ [See below for definition] 6 = ’PDS-1’ [See specific table for details] 7 = ’PDS-2’ [See specific table for details] 8 = ’PDS-3’ [See specific table for details] 10 = ’ID Duct’ [Nominal diameter based on inside diameter] 12 15 22 23 24 29 30 33 37 = = = = = = = = = ’ANSI-B16. Codelists 40 = ’ASME BPE-97 (PE)’ 41 = ’ASME BPE-97 (MCE)’ 45 = ’ASTM-A74’ 46 = ’ASTM-C76’ 47 = ’ASTM-C700’ [Cast iron S-XH soil pipe and fittings] [Reinforced Concrete Culvert. CL150.B & D. The system will default to table suffix "5" when dimensions from a male termination type 651 . These are based on API-605 flange bolt diameters and MSS-SP44 flange thicknesses] [MSS non-blind flanges] [MSS blind flanges] ’Crosby’ ’Consolidated’ ’Lonergan’ ’Tube-Turn’ ’Dow’ ’Aloyco’ ’Yarway’ ’Teledyne Farris 1’ ’R & G Sloane’ ’American DI Pipe’ ’Gladding McBean’ [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings] ’Taylor Forge’ ’Vendor 4’ CL No. 5 is used to define the "Default for end type". which represents the basis on which most US-practice generic piping tables for dimensional parameters will bedefined.15’ ’ANSI-B16. CL150.3’ ’ANSI-B1. hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL275] 70 = ’API-5LE’ 75 = ’API-6A’ 79 = ’API-605-B’ 80 = ’MSS-SP-44-NB’ 81 = ’MSS-SP-44-B’ 85 86 87 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = [Polyethylene fittings] [Wellhead flanges and fittings] [API-605 blind flanges.E.20._ _______________ Appendix B: 1 = [Blank] General Comments US Practice Table Suffixes.22’ ’ANSI-B16.B & D.

.ANSI-B16......... for 652 .. the bolt circle diameter from ANSI-B16...ANSI-B16... per basis defined in the applicable generic tables...... API-605 or MSS-SP-42...ANSI-B16. less one bolt diameter l 1/8 inch will be used for parameter "P"... API-5L......ANSI-B16. API-5LS or API-5LU PVC & CPVC socket...ANSI-B16...............1. API-605 or MSS-SP-42.... API-5LE....API-5LP.. in th order of precendence......ANSI-B16...............ANSI-B16...None Flat-full-face thru-bolted......5 Tongue/male-face flanged. for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs..5 Groove/female-face flanged.. For sizes and ratings for which APIdoes not apply.5........ANSI-B16.. B16...........DOW Male..5 Flat-face lap-flanged. B16.. in this order of precedence RTJ-face flanged.................. Male RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws....ANSI-B36...For pressure ratings XXXX#s......... Tongue/male-face lap-flanged...For pressure ratings XXXX#s. All thru-bolted............... The basis for this table suffix will be as follows: End Termination Type Basis for Table Values Flat-face flanged...........ANSI-B16.......5......................... Groove/female-face lap-flanged........10M..ANSI-B16. Female threaded thread engagement per Table 2... per ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored...... RTJ-face lap-flanged...........1....None Flat-face thru-bolted with cap screws........5 with stub end thickness ignored....5 with stub end thickness ignored........ ANSI-B36-19M....None Raised-face thru-bolted with cap screws..5 with stub end thickness ignored.......... Raised-face lap-flanged......_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 table are required in defining the component but the component ends are other than male termination.......5...................None RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws..For sizes and ratings for which API-590 applie the value of parameter "P" shall be taken from API-590... ASTM-D2466 or ASTM-D2467 Socketwelded..........11 and ANSI-B16.... API-5LP....Forged steel.5 Raised-face flanged........5 with stub end thickness ignored...1 or B16............ defined in the applicable generic tables.......4 of 2630-33 .......

.Not applicable Bolt....4 of 2630-33 B..._ _______________ Appendix B: Female grooved.....Not applicable User defined.... thread engagement will be per Table 2........... Codelists 100-199 125 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 1’ 126 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 2’ 129 = ’OD for plastic pipes’ 130 131 132 133 134 140 141 142 143 144 = = = = = = = = = = ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD acc acc acc acc acc acc acc acc acc acc to to to to to to to to to to DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN 2445-1 2445-1 2445-1 2445-1 2445-1 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN 100’ 160’ 250’ 320’ 400’ 64-100’ 160’ 250’ 320’ 400’ 150 = ’OD acc to DIN 2391’ 653 ........... Female ferrule.Not applicable Nut................4 of 2630-33 descriptions in the applicable generic tables.......................Victaulic catalog G100E Female quick connect........AWWA-C110 Gasket................ In all cases.........5....................... In all cases....... Mechanical joint bell........... Female hose.. thread engageme will be per Table 2. per ANSI and ANSI-B16...........................................None o European practices 1 (DIN) Codelist numbers used for DIN European practice Generic dimension data select flag access starts here 105 = ’Gen blt & fem end prep dim’ 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 = = = = = = = = = ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt dim dim dim dim dim dim dim dim dim for for for for for for lap for for cast steel flanges’ cast iron flanges’ oval screwed flanges’ screwed flanges’ sold & weld flanges’ lap flanges’ flanges w/ plain collars’ loose flanges w/ weld neck’ loose flanges in enamelled componnents’ General Comments pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs............

2-99 9 = ’35 pcf’ [Vitrified clay] 10 = ’57 pcf’ [Polypropylene] 16 = ’88 pcf’ [PVC] 22 = ’97 pcf’ [CPVC] 28 = ’111 pcf’ [FRP. Kynar] 30 = ’150 pcf’ [Reinforced concrete pipe] 34 = ’165 pcf’ [Aluminum] 40 = ’260 pcf’ [Titanium] 46 = ’450 pcf’ [Iron] 47 = ’450 pcf’ [Standard thk cement linin._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 160 = ’OD acc to DIN 2393’ 170 = ’OD acc to DIN 2440’ 171 = ’OD acc to DIN 2441’ 179 = ’OD for threaded components’ 181 182 183 184 185 191 192 193 194 195 = = = = = = = = = = ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness Reihe Reihe Reihe Reihe Reihe 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ selection selection selection selection selection British Standards 205 = ’default metric’ 206 = ’default converted imperial’ 210 = ’plate flanges BS4504’ CL578. 1 = [Blank] US Practice Weight Codes. Inconel] 70 = ’555 pcf’ [Bronze. copper. low Cr alloy steel. Weight Code (399) NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-99 have been reserved for values that apply to US practices. stainless steel] 58 = ’490 pcf’ [Cement lined carbon steel] 64 = ’525 pcf’ [Brass. 101-199 101 = [Blank] 111 112 113 114 115 = = = = = ’Weight ’Weight ’Weight ’Weight ’Weight selection selection selection selection selection flag flag flag flag flag 1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’ 654 . Codelist numbers 100-399 have been reserved for values that apply to practices in other countries. ductile iron] 48 = ’450 pcf’ [Double thk cement lining ductile iron] 52 = ’490 pcf’ [Carbon steel. Monel. nickel] 76 = ’570 pcf’ [Hastelloy] European Practice Weight Codes.

to DIN 3202-F1/K1/V1] [Acc. to DIN 3202-M36] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] General Comments B. to DIN 3202-S13] [Acc. Kynar] [Aluminium] [Titanium] [Iron] [CS] [low alloy st] [SS] [8mm thk cement lined CS] [Brass. to DIN 3202-F16] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F7/S7] [Acc. to DIN 3202-S12] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F11/M11] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F18] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F9/S9/M9] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F3/S3/K3/M3] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F2/S2/K2/M2/V2] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F33/M33] [Acc. Nickel] [Hastelloy] 655 . Codelists British Standards numbers (200-299) units kg per cubic metre 201 = [Blank] 209 210 216 222 228 230 234 240 246 247 248 252 253 254 258 264 270 276 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’561 km3’ ’913 km3’ ’1410 km3’ ’1554 km3’ ’1778 km3’ ’2403 km3’ ’2643 km3’ ’4165 km3’ ’7208 km3’ ’7208 km3’ ’7208 km3’ ’7849 km3’ ’7849 km3’ ’7849 km3’ ’7849 km3’ ’8410 km3’ ’8890 km3’ ’9130 km3’ [polypropylene] [pvc] [cpvc] [FRP. to DIN 3202-V21] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F8/S8/M8] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F6/M6] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F17] [Acc. Inconel] [Bronze. to DIN 3202-F4/K4/M4] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F34] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Acc._ _______________ Appendix B: 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’1’ ’2’ ’3’ ’4’ ’5’ ’6’ ’7’ ’8’ ’9’ ’10’ ’11’ ’12’ ’13’ ’14’ ’15’ ’16’ ’17’ ’18’ ’19’ ’-’ ’21’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’31’ ’32’ ’33’ ’34’ ’-’ ’36’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ [Acc. Monel. to DIN 3202-F5/S5/K5/M5] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F19] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Acc. to DIN 3202-S31] [Acc. to DIN 3202-S10/M10] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F32/M32] [Acc. to DIN 3202-S14/M14] [Acc. copper. to DIN 3202-F15/M15] [Acc.

General ’Specific . Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms 1 2 3 4 5 21 41 42 61 62 63 = = = = = = = = = = = ’General Fittings’ ’Pipe Bends ’ ’Orifice Flanges ’ ’Branch Nipples ’ ’Branch Reinforcement’ ’Valves ’ ’Piping ’ ’Tubing ’ ’Gaskets ’ ’Bolts ’ ’Nuts ’ 100 .Valve ’Typical .299 values are for Piping Specialties 100 .149 range of values are for specific specialties 150 .Valve ’ ’ ’ ’ 300 .Valve ’ ’ ’ ’ specific instruments typical instruments specific valves typical values CL999.General ’Typical . Standard Note Title (2000) NOTE: In editing this codelist set.349 range of values are for 350 .399 range of values are for 400 .499 values are for Instruments 300 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 CL990. 1 = [Blank] 31 = ’Object Types for Mass Annotation’ 35 = ’Approval Status’ 36 = ’Structural Approval Status’ 37 = ’HVAC Approval Status’ 50 = ’Hold Status’ 69 = ’Equipment Division’ 125 = ’Fluid Code’ 130 = ’Construction Status’ 145 = ’Materials Grade’ 148 = ’Materials Description’ 160 = ’Responsibility’ 180 = ’Fabrication Category’ 190 = ’Coating Requirements’ 200 = ’Heat Tracing Requirements’ 210 = ’Heat Tracing Media’ 220 = ’Insulation Purpose’ 230 = ’Cleaning Requirements’ 656 .499 range of values are for 300 350 400 450 = = = = ’Specific .299 range of values are for typical valves 100 150 200 250 = = = = ’Specific .449 range of values are for 450 . do not change the meaning of existing codelist values.249 range of values are for specific valves 250 .General ’Specific .General ’Typical .Valve ’Typical .199 range of values are for typical specialties 200 .

944 0.787 0.Green’ ’Table Suffix / End Standard . Area Units (25) No 1 3 5 7 10 12 14 Unit Name ftˆ2 inˆ2 ydˆ2 miˆ2 mmˆ2 cmˆ2 mˆ2 Convert to Destination Unit Dest.0 1.451 6* E+00 mˆ2 8.076 0.589 988 E+00 mmˆ2 1 mmˆ2 1.0* E+02 cmˆ2 1.0 6.0 2.0 1.0 1. Codelists CL1010.361 274 E-01 kmˆ2 2.0 9.076 0.0* 0.Red’ ’Weight Code’ ’Spec Writer Data Form Type’ ’Standard Note Title’ ’Area Units’ ’Weight Units’ ’Temperature Units’ ’Pressure Units’ ’Density Units’ ’Weld Type’ ’Force Units’ ’Drawing Scale’ ’Drawing Size’ ’Interference Manager Approval Status’ ’Interference Clash Type’ ’Interference Manager Action’ ’Interference Manager Approval Method’ ’Clash Checking Option’ ’Clash Checking Volume Filter Option’ ’Report Source’ ’Report Type’ ’Design Review Type’ ’Model Status’ ’Force Units for FrameWorks Plus’ ’Drawing View Direction’ ’Drawing View Composition Status’ ’Document Type’ ’Document Sub-Type’ ’Isometric Drawing Type’ ’Orthographic Drawing Type’ General Comments B. Unit Factor mˆ2 9.0* 0.0 1._ _______________ Appendix B: 330 332 340 360 365 366 380 390 400 420 425 430 499 530 550 570 572 575 576 577 578 990 999 1010 1028 1056 1064 1074 1100 1162 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1207 1208 1209 1310 1312 1410 1605 1610 1620 1630 1710 1720 1900 2000 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’End Preparation’ ’Schedule / Thickness Override’ ’Safety Classification’ ’Stress Analysis Requirements’ ’Reporting Requirements’ ’Requirement to Reconstruct’ ’Piping Component Type’ ’Action’ ’Commodity Option’ ’Piping Component Data Source’ ’Piping/Tubing Type/Source’ ’Instrument Component Data Source’ ’Piping Notes’ ’Accessory / Item Type’ ’Operator / Actuator Type’ ’Design Standard’ ’Wall Thickness Equation’ ’Geometry Standard’ ’Table Suffix / End Standard .290 304* E-02 cmˆ2 6.076 in CL E+00 444 E-03 E+00 840 E+07 391 E-05 391 E-03 391 E+01 657 .0* E+04 Convert To First Unit A B 0.

933 672 E-02 E+01 1.469 595 19 Pa [absolute] Pa 1 -1.204 622 — — -9999. Unit Factor A 1 psig [gage] kPa 0.0 1.386 38 E+00 -1.0 2.0 First Unit in CL B 1.8 0.0* E+02 -1. Changes will NOT be recognized unless the software is changed to use them.469 595 10 bar [absolute] kPa 1.450 377 E+01 1. Convert to Destination Unit Convert To No Unit Name Dest.422 334 E+01 E+01 1.469 595 4 inH2O [absolute] kPa 2.0* E+ E+01 1.24* (Mu)g 1 0.016 047 E+00 0. First Unit in CL B 1. Mass Units (40) No 1 3 9 11 20 22 24 26 28 40 Unit Name lb grain USton UKton (Mu)g mg g kg Mg [Blank] Convert to Destination Unit Convert To First Unit in Dest.469 595 16 inHg @ 32degF kPa 3. CL1028.535 924 E-01 0.479 891 E+01 0.469 595 15 mmH2O [absolute] kPa 9. 1.013 250* E+02 -1. 1.806 38 E-03 -1.0 1.450 377 E+02 0.333 22 E-01 -1.450 377 E-01 658 .469 595 E+01 E+01 1.0 13 dyn/cmˆ2 [absolute] Pa 1.488 4 E-01 -1. Pressure Units (40) NOTE: New entries in this codelist cannot be added by the user.8* E+00 E+02 0.450 377 E-01 0.450 377 E+02 -9999.894 757 E+00 -1.076 391 E+07 -9999.204 622 mg 1 0.0 21 kg/cm*2 [absolute] kPa 9.469 595 20 kg/cm*2 (gage) [gage] psig 1.428 571 Mg 9.469 595 7 inHg [absolute] kPa 3.450 377 E-01 E+01 1.596 900 K 1 -4.0* E+03 -1.469 595 9 atm [absolute] kPa 1.204 622 g 1 0.0 2 psi [absolute] kPa 6.450 377 E-05 E+01 1.469 595 8 mmHg [absolute] kPa 1.8* E+00 -9999.469 595 18 MPa [absolute] kPa 1.422 334 E+01 1.0* — E+06 0.422 295 E-03 E+01 4.0 2. CL E+00 E-04 E+03 E+03 E-09 E-06 E-03 E+00 E+03 CL1056.0* E+00 E+01 3. -9999._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 16 25 kmˆ2 [Blank] mˆ2 — 1.596 900 — — -9999.0* E-01 -1.422 334 E+01 0.897 707 E-01 E+01 1. Unit Factor A B kg 4.32)/1.911 054 E-01 E+01 1.0 2.204 622 kg 1 0.450 377 E+01 E+01 1.450 377 E+02 E+01 1.0* mg 6.0* E+00 E+01 1. Temperature Units (15) No 1 2 3 4 15 Unit Name degF degC degR K [Blank] Convert to Destination Unit Convert To Dest. CL1064.0 40 [Blank] — — -9999.0* Mg 1.469 595 11 bar (gage) [gage] psig 1.613 010 E-02 E+01 4.0 2.806 65 E+01 -1.450 377 E+01 0.0 2.204 622 Mg 1 0.071 847 E-01 0. 67 kPa_g psig 1.2* K 5/9 -4.450 377 E-04 1.469 595 6 inH2O @ 32degF kPa 2.469 595 17 kPa [absolute] kPa 1 -1.0* E+00 E+02 1.469 595 22 Mpa_g psig 1.0 2.491 14 E-01 -1.0 -9999.0 2.609 119 E-02 E+01 3. Unit Factor A degC (degF .376 85 E+00 -1.0 degC 1 +3.

601 846 E+04 0.0 1.977 633 E+01 0.0* E+03 0.480 519 E+00 kg/mˆ3 1. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values.0 6. Drawing Scale (540) (1-499) English System of Units 1 = [Blank] 104 = ’=1/8"= 1’ 0"’ 108 = ’=1/4"= 1’ 0"’ 112 = ’=3/8"= 1’ 0"’ 116 = ’=1/2"= 1’ 0"’ 124 = ’=3/4"= 1’ 0"’ 132 = ’=1"= 1’ 0"’ 164 = ’=2"= 1’ 0"’ 659 . numbers 20-29 have been reserved for field welds.0* E+03 kg/mˆ3 Use API2564 Tbl -9999. Unit Factor A B kg/mˆ3 1. and 30-39 have been reserved for offshore welds.601 846 E+01 0. Weld Type (100) NOTE: Codelist numbers 0-19 have been reserved for shop welds.728 000 E+03 kg/mˆ3 3.198 264 E+02 0.0* E+00 kg/mˆ3 9. Force Units (40) 1 3 5 7 20 22 24 26 28 40 = = = = = = = = = = ’lbf’ ’kipf’ ’UStonf’ ’UKtonf’ ’dyn’ ’mN’ ’N’ ’kgf’ ’kN’ [Blank] CL1201. 1 2 11 21 22 23 24 = = = = = = = [Blank] ’Pipe connector’ ’Shop weld’ ’Field weld at assembly site’ ’Field weld at job site’ ’Field weld at job site for loose flange’ ’Field fit weld at job site’ CL1162.203 692 E+04 0. Density Units (35) No 1 3 5 7 9 11 17 20 22 24 26 35 Unit Name lb/ftˆ3 lb/UKgal lb/USgal kip/ftˆ3 lb/inˆ3 USton/ftˆ3 degAPI kg/mˆ3 g/cmˆ3 kg/L kg/dmˆ3 [Blank] Convert to Destination Unit Convert To First Unit in CL Dest. In editing this codelist set.0 6.0 6.0 6.242 797 E-02 kg/dmˆ3 1 0.242 797 E+01 — — -9999. B.0 1. Codelists CL1100.242 797 E+01 kg/mˆ3 1 E+03 0._ _______________ Appendix B: General Comments CL1074. -9999.0 6. kg/mˆ3 1 0.767 990 E+04 0. -9999.0 2.242 797 E+01 kg/mˆ3 1.0 7.0 1.0* E+03 kg/mˆ3 2.228 834 E+00 kg/mˆ3 1.

Interference Manager Action (10) 1 2 3 4 = = = = ’No Action by user’ ’Approve Real Clash’ ’Approve False Clash’ ’Transfer Responsibility’ 660 . Drawing Size (199) (1-99) English System of Units 1 = ’A’ 2 = ’B’ 3 = ’C’ 4 = ’D’ 5 = ’E’ 6 = ’F’ (100-199) Metric System of Units 101 = ’A0’ 102 = ’A1’ 103 = ’A2’ 104 = ’A3’ 105 = ’A4’ CL1203. Interference Manager Approval Status (99) 1 = ’Unapproved’ 2 = ’Approved’ 99 = ’Cleared’ [User has approved clash] [Software detected that clash has been fixed] CL1204. Interference Clash Type (10) 1 2 3 4 5 6 = = = = = = ’Hard versus Hard’ ’Hard versus Soft’ ’Hard versus Construction’ ’Soft versus Soft’ ’Soft versus Construction’ ’Construct vs Construct=Construction versus Construction’ CL1205._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 (500-599) Metric System of Units 500 = ’1:10’ 510 = ’1:4’ 530 = ’1:2’ 540 = ’1:1’ CL1202.

_ _______________ Appendix B: 1 = ’Not Approved’ 2 = ’Accepted by Graphical Review’ 3 = ’Accepted from List’ General Comments CL1207. Report Type (999) NOTE: Document types defined below must be numerically identical to those defined in CL1720. Document Type. 1 2 3 11 12 21 22 = = = = = = = ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ MTO Report Drawing Report PID Report Header Project Control Report Clash Management Report Piping Job Spec Report Table Checker Report ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ CL1312. 21-30 reference data. Report Source (99) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. codelist numbers used must not exceed ’999’. Clash Checking Option 1 2 3 4 = = = = ’Unknown’ ’Project Mode’ ’Design Area Mode’ ’Pre-defined Volume Mode’ B. Clash Checking Volume Filter Option 1 = ’Volume Filter Is Inactive’ 2 = ’Volume Filter Is Active’ CL1310. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Codelists CL1209. 11-20 from project data. 601 682 685 687 689 690 692 696 = = = = = = = = ’Piping RDB Reports’ ’Equipment List’ ’Piping Line List’ ’Piping Segments Report’ ’Piping Components MTO Report’ ’Pipe Supports Report’ ’Instrument List’ ’Piping Release Report’ 661 . Interference Manager Approval Method (10) CL1208. In editing this codelist set. Codelist values are reserved as follows: 0-10 from design data.

Design Review Type (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set. In editing this codelist set. Drawing View Directions (7) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = = = = = = = ’Plan’ ’East Elevation’ ’North Elevation’ ’Isometric’ ’West Elevation’ ’South Elevation’ ’Plan (Vertical)’ CL1630. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Document Source (99) NOTE: Do not make any new entries to this codelist. Force Units for FrameWorks Plus (40) 1 2 3 4 = = = = ’LBS’ ’KIPS’ ’N’ ’kN’ CL1620. Drawing View Composition Status (4) 1 2 3 4 = = = = ’Drawing View Not Composed’ ’Drawing View Composed’ ’Composite Drawing View Not Composed’ ’Composite Drawing View Composed’ CL1710. 1 = ’Process RDB report’ 2 = ’Process TDB report’ 5 = ’Process TDB drawing’ 662 . 1 = ’Client Review’ 2 = ’Informal Review’ CL1605._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 CL1410. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Model Status 1 11 12 21 = = = = ’Undefined’ ’Preliminary’ ’Temporary’ ’Permanent’ CL1610.

Document Type (999) NOTE: The PDS source of each document type is shown to the right of the document type separated from it by the character ’|’ on the basis of codelist numbers defined in CL1710. In editing this codelist set. Document Source. (100-199) Process Documents 101 = ’Process RDB Reports | 1’ 121 = ’Process Flow Diagrams | 5’ 125 = ’Materials of Construction Drawings | 5’ 127 = ’Temperature/Pressure Diagrams | 5’ 131 = ’Equipment Process Datasheets | 2’ 133 = ’Instrument Process Datasheets | 2’ 199 = ’Other Process Documents | 99’ 663 . respect the number ranges identified below. Codelists 46 = ’Piping Specialty RDB report’ 47 = ’Piping Specialty TDB report’ 51 = ’Civil/Structural RDB report’ 52 = ’Civil/Structural TDB report’ 55 = ’Civil/Structural TDB drawing’ 61 62 65 67 = = = = ’Piping ’Piping ’Piping ’Piping RDB report’ TDB report (PD_Report)’ TDB drawing (PD_Draw)’ isometric TDB drawing’ 71 = ’Instrument RDB report’ 72 = ’Instrument TDB report’ 75 = ’Instrument TDB drawing’ 81 = ’Electrical RDB report’ 82 = ’Electrical TDB report’ 85 = ’Electrical TDB drawing’ 91 = ’HVAC RDB report’ 92 = ’HVAC TDB report’ 95 = ’HVAC TDB drawing’ 99 = ’No planned PDS source’ CL1720._ _______________ Appendix B: 11 = ’P&I RDB report’ 12 = ’P&I TDB report’ 15 = ’P&I TDB drawing’ 21 = ’Vessel RDB report’ 22 = ’Vessel TDB report’ 25 = ’Vessel TDB drawing’ 31 = ’Heat Transfer RDB report’ 32 = ’Heat Transfer TDB report’ 35 = ’Heat Transfer TDB drawing’ 41 = ’Mechanical RDB report’ 42 = ’Mechanical TDB report’ 45 = ’Mechanical TDB drawing’ General Comments B.

Plans. Sections and Details | 65’ 545 = ’Concrete Structural Drawings | 55’ 550 = ’Steel Structural Drawings | 55’ 570 = ’Building Drawings | 99’ 599 = ’Other Civil/Structural Documents | 99’ (600-699) Piping Documents 601 = ’Piping RDB Reports | 61’ 602 = ’Piping Specialty RDB Reports | 46’ 605 = ’Piping Job Specifications | 99’ 611 = ’Piping Commodity Requisitions | 99’ 612 = ’Piping Specialty Requisitions | 47’ 631 = ’P&IDs | 15’ 633 = ’Hydrotest P&IDs | 15’ 641 = ’Plot Plans | 65’ 643 = ’Equipment Arrangement Drawings | 65’ 651 = ’Piping Underground Drawings | 65’ 661 = ’Equipment Orientations | 65’ 663 = ’Piping One Line Drawings | 65’ 665 = ’Piping Perspectives. Sections and Details | 65’ 667 = ’Pipeline Alignment Drawings | 65’ 669 = ’Piping Isometric Drawings | 67’ 671 = ’Piping Spool Drawings | 67’ 673 = ’Spring Hanger Drawings | 99’ 675 = ’Pipe Support Details | 99’ 664 . Plans._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 (200-299) Vessel Documents 201 = ’Vessel RDB Reports | 21’ 205 = ’Vessel Job Specifications | 99’ 211 = ’Vessel Requisitions | 22’ 231 = ’Reactor Drawings | 25’ 233 = ’Regenerator Drawings | 25’ 235 = ’Cyclone Drawings | 25’ 237 = ’Transfer Line Drawings | 25’ 239 = ’Tower Drawings | 25’ 241 = ’Drum Drawings | 25’ 243 = ’Tank Drawings | 25’ 245 = ’Silo Drawings | 25’ 247 = ’Stack Drawings | 25’ 299 = ’Other Vessel Documents | 99’ (300-399) Heat Transfer Documents 301 = ’Heat Transfer RDB Reports | 31’ 305 = ’Heat Transfer Job Specifications | 99’ 311 = ’Heat Transfer Requisitions | 32’ 331 = ’Heat Transfer Drawings | 35’ 399 = ’Other Heat Transfer Documents | 99’ (400-499) Mechanical Equipment Documents 401 = ’Mechanical RDB Reports | 41’ 405 = ’Mechanical Equipment Job Specifications | 99’ 411 = ’Mechanical Equipment Requisitions | 42’ 431 = ’Mechanical Equipment Drawings | 45’ 499 = ’Other Mechanical Equipment Documents | 99’ (500-599) Civil/Structural Documents 501 = ’Civil/Structural RDB Reports | 51’ 505 = ’Civil/Structural Job Specifications | 99’ 511 = ’Civil/Structural Requisitions | 99’ 531 = ’Site Preparation Drawings | 99’ 535 = ’Foundation Location Drawings | 65’ 537 = ’Piling Drawings | 65’ 538 = ’Foundation Drawings | 55’ 540 = ’Structural Perspectives.

Sections and Details | 65’ 867 = ’Electrical Heat Tracing Drawings | 99’ 899 = ’Other Electrical Documents | 99’ (900-999) HVAC Documents 901 = ’HVAC RDB Reports | 91’ 905 = ’HVAC Job Specifications | 99’ 911 = ’HVAC Requisitions | 99’ 931 = ’HVAC Flow Diagrams | 99’ 971 = ’HVAC Perspectives. Isometric Drawing Type NOTE: In editing this codelist set._ _______________ Appendix B: 681 682 684 685 687 689 690 692 696 699 = = = = = = = = = = ’P&ID Equipment List | 12’ ’Equipment List | 62’ ’P&ID Line List | 12’ ’Piping Line List | 62’ ’Piping Segments Report | 62’ ’Piping Components MTO Report | 62’ ’Pipe Supports Report | 62’ ’Instrument List | 62’ ’Piping Release Report | 62’ ’Other Piping Documents | 99’ General Comments (700-799) Instrument Documents 701 = ’Instrument RDB Reports | 71’ 705 = ’Instrument Job Specifications | 99’ 711 = ’Instrument Requisitions | 72’ 721 = ’Instrument Logic Diagrams | 75’ 723 = ’Instrument Loop Diagrams | 75’ 731 = ’Instrument Location Plans | 65’ 733 = ’Instrument Control House/Panel Drawings | 99’ 735 = ’Instrument Hook Up Drawings | 75’ 737 = ’Instrument Heat Tracing Drawings | 75’ 739 = ’Instrument Wiring Drawings | 99’ 771 = ’Instrument Index | 72’ 799 = ’Other Instrument Documents | 99’ (800-899) Electrical Documents 801 = ’Electrical RDB Reports | 81’ 805 = ’Electrical Job Specifications | 99’ 811 = ’Electrical Requisitions | 99’ 831 = ’Electrical One Line Diagrams | 99’ 841 = ’Electrical Area Classification Drawings | 65’ 851 = ’Electrical Underground Drawings | 65’ 861 = ’Electrical Power Drawings | 99’ 863 = ’Electrical Communications Drawings | 99’ 865 = ’Lighting Perspectives. Codelists CL1900. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown. Plans. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Sections and Details | 65’ 999 = ’Other HVAC Documents | 99’ B. 1 = ’Fabrication’ 2 = ’Spool’ 3 = ’Stress’ 665 . Plans. other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.

Sections and Details’ Pipeline Alignment Drawings’ Instrument Location Plans’ Electrical Area Classification Drawings’ Electrical Underground Drawings’ Lighting Perspectives. Plans. Plans. PD_Draw Document Type (999) NOTE: Document types defined below must be numerically identical to those defined in CL1720. do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. In editing this codelist set._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 CL2000. Sections and Details’ Plot Plans’ Equipment Arrangement Drawings’ Piping Underground Drawings’ Equipment Orientations’ Piping One Line Drawings’ Piping Perspectives. 535 537 540 641 643 651 661 663 665 667 731 841 851 865 971 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ Foundation Location Drawings’ Piling Drawings’ Structural Perspectives. Sections and Details’ HVAC Perspectives. Plans. Plans. codelist numbers used must not exceed ’999’. Document Type. Sections and Details’ 666 .

A group of columns defines a table in a database. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. A queue. and then manipulated as individual elements. All network operations (database. A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. Software designed to meet specific needs. NFS. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue Glossary branch point cancel button cell character client In network operations. or channel for moving requests. Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. the menus. A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. See also path name and relative path name. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. column command confirm button 667 . unlike system software which runs other software. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option. An attribute of a database table. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. created through NQS. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. and the keyboard. it controls the message fields. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations.

For example._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. disk drive. or erase. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. interpreted. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. tape drive. though this is not required. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. the most common of which are memory violations. or processed by a specific program. Y. and floppy disk.0. for example. and activate windows and perform window manipulations. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. bus errors. that is. and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder. A nonaddressable component of a network. destroy. or Z axis. identify and accept elements. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points. Y. and Z axes of the design cube. illegal instructions. Normally.0. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0. and to select commands from forms and menus. a component onto which a user cannot log. Also known as key-in field. The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. place elements. to accept previously selected elements. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. A separating mark or space. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. To remove. coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 668 . An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. eliminate. and user-generated quit signals. whereby points are located by traversing the X.

a list of the data available for that field is displayed. or positive. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. A relational database management system supported by RIS. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. A UNIX path name that tells the system where to locate a file. A relational database management system supported by RIS. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. An object (project.) of interest about which information is stored. such as a button. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. a field. that responds to information. a relational database table. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. A portion of a form._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. element. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS. including the file name. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. A pictorial representation or image. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. See also relative path name. or a checklist. and so forth. difference in longitude. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename Glossary form full path name gadget header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 669 . When selected. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. a symbol that graphically identifies a command. See interference envelope. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. drawing. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas.

A graphic representation or schema. the Prompt field. the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations. An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. Network File System. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. or it can mean the connected system. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system. including vertices. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. Also known as a data entry field. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. It is divided into the Command Status field. the Current Command field. and the Key-in field. to which you can snap. The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. A name. A point on an element. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 670 . or alias. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file.

A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. the point where the x. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. See also path name and absolute path name. report formats and other information of a similar manner. but is level. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. job specifications. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. vendor’s catalog data. Reference Database. and is three-dimensional. label descriptions. to change the angular orientation. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. having no elevations or depressions. To turn. Glossary path name PDS pipe queue place data point plane RDB reference database relative path name rotate 671 . graphics symbology. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane._ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. y. Network Queuing System. The sequence of directories leading to a file. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. To identify a specific element. In coordinate geometry. See also absolute path name and relative path name. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. and z-axes intersect. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. commodity libraries. A relational database management system supported by RIS. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. or indicate a specific point in the design file. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources.

to change between two alternatives. and z axes. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes. This means that unneeded files and data. y. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type.y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. All network operations (database. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. The defined area of vision on a screen. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor.y. solid. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory. Language developed by IBM for creating. See also active depth. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. A name that provides access to an account on the system. stay on the disk until they are called for. while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. To switch. The x. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. The display style of an element. and querying relational databases. including color. NFS. In network operations. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data. The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. modifying. generally represented as a line. style. dash-dot. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. Data._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 row A unit of related information in a table. One collection of column values for a table. A collection of data for quick reference. and weight. the software can perform processing more quickly. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 672 . either entered by the user or determined by the software. A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database.z). The software uses virtual memory to store data. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. and so forth. that are stored in an attribute. Views are created with their own x.

_ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files. Glossary Glossary 673 .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 674 .

234 gasket diameter table 231 pipe length threshold table 222 preferred bolt length table 223 segment pipe run length threshold table 221 weld clearance 228 weld graphics dimensions 229 weld type 226 batch processes 40 bend deflection table 219 bends and branches 271 bolt commodity code table 230 bolted connections 326. 328 ends 324 bolts 272 branch insertion tables 208 reinforcement equations 203 C clash management labels 468 clash approval action 660 clash approval method 661 clash checking volume filter option 661 clash checking option 661 clash type 660 cleaning requirements 613 coating requirements 611 code lists sets 449 codelist 1010 657 1028 658 1056 658 1064 658 1074 659 1100 659 1162 659 1201 659 1202 660 1203 660 1204 660 1205 660 1207 661 1208 661 1209 661 125 574 1310 661 1312 661 1410 662 148 603 160 611 1605 662 1610 662 1620 662 1630 662 1710 662 Index Index 675 ._ _______________ Index A abbreviations 314 accessory/item type 634 action 625 actuator type 634 alphanumeric labels 466 approval status 573 HVAC 573 structural 573 area units 657 assembly data management create/batch 529 create/interactive 528 delete 532 extract 535 list 534 report 533 revise 530 B basic tables 215 bend deflection table 219 bolt commodity code 230 commodity item name 216 component mirror 233 field fit length 232.

292 piping specialty specification data 130 piping assembly data 528 PJS table 243. 279 implied material data 141 instrument specification data 134 label attribute data 478 data 473 graphic data 475 material description library 378 physical commodity data 291._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 codelist (continued) 1720 663 180 611 190 611 1900 665 200 612 2000 666 210 612 220 613 230 613 31 572 330 613 332 616 340 618 35 573 36 573 360 618 365 618 366 618 37 573 380 618 390 625 400 625 420 631 425 632 430 632 499 632 50 574 530 634 550 634 570 635 572 636 575 636 576 647 577 650 578 654 69 574 990 656 999 656 codelist names 656 codelist sets 567 comments 569 commodity code attribute message 467 implied data 140 item name table 216 specification data 67 component insulation exclusion data 95 mirror table 233 connect point data 270 connector type 574 construction tolerance exclusion data 101 construction status 578 conventions forms 37 copy report discrimination data 169 report format 159 cp type/termination/preparation 613 create assembly data 529 graphic commodity data 278. 244 report discrimination data 165 report format 159 standard note type 456 tap properties data 138 tutorial definition file 441 create/batch 244 D data retrieval from the physical data library 267 database information 30 structure reference 56 DBAccess 463 default project control data 53 676 .

662 forms conventions 37 piping commodity data 656 G gadgets conventions 37 gaskets 272 diameter table 231 separation table 212 generic tables 319 bolted ends 324 female ends 332 male ends 330 studs in bolted connections 326 w/ term type 328 variables 320 weight and thickness data._ _______________ delete graphic commodity data 283 label data 487 physical commodity data 296 piping assembly data 532 PJS table 247 spec data 151 standard note data 461 tutorial definition file 446 delivered reference data 31 density units 659 design review type 662 design standard 635 dimension data example of data look-up 268 directions drawing view 662 discrimination data file 155. 390 displayable attribute labels 466 message 466 document organization 16 purpose 15 document source 662 document type 663. 666 drawing scale 659 drawing size 660 drawing type isometric 665 drawing view composition status 662 directions 662 E empty weight GCP and RCP data 352 GCP data 348 valves 350 overflow data 351 end prep 613 end standard green 647 red 650 equation wall thickness 636 equipment and piping codelist names 656 equipment divisions/form code 574 error messages 565 example physical data look-up 268 extract assembly data 535 graphic commodity data 286 physical commodity data 300 PJS tables 251 standard note type 462 tutorial definition file 447 F fabrication category 611 female ends 332 field fit length table 232. male ends 333 geometry standard 636 graphic commodity data 27 library 254 manager 275 parametric shape definitions 263 physical data definitions 259 sub-symbol processor 258 symbol processors 256 data Index Index 677 . 234 fire and safety components 316 fittings 316 flange insulation exclusion data 98 flanges 272 fluid code 574 force units 659.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 graphic (continued) data (continued) library 253 graphic commodity library 254 notes for graphic commodity data 270 physical data tables 266 management create/batch 279 create/interactive 278 delete 283 extract 286 list 285 report 284 revise 281 green and red connect point data 342 overflow data 344 green connect point data 339 end standard 647 overflow data 341 table suffix 647 H heat tracing media 612 heat tracing requirements 612 help 41 hold status 574 hose 273 HVAC approval status 573 I implied material data 91 instrument component specification data 81 components 318 data 133 physical data tables 355 body 355 operators 358 instrument component type/source 632 insulation exclusion data 95. 465 label types 466 manager 471 merge 495 library manager create 473 types 466 alphanumeric labels 466 clash management 468 commodity code attribute message 467 displayable attribute labels 466 message 466 isometric drawing labels 467 report labels 468 libraries location 48 library verify RDB 561 library manager tutorial definition file 438 list assembly data 534 graphic commodity data 285 physical commodity data 299 PJS tables 250 standard note data 460 tutorial definition file 445 load spec neutral files 148 678 . 98 insulation purpose 613 interactive spec writer 103 table check 144 interference clash type 660 interference manager action 660 interference manager approval method 661 interference manager approval status 660 introduction database information 30 delivered reference data 31 project organization 22 reference data overview 23 reference data setup 32 isometric drawing labels 467 isometric drawing type 665 L label description data management create attribute data 478 create graphic data 475 delete 487 report 489 revise 485 library 29.

382 report 383 unapproved ==> approved 378 material reference database 366 reference database material description data 366 structure 56 component insulation exclusion data 95 flange insulation exclusion data 98 implied data 91 instrument 81 piping commodity 67 materials class 62 specialty 77 size-dependent data 88 tap properties 85 materials data table 200 materials grade 578 model status 662 MTO tables and functions 237 MTO flag 618 N naming conventions tables 303 neutral files location 53 spec data 59 nominal piping diameter table 194 notes graphic commodity data 270 bends and branches 271 bolts. tubing. 380 long material description library 372 M male ends 330 weight and thickness data 333 mass units 658 material description data 28._ _______________ load (continued) standard note data 463 load/revise material description data 379. gaskets. and hose 273 O object types orthographic drawings 572 on-line help 41 operator type 634 operators and actuators 345 overflow data 347 option code 625 options reference data 43 orthographic drawings object types 572 override schedule/thickness 616 P parametric shape definitions 263 PDS environment 33 PD_Shell 34 PD_Shell 34 form conventions 37 physical data definitions 259 library manager 287 management create 291 create/batch 292 delete 296 extract 300 list 299 report 297 revise 294 tables 266 data look-up 268 data retrieval 267 pipe 273 length threshold table 222 piping assembly Index Index 679 . and flanges 272 connect point data 270 pipe. 361 long material description library 372 material description library manager 376 short material description library 367 specialty material description library 374 library manager 376 create 378 load/revise batch 380 load/revise option 379 replace option 381.

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 piping (continued) assembly (continued) language 506 examples 521 placing taps in assemblies 520 library 29. 55 database structure 56 manager 145 delete option 151 interactive 103 load and replace options 148 report option 152 report manager report discrimination data 163 tables 189. 190. 239 create/batch 244 create/interactive 243 data management 239 delete table 247 extract 251 library management 239 list 250 report 248 piping (continued) job specification (continued) tables (continued) revise table 245 materials class data 113 materials class data 62 specialty data 129 dimension data 354 specification data 77 piping commodity data forms 656 piping component type 618 piping component type/source 631 piping materials class description 603 piping notes 632 piping/tubing type 632 PJS tables and functions 189 branch insertion tables 208 gasket separation table 212 materials data table 200 nominal piping diameters table 194 temperature and pressure service limits table 191 thickness data tables 197 wall thickness and branch reinforcement equations 203 place taps in assemblies 520 preferred bolt length table 223 pressure units 658 project organization 22 R RDB proposed changes report 555 tables and functions 215 MTO tables and functions 237 verify RBD library 561 red connect point end standard 650 table suffix 650 reference data conflict report 540 location 47 default project control data 53 reference database management data 48 manager 43 680 . 505 manager 525 piping assembly language 506 commodity data 117 implied material data 91 size-dependent material data 88 specification data 67 component tables 334 empty weight GCP and RCP data 352 GCP data 348 valves 350 overflow data 351 GCP data 339 overflow data 341 green and red cp data 342 overflow data 344 operators and actuators 345 overflow data 347 specialty components 354 variables 336 components required tables 315 construction tolerance exclusion data 101 job specification 27.

390 format copy 159 create 159 revise 159 graphic commodity data 284 label data 489 labels 468 material description library 383 output 155. 390 report source 661 report type 661 reporting requirements 618 required tables 315 requirement to reconstruct 618 requirements reporting 618 responsibility 611 revise graphic commodity data 281 implied material data 141 instrument specification data 134 label data 485 physical commodity data 294 piping specialty specification data 130 piping assembly data 530 PJS table 245 report format 159 standard note type 457 tap properties data 138 tutorial definition file 442 revision manager 537 reference database hierarchy of reported discrepancies 539 revision markers 305 S safety classification 618 sample piping assembly language file 521 table checker output 422 schedule/thickness override 616 segment pipe run length threshold table 221 short material description library 367 size-dependent material data 88 source files location 53 spec 55 spec tables library 239 spec writer 103 special tables and functions piping job specification 190 specialty material description library 374 piping components 317 Index Index 681 . 390 report output 155. 390 files and records 155. 539 proposed RDB changes report 555 reference data impact report 551 table change report 546 reference data conflict report 540 replace material description data 381. 390 reference data conflict 540 reference data impact 551 spec data 152 standard note library contents 459 table change 546 tutorial definition file 444 report data discrimination data file 155. 390 physical commodity data 297 PJS tables 248 proposed RDB changes 555 records 155. 390 format file 155. 382 spec neutral files 148 report assembly data 533 discrimination data 163 copy 169 create 165 files 155._ _______________ reference (continued) data (continued) overview 23 graphic commodity data 27 label description library 29 material description data 28 piping assembly library 29 piping job specification 27 standard note library 28 setup 32 data impact report 551 database management data 48 revision manager 537.

385 conventions 303. 304 abbreviations 314 revision marks 305 formats 303 basic tables 215 generic tables 319 instrument components 355 piping component tables 334 table conventions 304 table requirements 315 requirements 315 instrument components 318 piping components 315 fire and safety 316 fittings 316 table (continued) requirements (continued) piping components (continued) specialty components 317 valves 315 revision marks 305 table suffix green 647 red 650 tables female ends 332 GCP data 339 GCP overflow data 341 green and red cp data 342 green and red cp overflow data 344 instruments 355 body 355 operators 358 male ends 330 operators and actuators 345 tap properties data 137 properties data 85 TDF manager 437 temperature and pressure service limits table 191 temperature units 658 thickness data tables 197 tubing 273 tutorial definition file create 441 delete 446 extract 447 library manager 438 list 445 report 444 revise 442 tutorial definition manager 437 typefaces 17 U unapproved ==> approved material description library 378 units area 657 density 659 force 659 FrameWorks Plus 662 mass 658 pressure 658 682 ._ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 specialty (continued) specification data 77 standard note 449 library 28. 449 create standard note type 456 delete 461 extract 462 list 460 load database 463 report contents 459 revise standard note type 457 library manager 453 PID RDB 450 standard note titles 656 status drawing view composition 662 model 662 stress analysis requirements 618 structural approval status 573 studs in bolted connections 326 w/ term type 328 sub-symbol processor 258 symbol processors 256 T table 201 113 202 117 203 129 204 133 205 137 212 140 change report 546 checker 144.

_ _______________ units (continued) temperature 658 units of measure 569 V valves 315 variables generic tables 320 specific tables 336 verify RDB library 561 tables 385 W wall thickness equations 203 wall thickness equation 636 weight and thickness data male ends 333 weight code 654 weld clearance table 228 graphics dimensions 229 type table 226 weld type 659 Index Index 683 .

_ _______________ Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002 684 .

Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200034B For PDS version 07. .00.02.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200034A.

.. 691 686 .................6) .................................... Interference Clash Types .........................1......................................... 687 CL1204...............Reference Data Manager Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents Branch Insertion Tables (replaces 6.......

The following information has been modified: Removed “tee with reducing inserts. Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’BWWWW_WW’ ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN.Branch Insertion Tables (replaces 6. • A branch insertion table defines the selection criteria for tee and lateral branches. tee. The system uses the information in this table and the header nominal diameter (first size) and branch nominal diameter (second size) to provide the item name of the component to be used at the intersection. and reducing tee with reducer(s)” from list of tee branch connections See the following text for details. For them. the required reinforcement must be specified in Piping Design. Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches in the piping system as a function of the acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters for the intersecting lines. Neither interpolation nor extrapolation is allowed. The system accesses the branch table when placing a component at an intersection when no reinforcement component has been specifically defined. AN*6. You must specify the type of wye or cross to be placed in the model and specify the reinforcement data. branch weld with reinforcing pad.1 version of the document). AN*6. reducing tee. and weldolet. NPD_IN. The types of tee branch connections include branch weld.1. These tables do not include the reinforcement required at Y’s and crosses.” “tee with reducing bushing.6) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide (pp 208211 in the PDS 7. sockolet. threadolet. coupling. nipolet. AN*6 ! Nom Diam Preferred Branch ! Header Branch AABBCC Codes WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’ END 687 .

5 ’6Q3C74’ > 10 2 ’6Q3C73’ > 10 3 ’6Q3C73’ > 10 4 ’6Q3C73’ 10 6 ’6Q3C82’ 10 8 ’6Q3C82’ 10 10 ’6Q3C22’ 12 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ 12 1 ’6Q3C74’ 12 1.5 1 ’6Q3C24’ 1.75 ’6Q3C74’ 8 1 ’6Q3C74’ 8 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 4 2 ’6Q3C73’ > 4 3 ’6Q3C73’ 4 4 ’6Q3C22’ 6 0.75 ’6Q3C24’ 1. AN*6. AN*6.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 6 2 ’6Q3C73’ > 6 3 ’6Q3C73’ > 6 4 ’6Q3C73’ 6 6 ’6Q3C22’ 8 0.5 ’6Q3C74’ 2 2 ’6Q3C22’ 3 0.5 1.75 ’6Q3C22’ 1 0.Reference Data Manager Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Example Table_Data_Definition ’BA501_90’ ! Description= A.75 ’6Q3C24’ 1 1 ’6Q3C22’ 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 8 2 ’6Q3C73’ > 8 3 ’6Q3C73’ > 8 4 ’6Q3C73’ > 8 6 ’6Q3C73’ 8 8 ’6Q3C22’ 10 0. AN*6 ! Nom Diam Preferred Branch ! Header Branch AABBCC Codes 0. NPD_IN.5 0.063CA. Use with TA501 ! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=3 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3 Units= NPD_IN.75 ’6Q3C74’ 4 1 ’6Q3C74’ 4 1.0.75 ’6Q3C74’ 10 1 ’6Q3C74’ 10 1.75 ’6Q3C74’ 3 1 ’6Q3C74’ 3 1.75 0.5 ’6Q3C74’ > 3 2 ’6Q3C73’ 3 3 ’6Q3C22’ 4 0.5 ’6Q3C74’ Date=17-Aug-1988 688 .75 ’6Q3C74’ 6 1 ’6Q3C74’ 6 1.5 ’6Q3C22’ 2 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ 2 1 ’6Q3C74’ 2 1.

Branch Insertion Table Name (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the table.050" 5= 0. per the following criteria: 1= None 2= 0. as defined below.10" 7= 0.020" 3= 0. criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys. These tables use the following naming conventions: — first character: B — second character: a code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size for which threaded components are used in the PMC. Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels.5 inch diameter I= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter Z= Special criteria — third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the table is intended. This name results from the compounding of the Branch Table entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the acute angle of intersection between the header and the branch.125" 8= 0. A= Criteria 1 with no threaded components B= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter C= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.188" C= 304 clad D= 304L clad E= 316 clad F= 316L clad G= 317 clad H= 317L clad J= 321 clad L= Cement lined P= Polyester lined Q= Polypropylene lined R= PTFE lined S= Saran lined T= Teflon lined U= TK31 lined V= R11 lined W= R15 lined 689 .5 inch diameter D= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter F= Criteria 2 with no threaded components G= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter H= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.> 12 > 12 > 12 12 12 12 12 END 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 ’6Q3C73’ ’6Q3C73’ ’6Q3C73’ ’6Q3C82’ ’6Q3C82’ ’6Q3C82’ ’6Q3C22’ - - Parameters Table_Data_Definition .030" 4= 0.063" 6= 0. stainless steels and non-ferrous alloys.

The specified item is placed at the intersection. no branch reinforcement calculation is performed. Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes (character 6) — These fields identify the commodity item name of the component used to reinforce the intersection. The second part of the table name defines the acute angle of intersection. such as reinforcing welds and pads. — If two or more item names apply in one line.250" A= 405 clad B= 410S clad M= Epoxy lined N= Glass lined O= Kynar lined X= R18 lined Y= Other 1 Z= Other 2 — fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique. the codes are from one of the following types: — Reinforcing elements.Reference Data Manager Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 9= 0. Negative values and values less than 45 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid. — If only one item name is listed. The system tests the listed item names sequentially (from left to right) until the applicable strength criteria are satisfied. Nom Diam Branch . 690 . reinforcing welds.NPD for Branch (integer) — This field identifies the nominal diameter of the branch member at the intersection. followed by reinforcing pads. However. negative values and values less than 20 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid (per ANSI B31. — Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and weldolets.3). these codes should be arranged in ascending strength sequence (for example. — Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees. Nom Diam Header . followed by weldolets.1 and ANSI B31.) Typically. the system calculates the branch reinforcement thickness. The data fields are sorted by header NPD and then by branch NPD. This is the member with the smallest nominal diameter. This is the member with the largest nominal diameter. when dealing with branch reinforcements. Therefore.NPD for Run (integer) — This field identifies the nominal diameter of the header at the intersection.

Insul vs SoftSafety' . HardMain vs Hard' . Hard versus Soft' . 660 in the PDS 7. Insul vs Soft' . Hard vs HardMaint' . Soft vs SoftSafety' . Soft vs SoftAccess' . Soft versus Soft' .CL1204. Hard vs Fproof' . Hard vs HardAccess' . Insul vs Insul' . Soft vs SoftOperating' . Fproof vs HardOperat' . Fproof vs Fproof' . Fproof vs HardSafety' . Fproof vs HardOperat' . Fproof vs CT' . Interference Clash Types Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide (p. Hard vs HardSafety' . Fproof vs HardSafety' . Hard vs SoftMaint' . Fproof vs HardMain' . Insul vs SoftOperat' . Hard vs SoftOperating' . • 1 2 3 4 5 6 105 106 110 111 112 113 120 121 122 123 206 220 221 222 223 501 502 504 505 506 510 511 512 513 520 521 522 523 602 604 606 620 621 622 623 1001 1002 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' Hard versus Hard' . Construct vs Construct=Construction versus Construction' . Fproof vs HardMain' . Hard vs HardOperating' . Fproof vs Hard' . Soft versus Construction' . Insul vs SoftAccess' . Soft vs Insul' . Fproof vs HardAccess' . Insul vs CT' . Soft vs SoftMaint' . Hard vs SoftAccess' . Insul vs SoftMain' . 691 . The following information has been added: New clash types See the following text for details. Hard vs Insul' . Fproof vs Soft' .1 version of the document). Fproof vs Insul' . Fproof vs HardAccess' . Hard versus Construction' . Hard vs SoftSafety' . HardMain vs Soft' .

. . . . . . . . . 692 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Reference Data Manager Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 1004 1005 1006 1010 1012 1013 1020 1021 1022 1023 1101 1102 1104 1105 1106 1110 1111 1112 1113 1120 1121 1122 1123 1201 1202 1204 1205 1206 1210 1211 1212 1213 1220 1221 1222 1223 1301 1302 1304 1305 1306 1310 1311 1312 1313 1320 1321 1322 1323 2002 2004 2006 2020 2021 2022 2023 2102 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' HardMain vs CT' HardMain vs Fproof' HardMain vs Insul' HardMain vs HardMain' HardMain vs HardSafety' HardMain vs HardOperat' HardMain vs SoftMain' HardMain vs SoftAccess' HardMain vs SoftSafety' HardMain vs SoftOperat' HardAcc vs Hard' HardAcc vs Soft' HardAcc vs CT' HardAccess vs Fproof' HardAccess vs Insul' HardAcc vs HardMain' HardAcc vs HardAcc' HardAcc vs HardSafety' HardAcc vs HardOperat' HardAcc vs SoftMain' HardAcc vs SoftAcc' HardAcc vs SoftSafety' HardAcc vs SoftOperat' HardSafety vs Hard' HardSafety vs Soft' HardSafety vs CT' HardSafety vs Fproof' HardSafety vs Insul' HardSafety vs HardMain' HardSafety vs HardAcc' HardSafety vs HardSafety' HardSafety vs HardOperat' HardSafety vs SoftMain' HardSafety vs SoftAccess' HardSafety vs SoftSafety' HardSafety vs SoftOperat' HardOperat vs Hard' HardOperat vs Soft' HardOperat vs CT' HardOperat vs Fproof' HardOperat vs Insul' HardOperat vs HardMain' HardOperat vs HardAccess' HardOperat vs HardSafety' HardOperat vs HardOperat' HardOperat vs SoftMain' Ha